Volume-1 Full Report - 1280MW 28072022

DOCUMENT RECORD
Project Name Saundatti Pumped Storage Project
Name of Client Greenko
Doc No AA/POWER/2209/DPR/01
Doc Title Detailed Project Report
Rev No Date of Issue Description
R0 19-07-2022 Volume – I; Detailed Project Report
Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page i

SAUNDATTI PUMPED STORAGE PROJECT
DETAILED PROJECT REPORT : TABLE OF CONTENTS
VOLUME I : MAIN REPORT
VOLUME II : DESIGNS
VOLUME III: DRAWINGS
VOLUME IV: GEOLOGICAL AND GEOTECHNICAL STUDIES
VOLUME IV A: SITE INVESTIGATIONS & GEOLOGY
VOLUME IV B: PLATES (SITE INVESTIGATION & GEOLOGY)
VOLUME V: COST ESTIMATE
Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page ii

Table of Contents
CHECK LIST..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
SALIENT FEATURES OF THE PROJECT................................................................................................................................ 8
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................................................. 14
1.1 THE PROJECT................................................................................................................................................................. 14
1.2 SCOPE OF THE REPORT............................................................................................................................................. 16
1.3 TYPE OF PROJECT........................................................................................................................................................ 16
1.4 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT................................................................................................................................... 17
1.5 GENERAL CLIMATIC CONDITIONS IN THE PROJECT AREA........................................................................18
1.6 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF TOPOGRAPHY, PHYSIOGRAPHY & GEOLOGY OF PROJECT AREA...18
1.7 HISTORICAL BACKGROUND OF THE PROJECT................................................................................................. 19
1.8 ALTERNATIVE STUDIES............................................................................................................................................. 19
1.9 NATURAL RESOURCES OF THE STATE/REGION............................................................................................. 22
1.10 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ASPECTS.................................................................................................................................. 22
1.11 LAND REQUIRED FOR THE PROJECT CONSTRUCTION..............................................................................23
1.12 POPULATION AFFECTED BY THE PROJECT.................................................................................................... 23
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS.................................................................................................................................. 23
1.14 INTER-STATE/INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS...................................................................................................... 24
1.15 DEFENCE ANGLE....................................................................................................................................................... 24
1.16 HYDROLOGY................................................................................................................................................................ 24
1.17 INSTALLED CAPACITY............................................................................................................................................. 25
1.18 POWER EVACUATION............................................................................................................................................... 26
1.19 CONSTRUCTION PLANNING & SCHEDULE...................................................................................................... 26
1.20 BENEFITS OF THE SCHEME.................................................................................................................................. 26
CHAPTER 2 JUSTIFICATION OF THE PROJECT.............................................................................................................. 27
2.1 GENERAL......................................................................................................................................................................... 27
2.2 NECESSITY OF THE PROJECT.................................................................................................................................. 28
2.3 CONCLUSIONS................................................................................................................................................................ 29
CHAPTER 3 BASIN DEVELOPMENT................................................................................................................................... 30
3.1 THE COURSE OF THE WATER SOURCE................................................................................................................ 30
3.2 POWER POTENTIAL OF THE RIVER BASIN AND STAGES OF DEVELOPMENT...................................31
3.3 WHETHER TRANS-BASIN DIVERSION OF WATERS INVOLVED................................................................32
3.4 FITMENT OF THE SCHEME IN THE OVERALL BASIN DEVELOPMENT..................................................32
Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 3

3.5 FITMENT OF THE SCHEME IN THE POWER POTENTIAL ASSESSMENT STUDIES CARRIED OUT
BY CEA...................................................................................................................................................................................... 32
3.6 EFFECT OF FUTURE UPSTREAM/DOWNSTREAM DEVELOPMENTS ON THE POTENTIAL OF
PROPOSED SCHEME........................................................................................................................................................... 32
3.7 ROR VS STORAGE ASPECTS...................................................................................................................................... 32
CHAPTER 4 INTER-STATE & INTER-NATIONAL ASPECTS........................................................................................ 34
4.1 INTER-STATE ASPECTS.............................................................................................................................................. 34
4.2 INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS...................................................................................................................................... 34
CHAPTER 5 SURVEY & INVESTIGATIONS........................................................................................................................ 35
5.1 GENERAL......................................................................................................................................................................... 35
5.2 TOPOGRAPHICAL SURVEY....................................................................................................................................... 35
5.2.1 Reconnaissance Survey.................................................................................................................................... 35
5.2.2 Control Bench Marks......................................................................................................................................... 35
5.3 DEVELOPMENT OF PLAN......................................................................................................................................... 36
5.4 OTHER SURVEYS........................................................................................................................................................... 37
5.4.1 Archaeological Survey in the Reservoir Area.......................................................................................... 37
5.4.2 Mineral Survey..................................................................................................................................................... 37
5.4.3 Right of way surveys for the Reservoir...................................................................................................... 37
5.5 COMMUNICATION SURVEY...................................................................................................................................... 37
5.6 DRAINAGE SURVEY..................................................................................................................................................... 37
5.7 GEOLOGY, GEO-TECHNICAL FEATURES AND SEISMICITY...........................................................................37
5.7.1 Regional Geology................................................................................................................................................ 37
5.7.1.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................ 37
5.8 Physiography.................................................................................................................................................................. 38
5.9 Peninsular Gneiss and Granite................................................................................................................................ 46
5.9.1 Proterozoic Sedimentary Basins................................................................................................................... 47
5.9.2 Deccan Traps........................................................................................................................................................ 52
5.9.3 Laterite.................................................................................................................................................................... 52
5.9.4 Physiography of Project Area......................................................................................................................... 53
............................................................................................................................................................................................... 55
5.10 GEOLOGY AT AND AROUND THE PROJECT AREA........................................................................................ 55
5.10.1 Upper Reservoir area...................................................................................................................................... 59
5.10.2 Power House Complex:.................................................................................................................................. 67
5.11 TECTONIC SETUP...................................................................................................................................................... 69
5.12 SURFACE & SUB-SURFACE INVESTIGATIONS................................................................................................. 70

5.12.1 Geological Mapping......................................................................................................................................... 70
5.12.2 Exploratory Drilling........................................................................................................................................ 71
5.12.3 Exploratory Pits................................................................................................................................................ 72
5.12.4 Permeability Test............................................................................................................................................. 72
5.12.5 Rock Mechanics Testing................................................................................................................................. 72
5.12.6 Geophysical Surveys....................................................................................................................................... 73
5.12.7 Seismic Studies................................................................................................................................................. 73
5.13 FOUNDATION INVESTIGATIONS......................................................................................................................... 73
5.14 CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL INVESTIGATIONS............................................................................................. 73
5.14.1 Assessment for Availability.......................................................................................................................... 73
5.14.2 Coarse Aggregate.............................................................................................................................................. 75
5.14.3 Fine Aggregate................................................................................................................................................... 75
5.14.4 Water Samples................................................................................................................................................... 76
5.15 SUMMARY..................................................................................................................................................................... 76
5.15.1 Rock as Coarse aggregate or Rockfill........................................................................................................ 76
5.15.2 Sand as fine aggregate.................................................................................................................................... 76
5.15.3 Water Samples................................................................................................................................................... 76
5.16 HYDROLOGICAL AND METEOROLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS.................................................................76
CHAPTER 6 HYDROLOGY........................................................................................................................................................ 77
6.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................................................ 77
6.2 OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY.................................................................................................................................... 78
6.3 PROJECT COMPONENTS............................................................................................................................................ 78
6.4 CLIMATE.......................................................................................................................................................................... 78
6.5 HYDRO METEOROLOGICAL DATA......................................................................................................................... 79
6.6 PROCESSING OF PRECIPITATION DATA.............................................................................................................. 81
6.6.1 Quality of Data..................................................................................................................................................... 81
6.6.2 Consistency of data............................................................................................................................................ 82
6.7 WATER AVAILABILITY AT PROJECT LOCATION............................................................................................... 85
6.8 EVAPORATION............................................................................................................................................................... 85
6.9 SEDIMENTATION.......................................................................................................................................................... 85
6.9.1 Sedimentation Rate............................................................................................................................................ 85
6.9.2 Trap Efficiency..................................................................................................................................................... 86
6.9.3 Sediment Volume................................................................................................................................................ 86
6.9.4 Sediment Distribution...................................................................................................................................... 87
6.10 DESIGN FLOOD........................................................................................................................................................... 87

6.10.1 Probable Maximum Precipitation (PMP)................................................................................................ 88
6.10.2 Probable Maximum Flood (PMF)............................................................................................................... 89
6.11 Freeboard...................................................................................................................................................................... 89
CHAPTER 7 RESERVOIR.......................................................................................................................................................... 91
7.1 UPPER & LOWER RESERVOIRS - CATCHMENT AREA, SUBMERGENCE & ANNUAL INFLOW.......91
7.2 ELEVATION AREA CAPACITY................................................................................................................................... 91
7.2.1 Upper Reservoir.................................................................................................................................................. 91
7.2.2 Lower Reservoir.................................................................................................................................................. 91
7.3 SEDIMENTATION DATA & STUDIES...................................................................................................................... 94
7.3.1 Rates of sedimentation..................................................................................................................................... 94
7.3.2 Quantity of sediment (Tonnes or M cum during the life of the Reservoir)..................................94
7.3.3 Sediment studies................................................................................................................................................. 94
7.3.4 Sedimentation in the reservoir after feasible service time................................................................94
7.4 FIXATION OF STORAGE AND RESERVOIR LEVELS-APPROACH- CRITERIA..........................................94
7.5 SADDLES PRESENT ALONG THE RIM OF THE RESERVOIR........................................................................95
7.6 LIFE OF RESERVOIR IN YEARS WITH BASIS..................................................................................................... 95
7.7 WATER TIGHTNESS OF THE RESERVOIR........................................................................................................... 95
7.8 ANNUAL LOSSES........................................................................................................................................................... 95
7.9 FLOOD ABSORPTION.................................................................................................................................................. 95
7.10 EFFECT ON SUB SOIL WATER TABLE IN THE ADJOINING AREAS PARTICULARLY DOWN
STREAM OF THE DAM....................................................................................................................................................... 96
7.11 RESERVOIR RIM STABILITY.................................................................................................................................. 96
7.12 AREA OF SUBMERGENCE / LAND ACQUISITION (HA)...............................................................................96
7.13 RECREATION FACILITIES....................................................................................................................................... 96
7.14 PISCICULTURE............................................................................................................................................................ 96
7.15 NEED AND RECOMMENDATION FOR SOIL CONSERVATION MEASURE IN THE CATCHMENTS
..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 96
CHAPTER 8 POWER POTENTIAL AND INSTALLED CAPACITY................................................................................ 97
8.1 INSTALLED CAPACITY................................................................................................................................................ 97
8.2 LOCATION & RESERVOIR DETAILS....................................................................................................................... 97
8.2.1 Upper Dam............................................................................................................................................................ 97
8.2.2 Lower Dam............................................................................................................................................................ 97
8.2.3 Fixation of Reservoir Parameters................................................................................................................. 97
8.2.4 Minimum Draw Down Level........................................................................................................................... 97
8.3 OPTIMISATION OF INSTALLED CAPACITY......................................................................................................... 97

8.4 DAILY REGULATION, ENERGY GENERATION AND REQUIRED STORAGE.............................................98
8.5 RULE CURVE FOR OPERATION OF RESERVOIRS............................................................................................. 99
CHAPTER 9 DESIGN FEATURES OF MAJOR COMPONENTS.................................................................................. 102
9.1 General........................................................................................................................................................................... 102
9.2 Alternative Studies.................................................................................................................................................... 103
9.3 Geological & Geotechnical Appraisal.................................................................................................................. 103
9.4 Head Works.................................................................................................................................................................. 103
9.4.1 Site Selection for Reservoirs........................................................................................................................ 103
9.4.2 Alternatives for Type of Dam....................................................................................................................... 104
9.4.3 Roller-Compacted Concrete Dam (RCC Dam).......................................................................................104
9.4.4 Asphalt Faced Rock fill Dam (AFRD)........................................................................................................ 104
9.5 ALTERNATIVE PROJECT LAYOUTS...................................................................................................................... 106
9.5.1 Alternative-1...................................................................................................................................................... 107
9.5.1.1 Geological & Geotechnical Appraisal:............................................................................................. 108
9.5.1.2 Advantages of Alternative – 1............................................................................................................ 110
9.5.1.3 Disadvantages of Alternative – 1...................................................................................................... 111
9.5.2 Alternative-2...................................................................................................................................................... 111
9.5.2.1 Geological & Geotechnical Appraisal.............................................................................................. 112
9.5.2.2 Advantages of Alternative – 2............................................................................................................ 112
9.5.2.3 Disadvantages of Alternative – 2...................................................................................................... 113
9.5.3 Comparison of the Alternative I & II......................................................................................................... 113
9.5.4 Conclusion.......................................................................................................................................................... 113
9.5.5 Seismicity............................................................................................................................................................ 114
9.6 Saundatti AFRD Dam (Upper Reservoir).......................................................................................................... 114
9.6.1 General................................................................................................................................................................. 114
9.6.2 AFRD Dam........................................................................................................................................................... 115
9.6.3 Stability Analysis of Rockfill dam............................................................................................................... 115
9.6.4 Free Board........................................................................................................................................................... 116
9.6.5 Bottom Outlet.................................................................................................................................................... 116
9.6.6 Upper Reservoir Main Technical Parameters....................................................................................... 117
9.6.7 Lower Reservoir Main Technical Parameters....................................................................................... 118
9.7 Intake Structure.......................................................................................................................................................... 119
9.7.1 Hydraulic Design.............................................................................................................................................. 120
9.7.2 Slope Support Design..................................................................................................................................... 121
9.8 Hydraulic Design........................................................................................................................................................ 121

9.8.1 Hydraulic Data................................................................................................................................................... 121
9.8.2 Hydraulic Loss................................................................................................................................................... 122
9.8.2.1 Major Losses............................................................................................................................................. 122
9.8.2.2 Minor Losses............................................................................................................................................ 122
9.8.2.3 Trash Rack Losses.................................................................................................................................. 122
9.8.2.4 Entrance Losses...................................................................................................................................... 123
9.8.2.5 Loss in the Gate Groove........................................................................................................................ 123
9.8.2.6 Bend Losses.............................................................................................................................................. 123
9.8.2.7 Transition Losses................................................................................................................................... 124
9.8.2.8 Loss through Valves.............................................................................................................................. 124
9.9 Transient Analysis..................................................................................................................................................... 127
9.9.1 Turbine/Generation Mode........................................................................................................................... 128
9.9.2 Pumping Mode.................................................................................................................................................. 129
9.10 Water Conductor System...................................................................................................................................... 129
9.10.1 General............................................................................................................................................................... 129
9.10.2 Economic Diameter of Pressure Shaft................................................................................................... 130
9.10.3 Rock Support & Grouting Details of water conductor system.....................................................133
9.10.3.1 Top Inclined Pressure Shaft............................................................................................................. 133
Based on the investigations carried out, the water conductor system will negotiate different
rock types of variable strength with different rock conditions along its length..........................133
9.10.3.2 Vertical Pressure Shaft....................................................................................................................... 134
9.10.3.3 Bottom Horizontal Pressure shaft................................................................................................ 134
9.11 Design of Support system.................................................................................................................................... 135
9.11.1 By Wedge Analysis........................................................................................................................................ 135
9.11.2 Penstock Bifurcation.................................................................................................................................... 139
9.11.3 Steel Liner of Water Conductor System................................................................................................ 139
9.12 Power House............................................................................................................................................................. 141
9.12.1 General............................................................................................................................................................... 141
9.12.2 Machine Hall.................................................................................................................................................... 142
9.12.3 Transformer Building.................................................................................................................................. 142
9.12.4 General design of the power house........................................................................................................ 142
9.12.4.1 Selection of site and general layout.............................................................................................. 142
9.12.4.2 Layout and main dimensions.......................................................................................................... 143
9.12.5 Structural design of the powerhouse.................................................................................................... 145
9.12.5.1 General considerations...................................................................................................................... 145

9.12.5.2 Material properties............................................................................................................................. 145
9.12.5.3 Loadings.................................................................................................................................................. 145
9.12.5.4 Method of design................................................................................................................................. 148
9.13 Stability of cut slopes............................................................................................................................................. 149
9.13.1 Cut slope details............................................................................................................................................. 149
9.13.2 Stereonet Plots............................................................................................................................................... 151
9.14 Tail Race Tunnel....................................................................................................................................................... 156
9.15 Outlet Structure....................................................................................................................................................... 160
9.15.1 Hydraulic Design............................................................................................................................................ 161
9.16 DESIGN OF HYDROMECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.......................................................................................... 161
9.16.1 GENERAL.......................................................................................................................................................... 161
9.16.2 Intake Trash Racks........................................................................................................................................ 162
9.16.3 Intake Stoplog Gates..................................................................................................................................... 162
9.16.4 Intake Service Gates..................................................................................................................................... 163
9.16.5 Outlet Service Gates...................................................................................................................................... 163
9.16.6 Emergency Gates........................................................................................................................................... 164
9.16.7 Outlet Trash Racks........................................................................................................................................ 165
9.16.8 Instrumentation And Control System................................................................................................... 165
CHAPTER 10 ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL DESIGNS....................................................................................... 168
10.1 GENERAL.................................................................................................................................................................... 168
10.1.1 Basis for selection of machines................................................................................................................ 168
10.2 LAYOUT PLAN OF ELECTRO-MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT......................................................................169
10.3 FLOOR WISE EQUIPMENT LAYOUT PLAN IS AS UNDER:.......................................................................169
10.3.1 Machine hall at EL 617.2m........................................................................................................................ 169
10.3.2 Generator – Motor floor at EL 611.75m............................................................................................... 169
10.3.3 Pump Turbine floor at EL 607m.............................................................................................................. 169
10.3.4 Main Inlet Valve (MIV) floor at EL 595.56........................................................................................... 170
10.3.5 Drainage & Dewatering galley floor at EL 587.51m........................................................................170
10.4 ELECTRO-MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT........................................................................................................... 170
10.5 SALIENT FEATURES OF E&M EQUIPMENT.................................................................................................. 171
10.6 PUMP TURBINE....................................................................................................................................................... 173
10.6.1 Main Inlet Valve (MIV)................................................................................................................................. 175
10.6.2 Governor for Pump Turbine Machine................................................................................................... 175
10.6.3 Oil Pressure Systems for Governor and Turbine Inlet Valves......................................................175
10.7 TURBINE AUXILIARIES......................................................................................................................................... 175

10.7.1 List of Spare Parts......................................................................................................................................... 176
10.8 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................................................. 176
10.8.1 Control:.............................................................................................................................................................. 176
10.8.2 Monitoring....................................................................................................................................................... 177
10.8.3 List of Spares for SCADA system:............................................................................................................ 177
10.9 POWER........................................................................................................................................................................ 177
10.9.1 Turbine Mode.................................................................................................................................................. 177
10.9.2 Pump Mode...................................................................................................................................................... 177
10.10 UNIT START-UP – SHUTDOWN....................................................................................................................... 177
10.11 WEIGHTED AVERAGE EFFICIENCY............................................................................................................... 178
10.12 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION FEATURES OF TURBINE..............................................................178
10.12.1 Runner............................................................................................................................................................. 178
10.12.2 Guide Vanes................................................................................................................................................... 178
10.12.3 Guide Vane Operating Mechanism....................................................................................................... 178
10.12.4 Turbine/pump Shaft.................................................................................................................................. 179
10.13 GENERATOR - MOTOR........................................................................................................................................ 182
10.13.1 Insulation and Temperature Rise......................................................................................................... 183
10.13.2 Cooling System............................................................................................................................................. 183
10.13.3 Noise level...................................................................................................................................................... 183
10.13.4 stator frame................................................................................................................................................... 184
10.13.5 Stator Core..................................................................................................................................................... 184
10.13.6 Stator Winding............................................................................................................................................. 184
10.13.7 Rotor Spider.................................................................................................................................................. 184
10.13.8 Rotor................................................................................................................................................................ 184
10.13.9 Laminated Rim............................................................................................................................................. 185
10.13.10 Breaking and Jacking:............................................................................................................................. 185
10.13.11 LAVT and Neutral grounding Cubicles............................................................................................. 185
10.13.12 Static Excitation System, AVR & Sliprings......................................................................................186
10.13.13 Thrust Bearings........................................................................................................................................ 186
10.13.14 Guide Bearings.......................................................................................................................................... 187
10.13.15 Resistance / Thermo Couple Type Temperature Detectors....................................................187
10.13.16 Condition Monitoring System............................................................................................................. 187
10.14 PHASE REVERSAL DISCONNECTING SWITCH (PRDS)..........................................................................188
10.15 STARTING OF UNITS AS PUMP........................................................................................................................ 189
10.15.1 Starting of ohe Units in Motoring Mode............................................................................................. 189

10.15.2 Back to Back starting................................................................................................................................. 189
10.15.3 SFC Starting................................................................................................................................................... 189
10.15.4 Details of Equipment................................................................................................................................. 190
10.15.5 SFC System Configuration....................................................................................................................... 190
10.15.6 Control Unit................................................................................................................................................... 190
10.15.7 Breakers/Switches..................................................................................................................................... 191
10.15.8 Transformers................................................................................................................................................ 191
10.15.9 Static Frequency Coverter Spares:....................................................................................................... 191
10.16 ISOLATED PHASE BUS DUCT........................................................................................................................... 191
10.17 LIGHTING SYSTEM.............................................................................................................................................. 194
10.18 CABLING................................................................................................................................................................... 194
10.19 HT & LT POWER CABLES................................................................................................................................... 194
10.19.1 Control Cables.............................................................................................................................................. 195
10.19.2 Signal and Supervisory Cables.............................................................................................................. 195
10.19.3 Cable Trays.................................................................................................................................................... 195
10.20 EARTHING............................................................................................................................................................... 195
10.21 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)............................................................195
10.22 GENERATOR / UNIT CONTROL PANEL........................................................................................................ 196
10.23 MAIN STEP-UP TRANSFORMER..................................................................................................................... 196
10.24 400KV INDOOR GIS.............................................................................................................................................. 199
10.25 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF COMPONENTS IN GIS:...................................................................................... 201
10.25.1 Bus bars.......................................................................................................................................................... 201
10.25.2 Circuit Breaker............................................................................................................................................. 201
10.25.3 Current Transformers............................................................................................................................... 202
10.25.4 Voltage Transformers................................................................................................................................ 202
10.25.5 Isolators.......................................................................................................................................................... 202
10.26 CONTROL & PROTECTION EQUIPMENT..................................................................................................... 203
10.26.1 Generator protection................................................................................................................................. 204
10.26.2 Turbine Protections................................................................................................................................... 204
10.26.3 Auxiliary Transformer Protections...................................................................................................... 205
10.26.4 Step-Up Generator Transformer Protections.................................................................................. 205
10.26.5 400KV Line protections............................................................................................................................ 205
10.26.6 List of Spares for Protection System................................................................................................... 206
10.27 SAFETY EARTHING & LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEM.....................................................................206
10.28 AUXILIARY MECHANICAL SERVICES............................................................................................................ 207

10.28.1 EOT crane for Powerhouse..................................................................................................................... 207
10.28.2 EOT crane for GIS....................................................................................................................................... 207
10.28.3 EOT crane for others.................................................................................................................................. 207
10.28.4 Ventilation & Air Conditioning System............................................................................................... 207
10.28.5 HVAC system consists of:......................................................................................................................... 208
10.28.6 Air-to-water heat exchangers................................................................................................................ 208
10.28.7 Fire Protection System.............................................................................................................................. 209
10.28.8 Fire Detection and Alarm System......................................................................................................... 209
10.28.9 Passenger and Goods Lifts...................................................................................................................... 209
10.28.10 LP Air Compressor System................................................................................................................... 210
10.29 Dewatering and Drainage System.................................................................................................................. 210
10.30 Flood water system.............................................................................................................................................. 211
10.31 Oil Handling System............................................................................................................................................ 211
10.32 AUXILIARY ELECTRICAL SERVICES.............................................................................................................. 211
10.32.1 400/11KV Station Auxiliary Transformers...................................................................................... 211
10.32.2 11KV Switchgear......................................................................................................................................... 212
10.32.3 11/0.415KV Unit Auxiliary Transformers........................................................................................ 212
10.32.4 415V Switchgear......................................................................................................................................... 212
10.32.5 415V Unit Auxiliary Boards.................................................................................................................... 213
10.32.6 Power Station Auxiliary Services.......................................................................................................... 213
10.32.7 Emergency Power System - 1010 KVA Diesel Generator............................................................214
10.32.8 Direct Current Supply System................................................................................................................ 214
10.32.9 Communication system............................................................................................................................ 214
10.32.10 400 KV Switchyard equipment’s:....................................................................................................... 215
10.33 POWER EVACUATION......................................................................................................................................... 215
10.34 TRANSPORT LIMITATIONS............................................................................................................................... 215
10.35 ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL WORKSHOP......................................................................................... 215
10.36 Mechanical Workshop material:..................................................................................................................... 216
10.37 TOOLS AND TACKLES FOR HANDLING OF TURBINE............................................................................217
10.38 TOOLS AND TACKLES FOR HANDLING OF GENERATOR- MOTOR..................................................218
10.39 LIST OF APPLICABLE IS/IES/BS CODES FOR ELECTRO-MECHANICAL COMPONENTS..........220
CHAPTER 11 POWER EVACUATION AND INTEGRATION....................................................................................... 224
11.1 POWER EVACUATION SYSTEM:......................................................................................................................... 224
CHAPTER 12 CONSTRUCTION PROGRAMME & PLANT PLANNING...................................................................227
12.1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE............................................................................................................................... 227

12.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES.................................................................................................................... 227
12.3 DETAILED DESIGN & WORKING DRAWINGS............................................................................................... 227
12.4 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT PLANNING.................................................................................................... 227
12.5 COMMON EQUIPMENT......................................................................................................................................... 228
12.6 AGGREGATE PROCESSING PLANT................................................................................................................... 228
12.7 BATCHING PLANT................................................................................................................................................... 229
12.8 CONSTRUCTION POWER...................................................................................................................................... 229
12.9 METHODOLOGY FOR CONSTRUCTION OF VARIOUS CIVIL WORKS...................................................229
12.9.1 Rockfill Dam for Upper Reservoir........................................................................................................... 229
12.9.2 Surface Excavation........................................................................................................................................ 230
12.9.3 Fill Placement................................................................................................................................................. 230
12.9.4 Impervious Materials................................................................................................................................... 230
12.9.5 Fine Filter........................................................................................................................................................ 231
12.9.6 Coarse Filter & Rock Toe............................................................................................................................ 231
12.9.7 Major Construction Plant & Equipment for AFRD...........................................................................231
12.9.8 Construction Programme........................................................................................................................... 232
12.10 INTAKE STRUCTURE........................................................................................................................................... 232
12.10.1 Surface Excavation for Intake Structure............................................................................................ 233
12.10.2 Concreting for Intake Structure............................................................................................................ 233
12.10.3 Major Construction Plant & Equipment for Intake Structure...................................................234
12.10.4 Construction Programme........................................................................................................................ 234
12.11 STEEL LINED PRESSURE SHAFTS/PENSTOCK........................................................................................ 234
12.11.1 Excavation Methodology for Adit & Tunnel.....................................................................................235
12.11.3 Excavation Methodology for Pressure Shaft.................................................................................... 237
12.11.4 Rock Support Measures............................................................................................................................ 237
12.11.5 Steel Liner for Penstock........................................................................................................................... 237
12.11.6 Major Construction Plant & Equipment for Penstock..................................................................238
12.11.7 Concreting..................................................................................................................................................... 239
12.11.8 Concreting Equipment Planning........................................................................................................... 239
12.11.9 Grouting.......................................................................................................................................................... 240
12.11.10 Construction Programme...................................................................................................................... 240
12.12 POWER HOUSE...................................................................................................................................................... 241
12.12.1 Major Construction Plant & Equipment for Power House.........................................................241

12.13 TAIL RACE TUNNEL............................................................................................................................................. 242
12.14 SWITCHYARD......................................................................................................................................................... 243
12.15 HYDRO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.............................................................................................................. 243
12.16 E&M WORKS........................................................................................................................................................... 243
CHAPTER 13 PROJECT ORGANIZATION........................................................................................................................ 245
13.1 GENERAL.................................................................................................................................................................... 245
13.2 PROJECT ORGANIZATION.................................................................................................................................... 246
13.3 PROPOSED ORGANIZATION STRUCTURE..................................................................................................... 246
13.4 FUNCTIONS & RESPONSIBILITIES OF PROJECT TEAM MEMBERS.....................................................247
13.4.1 Project Director.............................................................................................................................................. 247
13.4.2 Project Head.................................................................................................................................................... 248
13.4.3 Divisional Heads (General Manager)..................................................................................................... 249
13.4.4 Sector Head (Senior Manager -Civil)..................................................................................................... 250
13.4.5 Sector Head (Senior Manager -Electrical)........................................................................................... 251
13.4.6 Sector Head (Senior Manager -Mechanical)....................................................................................... 251
13.4.7 Sector Head (Senior Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC)Engineer).......................252
13.4.8 Sector Head (Engineering Geologist).................................................................................................... 253
13.4.9 Sector Head (Senior Manager – Administration).............................................................................253
13.5 MANPOWER SUMMARY....................................................................................................................................... 253
13.6 PROJECT REVIEW................................................................................................................................................... 254
CHAPTER 14 INFRASTRUCTURE FACILITIES.............................................................................................................. 256
14.1 GENERAL.................................................................................................................................................................... 256
14.2 APPROACH ROADS.................................................................................................................................................. 256
14.3 CONSTRUCTION POWER...................................................................................................................................... 256
14.4 WATER SUPPLY TO THE CONSTRUCTION AREA AND COLONY...........................................................257
14.5 TELECOMMUNICATION FACILITIES................................................................................................................ 257
14.6 PROJECT OFFICES/COLONIES........................................................................................................................... 257
CHAPTER 15 ENVIRONMENTAL & ECOLOGIAL ASPECTS......................................................................................259
15.1 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................................................... 259
15.2 PROJECT STUDY AREA.......................................................................................................................................... 260
15.3 ENVIRONMENTAL BASELINE STATUS............................................................................................................ 260
15.3.1 Physiography................................................................................................................................................... 261
15.3.2 Geology.............................................................................................................................................................. 262
15.3.3 Soil....................................................................................................................................................................... 263
15.3.4 Meteorology..................................................................................................................................................... 263

15.3.4.1 Temperature.......................................................................................................................................... 263
15.3.4.2 Rainfall..................................................................................................................................................... 263
15.3.4.3 Relative Humidity................................................................................................................................ 264
15.3.4.4 Wind Speed............................................................................................................................................ 264
15.3.5 Water Quality.................................................................................................................................................. 264
15.3.6 Land Use/Land Cover.................................................................................................................................. 264
15.3.7 Forest Types.................................................................................................................................................... 265
15.3.8 Floristic Diversity.......................................................................................................................................... 266
15.3.9 Wild Life............................................................................................................................................................ 275
15.3.9.1 Mammals................................................................................................................................................. 275
15.3.9.2 Avifauna................................................................................................................................................... 276
15.3.9.3 Herpetofauna......................................................................................................................................... 279
15.3.9.4 Conservation Status of Fauna......................................................................................................... 279
15.3.9.5 Fish and Fisheries................................................................................................................................ 279
15.4 SOCIO-ECONOMIC PROFILE............................................................................................................................... 280
15.4.1 District Profile:............................................................................................................................................... 281
15.4.2 Socio-economic Profile of Villages in the Study Area......................................................................281
15.4.3 Survey of Project Affected Village........................................................................................................... 284
15.4.4 Observation on Social Changes/Impact due to COVID-19............................................................284
15.5 PREDICTION OF IMPACTS................................................................................................................................... 285
15.5.1 Impacts During Construction................................................................................................................... 285
15.5.1.1 Impacts due to immigration of Construction Workers.........................................................285
15.5.1.2 Construction of Main Project Components............................................................................... 285
15.5.1.3 Operation of Construction Plant and Equipment..................................................................286
15.5.1.4 Muck Disposal....................................................................................................................................... 287
15.5.1.5 Road Construction............................................................................................................................... 287
15.5.1.6 Impact due to Acquisition of Land................................................................................................ 288
15.5.1.7 Impact on Water Quality................................................................................................................... 289
15.5.1.8 Impact on Terrestrial Flora.............................................................................................................. 290
15.5.1.9 Impact on Terrestrial Fauna............................................................................................................ 290
15.5.1.10 Impact on Noise Environment..................................................................................................... 291
15.5.1.11 Impact on Air Quality...................................................................................................................... 293
15.5.1.12 Impact on Socio-economic Environment................................................................................294
15.5.1.13 Impact During Operation Phase.................................................................................................. 295
15.6 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN...................................................................................................... 296

15.6.1 Compensatory Afforestation Plan........................................................................................................... 296
15.6.2 Biodiversity Conservation & Wildlife Management Plan..............................................................296
15.6.3 Muck Dumping Plan..................................................................................................................................... 297
15.6.4 Landscaping and Restoration of construction sites.........................................................................298
15.6.5 Sanitation & Solid waste management................................................................................................. 298
15.6.6 Public Health Delivery System................................................................................................................. 298
15.6.7 Energy Conservation Measures............................................................................................................... 299
15.6.8 Labour Management Plan for their Health & Safety........................................................................299
15.6.9 Green Belt Development Plan................................................................................................................... 299
15.6.10 Air & Water Management Plan.............................................................................................................. 300
15.6.11 Environmental Monitoring Plan........................................................................................................... 300
15.6.12 Rehabilitation & Resettlement Plan.................................................................................................... 300
15.6.13 Local Area Development Plan................................................................................................................ 301
15.6.14 Disaster Management Plan..................................................................................................................... 301
15.7 COST FOR IMPLEMENTING ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN.............................................301
CHAPTER 16 COST ESTIMATE........................................................................................................................................... 303
16.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT.................................................................................................. 303
16.2 BASIS OF THE COST ESTIMATES...................................................................................................................... 304
16.3 PREPARATION OF DETAILED ESTIMATES OF COST (I-WORKS)..........................................................305
16.3.1 A - Preliminary............................................................................................................................................... 305
16.3.2 B – Land............................................................................................................................................................. 306
16.3.3 C - Works........................................................................................................................................................... 306
16.3.4 J - Power plant civil works......................................................................................................................... 306
16.3.5 K – Buildings.................................................................................................................................................... 307
16.3.6 M – Plantation................................................................................................................................................. 308
16.3.7 O – Miscellaneous.......................................................................................................................................... 308
16.3.8 P - Maintenance during Construction................................................................................................... 308
16.3.9 Q - Special Tools & Plants........................................................................................................................... 308
16.3.10 R – Communication.................................................................................................................................... 308
16.3.11 S - Power plant and Electro - Mechanical System..........................................................................308
16.3.12 X - Environment and Ecology................................................................................................................. 309
16.3.13 Y - Losses On Stock..................................................................................................................................... 309
16.3.14 Establishment.............................................................................................................................................. 309
16.3.15 Tools & Plants............................................................................................................................................... 309
16.3.16 Suspense......................................................................................................................................................... 309

16.3.17 Receipts & Recoveries On Capital Account.......................................................................................309
16.3.18 Indirect Charges.......................................................................................................................................... 309
16.4 PROJECT COST.......................................................................................................................................................... 309
CHAPTER 17 FINANCIAL AND ECONOMIC ANALYSIS.............................................................................................. 313
17.1 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................................................... 313
17.2 GENERATION BENEFITS FROM THE PROJECT........................................................................................... 313
17.3 ANNUAL REQUIREMENT OF PUMPING ENERGY....................................................................................... 313
17.4 PROJECT COST.......................................................................................................................................................... 313
17.5 MEANS OF FINANCE.............................................................................................................................................. 313
17.6 PHASING OF EXPENDITURE............................................................................................................................... 314
17.7 INTEREST DURING CONSTRUCTION.............................................................................................................. 314
17.8 DEPRECIATION PROVISION................................................................................................................................ 314
17.9 VIABLE TARIFF........................................................................................................................................................ 315
CHAPTER 18 RECOMMENDATIONS................................................................................................................................ 324
18.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................................................................ 324
18.2 ECONOMIC JUSTIFICATION OF THE PROJECT............................................................................................ 324
18.3 ENVIRONMENTAL & ECOLOGICAL ASPECTS............................................................................................... 324
18.4 SOCIO-ECONOMIC BENIFITS.............................................................................................................................. 324
Table of Figures
Figure 1.1: Project Location................................................................................................................................................... 17
Figure 1.2: General Layout of the Scheme........................................................................................................................ 21
Figure 2.1: All India Load profile Year 2021-22 to 2026-27.....................................................................................28
Figure 3.1: Krishna River Basin........................................................................................................................................... 31
Figure 5.1: Map showing major rivers draining through north Karnataka Plateau.......................................39
Figure 5.2: Generalized geological map of India............................................................................................................ 40
Figure 5.3: Geology of the western and eastern Dharwar Craton (after Rogers, 1990)...............................41
Figure 5.4: Geological map of the Western Dharwar Cratons (After Naqvi and Rogers, 1987;
Ramakrishnan and Vaidyanadhan, 2008)........................................................................................................................ 44
Figure 5.5: Geological map of the study area (after Jayaprakash et al. 1987; Dey et al., 2009)..................51
Figure 5.6: .Google Earth map of the project and its surrounding areas showing different geomorphic
landforms...................................................................................................................................................................................... 54

Figure 5.7: Plateau flanked by a 50- 150m wide pediment zone merging with low lying flat area
extending for kms. Photographs taken from the plateau located to the north of proposed Powerhouse
........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 54
Figure 5.8: Plateau hills present to the east of the project area.............................................................................55
Figure 5.9: Vertical scarps exposing gently dipping quartzite adjacent to plateau surface........................55
Figure 5.10: Vertical cliff exposing quartzite (a) and quartzite exposed along steep slopes & capping
gently sloping plateau.............................................................................................................................................................. 56
Figure 5.11: Contact between quartzite and underlying Peninsular Gneiss covered under Pediment
zone comprising debris & talus material.......................................................................................................................... 56
Figure 5.12: Highy weathered in situ profile developed over granite noticed in a few quarry sections57
Figure 5.13: Sharp contact between fresh, hard granite and overlying fractured quartzite. Loc: 1.6km
northwest of prposed Powerhouse location................................................................................................................... 57
Figure 5.14: Moderately weathered coarse grained granite exposed at EL. m on way from Yekundi to
village.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 58
Figure 5.15: Upright, open folds developed in interbedded sequence of sandstone-shale occurring
over the moderately weathered granite........................................................................................................................... 58
Figure 5.16: Quartzite exposed along the E – W aligned cliffs located to the south of the plateau over
which location of upper reservoir is proposed.............................................................................................................. 60
Figure 5.17: Gently dipping quartzite exposed along the slopes adjacent to plateau exhibiting benches
with successive vertical cliffs................................................................................................................................................ 60
Figure 5.18: Near flat area (a) towards northern part of the reservoir and gently sloping surface (b).61
Figure 5.19: Quartzite outcrops exposed on plateau surface where upper reservoir is peoposed..........61
Figure 5.20: Thin scree material over the bed rock (a) & rock blocks/boulders of quartzite occurring
at the top........................................................................................................................................................................................ 62
Figure 5.21: Different type of in situ overburded developed in parts of upper reservoir...........................62
Figure 5.22: Bedding planes in quartzite represented by colour laminations and variation in grain size
........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 63
Figure 5.23: Moderately thick bedded quartzite (a) and thin bedded quartzite underlain by
moderately thick bedded quartzite.................................................................................................................................... 63
Figure 5.24: Medium to fine grained quartzite of arenite composition (a) and quartzite with feldspar
as accessory mineral................................................................................................................................................................. 64
Figure 5.25: Lbands of ferruginous quartzite within moderately thick bedded quartzite..........................64
Figure 5.26: Thin layers of pebble bed occurring in massive quartzite (a); 30cm thick pebble bed
having ferrugineous & siliceous matrix............................................................................................................................ 65

Figure 5.27: Quartz, jasper, quartzite pabbles/gravels of different shape & size embedded in sandy
matrix............................................................................................................................................................................................. 65
Figure 5.28: Grity quartzite occurring over thickly bedded quartzite.................................................................66
Figure 5.29: Thinnly bedded quartzite occurring in the upper part of the hills..............................................66
Figure 5.30: Ripple marks in thinly bedded quartzite outcrops............................................................................66
Figure 5.31: Trough (a) & planar (b) cross stratification in gritty quartzite.....................................................67
Figure 5.32: Nature of overburden in pediment zone extending between cliff and low lying flat area. 67
Figure 5.33: Highy weathered granite outcrops surrounded by debris / talus noticed along the
pediment zone flanking the plateau margin................................................................................................................... 68
Figure 5.34: Fresh outcrops of granite exposed along the periphery of Renuka Sagar reservoir.............69
Figure 5.35: Seismic Zonation Map; Source BIS 2002................................................................................................. 70
Figure 6.1: Rainfall Data Consistency at Saundatti Rain Gauge Station...............................................................83
Figure 6.2: Rainfall Data Consistency Yaragatti Rain Gauge Station.....................................................................84
Figure 6.3: Rainfall Data Consistency At Murugodu Rain Gauge Station............................................................84
Figure 6.4: Rainfall Data Consistency At Hulikatti Rain Gauge Station...............................................................84
Figure 6.5: Brune's Curves...................................................................................................................................................... 86
Figure 9.1: Curve Showing Diameter vs Cost of Tunnel for Selection of Economic Diameter.................132
Figure 9.2: Different views of wedge with support................................................................................................... 136
Figure 9.3: Pole Density for Powerhouse area............................................................................................................ 150
Figure 9.4: Joint Sets details............................................................................................................................................... 151
Figure 15.1: Location Map................................................................................................................................................... 259
Figure 15.2: Study area map............................................................................................................................................... 260
Figure 15.3: Digital ELevation Model (DEM) of the study area.............................................................................262
Figure 15.4: Land Use/ Land Cover Map of the Project Study Area....................................................................265
Index of Tables
Table 1 1: Land requirement for Saundatti Pumped Storage Project....................................................................23
Table 1 2: Key parameters of Saundatti PSP................................................................................................................... 25
Table 5 1: Primary Ground Control Points....................................................................................................................... 36
Table 5 2: Final Ground Control Points............................................................................................................................. 36
Table 5 3: Generalized regional stratigraphy of Karnataka (GSI, Misc. Pub.Part-VII, 2006)........................42
Table 5 4: Two fold classification of the Kaladgi Series by Bruce Foote (1876)...............................................49
Table 5 5: Lithostratigraphy of the Kaladgi-Badami Basin (after Jayaprakash et al., 1987)........................49
Table 5 6: Process-responsive lithostratigraphie classification of the sediments transgression in the
Kaladgi Basin (Kale et al, 1996)........................................................................................................................................... 52

Table 5 7: Lithostratigraphy of the Saundatti Pump Storage Project area..........................................................59
Table 5 8: Geological Plan, L-section and Cross section of different Project Components...........................71
Table 5 9: Location of samples collected.......................................................................................................................... 73
Table 5 10: Test on Coarse Agreegates.............................................................................................................................. 75
Table 5 11: Test on Fine Agreegates................................................................................................................................... 75
Table 6 1: Key parameters of Renuka Sagar reservoir................................................................................................ 77
Table 6 2: Monthly Rainfall Data.......................................................................................................................................... 79
Table 6 3: Evaporation loss rate in project area............................................................................................................. 85
Table 6 4: Design flood adoption criteria......................................................................................................................... 88
Table 7 1: Elevation-Area-Capacity of Upper Reservoir............................................................................................. 92
Table 7 2: Elevation-Area-Capacity of Lower Reservoir............................................................................................. 93
Table 7 3: Key parameters of Reservoirs & Dams......................................................................................................... 95
Table 9 1: Salient Features of Proposed Upper Reservoir....................................................................................... 105
Table 9 2: Comparison of the Salient Features of Alternatives- 1 and 2............................................................113
Table 9 3: Minimum Target FOS Values.......................................................................................................................... 115
Table 9 4: Upper Reservoir - Summary of the results of stability analysis.......................................................116
Table 9 5: Key parameters of the proposed Upper Reservoir & Upper Dam...................................................118
Table 9 6: Key parameters of the proposed Lower Reservoir & Lower Dam..................................................119
Table 9 7: Summary of Head loss & Coefficients worked out in the Proposed Water Conductor System
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 125
Table 9 8: Net Heads Adopted in the Project................................................................................................................ 126
Table 9 9: Water Conductor System Parameters used in Transient Analysis..................................................127
Table 9 10: Time Sequence Applied for Case-1: Shutoff of Generation..............................................................128
Table 9 11: Time Sequence Applied for Case-3: Start of Generation..................................................................128
Table 9 12: Time Sequence Applied for Case-2: Shutoff of Pumping..................................................................129
Table 9 13: Time Sequence Applied for Case-4: Start of Pumping.......................................................................129
Table 9 14: Various diameter of Tunnel considered for the Selection of Economic Diameter.................131
Table 9 15: Support Recommended for 7.1m diameter Top Inclined Pressure shaft...................................133
Table 9 16: Summary of Steel Liner Thickness along Water Conductor System of Large Unit................140
Table 9 17: Summary of Steel Liner Thickness along Water Conductor System of Small Unit.................141
Table 9 18: Joint sets of powerhouses............................................................................................................................. 151
Table 9 19: Technical Parameters of Intake Trash Racks........................................................................................ 162
Table 9 20: Technical Parameters of Intake Maintenance Gate.............................................................................163
Table 9 21: Technical Parameters of Intake Service Gate........................................................................................ 163
Table 9 22: Main Technical Parameters of Outlet Service Gate.............................................................................164

Table 9 23: Technical Parameters of Outlet Stoplog Gate........................................................................................ 164
Table 9 24: Technical Parameters of Outlet Trash Racks......................................................................................... 165
Table 12 1: Major Construction Plant & Equipment for Rockfill Dam................................................................232
Table 12 2: Major Construction Plant & Equipment for concrete Intake Structure......................................234
Table 12 3: Major Construction Plant & Equipment for Penstock.......................................................................238
Table 12 4: Major Construction Plant & Equipment for concrete in Penstock................................................240
Table 12 5: Major Construction Plant & Equipment for power house...............................................................241
Table 15 1: Area under different Land use/ Land cover in the study area.......................................................265
Table 15 2: Family wise details of plant species......................................................................................................... 266
Table 15 3: Conservation Status of Plant Species....................................................................................................... 267
Table 15 4: Medical Plant Species..................................................................................................................................... 268
Table 15 5: List of Different types of Trees species.................................................................................................... 271
Table 15 6: List of Different types of shrubs species................................................................................................. 272
Table 15 7: List of Different types of herbs species................................................................................................... 274
Table 15 8: List of mammals reported from the study area based from secondary sources.....................275
Table 15 9: List of avifauna reported from the study area with their conservation status in the study
area............................................................................................................................................................................................... 276
Table 15 10: List of Herpetofauna found in the Study Area....................................................................................279
Table 15 11: Types of fish species available in the study area..............................................................................280
Table 15 12: Land requirement for Saundatti Pumped Storage Project............................................................288
Table 15 13: Equivalent Noise Levels due to Operation of Construction Equipment..................................291
Table 15 14: Noise levels exposure period for affected persons..........................................................................293
Table 15 15: Cost for Implementing EMP & CER Activities.................................................................................... 301
Table 17 1: Phasing of Expenditure................................................................................................................................. 314

CHECK LIST
I GENERAL DATA
1. Name of the Project Saundatti Pumped Storage
Project
2. Location
a. State Karnataka
b. District Belagavi
c. Mandal/Tehsil Saundatti Tehsil
d. Basin Krishna Basin
e. River Krishna River
f. Village Karlakatti
g. Survey of India Topographical sheets D43D1 (48M/1) and D43C13
(48I/13)
II CATEGORY OF THE PROJECT
1. a) Power Project
b) Power Project having reservoir for flood moderation. Pumped Storage Power Project
c) Multipurpose Project
III PLANNING
1. Has the Master Plan for overall development of the river No
basin been prepared & stages of basin development
discussed briefly?
2. Have the alternative proposals been studied and their Yes
merits and demerits discussed?
3. Does the scheme fit in the overall development of the river Yes
basin and its priority in the overall development of the
basin discussed?
4. Are there any features which are not likely to fit in the No such features
overall development of the basin?
5. Have the other departments concerned with the Yes
development been informed?
6. Is the present scheme proposed to be executed in stages? No
If so, are its various stages of execution and development
discussed in the report?
7. Are the effects of the scheme on the riparian rights NA
existing upstream and downstream projects etc.,
discussed?
IV. INTER STATE AND INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS
1. Are there any international / Interstate issues involved? If No interstate problems are
so, have these issues been identified and present status of involved as the proposed PSP is
agreement indicated specially in respect of. entirely in the state of Karnataka.
a Sharing of water Does not arise
b Sharing of cost Does not arise
c Sharing benefits Does not arise
d Settlement of oustees Does not arise
e Acceptance of the submergence by the Upstream state(s). Does not arise
f Compensation of land coming under submergence Does not arise
2. Any other Nil

V SURVEYS
1. Have the detailed topographical surveys been carried out
for the following items and maps prepared as per
prescribed scales?
a. River Surveys NA
b. Reservoir Surveys Yes
c. Head works surveys Yes
d. Water conductor system Yes
e. Plant site and colonies Yes
f. Major hydraulic structures Yes
g. Tunnel(s), adits, penstocks etc. Yes
h. Power House, switch-yard, tail-race Yes
i. Soil surveys Yes
VI GEOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS
1. Have the Geological Surveys for the following items been Yes
carried out and report on Geology appended?
a. Regional Geology Yes
b. Reservoirs Yes
c. Head works Yes
d. Power houses and appurtenances Yes
e. Intake Structures Yes
f. Tunnels, Penstock(s) Yes
g. Communication routes NA
2. Any other NA
VII SEISMIC INVESTIGATIONS
1. Seismicity of the area Seismic Zone – II as per latest BIS
adopted for design
2. Has the seismicity of the region been studied and co- Yes, as per IS 1893-1984.
efficient of vertical / horizontal acceleration for the
various structures discussed?
3. Has the approval of the standing committee for No, NCSDP shall be approached at
recommending design of seismic coefficients for river detail design stage.
valley project been obtained?
4. Is there possibility of liquefaction of foundations? If so NA
whether liquefaction studies been carried out
VIII FOUNDATION INVESTIGATIONS
1. Have the detailed foundation investigations (including
insitu tests and laboratory tests) for the following
structures been carried out and detailed report(s)
appended?
a. Earth and rock fill dam/barrage/weir etc. Yes
b. Masonry/Concrete dam/Weir etc. Yes
c. Power House, Tunnel(s), Water conductor system etc. Yes
2. Are there any special features affecting the designs? No such Features
IX MATERIAL SURVEY
1. Have the surveys and laboratory tests for construction Yes
materials been carried out and report(s) appended?
2. Soils for impervious, semi-pervious and pervious zones of Yes
earth and rockfill dam(s)
a. Sand Yes
b. Rock and aggregate Yes

c. Cement Will be done during construction
d. Steel Will be done during construction
e. Any other Nil
3. Have the sources for each of the above materials been Yes
identified and lead etc., indicated?
4. Have the proposals for procurement of scarce materials NA
been indicated?
X HYDROLOGICAL & METEOROLOGICAL INVESTIGATION
1. Have the hydrological and meteorological investigations Yes
been carried out and status of data discussed in report?
a. Rainfall Yes
b. Temperature Yes
c. Gauge and discharge NA
2. Has the above data been collected and appended Yes
XI HYDROLOGY
1. Is the hydrology dealt with in detail in this report? Yes
2. Have Hydrological studies been carried out to establish 90% dependable flows have been
the availability of water for the benefits envisaged, and computed from observed monthly
what is the dependability of the potential? rainfall data.
3. Have an index map and bar chart showing location of NA
various hydro-metric, rainfall stations and the data
availability at those stations been attached?
4. Are brief notes about quality, consistency, processing and Yes
gap filling of the data included?
5. Have the analysis for the water flows/sediment flows & Yes
rainfall been discussed?
6. Is the criteria adopted for selection of the construction Yes
diversion flood discussed?
7. Have hydrological studies been carried out for the
following?
a. To establish the availability of water Yes
b. To determine design flood for the various structures Yes
c. Evaporation rates from reservoir concerned area Yes
d. Command area rainfall Yes
e. Is the dependability of the potential checked and indicated Yes
XII LAND ACQUISITION AND RESETTLEMENT OF OUSTEES
1. Have the provision for Land acquisition and resettlement Yes - Provision for Land
been considered? acquisition has been made.
No – Resettlement is not involved.
2. Have the socio-economic problem involved in resettlement No such problems
been considered?
3. Have the type and quantum of land proposed to be Does not arise
acquired in the submerged areas, projected area, area
required for rehabilitation of the oustees been detailed?
4. Is the basis for provision of land compensation indicated? Yes
5. Have the rehabilitation measures, amenities and facilities Does not arise
to be provided to the project affected persons been
discussed and whether their provisions included in the
report? Are these in accordance with state's policy /
project specific policy / draft national policy for

rehabilitation and resettlement
XIII DESIGNS
1. Have the layout of the components of the project been
finalized?
a. Upper Dam Yes
b. Penstock and water conductor system etc., Yes
c. Power House Yes
d. Switch yard etc., Yes
2. Has the selection of final location of the head works and Yes
appurtenances, in preference to the other sites
investigated been discussed?
3. Have the layout of the project viz., location of head works, Yes
work shop sheds, offices, colonies etc. Been finalized and
discussed?
4. Have the Layout of the project area, Location of Diversion Yes
structure, offices, camp etc been finalized.
5. Have the following designs prepared for the following
components.
a. Upper Dam Yes
b. Pressure shaft Yes
c. Opening(s) through head regulators, penstocks, other Yes
outlets, sluices etc.
d. Intake and water conductor system Yes
e. Power house and switch yard Yes
f. Power evacuation provisions Yes
g. Power house equipment, LT / HT switchgear Yes
6. Have the salient features of the above components and the Yes
assumptions made in the design of above components of
the project been indicated and their basis discussed?
7. Have any model studies been carried out for location of No
barrage/weir, spillway and other appurtenances, checking
the design profile of the spillway, energy dissipation
arrangements, location of outlets/regulators etc.
8. Has the final alignment of water conductor system been Yes
discussed in the light of various alignments studied?
9. Is the water conductor system being discussed in the light Yes
of various alignments studied?
10. Are sufficient escapes including terminal escapes provided NA
on the water conductor system?
11. Have any model studies for major hydraulic structures No
been carried out and if so, are the results discussed and
incorporated in the design?
12. Is the location of the water conductor system fixed after Yes
detailed surveys of the final alignments?
XIV POWER BENEFITS
1. Have the following points been discussed.
a. Total energy production & installed capacity. Yes
b. How does the scheme fit into overall development of Power generated shall be fed into
power in the region? the existing grid.
c. Integrated operation of the system and present status of Yes

utilization.
d. Surpluses and shortfalls in the system. Yes
e. Future plans of power development from different sources Yes
in the state/region.
f. Availability of the power generating capacity in the region Yes
from different sources
g. Proposals for transmission and / or connection to the Central Pooling Substation (CPSS)
existing system etc., (Wherever applicable)Central Pooling
Substation (CPSS)
h. Energy generation from the project, firm power, seasonal Yes
power and total power?
i. Cost of generation per KW installed/ as per KWH As per the studies, the project at
generated, as compared to the various hydel projects and present market rates is
various services in the region to justify the economic economically viable.
viability of the scheme.
XV CONSTRUCTION PROGRAMME
1. Are the major components of work proposed to be done Through contractor
departmentally or through contractor?
2. Have the various alternatives for construction programme Yes
been studied and proper justification furnished for the
final programme adopted?
3. Has the proposed construction programme been prepared Yes
and synchronized for timely completion of each of the
major components of work?
4. Have the year/month wise quantities of the following
items been worked out for various components of the
project?
a. Excavation – soft and hard strata Yes
b. Earth work and filling (Wherever applicable) Yes
c. Stone masonry Yes
d. Rockfill-dam, toe, riprap etc. Yes
e. Sand for filter, masonry concrete Yes
f. Gravel filter Yes
g. Coarse aggregate of concrete Yes
h. Steel of various sizes and types of reinforcement Yes
i. Cement-normal, quick/slow setting with or without Yes
pozzolana.
j. Lime-surkhi: pozzolana NA
k. Scarce material: special steel NA
l. Other materials: fuel, electricity, explosive etc. Yes
m. Other material – construction Power supply, P.O.L etc., Yes
5. Have the year-wise quantities to be executed by Yes
machine/labour for each of the major components been
worked out for each of the above materials?
6. Have the labour intensive items of the various major Yes
components of the project been identified and the
quantities of such items worked out?
XVI FORIEGN EXCHANGE
1. Have the details of the plant & machinery, spares, The estimation has been done
instruments, scarce materials to be imported item-wise? presuming that all the goods &

services except GIS and XLPE
cables are available within the
country. However, final decision
on foreign components shall be
made at tender stage depending
upon price advantage
2. Has the phasing of imports and source(s) of imports been -do-
discussed item-wise?
3. Are the imports to be effected under foreign -do-
grants/credits or internal resources of the country?
XVII FINANCIAL RESOURCES
1. Has the concurrence of the finance department been NA
obtained?
2. Whether the scheme has already been started? If not, what No
is the present position regarding its inclusion in the plan?
3. Is the scheme included in the plan? If not, what is the Yes, to be included
present position regarding its inclusion in the plan?
4. Have the year-wise requirement of funds been indicated? Yes
5. Is the scheme covered under state sector or Central Private Sector
sector?
6. Is the scheme covered under any foreign assistance/aid NA
agreement?
XVIII ESTIMATE
1. Is the estimate prepared? Is a separate appendix of Yes Detailed estimates were
estimate attached? prepared for civil works, H & M
works and E & M works and
appended as separate volume.
2. Is the year to which the rates adopted in the estimate Rates are April 2022, Price level
indicated?
3. Have the analysis of rates for various major items of works Yes the Estimates are prepared
for the major components of the project been furnished, based on the Unified Schedule of
with the basis of analysis and the price index at which the Rates of Government of
estimate is based? Karnataka 2021 & current market
rates.
XIX ECOLOGICAL & ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS
1. Is the area likely to have ecological and environmental No ecological and environmental
problems due to altered surface water pattern and problems are involved.
corrective measures created discussed?
a. National parks and sanctuaries No
b. Health hazards-water borne diseases No
c. Submergence of monuments / archaeological sites No
d. Seismicity due to filling of reservoir No
e. Life of migratory birds NA
f. Plant life-forests Least affected
g. Fish culture & aquatic life No
h. Submergence of important minerals. NA
i. Ground water recharge Insignifacent
j. Increase in salinity of the ground water No
k. Water logging No
l. Excessive sedimentation of the reservoir No

2. Has the concurrence of the environmental appraisal TOR for EIA studies approved by
committee been obtained? MoEF.
XX CAMPS AND BUILDINGS
1. Has the planning of the camps / buildings been done? Yes
2. Can the buildings other than required for maintenance of Will be considered on the
the project being constructed be put to some other use completion of the project.
after the completion of the project by the Department or
any other agencies?
3. Have the interested agencies been consulted in planning of Yes
the buildings to suit their requirements later on?
4. Are the permanent buildings required for maintenance of Yes
the project discussed?
5. Are the temporary camps required for the project Yes
discussed?
XXI SOIL CONSERVATION
1. Is the need for soil conversation measures in the Yes. Such problem does not arise.
Catchment of the project discussed? Plantation will be taken up after
completion of construction works

SALIENT FEATURES OF THE PROJECT
NAME OF THE PROJECT SAUNDATTI PUMPED STORAGE PROJECT

1 Location
a Country India
b State Karnataka
c District Belagavi
d Village near Power House Karlakatti
2 Geographical Co-Ordinates
a Upper Reservoir (Proposed)
Latitude 15°51'28.27"N
Longitude 75° 0'13.82"E
b Lower Reservoir (Proposed)
Latitude 15°50'36.29"N
Longitude 75° 0'37.32"E
3 Access To Project Site
a Airport Belagavi, 80 Km from project site
b Rail head Dharwad, 45 Km from project site
c Road head Dharwad, 45 Km from project site
d Port Karwar, 200 Km from project site
4 Type of Project
a Type Pumped Storage Project
b Storage Capacity 8166.40MWH
c Rating 1280MW
d Peak operation duration 6.38 Hours daily
5 Upper Reservoir (Proposed)
a Live Storage 0.63 TMC
b Dead Storage 0.03 TMC
c Gross Storage 0.66 TMC
6 Upper Dam
a Type of Dam Asphalt Face Rockfill Dam
b Top of Dam EL +860 m
c Full Reservoir level (FRL) EL +857 m
d Minimum Draw Down Level (MDDL) EL +829m
e Length of AFRD Dam 3782
f Max Height of Embankment 35.0 m (above Lowest NSL)
g Top Width of Embankment 8.0 m
7 Lower Reservoir – (Proposed)
a Live Storage 0.63 TMC
b Dead Storage 0.03 TMC
c Gross Storage 0.66 TMC
8 Lower Dam
a Type of Dam Asphalt Face Rockfill Dam

b Top of Dam EL +662.00 m
c Full Reservoir level (FRL) EL +659.00 m
d Minimum Draw Down Level (MDDL) EL +637.00m
e Length of Dam 5740 m
f Max Height of Dam 22 m (above Lowest NSL)
9 Intake Structure
a Type Diffuser Type
b Number of Vents 4 Nos
c Size of Each Intake 30.9 m (W) x 10.20 m (H) including piers
d Length of each Intake 65.66 m (covered with RCC slab at top up to
Intake Gate)
e Elevation of Intake center line EL +813.83 m
f Elevation of Intake bottom EL +810.28 m
g Design Discharge of each Intake (Turbine 193.46 Cumecs for larger units (3 nos.)
mode) 97.73 Cumecs for smaller units (2 nos.)
h Trash rack type Vertical with inclination of 15o
i Size of Trash Rack 3 nos. of 8.30m(W) x 10.56 m(H) for each
unit
j Velocity through Trash rack 0.85 m/s
k Numbers & Size of Intake Service Gate 4 Nos. - 5.6 m (W) x 7.1 m (H) with
Independent Rope Drum Hoist
L Numbers & Size of Intake Maintenance 1 No. - 5.6 m (W) x 7.1 m (H) with Moving
Gate Gantry
10 Water Conductor System
I Intake tunnel (Top inclined PS)
a Type Circular
b Number of Penstock 4 Nos
c Diameter of Penstock 7.1 m dia.
d Length of Penstock up to Vertical Pressure 216.32 m each (average)
Shaft
e Thickness of Steel Liner 20 mm
f Grade of Steel Plate ASTM 537 CL-2 Grade Steel
II Buried Penstock (from Tunnel portal
to start of Vertical Pressure Shaft
including top bend)
a Type Circular
b Number of Penstock 4 Nos
c Diameter of Penstock 7.1 m dia.
d Length of Penstock up to Vertical Pressure 128.752 m each (average)
Shaft
e Thickness of Steel Liner 25 mm
f Grade of Steel Plate ASTM 517 GRADE-F
III Vertical Pressure Shaft
a Type Steel lined – circular
b Number of Pressure Shafts 4 Nos

c Diameter of shaft 7.1 m dia.
d Length of Vertical Pressure Shaft 185.97 m each (up to start of Horizontal
Shaft including )
e Thickness of Steel Liner 30mm to 48mm
f Grade of Steel Plate ASTM 517 GRADE-F
IV Bottom Horizontal Pressure Shaft
a Type Steel lined – circular
b Number of Pressure Shafts 4 Nos, wherein 1 No Independent Pressure
shaft bifurcated in to 2 for Smaller units
c Diameter of main pressure shaft 7.1 m
d Discharge in Main Pressure shaft 193.46 Cumecs
e Velocity in Main Pressure shaft 4.89 m/sec
f Diameter of branch Pressure shaft 5.00 m
g Discharge in Branch Pressure shaft 97.73 Cumecs
h Velocity in Branch Pressure shaft 4.98 m/sec
i Length of Bottom Horizontal Pressure 506.30 m (Average)
Shaft
j Length of Bottom Horizontal branch 113.55 m each
Pressure Shaft
k Thickness of Steel Liner (7.1m Dia) 48 mm to 52 mm
l Thickness of Steel Liner (5.0m Dia) 24 mm
m Grade of Steel Plate ASTM 517 GRADE-F
11 Main Inlet Valve (MIV)
a Size of MIV 4.40 m Diameter (for Larger unit)
3.10 m diameter (for Smaller unit)
b Velocity of MIV 12.72 m/sec (for Larger unit)
12.95 m/sec (for Smaller unit)
12 Adit Tunnels
a Adit to Penstock Bottom 2100.0 m long 9.0m dia. D Shaped Tunnel
b Escape Tunnel from Machine Hall 220 m long 6.5m dia. D Shaped Tunnel
13 Powerhouse
a Type Surface Powerhouse (Pit type)
b Center Line of Unit El. 603.00 m
c Size of Powerhouse 126 m (L) x 25.5 m (W) x 54.00 m (H) at
Generator Floor Level
d Size of Service bays 30 m (L) x 26.5 m (W)
e Service bay level EL. 617.20 m
f Crane Beam Level in Powerhouse El. 650.65 m
g Size of Unloading Bay 15m (L) X 26.5m (W)
h Unloading Bay Level El. 641.15 m
14 Tail Race Tunnel
a Type Concrete Lined - Circular
b Number of Tunnel 5 Nos (3 individual tunnels for Larger units
& 2 individual tunnels for Smaller units)

c Diameter for Larger Unit 8.0 m each
d Length for Larger Unit 268.00 m each
e Design Discharge in tunnel for Larger unit 193.46 m3/s
f Velocity in tunnel for Larger unit 3.85 m/s
g Diameter for Smaller Unit 5.65 m each
h Length for Smaller Unit 268.0 m each
i Design Discharge in tunnel for Smaller 97.73 m3/s
unit
j Velocity in tunnel for Smaller unit 3.90 m/s
15 Outlet Structure
a Type Diffuser Type
b Number of Outlet 5 Nos. (3 Nos. for Larger units & 2 nos. for
Smaller units)
c Size of Each Outlet 26.0 m (W) x 11.50 m (H) for Larger Units
23.0 m (W) x 8.50 m (H) for Smaller Units
d Length of each Outlet 51.05 m (covered with RCC slab at top up to
Outlet Gate) for both Larger & Smaller Units
e Elevation of outlet centre line EL +623.50 m for Larger units
EL +622.325 m for Smaller units
f Elevation of outlet bottom EL +619.50 m
g Trash rack type Vertical with inclination of 15o
h Size of Trash Rack 3 no’s of 6.67m(W) x 11.9m(H) for each
larger unit
2 no’s of 5.67m(W) x 8.8m(H) for each
smaller unit
i Velocity through Trash rack 0.840 m/s (for larger units)
0.959 m/sec (for smaller units)
j Tail Race outlet Service Gate 3 Nos. - 6.30 m (W) x 8.0 m (H) for Larger
Units & 2 Nos. - 4.50 m (W) x 5.65 m (H) for
Smaller Units with Independent Hydraulic
Hoist
k Tail Race outlet Stoplog Gate 1 No. – 6.30 m (W) x 8.0 m (H) for Larger
Units & 1 No. - 4.5 m (W) x 5.65 m (H) for
Smaller Units with Common Movable
Gantry Crane
16 Electro Mechanical Equipment
a Pump Turbine Francis type, vertical shaft reversible pump-
turbine
b Total No of units 5 no’s (3 x 320MW & 2 x 160MW)
c Centre Line Of Units EL +603.00 m
17.1 320 MW Turbines
a Total No of units 3 Units
(All units are Fixed speed )
b Turbine Capacity 320 MW
c Turbine Design Discharge 193.46 m3/s for each Unit

d Rated Head in Turbine Mode 189.90 m
e Pump Capacity 340 MW
f Rated Head in Pump Mode 199.00 m
g Synchronous speed 166.67 rpm
17.2 Generator-Motor
a Type Three phase, alternating current
synchronous, generator motor semi
umbrella type with vertical shaft
b Number of units 3 Units
c Rated Capacity Generator – 320 MW
Pump Input – 340 MW
d Rated Voltage 18 kV
17.3 Generator Motor Transformer
a Type Outdoor Single-Phase Power transformers
with Off-Circuit tap changer (OCTC)
c Rated Capacity of each unit 100 MVA
d Rated Voltage Primary – 18 KV; Secondary - 400 kV
adjustable range of the secondary voltage:
-10% to +10%(3kV/tap)
17.4 160 MW Turbines
a Total No of units 2 Units (both are Fixed speed)
e Pump Capacity 180 MW
g Synchronous speed 230 rpm
17.5 Generator-Motor
a Type Three (3) phase, alternating current
synchronous, generator motor semi
umbrella type with vertical shaft
c Rated Capacity Generator – 160 MW
Pump Input – 180 MW
d Rated Voltage 18 kV
a Type Indoor, 3-Ph transformers with Off-Circuit
tap changer (OCTC)
d Rated Voltage Primary – 18 KV; Secondary - 400 kV
adjustable range of the secondary voltage:
-10% to +10% (3kV/tap)

18 420 kV Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS)
a Type of GIS Indoor Type
b No. of GIS units One No. with bus sectionaliser
c Location Inside GIS Building above ground
d Scheme Double Busbar Arrangement with bus
sectionaliser
19 Power Evacuation
a Voltage Level (KV) 400 KV
b No. of Transmission lines One Double Circuit Transmission Line
c Conductor Moose
d Terminating at Central Pooling Substation (CPSS)
20 Project Cost
a Cost of civil works 3984.50 Cr
b Cost of EM works incl Transmission lines 2270.63 Cr
c Interest During Construction (IDC) 793.49 Cr
d Total Project Cost 7048.62 Cr

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 THE PROJECT
India is leading the world’s renewable energy revolution and is on track to achieve 175 GW of RE
capacity by 2022. Today, Wind & Solar, are the lowest cost source of new energy, however their
inherent infirm nature & non-schedulability presents a huge challenge for integrating large RE
capacities, while maintaining grid stability. Today, increasing RE capacities coupled with ever
changing dynamic demand curves of the States/DISCOMs/STUs are leading to sub-optimal
utilization of the existing base-load assets resulting in high fixed cost pass through per kWh and
additional burden to the consumers.
Flexible Energy Generation Assets that have a capability to supply both Base Load & Peaking
Power efficiently and economically are the need of the future and the necessary solution to address
the dynamic evolving energy needs of India. The increasing energy demand of the country can only be
met sustainably by developing the much required Flexible Energy Generation Assets immediately.
Wind-Solar-Storage Hybrid Projects present a viable solution to the problem at hand and also for
future wherein large RE capacities are being planned to be added to National grid. While battery
storage solutions are still evolving, integrating Wind & Solar with time tested and proven Pumped
Storage solutions presents an optimal, economically viable & scalable solution to supply
Schedulable Power On-Demand (SPOD) with both base load and peak load capabilities to the
Nation. Pumped Storage solutions provide the necessary scale (large volume of energy storage) and
have a long life cycle resulting in lowest cost of delivered SPOD energy over the life of the projects.
Developing such integrated projects in Wind-Solar resource rich locations along with Pumped Storage
capacities independently, without impacting the existing natural water systems / irrigation systems is
necessary to sustainably power the future needs of our country while maintaining grid stability.
In next 2-3 years’ time frame, with increasing penetration of non-flexible solar in state of
Karnatakapower procurement there will be significantly high supply of solar power during peak solar
supply hours (between 1100 – 1500 hours) which will lead to operating thermal plant at below their
respective technical minimum level (55%) else solar supply needs to be curtailed however, it faces
peak deficit due to supply availability issues during peak demand hours. Additionally, increasingly
higher quantum of RE capacity (primarily solar) is coming up within the state and this exposes the
state grid to higher variability of RE generation leading to DSM based penalties. Hence, grid connected
energy storage would reduce reliance on external sources by optimally utilizing contracted supply
capacity to meet increasing energy & peak demand as well as reduction in DSM penalties.

Also, evolving demand drivers like Solar pumps, EVs, increasing urbanization, change of agricultural
crops sowing in future would lead to need for storage asset enabling energy shifting to meet evolving
demand profile of the state.
Greenko Group is India’s leading clean energy company, with ~7.2 GW operational portfolio across
15 states in India. Greenko Group has an existing asset base of over USD 8.0 Billion with an equity
investment of USD 2.3 Billion. Greenko enjoys strong shareholder support of the world’s largest
sovereign wealth funds of Singapore (GIC) and Abu Dhabi (ADIA). Greenko Group has an experienced
& diverse management team to develop, execute and operate challenging projects with expertise
across large-scale Wind, Solar PV and Hydro projects. The team has recently commissioned one of the
World’s largest single 816 MWDC Solar PV Plant in Kurnool, Andhra Pradesh within a record time
of 6 months.
Greenko Group has over the past 10 years, developed capabilities not just in RE project execution, but
also state of the art digital capabilities for efficiently forecasting renewable generation trends in
Solar & Wind domains giving it a unique capability to integrate diverse generation streams of
energy to lead the creation of a Decarbonized, Digitized future on the Energy sector in India.
Greenko Group has been in the process of evaluating suitable locations for such integrated projects for
over 1 year and has identified Saundatti, Belagavi District, Karnataka for the proposed Saundatti
Integrated Renewable Energy Project (IREP). Saundatti IREP has been conceived as the World’s
First & Largest Gigawatt Scale integrated project with solar, wind and pumped storage components
that can supply Schedulable Power On Demand (SPOD) which is Dispatchable & Schedulable
Renewable Energy for the first time to consumers across India.
After evaluating the site for over 1 year, assessing the Wind & Solar resources, Greenko Group has
approached the Government of Karnataka (GoK) for necessary permissions and approvals for the
proposed Project. Presently, GoK has approved the project with 1000 MW Solar, 450 MW Wind &
1280 MW of Standalone Pumped Storage capacities depending on technical Detailed Project, site
suitability and associated requirements and demand from various State DISCOMs/STUs and other
consumers. GoK has also allocated 0.63 TMC of water for establishing the 1280 MW Pumped Storage
component with 6.38 hour storage capacity.

Depending upon actual Peak demand capacity and peaking duration requirement of State Government
/ Central utility, Project configuration can be altered by keeping overall daily storage capacity same.
All three components of Saundatti IREP are in close vicinity of each other and therefore power from all
three components will be pooled into common pooling station and will be connected to PGCIL/CTU
sub-station at Dharwad for further supply into the National Grid. The IREP Project is a self-identified
project and first of its kind in the world and our country which can meet the dynamic needs of
DISCOMs/STUs, through:
• 24 Hours Round The Clock (RTC) Base Load Energy
• 18 Hours Base Load Energy as per Demand
• 6.38 hours Peak Load Energy of 1280MW
• Energy Storage Service, Grid Management, Frequency Management & Ancillary Services
1.2 SCOPE OF THE REPORT
The proposed Saundatti PSP is a self-identified project by M/s Greenko and M/s Aarvee Associates is
associated with preparation of DPR.
1.3 TYPE OF PROJECT
The project is a pumped storage hydro power project, which comprise an upper reservoir and lower
reservoir interconnected with a waterway, a powerhouse which contains hydro power electrical
mechanical equipment, and a transmission connection to the grid. This project is operated when there
is a peak demand in the Energy, for the consumption inexpensive electricity is available (which is
typically available at night or on the weekends when power demand is low or excess solar generation
in the day time) and is used to pump water from the lower reservoir to the upper reservoir when there
is less demand in Energy & more generation of Energy. Water stored in the upper reservoir is then
released during peak demand periods, delivering more valuable electricity to the grid.
The DPR is for the standalone Pumped Storage component of PSP of 1280 MW / 8166.4 MWH storage
capacity, located at Belagavi District, Karnataka. Saundatti PSP Standalone Pumped Storage Project
will comprise of two reservoirs to be constructed in existing natural ground with low height
embankments of average height 10-22m (with maximum height 35m) to create the desired storage
capacity. This Project is standalone in nature and both the reservoirs are located away from all existing
natural water systems and have no/negligible catchment area.
Water will be used cyclically for energy storage and discharge. Evaporation losses, if any will be
recouped periodically. This Project envisages non-consumptive re-utilization of 0.63 TMC of water for
re-circulation among the proposed upper reservoir & existing lower reservoir. The project comprises

installation of 5 Units for 1280MW Capacity which is 3 X 320MW+2 X 160MW has been planned to
cater the requirement of higher percentage fulfillment of PPA requirements and near 100% plant
availability.
1.4 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT
The geographical coordinates of the proposed upper reservoir are at longitude 75° 0'13.82" East and
latitude is 15°51'28.27" North and that of proposed lower reservoir are at 75° 0'37.32" East and
15°50'36.29" North.
Saundatti IREP is located in Saundatti Tehsil/Mandal of Belagavi district in Karnataka, India. It is

situated 80kms away from district headquarter Belagavi. Nearest railway head is Dharwad from where
project site is located at around 45kms.
The project is located near Karlakatti village located in Saundatti Tehsil/Mandal of Belagavi district in
Karnataka, India as shown in Figure 1.1. It is situated 55kms away from sub-district headquarter
Saundatti and 80kms away from district headquarter Belagavi. Rampura is the nearest town to Basi
Block with 16kms away. The site is easily approachable by SH-31A from Belagavi via Saundatti.
Nearest railway head is in Rampura from where project site is located.
Figure 1.1: Project Location

1.5 GENERAL CLIMATIC CONDITIONS IN THE PROJECT AREA
The climate of Karnataka varies considerably, depending on the geographical region. The state mainly
experiences arid to semi arid in the plateau region, sub-humid to humid tropical in the western ghats
and humid tropical monsoon in the costal plains. Mainly three Monsoons play a major role in
determining the climate of the state. The entire state is divided into three metrological regions namely
costal, North interior & South interior.
The entire coastal region and the adjoining areas have tropical monsoon type of climatic
conditions.This region stretches over the districts of Udupi, Uttara Kannada and Dakshina Kannada.
Rainfall received in this region is much more than the rainfall received in the other parts of the state.
The North interior region mainly covers the districts of Bagalkot, Belgaum, Bijapur, Bidar, Bellary,
Dharwad, Haveri, Gadag, Gulbarga, Koppal and Raichur area which are arid zones. This region receives
the least amount of rainfall in the state.
The south region spreads over the districts of Bangalore Rural, Bangalore Urban, Chitradurga,
Chamrajnagar, Chikmagalur, Hassan, Kodagu, Kolar, Mysore, Shimoga and Tumkur. These regions
experiences semi-arid type of climate.
Summers last from March and extends till may with very dry and hot climate. Monsoons begins in june
and lasts untill september. The state receives heavy rainfall from the Southwest Monsoon during these
months. The state receives very mild to moderate rainfall with Northeast Monsoon during the months
of October and continues till December. November, December, January, and February are the winter
months and the temprature dips to low. The range of winter temperature is generally 12 °C to 30 °C.
The climate in Bellagavi District is tropical savanna climate with temperatures ranging from 18.4 °C
(65.1 °F) to 39.5 °C (103.1 °F) in the summer and 6.2°C (43.2 °F) to 31.5 °C (88.7 °F) in the winter. The
average annual rainfall is about 1775 mm (69.7 in).
1.6 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF TOPOGRAPHY, PHYSIOGRAPHY & GEOLOGY OF PROJECT

AREA
1.6.1 Topography
The Project area is located in Saundatti Tehsil/Mandal of Belagavi district in Karnataka, India. It is
situated 80kms away from district headquarter Belagavi. Nearest railway head is Dharwad from where
project site is located at around 45kms.
The Geographical co-ordinates of the proposed Saundatti PSP reservoir are at longitude 75° 0'13.82"
East and latitude is 15°51'28.27" North and that proposed lower reservoir are 15°50'36.29" N and 75°
0'37.32"E.

1.6.2 Physiography
The Western Ghats grade into the plateau region towards east and continue in to north Karnataka.
Plateau topography is the southern extension of the Deccan Plateau with an average elevation of about
650m with a series of narrow, linear ridges/hill ranges of schistose rocks & bouldery granitoid hills,
and intermittent flat plains. Physiograpically the project area is located within the Northern Karnataka
Plateau Region comprises of Belgaum, Bidar, Bijapur, Bagalkot and Gulbarga districts. It is largely
composed of Deccan Trap. It represents a monotonous treeless extensive plateau landscape with a
general elevation of 300 to 600 metres from the mean sea level.
1.6.3 Geology
Saundatti IREP project area located to the northwest of Yekundi/Karlakatti suggests that the proposed
layout spreads across the southern margin of the Kaladgi basin into the northern margin of WDC . The
sedimentary litho-assemblage constituting a part of the Proterozoic Kaladgi basin is represented by
quartzite exposed along the near vertical cliffs and capping the redidual hills having near flat to gently
dipping plateau surface the Peninsular Gneiss represents northern margin of western Dharwar craton
(WDC).
Detailed description of geological features are described in 5.7.
1.7 HISTORICAL BACKGROUND OF THE PROJECT
The proposed integrated renewable energy project is the first of its kind in the world. M/s Greenko
Group has evaluated a suitable location for integrated projects and has identified Saundatti
Tehsil/Mandal of Belagavi district in Karnataka for the proposed Saundatti Integrated Renewable
Energy Project (IREP). Saundatti IREP has been conceived as the World’s First & Largest Gigawatt
Scale integrated project with solar, wind and pumped storage components that can supply Schedulable
Power On Demand (SPOD) which is Dispatchable & Schedulable Renewable Energy for the first time to
consumers across India. The Saundatti Pumped Storage Project is a part of IREP. time to consumers
across India. The Saundatti Pumped Storage Project is a part of IREP.
1.8 ALTERNATIVE STUDIES
After finalisng the parameters of Upper Reservoir, the pumped storage component of Saundatti PSP is
proposed to be developed between upper reservoir FRL of EL +857.0 m and lower reservoir FRL of EL
+659.0m. Accordingly, alternatives were worked out to develop a best possible layout. Alternatives of
project layout have been studied based on the topographical, geological & geotechnical constraints. All
the alternatives have been studied and discussed below with 3 units of 320 MW and 2 units of 160
MW of variable head Francis turbines and for the same location for upper and lower reservoir for the

project. The power house and water conductor system has only been altered accordingly. The layout
comprising the Project area with all the alternative schemes are shown in the drawing numbers.
1 Alternative - 1 Surface Powerhouse Dwg. No. AA/POWER/CIVIL/2209/02

with no Surge Tank
2 Alternative - 2 Underground Dwg. No. AA/POWER/CIVIL/2209/34
Powerhouse complex
with long TRT &
underground surge
chamber on d/s
Alternative-1: The water conductor system comprises of four nos. of steel lined penstock
tunnel/pressure shaft and a surface power house. The water after generation will be lead into lower
reservoir through a Tailrace tunnel connected to Tailrace channel.
Alternative-2: The water conductor system comprises of four nos. steel lined penstock
tunnel/pressure shaft and an underground power house. 5 numbers independent Draft Tube tunnels
from each machine will be connected to a common tail race surge chamber. From the tail race surge
chamber 3 numbers of each 8.2 m diameter & 617.72 m long tail race tunnels will lead the water to
lower reservoir through outlet structure.
Two alternative project layouts could emerge after considering the topography, lateral & vertical rock
covers, geological setup and geotechnical parameters of the rock mass which will be available at the
foundation grade of different project components. Both the alternatives have been studied and
discussed below with the locations of upper and lower reservoir for the project are same. Different
possible combinations of the Water Conductor System and surface vs. underground Power House
Complex have been considered in developing different alternative project layouts.
The Saundatti PSP envisages construction of
• Asphalt facing Rockfill embankment varying from 10m to 35m height for creation of Saundatti
upper reservoir with 0.66 TMC gross storage capacity.
• Intake Structure.
• Water Conductor System, 3 Nos., 7.1 m dia, 1035.71 m each (steel lined) with velocity of 4.89
m/s & 1 No, 7.1 m dia, 922.15 m steel lined which will be bifurcated to 5.0 m dia, 113.55 m
each with velocity of 4.98 m/s. HRT comprising of Top inclined prenstocks, 4 Nos., 7.1m dia &
216.32, Burried Penstocks, 4 Nos., 7.1 m dia & 128.752 m length (average), Vertical Pressure

Shafts, 4 Nos., 7.1 m dia & 185.97 m length and Horizontal Pressure Shaft, 4 Nos., 7.1 m dia in
which 3 Nos. will feed 3 units each of 320 MW of 506.30 m length and 1 no. Independent
Pressure Shaft will be bifurcated into two branch pressure shafts of 5 m dia & of about 113.55
m length to feed two smaller units of 160 MW.
• A surface Power house having an installation of three nos. reversible Francis turbine each of
320 MW capacity (All units are fixed speed turbines) operating under a rated head of 189.90 m
in generating mode & 199.00 m in pumping mode and two nos. reversible Francis turbine each
of 160 MW capacity (both units are fixed speed turbines) operating under a rated head of
189.00 m in generating mode & 199.40 m in pumping mode.
• Five numbers of 268.00 m long tail race tunnel connecting the tail race outlet structure and the
draft tube of the power house out of which three larger units has a tunnel dia of 8.0 m whereas
two small units consists of 5.65 m dia.
• Tailrace Outlet structure.
Figure 1.2: General Layout of the Scheme

1.9 NATURAL RESOURCES OF THE STATE/REGION
The Krishna River is the third longest river in central−southern India, after the Ganges and the
Godavari. The river is almost 1,300 kilometres (810 m) long. The river is also called Krishnaveni. It is a
major source of irrigation for Maharashtra, Karnataka and Andhra Pradesh.
The river originates at Mahabaleswar near the Jor village in the extreme north of Wai Taluka, Satara
District, Maharashtra in the west and pours into the Bay of Bengal at Hamasaladeevi (near Koduru) in
Andhra Pradesh, on the east coast. It flows through thestate of Karnataka before entering Andhra
Pradesh. The delta of this river is one of the most fertile regions in India and was the home to ancient
Satavahana and Ikshvaku Sun Dynasty kings. Vijayawada is the largest city on the River Krishna. Sangli
is the biggest city on the river Krishna in Maharashtra.
It causes heavy soil erosion during the monsoon season. During this time, Krishna takes fertile soil
from Maharashtra, Karnataka and Andhra Pradesh towards the delta region. It flows fast and furious,
often reaching depths of over 75 feet (23 m). Ironically, there is a saying in Marathi (language of
Maharashtra) "Santh vaahate Krishnamaai" which means "quiet flows Krishna". This term is used to
describe that a person should be as quiet as Krishna.
The principal tributaries of Krishna in Karnataka are Ghataprabha, Malaprabha, Bhima and
Tungabhadra. All these rivers except the Malaprabha River having their catchment area both in
Karnataka and Maharastra.
1.10 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ASPECTS
The Study Area for the collection of data on socio-economic status has been delineated as the area
within 10 kms radius of the main project components like proposed reservoir area, powerhouse,
tailrace channel, muck dumping site etc.
All project components as well as entire study area falls under Saundatti taluka (Parasgad) in Belagavi
district. Socio-economic profile of the study area covering aspects like demography, occupational
pattern, literacy rate and other important socio-economic indicators of the villages. The baseline
socio-economic profile is based on field survey and Census of India 2011.
Total households in study area tehsil are 70063. The total population of study area is 352929, of which
178755 are male and 174174 are female. Sex ratio in study area is 974 female per 1000 males.
The scheduled caste and scheduled tribes percentage population of the district is 9.54% and 11.07%
respectively. The literacy rate of the Suandatti taluka is 59.0 % of which the male 58.45% while the
female 41.55%.
The male and female literate population is 10738 and 7525 respectively, which implies that the

literacy rate of the affected villages is 58.4 % of which the male 58.8% while the female 41.2 %.
Murgod village has the highest li.
Total working population of the Saundatti taluka is 46.34%, while, the rest 53.66% of the population is
classified are non-workers. Out of the total working population, 81.19% are main workers, while,
18.09% are marginal workers.
1.11 LAND REQUIRED FOR THE PROJECT CONSTRUCTION
For the development of Saundatti PSP, land would be required for construction of project components,
reservoir area, muck dumping, construction camps and colony, etc. Total land required for the
construction of proposed activities is approximately 383.26 ha. break up of land required for different
components is given below.
Table 1 1: Land requirement for Saundatti Pumped Storage Project
Sl. no. Components Total Area (Ha)

1 Upper Reservoir 118.51
2 Intake Structure 10.61
3 Penstock 16.57
4 Power House & TRC Outlet 14.50
5 Lower Reservoir 156.51
6 Pot Head Yard 0.25
Proposed roads:from Lower Reservoir to Power House
7 10.76
(PH), PH to Upper Reservoir
Contractor facilities, cement and E&M stores, Temporary
8 10.50
colony area.
9 Muck disposal areas 30.00
10 Pumping & Other facilities 15.00
11 Magazine 0.05
TOTAL 383.26
1.12 POPULATION AFFECTED BY THE PROJECT
There is no settlement in the entire project area. As such no population is affected by the project. As
per information available till date, all the land in the project area belongs to the local farmers, state
government and forest department.
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS
Saundatti IREP will consist of proposed upper reservoir and proposed lower reservoir. There will be of
additional land required for the proposed Saundatti PSP reservoirs for the pumped storage project.

Also, the land required is for the construction of power house complex and its apparent works Viz.,
Intake structure, Penstocks, Vertical Pressure Shafts/ Horizontal Pressure Shafts, Powerhouse, Tail
Race Tunnel etc,. Total land required for the construction of various components is about 383.26 Ha.
The project area is in Kagehala forest under Savadati Range. Tail race channel falls totally in private
land area. Based on assessment of environmental impacts, management plans must be formulated for
Catchment Area Treatment, compensatory afforestation and other environmental issues like
rehabilitation & resettlement.
1.14 INTER-STATE/INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS
The project Upper reservoir, water conductor system, power house and Lower reservoir lie well within
the state of Karnataka. The Saundatti IREP does not entail any interstate aspects. Moreover, there is no
international boundaries around the Karnataka, therefore does not entail to international aspects.
The proposed project is closed loop project where water will be cycled between two reservoirs of
which one is created newly & the other existing reservoir in closed loop only i.e. without any
consumptive use except for evaporation losses. As such, no Interstate or International aspects are
envisaged in the project.
1.15 DEFENCE ANGLE
The project area doesn’t have any coastal belt, international borders or any defence activity in the
vicinity
1.16 HYDROLOGY
The proposed storage project is being planned by creating a new upper reservoir & lower reservoir.
The upper reservoir do not have any natural streams draining into the reservoir. The upper & lower
reservoir does not have any significant catchment draining into the reservoirs. The Saundatti PSP has
a gross storage capacity of 18.501 MCM (0.66 TMC) & 18.78 MCM (0.66 TMC) for upper & lower
reservoirs respectively. The live storage of Saundatti PSP Upper reservoir is 17.787 MCM (0.63TMC)
and lower reservoir is 17.864 MCM (0.63TMC). Operational pattern of Saundatti PSP has been kept in
such a way that 0.63TMC of water will be utilized for the proposed Saundatti PSP. The project is a
pumped storage scheme and hence, no consumptive utilization of water is required for its operation.
It is proposed to reduce the evaporation loss by about 50% by adopting some effective measures such
as floating umbrellas etc. in both the reservoirs. Accordingly, the annual loss in the volume of the
Upper reservoir due to evaporation works out to 2.191 MCM and the annual yield in to the reservoir
through precipitation is 0.557 MCM.

1.17 INSTALLED CAPACITY
The Saundatti PSP is proposed with a Storage Capacity of 8166.4 MWH with Rating of 1280 MW. This
Project comprises of 3 units of 320 MW and 2 units of 160 MW each. The installed capacity of a
pumped storage scheme is influenced by the requirements of daily peaking power requirements,
flexibility in efficient operation of units, storage available in the reservoirs and the area capacity
characteristics. The project comprises installation of 5 Units for 1280MW Capacity which is 3 X 320
MW+2 X 160 MW has been planned to cater the requirement of higher percentage fulfillment of PPA
requirements and near 100% plant availability. The Project will generate 1280 MW by utilizing a
design discharge of 193.46 Cumec with rated head of 189.90 m for large units and 189.00 m for
smaller units. The Saundatti PSP will utilize 1380 MW to pump 0.63 TMC of water to the upper
reservoir in 7.57 hours.
Table 1 2: Key parameters of Saundatti PSP
Sl. No. Parameter Unit Value

1 Storage Capacity MWH 8166.4
2 Rating MW 1280
3 No. of Units Nos. 5.00
4 Rated Head in Turbine mode – 320 MW m 189.90
5 Rated Head in Turbine mode – 160 MW m 189.00
6 Total Design Discharge Cumec 775.84
7 Design Discharge per unit of 320 MW Cumec 193.46
8 Design Discharge per unit of 160 MW Cumec 97.73
9 Generation Duration Hrs 6.38
10 Turbine Capacity – 5 Units MW (3x320 MW +2X160 MW)
11 Annual Energy Generation MU 2833.20
12 Pump Capacity – 5 Units MW (3x340MW +2X180MW)
13 Rated Head in Pump mode – 340 MW m 199.00
14 Rated Head in Pump mode – 180 MW m 199.40
15 Pumping Duration Hrs. 7.57
16 Annual Energy consumption MU 3622.0
The volume of water required for turbine mode of operation is equated to the pumped mode. Annual
energy generation by Saundatti PSP in Turbine mode is 2833.20 MU, Annual energy consumption by
Saundatti PSP in Pump mode is 3622.00MU.

1.18 POWER EVACUATION
Two nos 400 KV Moose Double circuit Transmission Lines shall be used by the plant. One line will be
connected to PGCIL Narendra 400 KV substation at Dharwad and other line will be connected to PSP
CPSS for evacuation of generated Power and for Supply of power during pumping mode.
1.19 CONSTRUCTION PLANNING & SCHEDULE
It is proposed to construct the project within a period of 36 months excluding pre-construction

duration of 6 months.
1.20 BENEFITS OF THE SCHEME
The Saundatti PSP is envisaged to be completed in a period of 3 years. The project would generate
designed energy of 2833.2 MU. Other benefit of this storage project can be in the form of spinning
reserve with almost instantaneous start-up from zero to full power supply, supply of reactive energy,
primary frequency regulation, voltage regulation etc.

CHAPTER 2 JUSTIFICATION OF THE PROJECT
2.1 GENERAL
The Indian government on 2014 has made the Renewable Energy Initiative to introduce 175 GW
renewable energy (solar power and wind power) by 2022. The constraints with Renewable Energy
(RE) associated are:
• Solar generation peaks at around 11:00 hrs and starts to drop at 16:00 hrs
• Wind generation is generally curvilinear with small dip during day-time compared to morning
and evening time.
• Morning Peak demand during 7:00 – 9:00 hrs and evening peak starts at around 18:00-20:00
hrs.
• During peak demand period - Low renewable generation & During low demand period - High
renewable generation.
• These problems will get amplified with achievement of RE mission of GOI
• Demand during 7:00-9:00 hrs and 18:00-20:00 hrs will continue to peak reducing grid
frequency.
• At the same time, with increase in Renewable generation, peak generation shall be during day-
time thus making grid-vulnerable.
• As per CEA’s National Draft Electricity plan, Net Demand after adjusting for Renewable
generation shall exhibit duck-curve profile (Figure 2.1).
To manage large swings in net power demand during the day, optimal solution would be flattening the
RE generation instead of backing down and ramping up thermal generation.
Flexible Energy Generation Assets that have a capability to supply both Base Load & Peaking Power
efficiently and economically are the need of the future and the necessary solution to address the
dynamic evolving energy needs of India.

Figure 2.1: All India Load profile Year 2021-22 to 2026-27
(Net Demand after adjusting Renewable Generation)
The increasing energy demand of the country can only be met sustainably by developing the much
required Flexible Energy Generation Assets immediately. Integrating by power management plan
required for Round the Clock (RTC) power supply as because:
➢ Both Solar and wind projects will operate in normal operating conditions and supply power to
Grid during 0000-2400 hrs, with maximum limit of power clamped at 1/1.2 GW
➢ Storage will be created using Excess generation i.e. generation above 1/1.2 GW (from Solar and
wind combined) during the day i.e. mostly during period 1100-1600 hrs will be used for
creation of storage
➢ Storage will be released in two phases, during morning and evening peak requirement times
i.e. usually during period 0600-1100 hrs and 1600-2400 hrs.
For this requirement of the storage for RE development, the pumped storage power generation is now
promoted by CEA with announcement to development of 10GW pumped storage power potential
(August, 2016).
2.2 NECESSITY OF THE PROJECT
Renewable Energy (RE) becoming a mainstream energy source. Increasing demand of renewable
power on round the clock basis. Improving scale of Renewable Energy Projects and technology
improvement leading to cost reduction. Declining Storage Costs in recent past. Focus on energy
solutions that can help in climate change mitigation. Inability to predict and schedule hinders
renewable to substitute base load power requirements the storage is the answer to providing
improved grid balanced renewable power round the clock and can solve renewable intermittency
issues and help in absorbing much larger quantum of RE.

Need for balancing grid as RE penetration increases coupled with limited flexible generation (e.g., gas,
greenfield hydro). Customers demanding Round the clock (RTC) power from RE and Wind and solar
have complementing energy pattern and storage can effectively balance these sources.
The proposed Saundatti Integrated Renewable Energy Project (IREP) has been conceived as the
World’s First & Largest Gigawatt Scale integrated project with solar, wind and pumped storage
components that can supply Schedulable Power On Demand (SPOD) which is Dispatchable &
Schedulable Renewable Energy for the first time to consumers across India.
All three components of Saundatti IREP are in close vicinity of each other and therefore power from all
three components will be pooled into common pooling station and will be connected to PGCIL/CTU
sub-station at Dharwad for further supply into the National Grid. The IREP Project is a self-identified
project and first of its kind in the world and our country which can meet the dynamic needs of
DISCOMs/STUs, through:
1. 24 Hours Round The Clock (RTC) Base Load Energy

2. 18 Hours Base Load Energy as per Demand
3. 6.2 hours Peak Load Energy of 1280MW
4. Energy Storage Service, Grid Management, Frequency Management & Ancillary Services
After evaluating the site for over 1 year, assessing the Wind & Solar resources, Greenko Group has
1280 MW of Standalone Pumped Storage capacities depending on technical Detailed Project, site
suitability and associated requirements and demand from various State DISCOMs/STUs and other
consumers. GoK has also allocated 0.63 TMC of water for establishing the 1280 MW Pumped Storage
component with 6.38 hour storage capacity.
The GoK has approved the project with First Right of Refusal to utilize the energy from the project,
however with no obligation to consume the same.
2.3 CONCLUSIONS
Pumped Storage solutions presents an optimal, economically viable & scalable solution to supply
Schedulable Power On-Demand (SPOD) with both base load and peak load capabilities to the Nation.
Pumped Storage solutions provide the necessary scale (large volume of energy storage) and have a
long life cycle resulting in lowest cost of delivered SPOD energy over the life of the projects.
Developing such Pumped Storage capacities independently, without impacting the existing natural
water systems / irrigation systems is necessary to sustainably power the future needs of our country
while maintaining grid stability.

CHAPTER 3 BASIN DEVELOPMENT
3.1 THE COURSE OF THE WATER SOURCE
A number of dams and barrages have been constructed and are under construction in the Krishna
basin to utilize water resources which are Upper Krishna Project Stage – 1,Upper Krishna Project
Stage – 2, Srisailam Dam, Pulichintala Project, Nagarjunasagar Project, Ghatprabha Dam, Tungabhadra
Project, Vanivilas Sagar Project, Bennihora Project, Bhadha Reservoir Project, Bhima Irrigation Project,
Hipparagi Barrage, Malprabha Project, Upper Tunga Project, Koyna dam, Markendaya Project,
Singatalur Lift Irrigation, Krishna Irrigation Project, Osmansagar Reservoir and Prakasam barrage.
Krishna Basin extends over an area of 258,948 square kilometres (99,980 sq mi) which is nearly 8% of
the total geographical area of the country. This large basin lies in the states of Karnataka (113,271
km2), Telangana, Andhra Pradesh (76,252 km2) and Maharashtra (69,425 km2).
The Krishna river rises in the Western Ghats, at an elevation of about 1337 m just north of
Mahabaleshwar, about 64 km from the Arabian Sea. It flows for about 1400 km and outfalls into the
Bay of Bengal. The principal tributaries joining Krishna are the Ghataprabha, the Malaprabha, the
Bhima, the Tungabhadra and the Musi.
Most of this basin comprises rolling and undulating country, except for the western border, which is
formed by an unbroken line of the Western Ghats. The important soil types found in the basin are
black soils, red soils, laterite and lateritic soils, alluvium, mixed soils, red and black soils and saline and
alkaline soils.
An average annual surface water potential of 78.1 km³ has been assessed in this basin. Out of this, 58.0
km³ is utilisable water. Culturable area in the basin is about 203,000 km 2, which is 10.4% of the total
culturable area of the country.
Mullayanagiri peak, in Karnataka, is the highest point (1,930 m) of the Krishna basin.

Figure 3.1: Krishna River Basin
3.2 POWER POTENTIAL OF THE RIVER BASIN AND STAGES OF DEVELOPMENT
Central Electricity Authority (CEA), A Government of India undertaking had a reassessment study in
various river basins on 845 No’s of sites with the probable installed capacity of 84,044 MW which
when fully developed would result in an installed capacity of 1,48,701 MW in the country. As of today
the total Hydro schemes have been installed with a capacity of 45,400MW and a capacity of 12034MW
are under construction including the pumped storage stations. A total of 63 number of sites have been
identified with a probable installed capacity of 96,524MW out of which only 4785.5MW have been
installed as a Pumped storage schemes at 9No’s of sites in the country and a probable installed
capacity 9,960 MW are in various stages of development. It is identified that southern region has a
huge potential for the development of the Pumped Storage Projects (PSP).
The present proposal of 1280 MW Pumped storage project is a self identified project utilising the
waters from Lower reservoir of Krishna River basin for the development of the Pumped storage hydro
power scheme. The quantity of water required for first filling of water is 0.69 TMC (0.63 TMC Live
Storage & 0.03 TMC Dead Storage) of the Upper reservoir.
The Proposed PSP is planned with a Lower reservoir and an upper reservoir. As the project is
proposed with one time filling of reservoir and circulate thereafter, therefore, it will not affect any
downstream river valley developments and any regular uses of river water. The proposed project is
adjacent to the riverine system, therefore any RoR vs Storage study required for conventional hydro
power developments. The advantage of this current project is one time reservoir filling and re-

utilization of the water & installation cost is less per MW. No additional costs are required to divert
waters of Krishna River to the potentially identified site in the river system to the Proposed reservoirs.
With minimum submergence of the forest land the present proposal can be developed. From the
Economical point of view & with lesser impact on the Environment & Ecology multi-stage
development of the present proposal has not been considered. Hence the entire project is developed in
a single stage.
3.3 WHETHER TRANS-BASIN DIVERSION OF WATERS INVOLVED
For the development of the Saundatti Pumped storage Project Trans-Basin diversion of waters are not
at all involved as the newly proposed reservoirs are intended for one time filling of allotted water from
the Renuka Sagar Reservoir to the Lower reservoir and re-utilization, only the evoporational losses are
to be balanced in the proposed project from the Renuka Sagar reservoir from the Krishna River.
3.4 FITMENT OF THE SCHEME IN THE OVERALL BASIN DEVELOPMENT
The Pumped Storage Hydel Project is proposed to produce electricity mostly to meet the peak hour
demand. The project will not use water from the required quantum of water for existing hydel
projects. The water used for generation of power during peak hour demand will be pumped back to
upper reservoir using energy available from RE sources during low demand/excess generation hour.
So, same water will always go on recycling. This concept has been accepted universally economical to
meet the peak hour demand. This proposed project will enhance the power generation during critical
hour of need with no consumptive use of water. Techno-Economically this is the feasible option for the
development of the pumped storage potential as it involves in one time filling and reutilization for
regeneration of power.
3.5 FITMENT OF THE SCHEME IN THE POWER POTENTIAL ASSESSMENT STUDIES CARRIED
OUT BY CEA
In the perspective of the pumped storage power potential assessment studies carried out by CEA for
the Southern Region, the present proposal of 1280 MW Pumped storage development is the feasible
proposal for the energy requirements of the region.
3.6 EFFECT OF FUTURE UPSTREAM/DOWNSTREAM DEVELOPMENTS ON THE POTENTIAL OF

PROPOSED SCHEME
The proposed project will not require regular inflows. It will always use recycled water filled from
Lower reservoir. The project does not interfere with any river’s daily flows, there will not be any
adverse effect on the proposed project even in case of any development in U/s and D/s in future.
3.7 ROR VS STORAGE ASPECTS
Saundatti PSP is the off-stream closed loop pumped storage development proposed by drawing water
from the existing Renuka Sagar Reservoir on stream river course to the Lower reservoir, therefore will

not affect any upstream and downstream river valley developments and any regular uses of river
water may affect. The proposed project is not in the riverine system and is a pumped storage project
therefore does not entail for any RoR vs Storage study required for conventional hydro power
developments.

CHAPTER 4 INTER-STATE & INTER-NATIONAL ASPECTS
4.1 INTER-STATE ASPECTS

The geographical coordinates of the proposed upper reservoir are at longitude 75° 0'13.82" East and
latitude is 15°51'28.27" North and that of lower reservoir are 15°50'36.29" N and 75° 0'37.32" E. The
project is located near Saundatti Tehsil/Mandal of Belagavi district in Karnataka , India. The project lies in
Krishna Basin.
This scheme envisages non-consumptive re-utilization of 0.63 TMC of water of the Renuka Sagar
reservoir by recirculation. The water in the Renuka Sagar reservoir (existing lower reservoir) will be
pumped up and stored in the proposed Saundatti PSP reservoir (upper Reservoir) and will be utilized
for power generation.
The project Upper reservoir, water conductor system, power house and Lower reservoir lie well within
the state of Karnataka. The Saundatti IREP does not entail any interstate aspects.
4.2 INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS
The state of Karnataka has no international boundaries around its state boundaries, therefore does
not entail to international aspects.

CHAPTER 5 SURVEY & INVESTIGATIONS
5.1 GENERAL
The following survey & investigations were carried out for the project and are briefly discussed in this
Chapter:
• Topographical survey
• Geology & Geotechnical investigations
• Construction material investigations
5.2 TOPOGRAPHICAL SURVEY
Topographical maps (D43D1 (48M/1) and D43C13 (48I/13)) of Survey of India were referred for
investigation, reconnaissance and for finalizing the project layout.
5.2.1 Reconnaissance Survey
Saundatti Standalone Pumped storage project with 1280MW/8166.4 MWH storage capacity is located
at Belagavi district in Karnataka. The Saundatti PSP comprises of one off stream reservoir to act as
upper reservoir and one as a lower reservoir. The water required for the Pumped storage operation
will be drawn from Renuka Sagar reservoir for onetime filling of the proposed lower reservoir.
A reconnaissance survey is made for proposed location of upper and lower reservoir, possible intake
and exit locations, penstock tunnels, power house area and TRT. All salient features of the area are
noted during the reconnaissance survey.
5.2.2 Control Bench Marks
A network of control points has been established in the project area, using auto-levels and Differential
Global Positioning System (DGPS). Traversing was conducted between the DGPS points by Total
Station survey using Leica TS06 – 1”.
The processes of TS survey carried out involves:
• Establishing a planimetric control network by DGPS survey
• Preprocessing of TS data to generate Spot Levels & Contour Data
• Generation of Contours, topographic maps of the project area
The work was carried out using Trimble R4 Dual frequency DGPS in Static survey mode. To start with
Primary Point with 6 hrs observation and establish Triangulation method to be followed in GPS Survey
for Primary GCP Points static method GCP which is marked with specification marking and symbol
preferable is and paint colours (white, & Red) Marking can done in rocky strata. The following

primary ground control points are established (GCP’s).
Table 5 1: Primary Ground Control Points
ID - DGPS Latitude (Global) Longitude Height

(Global) (Global)
(m)
TBM1 N15° 49’ 16.5” E75° 05’ 48.7” 638.785
B1 N15° 51’ 35.6” E75° 00’ 41.2” 751.622
b3 N15° 51’ 36.6” E75° 00’ 42.5” 724.158
B N15° 51’ 53.7” E75° 00’ 04.9” 833.917
TBM4 N15° 49’ 20.9” E75° 05’ 42.4” 671.238
TBM9 N15° 49’ 34.3” E75° 05’ 37.1” 690.919
The final ground control points established are as follows:
Table 5 2: Final Ground Control Points
S. No ID - Easting Northing Elevation

TS (Meter) (Meter) (Meter)
1 B1 501225.843 1753437.485 750.953
2 GRK1 501199.793 1753416.697 771.483
3 GRK2 501166.181 1753425.287 786.715
4 GRK3 501138.236 1753405.228 796.980
5 GRK4 501095.198 1753396.024 807.040
6 GRK5 501053.352 1753412.364 812.675
7 GRK6 500982.381 1753394.279 823.442
8 GRK7 500948.523 1753365.662 828.135
9 B1 501225.843 1753437.485 750.953
5.3 DEVELOPMENT OF PLAN
The overall plan of the project site indicating the streams, topographical features like cliffs, rock
outcrops, mounds, ditches, was generated by taking coordinates using total station. Proposed
alignment of RCC dam, intake structure, HRT, Surge shaft, Penstock/Pressure Shaft, Power House, TRT
outlet structure and Tail Race Tunnel (TRT).

5.4 OTHER SURVEYS
5.4.1 Archaeological Survey in the Reservoir Area
There is no centrally protected monument/Archaeological site located in the proposed submergence

area or along the alignment.
5.4.2 Mineral Survey
The mineral resources are not affected by the project.
5.4.3 Right of way surveys for the Reservoir
Due to formation of the proposed dam, survey of the existing causeways, existing highways etc. If any
which are likely to be affected by submergence was undertaken. It has been found that, with the FRL
of 857 m for upper reservoir as proposed, no highway or road of any importance are affected by the
submergence.
5.5 COMMUNICATION SURVEY
No Roads of importance are getting affected with the FRL fixed at +857 m for upper reservoir.
5.6 DRAINAGE SURVEY
The topography of the command is sloping and can offer adequate drainage. Water logging of the
command is not anticipated.
5.7 GEOLOGY, GEO-TECHNICAL FEATURES AND SEISMICITY.
5.7.1 Regional Geology
5.7.1.1 Introduction
Saundatti Integrated Renewable Energy Project (IREP) is located in Belagavi district of Karnataka. The
project comprises of 1000 MW Solar, 450 MW Wind & 1280 MW of Standalone Pumped Storage
capacities depending on technical feasibility, site suitability and associated requirements and demand
from various State DISCOMs/STUs and other consumers. All three components of the project are in
closed vicinity, and the power generated will be pooled in a common pooling station and will be
connected to PGCIL/CTU sub-station at Dharwad for further supply into the National Grid.
The Pumped Storage Scheme (1280MW) will comprise of two reservoirs i.e. Renuka Sagar Reservoir
(already existing) and Saundatti PSP Reservoir (to be constructed). This project is a one of its kind
because the proposed reservoir is not located on any river course and the existing Renuka Sagar
reservoir is located across river Malaprabha. The proposed Saundatti PSP reservoir is standalone in
nature and the proposed upper reservoir is located away from all existing natural water systems and

have no/negligible catchment area.
5.8 Physiography
The Western Ghats grade into the plateau region towards east and continue in to north Karnataka.
Plateau topography is the southern extension of the Deccan Plateau with an average elevation of about
650m with a series of narrow, linear ridges/hill ranges of schistose rocks & bouldery granitoid hills,
and intermittent flat plains. Physiograpically the project area is located within the Northern Karnataka
Plateau Region comprises of Belgaum, Bidar, Bijapur, Bagalkot and Gulbarga districts. It is largely
composed of Deccan Trap. It represents a monotonous treeless extensive plateau landscape with a
general elevation of 300 to 600 metres from the mean sea level. However the river plains of the
Krishna, the Bhima, the Ghataprabha and the Malaprabha with the intervening watersheds, the step
like landscapes, lateritic scarpments, residual hills and ridges break the monotony of this extensive
plateau. The general slope is towards east and this region is largely covered with rich black cotton
soils.
The state experiences humid Tropical to Semi – Arid climate for most part of the year. The annual
rainfall is about 300 to 500 cm in the coastal plains and the Western Ghats and about 80 cm on the
eastern plateau. The Western Ghats are thickly forested. The plateau is generally devoid of dense
forest.
The Belgaum district is drained by three principal rivers draining from west to east, namely the
Krishna in the north, the Ghataprabha in the center and the Malaprabha in the south (Fig. 6.1). Krishna
with its tributaries, Tungabhadra, Ghataprabha, Malaprabha, Bhima and Vedavati draining the
northern and central part, although their courses are perennial, their volume of flow decreases and
even ceases during summer. Several tributaries of these principal rivers make the river basins gentler
in the district.
The river Krishna enters in to Karnataka from the northeastern corner of Yadur village, located at
35km north of Chikodi and flows in the south westerly directions for about 10 km, and then takes a ’U'
turn; there it is joined by the Dudhaganga River from the west and thereafter flows eastwards along
the border of Chikodi taluka. The river Ghataprabha flows through the central part of the district.
Markandeya River is an important tributary of the Ghataprabha. It rises near Belur village in
Khanapur taluk and runs in a North east direction through Belgaum, Hukkeri and Gokak taluks for a
distance of about 22 km. It receives the water of Bellarynala at Dasanahatti village. About 16 km west
of jamboti and near Kankumbi in Kanapur Jianpur taluk is the source region of the river Malaprabha.
The river then gradually takes an almost northeasterly direction and runs through the taluks of
Khanapur, Bailhongal, Soundatti and Ramdurga. A reservoir has been constructed at this city mainly
for irrigation purpose. Malaprabha receives the waters of Bennihalla, Taparihalla and a few other

streams, before leaving the district.
Figure 5.1: Map showing major rivers draining through north Karnataka Plateau
The project area may be divided in to three physiographical divisions, such as, gently sloping Plateau
to gently sloping hills; moderately sloping Peidmont zones covered with debris/talus material and
vast, flat terrain.
Karnataka forming a part of the Indian Shield is constituted of rock formations ranging in age from
3300 m.y. to 5 m.y. Barring a narrow coastal strip of about 5000 sq.km of Tertiary and Quaternary
sediments and another 31,250 sq.km of Deccan basalts, the remaining area is dominated by Archaean-
Proterozoic rocks. Mysore Plateau geologically constituted of Dharwar Craton comprises of
greenstone-granite belts, gneisses and granulites.
The cratonic block of South India commonly known as the Dharwar Craton covers an area of 2,38,000
km2 lying between latitudes 12°0' to 18°0' and longitudes 74°0' to 80°0' forming the heart of
Peninsular India. This block formed a part of the Gondwana land in Cretaceous times and its truncated
extensions to the west and east are to be traced in Africa and Antarctica respectively. The Dharwar
Craton is bordered on the west by the Arabian Sea and on the south by the high-grade terrain of Tamil
Nadu – Kerala (Fig. 5.2). The crescent shaped Cuddapah Basin (1600 Ma) covers a good part of the
gneissic terrain to the east, and the northern extensions of the cratonic block are hidden beneath the
cover of Deccan Traps of Mesozoic - Tertiary age. The north-eastern margin of the Dharwar craton is
limited by the Godavari graben, a structural element active since Proterozoic.

Figure 5.2: Generalized geological map of India
Lithological variations, differences in volcano - sedimentary environments, magmatism and grade of

metamorphism have prompted the division of the Dharwar Craton into a western block characterised
by larger schist belts (Dharwar Type) showing evidences of having accumulated in distinct
sedimentary basins and an eastern block characterised by reworked and remobilized gneiss with
remnants and slivers of schist belts (Kolar Type) which are auriferous and developed in an oceanic
environment. The N-S trending Closepet granite demarcates the boundary between the eastern and
western blocks (Fig.5.3).

Figure 5.3: Geology of the western and eastern Dharwar Craton (after Rogers, 1990)
Dharwar Craton, a Precambrian greenstone-granite terrain, is the rigorously studied area of the Indian
Shield. This shield predominantly comprises the Archaean greenstone belts, gneisses, granites, and
dyke swarms. Epicratonic or intracratonic undeformed sedimentary basins called Purana Basins
(Kaladgi & Bhima) occupy the northern segment of the craton whose northern part in turn is
concealed by Deccan basalts. Thus younging of lithosequence from south to north is evident. These
Proterozoic sedimentary basins rest over the shield (Pichamuthu and Srinivasan, 1983; 1984;
Radhakrishna and Naqvi, 1986) and are exposed near the junction of Dharwar Craton and Deccan
Traps (refer Fig. 5.3).
Differences in grade of regional metamorphism (within the craton) viz. low pressure type in the
eastern area and intermediate pressure type in the western block of the Dharwar Craton have been

noticed by Swami Nath and Ramakrishnan (1981). Consequently these differences in metamorphism
brought the fundamental lithological distinction between the belts (Ramakrishnan et al., 1976; Swami
Nath et al., 1976). These features along with the observation that greenstone belts are well developed
in western block, whereas potassic granites are extensively intruded in eastern area of Dharwar
Craton suggest a possible division of the craton into a western Dharwar Craton and an eastern
Dharwar Craton (Rogers, 1986; Naqvi and Rogers, 1987). Greenstone belts essentially consist of meta-
volcanosedimentary sequences, surrounded and dissected by Peninsular Gneiss. At the southern end
of the craton these give way to granulite suite of rocks. The craton preserves a billion year orogenic
history from 3400 m.a. to 2400 m.a. Generalised regional lithostratigraphy worked out for Karnataka
is tabulated below.
Table 5 3: Generalized regional stratigraphy of Karnataka (GSI, Misc. Pub.Part-VII, 2006)
Eon/Era/Epoch Suite/ Group/ Lithology

Assemblage Formation and
Supergroup other lower
ranks
WESTERN BLOCK
Recent Alluvium/soil
Quaternary Undifferentiated fluvial/coastal
sediments; transported red soil/
alluvium
Neogene Laterite
Mio-Pliocene Warkhali Beds Sandstone, clay, marl and limestone
Late Cretaceous To Deccan Trap Continental flood basalt of tholeiitic
Paleogene chemistry; intertrappean beds of
67-65 ma chert & marl
Neo Proterozoic 900- Bhima Group Predominantly Mg poor carbonate
540 ma sequence with shale; sandstone and
conglomerate at the base
Neo Proterozoic ≈ 800 Chamundi K-rich porphyritic to homophanous
ma granite granite
Meso-Neo Proterozoic Kaladgi Badami Group Horizontally bedded multistorey
1600-1000 ma Supergroup sequence of arenite; shale and
limestone in lesser amounts
Bagalkot Group Two mega cycles of repeated
sequence of argillite followed by

chemogenic precipitates
predominantly of sandstone and
dolomite; quartzites and
conglomerates forming the base
Palaeo-Proterozoic Closepet Alkali granite, monzogranite/ada
2530-2450 ma Granite mellite to granodiorit
Ranebennur Greywacke/BIF/ polymict
Subgroup conglomerate/ volcanics
(Mardihalli, Bellara, Medur)
Late Archaean to Dharwar Chitradu Vaniv Polymict conglomerate, cross
Palaeo-proterozoic To Supergroup rga ilas bedded quartzite, pelite,
Late Archaean 2900- Group Sub stromatolitic carbonates, biogenic
2600 ma 2700- group chert, BIF & manganese formations
2600 ma (Ingaldhal volcanics-thoeliitic basalt
rhyolite suite ) (Tekkalvatti, Jagar)
Bababudan BIF & carbonaceous phyllite, basalt-
Group 2900- dacite suite (locally pillowed) with
2800ma minor ultramafics/ alteration of
amygdular basalt/ cross bedded
quartzite/pelite/minor BIF/ basal
quartz pebble conglomerate
Late Archaean Peninsular Tonolite-trondjomite-granodiorite
3000 ma Gneiss-I
Middle Archaean 3000 Charnokite Metamorphic equivalents of earlier
ma Group formed rocks
Middle Archaean Sargur Group Ultramafic-mafic intrusive complex
>3000 ma (HolenarsipurNuggihalli)/
serpentinised komatiites, komatiitic
and thoeliitic amphibolites, chert,
BIF/garnet-biotite schist (with
kyanite, sillimanite and
staurolite)/local marble and calc
sillicates/fuchsite quartzite with
chromite and baryte layers
Lower to middle Older Gneiss Gorur Gneiss/ Trondjhemite, granodiorite, grey
Archaean ≈ 3400 ma Hunsur Gneiss banded biotite ortho gneiss

EASTERN BLOCK
Late Archaean ≈2600 Peninsular Juvenile granodioritic to granitic
ma Gneiss-II material-all enclosing the true
greenstone belts within the younger
phase
Late Archaean ≈2700 Greenstone Grit/arenite, pelite/ BIF Bimodal
ma belts, viz. Kolar mafic-felsic volcanics Pyroclasts,
Sandur volcanic conglomerate, BIF local
Raichur komatiites (main unit in all belts)
Hutti Quartzite (locally cross bedded),
Mangalur mangan marble, stromatolitic
Hungund- carbonate, calc silicate, cordierite
Kushtagi- bearing pelite, amphibolite, BIF
Hagari (Sakarsanahalli, Lepakshi)
Figure 5.4: Geological map of the Western Dharwar Cratons (After Naqvi and Rogers,
1987; Ramakrishnan and Vaidyanadhan, 2008)
Saundatti Pumped Storage Project is located in the northern part of Karnataka (Fig. 5.4) and spread
across the boundary of the western Dharwar Craton and overlying Proterozoic sedimentary cover
rocks representing part of the Kaladgi basin. A brief description of the regional geological setup of the
western Dharwar Craton (WDC) is given below.

The WDC contains three suites of approximately north–south-oriented metamorphic belts: the oldest,
the Sargur Group (Radhakrishna 1967; Viswanatha & Ramakrishnan 1976); the Peninsular Gneissic
Complex (PGC); and the youngest, the Dharwar Supergroup (Ramakrishnan & Swami Natha 1976;
Swami Nath et al. 1976; Viswanatha & Ramakrishnan 1976; Radhakrishna & Naqvi 1986). Generally,
the younger schist or greenstone belts (Dharwar belts) in the northern region are less
metamorphosed than those in the southern part (Naqvi et al. 1988). Metamorphism is regional,
affecting all parts of the craton (Radhakrishna 1983). The principal structural trend in the WDC is
approximately NW–SE to north–south, as shown by major shear zones and the elongation of the
various schist belts. Rock suites of different ages exhibit a similar sequence of deformation (Naha et al.
1986). Detailed structural studies of the WDC have established a sequence of superposed folding
events that can be identified in all schist belts (low as well as high grade), the PGC and banded
granulites (Naqvi 1973; Chadwick et al. 1981a, b; Roy & Biswas 1983; Mukhopadhyay 1986; Naha et
al. 1991).
Greenstone belts in the southern part of the craton tend to be small, engulfed in gneisses,
metamorphosed to amphibolite facies and older (Radhakrishna 1967; Viswanatha & Ramakrishnan
1976) than those in the northern lower-grade belts (Swami Nath & Ramakrishnan 1981). In addition
to the widespread PGC, thus, there are the Sargur Group supracrustal enclaves, as well as the younger
northern type (Dharwar) greenstone belts.
The Sargur enclaves consist largely of a supracrustal assemblage of quartzite, carbonate, metapelite
and iron formation, as well as high-grade mafic rocks. It is possible that some of the older Sargur-type
belts in the south have been intruded by older members of the PGC. Janardhan & Srikantappa (1975)
proposed that deformation in Sargur enclaves in the southern part of the craton was coincident with
emplacement of the gneisses. Enclaves may be a few kilometres in width and tens of kilometres in
length and may also possibly be considered as very old members of the PGC
ultramafic/mafic/anorthosite suites (Naqvi 1981).
The PGC together with the Sargur supracrustal remnants, enclaves and high-grade greenstone belts is
thought to have formed the basement of the younger Dharwar Supergroup rocks overlying a marked
basal unconformity (Ramakrishnan & Swami Natha 1976; Swami Nath & Ramakrishnan 1981). Since
the major event of Peninsular Gneiss intrusion is dated at around 3.0 Ga, the Sargur Group of rocks
probably belongs to the early–middle Archaean. After the formation of the older (Sargur) schist belts,
a regional and major crust-forming event took place around 3.0 Ga to form much of the PGC
(Ramakrishnan & Swami Natha 1976; Naqvi & Rogers 1987). Rb–Sr whole-rock and mineral isochrons
suggest two major events regarding the origin of granites and migmatites, one at 3000–2900 Ma and
another at 2600–2500 Ma; the 2600 Ma event is also reflected in the charnockites

(Venkatasubramanian & Narayanaswamy 1974).
The younger schist belts belonging to the Dharwar Supergroup are characterized by metamorphism
predominantly of greenschist facies but locally up to epidote–amphibolite or lower amphibolite facies
towards the south of the WDC or in the southern parts of some belts. They contain an abundance of
clastic and quartzose sedimentary rocks, a relatively high proportion of sedimentary to volcanic rocks
and conglomerates containing clasts of underlying gneisses. These supermature basal quartz pebble
conglomerates indicate deposition of the Dharwar rocks on a peneplained basement of peninsular
gneisses. Typical rock types of the Dharwar greenstone belts are arenite, shales, volcanic rocks varying
from basalts through to rhyolites, cherts, phyllites and carbonates. Well-known examples of the
Dharwar Supergroup are found in the Chitradurga, Bababudan, Shimoga and Kudremukh (greenstone)
belts.
5.9 Peninsular Gneiss and Granite
The term "Peninsular Gneiss" was, and still is, applied to quartzo-feldspathic gneisses engulfing
Dharwar schists, and exhibits extreme diversity of composition but most of the rocks are tonalites,
trondhjemite and granodioritic gneiss (TTG) showing leucocratic-melanocratic banding, tygmatic
folding, and agmatitic structures (Naqvi et al., 1983). Apart from these, enclaves of ultramafic/roatic
rocks are also present (Viswanatha and Ramakrishnan, 1981; Bhaskar Rao et al., 1983; Monrad, 1983;
Radhakrishna and Naqvi, 1986) which cannot be distinguished on a small map scale. Apart from their
magmatic precursors, sedimentary precursors (meta-arkose) are also reported in them (Udai Raj,
1991). Therefore two types of gneisses namely the ortho and para gneissess are part of the PG (Naqvi
and 13 others, 1983). However, the low initial 87Sr/86Sr (0.701 to 0.702) ratios show that most of the
gneisses for which such data are available are mantle derived (Faure and Powell, 1972), or formed due
to partial melting of amphibolites or primitive simatic crust (Arth and Hanson, 1975).
The ortho peninsular gneisses and related granotoids have intruded at various stratigraphic levels as
implied by the intrusive contacts with the oldest as well as youngest member of Dharwar schist belts,
without any obvious evidence of tectonic contact to discard their genetic affinity (Pichamuthu and
Srinivasan, 1983). The representation of different components of PG as one mapable unit is caused by
their quartzo-feldspathic nature. Mutual relationship between PG and schist belts has been debated
since last 100 years (Radhakrishna and Ramakrishnan, 1990).
Dharwar schist was considered to be the oldest rocks of Peninsular India in which PG intruded. The
other group thought that PG was the basement of schists (see Radhakrishna and Ramakrishnan, 1990
for historical development of ideas). Radhakrishna (1967) proposed that PG intruded one set of schist
and formed basement for the other younger group. Swami Nath et al., (1976) and Ramakrishnan et al.
(1976) substantiated this view and Naqvi (1981) proposed an interfingering stratigraphic relationship

between various components of PG and schist belts formed at different times between 3.5 to 2.6 Ga.
Three major phases of emplacement of Peninsular Gneisses were recognized so far.
In the western block of the Dharwar Craton, the basement-cover relationship between the Peninsular
Gneiss and rocks of the Dharwar supracrustals is more or less clear. Closepet granite is a prominent
meridional batholith extending in a north southerly direction for about 500 km delimiting the eastern
boundary of the western Dharwar Craton. It is essentially porphyritic granite with gray and pink
varieties. A major fault zone has been recognized along the eastern margin of the Closepet granite belt
(Kaila et al., 1979). Radhakrishna (1956) proposed that these granites have been formed by
granitisation of the Peninsular Gneiss by alkali solutions. Divakara Rao et al. (1972) envisaged
palingenesis of Peninsular Gneiss followed by alkali metasomatism.
As emphasized earlier, it is virtually difficult to distinguish various components of the Peninsular
Gneiss (PG) on a mappable scale, because intermixing of various components is of rather small scale.
The only variant of the PG that is separated is a suite of poorly foliated to massive, diapiric bodies with
ages of about 3.1 to 2.9 Ga. For example, Sigegudda trondhjemites, Holekote trondhjemite,
Chickmagalur granodiorite (Monrad,1983; Stroh et al.,1983; Chadwick et al.,1985a; Rama Rao et
al.,1991). Other trondhjemite rock bodies with similar character are not shown in geological map.
These bodies range in size from small dykes and sills to plutons with diameters of many kilometers.
Components of Peninsular Gneiss always show isoclinal folds with thinned limbs and stretched hinges
defined by compositional banding. Ptygmatic folds in quartzo-feldspathic materials and agmatitic
structures are invariably noticed. Peninsular Gneiss is considered as the basement for the entire
greenstones.
Low lying areas and the mild slopes adjacent to the near flat plateaus are occupied by in situ soil
profile developed by the chemical weathering of underlying Peninsular Gneiss. The thickness of the
weathered profile varies in thickness from a couple of meters to more than 40m. At places slightly
weathered to fresh outcrops of light to dark grey, medium to coarse grained ganite have been recorded
from different parts of the terrain.
5.9.1 Proterozoic Sedimentary Basins
The north and northeastern segments of Peninsular India witnessed orogenic event of
MesoProterozoic Mobile Belts, resulting in the formation of a series of intracratonic basins, viz.,
Kaladgi (Bagalkot and Badami) and Bhima basins. These sedimentary basins are popularly known as
Purana Basins and the hiatus involved is called Eparchaean Unconfirmity in the Indian Geological
Literature. These sedimentary rocks belong to the age of 2500-1600 Ma and 1600-1000 Ma
respectively.
These undeformed Proterozoic basins, viz., Kaladgi and Bhima are resting unconformably over the
Ranibennur Group. representing part of the Dharwar Supergroup. The Bhima Basin is located between

the northern margin of the Dharwarr Craton and the Deccan Trap flows. The basin is much smaller
than the Cuddapah and covers 5200 sq km area, with the longest portion having an axis of 160km
(NE–SW). The southern portion of the basin is bounded by an unconformity with the underlying
granitic gneisses while the east–west and NW–SE borders are fault bounded. The full extent of the
basin is unknown owing to the Deccan Traps covering the basin to the north. The Bhima Group is
predominantly composed of limestones; however, sandstone and conglomerate beds rest between the
basement and the upper sequence limestones. The oldest age for the formation of the Bhima Basin is
constrained by the underlying granitic gneisses to c. 2500 Ma (Sastry et. al., 1999). It is currently
under debate as to whether the basin formed during the Meso- (Purana II) or Neoproterozoic (Purana-
III; Patranabis-Deb et al. 2007; Malone et al. 2008).
The Kaladgi Basin extends over an east-west trending irregular area in the northern part of the
Dharwar Craton, Karnataka. The ovoid shaped Kaladgi and Badami Group of sedimentary basin is well
marked lying mainly between Krishna, Malaprabha and Ghataprabha rivers, over an area of around
8,300 sq. kms. It occupies parts of Bagalkot, Bijapur, Belgaum, Dharwad, Raichur districts of northern
Karnataka state, and some parts of eastern Maharashtra, at the Latitude 15°33’ to 16°31' N; and
Longitude 74° 10' to 76° E [Fig. 6.5], as it is located almost centre part of the basin.
This basin formed on gneisses and greenstones of Archaean age. The Kaladgi Supergroup preserves
the record of sedimentation in the basin, and consists of sandstones, mudstones and carbonates. The
textural and mineralogical maturity of this basin increased over time, indicating that the regional relief
surrounding the basin declined over time, with the clastic sediments being derived from the local
gneiss and greenstone rock (Dey et al. 2009). An angular unconformity between the two constituent
groups (the lower Bagalkot and overlying Badami) suggests a period of uplift in the basin’s history
(Jayaprakash et al. 1987). Deformation in the Bagalkot Group is significant, whereas the Badami Group
exhibited only mild deformation (Kale & I’hansalkar 1991).
The Precambrian epicontinental Kaladgi Basin represents a remarkable and significant geological unit
displaying magnificent stratigraphic succession, lithologic assemblage, tectonic, structural and
depositional features among the Precambrian rocks of Peninsular India. It covers the large area, as
compared to other Precambrian sedimentary formations of Karnataka namely the 'Bhima Group' and
geologically it has long history. The Proterozoic sedimentary sequence was designated as 'Kaladgi
Series' by Bruce Foote (1876). However, subsequently several authors have proposed new strtigraphic
classification of the Kaladgi sediments, viz., Pascoe (1949, 1965), Krishnan (1964), Nautiyal (1966),
Viswanathiah(1977, 78-80), Chandrasekhara Gowda (1980-1981), Jayaprakash et al., (1987) and Kale,
et al., (1996).
The classification of the Kaladgi Group has been first attempted by Bruce Foote (1876) and estimated
the total thickness as 4545 to 1212m. He proposed a two-fold classification of the Kaladgi Series as

given below.
Table 5 4: Two fold classification of the Kaladgi Series by Bruce Foote (1876)
B. Upper Kaladgi Series 6. Shales, limestones and haematite schists 2000 ft.
5. Quartzite with local conglomerate and 1200-1800 ft.
breccias
A. Lower Kaladgi Series 4. Limestones, clays and shales 5000-6000 ft.
3. Sandstones and shales 3000-5000 ft.
2. Siliceous limestones, homstones and chert
breccias
1. Quartzites, conglomerates and sandstones
Based on regional study of Kaladgi Basin, Bruce Foote arrived at the following conclusions:
• Kaladgi sediments suffered disturbances before the formation of Deccan basalts
• Enormous amount of denudation of Kaladgi rocks
• Time gap between Kaladgi sediments and outpouring of lava
Based on the guidelines laid by the Code of Stratigraphic Nomenclature of India, (1971) as well as the
International Stratigraphic Guide (Hedberg, 1976), Jayaprakash et al., (1987) have proposed a new
litho-staratigraphical classification in the absence of specific radiometric age data.
Table 5 5: Lithostratigraphy of the Kaladgi-Badami Basin (after Jayaprakash et al., 1987)
Super Group Subgroup Formation Member Thickness

group (m)
Badami Katageri Konkankoppa limestone 85
Hulkurki shale 67
Belikhindi arenite 39
Keru Halgeri shale 03
Cave-temple arenite 89
Kendur conglomerate 03
KALADGI Angular Unconformity
Hoskatti Mallapur intrusive 07
Dadanhatti argillite 695

Bagalkot Simikeri Laksanhatti dolomite 87
Aralikatti Kerkalmatti haematite 42
schist
Niralkeri chert breccia 39

Kundargi Govinkoppa argillite 80
Muchkandi quartzite 182
Bevinmatti conglomerate 15
Disconformity
Yadhalli Argillite 58
Muddapur Bamanbudni dolomite 402
Petlur limestone 121
Jalikatti argillite 43
Yendigeri Naganur dolomite 93
Chiksellikeri limestone 93
Lokapur Hebbal argillite 166
Yargatti Chitrabhanukot dolomite 218
Muttalgeri argillite 502
Mahakut chert breccia 133
Ramdurg Manoli argillite 61
Saundatti quartzite 383
Salgundi conglomerate 31
-------------------- Nonconformity-------------------
DHARWAR Granitoids, Gneisses and Metasediments
Geological map of the area (Fig. 5.5) elucidates the regional geological setup in and around the
proposed Saundatti Pump Storage Project.

Figure 5.5: Geological map of the study area (after Jayaprakash et al. 1987; Dey
et al., 2009)
According to the lithostratigraphical classification of Jayaprakash et al., (1987), the Kaladgi

Supergroup have been classified as mainly four geo-stratigraphic code viz. group, subgroup, formation
and members. They considered Badami and Bagalkot as separate groups: Badami Group is considered
by angular unconformity as younger sediments deposited over Bagalkot Group. It has two formations,
namely Katageri and Kemur Formations, whereas Bagalkot Group has been divided into two
subgroups namely Simikeri and Lokapur. The Bagalkot Group has been further divided into eight
formations, viz., three formations comprising Simikeri Subgroup and rest the Lokapur Subgroup.
Simikeri and Lokapur Subgroups are separated by disconformity between Yadhalli and Kundargi
Formations.
The rocks of the Kaladgi and Badami Groups are considered to be equivalent to Cuddapah and
Vindhyan Groups respectively. Based on the comparison of Jayaprakash et al., (1987) classification,
Kale et al., (1996) propoed a process responsive revision in the litho-stratigraphic classification of the
sediments of the (Mesoproterozoic) transgression in the Kaladgi Basin with respect to the architecture
of the four main macro-facies which are recognized in the southern margin of the Kaladgi Basin.

Table 5 6: Process-responsive lithostratigraphie classification of the sediments transgression in the
Kaladgi Basin (Kale et al, 1996)
Exising lithostratigraphic Sedimentalogical Proposed Lithostratigraphic

classification, after Macrofacies Classification, Kale et al,
Jayaprakash et al., (1987) (1996)
Litho Members Formation
II F. Chitrabhankot Dolomite Carbonate 4.Chitrabhankot Dolomite
E. Muttalgeri Argillite 3. Mahakut Chert breccia
Chert Breccia
D. Mahakut Chert breccia
I C. Manoli Argillite Argillite 2. Yargatti Argillite
B. Saundatti Quartzite 1. Saundatti Quartzite
Sandstone
A. Salgundi Conglomerate
--------------------------------------------UNCONFORMITY-------------------------------------
Uneven Basement of Peninsular Gneisses and Dharwarian Schists
5.9.2 Deccan Traps
The next major event is the burst of volcanic activity at the end of the cretaceous-dawn of tertiary era.
Deccan Trap rocks, especially basalts, cover a substantial part of northern Karnataka particularly the
districts of Belgaum, Bidar, Bijapur and Gulbarga. This is represented by horizontal sheets of lava
piling one upon the other over a thickness of nearly 2 Km and extending over an area of 5,000,000
Km2. The burst of volcanic activity was sudden and continues with hardly any interval between the
flows. The volcanic episode was short not exceeding more than a million years. The fossils embedded
in these suggest a tertiary age (Radhakrishna and Vaidyanatha, 1997). The western margin close to the
coast was affected by large-scale dyke intrusion. The dyke assigned an age around 65 m.y. connects
them with Deccan volcanic activity.
The Deccan traps of India, classified as large igneous province (LIP), which erupted during the KTB is
one of the largest and best-exposed continental flood basalt provinces of the world. They consist of
multiple layers of solidified flood basalt that together are more than 2000-m thick and cover an area of
500,000 km2 and a volume of 512,000 km 3. A large portion of the west-central India is covered by the
Deccan trap flows due to which little is known about the sub-trappean geology. On the south and
south-east peripheral region of the Deccan trap lie the Proterozoic Kaladgi and Bhima basins, while
the Gondwana Godavari basin lies on the east.
5.9.3 Laterite
Over the Deccan trap capping of laterite is found which probably started forming at cessation of
Deccan volcanic activity an early tertiary and are continuing to form even today. The narrow coastal

belt between the coast line and the precipitous edge of the Western Ghats in a plain of marine
denudation and is covered by the extensive capping of detrital and residual laterite.
5.9.4 Physiography of Project Area
North Karnataka is a geographical region consisting of mostly semi-arid plateau from 300 to 730
metres elevation that constitutes the northern part of the Karnataka state in India. It is drained by the
Krishan River and its tributaries the Bhima, Ghataprabha, Malaprabha, and Tungabhadra. North
Karnataka lies within the Deccan thorn scrub forests ecoregion, which extends north into eastern
Maharashtra. The area of present investigation is located at about 45 km ENE of Belgam, 15km
northeast of Bailhongal, 10km west of Monali, 15km northwest of Saundatti and 12km southwest of
Yaragatti in Belgam district of north Karnataka. Though the region is semi-arid, part of Belgaum
district receive enough rainfall to make them lush and green throughout the year. Belgaum district is
quite big and though the north parts of the district are arid and receive less rainfall, the southern parts
which are adjacent to North Canara district, have an almost highland tropical climate. The stretch from
Londa to Alnavar has some of the most dense jungles on the Western coastal belt of India. They are
part of the Western Ghats and their foothills which are now protected under National Wildlife laws.
The project area and its surroundings may be broadly subdivided into three geomorphic units, viz., the
low lying near flat area extensively irrigated and cultivated; gently sloping plateaus and isolated near
flat areas occurring as inliers surrounded by plateaus. The low lying near flat areas varying in
elevation between 600m and 640m, characterized by dark tone & extensive cultivation in Google Earth
map occur to the south, southeast and northwest of the proposed surface Power house located to the
northwest of Karlakatti/ Yekundi villages. Similarly a large near flat, low lying area extends between
Yargatti and Manoli which extends towards katkol and Torgal villages. Towards east and northeast of
Manoli several isolated small plateaus forming mesa structures are also noticed within flat areas,
suggesting detachment from the adjacent main plateaus.

Figure 5.6: .Google Earth map of the project and its surrounding areas showing different
geomorphic landforms
The project area is located on left bank of Mallaprabha River, and to the north of Renuka Sagar
reservoir. On either side of the proposed surface powerhouse the low lying near flat area extenda for
kilometers, and is extensively irrigated & cultivated.
Figure 5.7: Plateau flanked by a 50- 150m wide pediment zone merging with low lying flat
area extending for kms. Photographs taken from the plateau located to the north of
proposed Powerhouse
Invariably a well defined pediment zone having gentle to moderate slopes, varying in width from 50 –
150m occurs in between near flat, low lying areas and plateaus. It has resulted by the merging of
tatus/debris fans resulted by the mechanical weathering of adjacent near vertical cliffs. The pediment
zones support growth of schrubs and scanty bushes.

The gently sloping plateaus characterized by light brown colour, smooth tone and texture in Google
map. The ephemeral stremlets draining through show near parallel to sub-parallel drainage pattern. In
the project and its surrounding areas thi landform occur to the north of the proposed Power House,
Karlakatti, northwest & south of Manoli, between Katkol and Ramdurg and extend for considerable
distance. The elevation of these plateaus ranges from 760m to 840m, and are flanked by near vertical
cliffs exposing quartzites. The plateau occurring to the north of the power house extends from SE to
NW direction for considerable distance.
Figure 5.8: Plateau hills present to the east of the project area
Figure 5.9: Vertical scarps exposing gently dipping quartzite adjacent to plateau surface
5.10 GEOLOGY AT AND AROUND THE PROJECT AREA
Detailed geological mapping (1:1000 scale) of the project area located to the northwest of
Yekundi/Karlakatti suggests that the proposed layout spreads across the southern margin of the
Kaladgi basin into the northern margin of WDC. The sedimentary litho-assemblage constituting a part
of the Proterozoic Kaladgi basin is represented by quartzite exposed along the near vertical cliffs and
capping the redidual hills having near flat to gently dipping plateau surface extending on either side
for considerable distances. Adjacent low lying & near flat terrain covered in general with top soil
underlain by in situ weathered profile developed over the Peninsular Gneiss represents northern

margin of western Dharwar craton (WDC).
The quartzite exposed in the project area extends towards NW & SE direction, and its continuity can
be traced up to Saundatti thus correlatable with Saundatti Qurtzite of the Ramdurg Formation
comprising lower part of the Lokapur Subgroup (Jaya Prakash et al., 1987; Kale et al. 1996). A
conglomerate horizon (4 - 15m thick) with a few intercalated sandstone beds has been reported at the
basal part of the Saundatti Quartzite at Bilgi and Bisnal, however, could not be observed in the area of
present investigation.
Quartzite representing basal part of the Ramdurg Formation is having sharp contact with the
underlying older rocks representing the Peninsular Gneiss exposed along the northern margin of
western Dharwar craton. In majority of cases the contact in between is concealed below the debris
and talus cones deposited adjacent to the cliffs exposing quartzite (Fig. 5.11).
Figure 5.10: Vertical cliff exposing quartzite (a) and quartzite exposed along steep slopes
& capping gently sloping plateau
Figure 5.11: Contact between quartzite and underlying Peninsular Gneiss covered under
Pediment zone comprising debris & talus material
In a few quarry sections located in the surrounding areas of the proposed project layout well

developed in situ weathered profile giving rise to cherry red to ash grey soil was noticed occurring
below the overlying quartzite outcrops. The thickness of in situ soil varies from a couple of meters to
more than 5 - 6m (Fig. 5.12).
During detailed geological mapping the contact between quartzite and underlying fresh, hard &
compact, coarse grained granite was noticed at about 1.6km NW and 2.5km NNW of the proposed
surface Powerhouse location. The contact located to the northwest of Powerhouse location at EL.
705.65m is sharp in nature with near parallel strike of foliation and overlying bedding planes (Fig.
5.13). Quartzite is highly fractured in nature whereas the underlying granite gneiss is moderately
fractured. Bedding planes noticed in overlying quartzite exhibit variation in dip from 26 -37° and
foliation planes in the underlying granite gneiss have higher dip (50°) thus suggesting presence of
angular unconformity.
Figure 5.12: Highy weathered in situ profile developed over granite noticed in a few
quarry sections
Figure 5.13: Sharp contact between fresh, hard granite and overlying fractured
quartzite. Loc: 1.6km northwest of prposed Powerhouse location
At about 2.5km distance towards NNW direction from Power House location along the footpath from

Karlakatti to Basidoni daddi village slightly to highly to moderately weathered granite outcrops are
exposed (Fig. 5.14) which are overlain by interbedded sequence of sandstone and shale exhibiting
folded nature (Fig. 5.15) followed by quartzite. Thin pegmatite dykelet emplaced along the axial trend
of the mesoscopic folds was observed at this location. Interbedded shale-sandstone sequence could
not be observed in other parts of the project area, therefore might have deposited in a small localized
part of the basin.
Figure 5.14: Moderately weathered coarse grained granite exposed at EL. m on way from
Yekundi to village
Figure 5.15: Upright, open folds developed in interbedded sequence of sandstone-shale

occurring over the moderately weathered granite
Detailed geological mapping (1:1000 scale) of the project area was carried out over 4.50 Sq Km area to
prepare a bankable Detailed Project Report (DPR). Total Stations were used for delineating rock
outcrops, different types of overburden, and recording all geotechnical parameters to classify &
categorize the rock mass exposed in the project area and the data obtained were used for inferring
likely foundation grade rock mass conditions. Project component wise geological description is given
in following pages.
Based on the detailed geological mapping (1:1000 scale) and order of superimposition of the

lithounits, general lithostratigraphy of the project area has been established and correlated with the
regional stratigrahy (after Jayaprakash et al., 1987) and given below.
Table 5 7: Lithostratigraphy of the Saundatti Pump Storage Project area
Age Supergr Group Subgroup Formation Member Lithology

oup
Pliestocen Colluvial / talus
e to recent material
Proterozoic Kaladgi Bgalkot Lokapur Ramdurg Saundatti Quartzite with thin
quartzite layers/bands of
conglonerate
---------------------------Angular unconformity-------------------------------------
Late Dharwar Peninsular Geniss Granitoids,
Archaean Gneisses
3000 ma
5.10.1 Upper Reservoir area
A plateau surface having substantial extents was identified to the north-west of Karlakatti village. The
maximum elevation within the plateau surface has been recorded as EL. 845m towards the south
eastern part of the reservoir which gradually decreases to EL. 820m towards its north-western
margin. It is proposed to develop a reservoir aligned in NW – SE direction having approximately 1.125
sq. km surface area over the plateau by constructing a 5776.0 m long & 43.0m high Rockfill dam with
clay core all along its perimeter. The southeastern margin of the proposed upper reservoir is located at
about 1.90km from the nearest margin of Renuka Sagar reservoir which will serve the purpose of
lower reservoir. The gross & live storages of the reservoir have been estimated as 0.66TMC & 0.63TMC
respectively. The full reservoir level (FRL) and minimum draw down level (MDDL) of upper reservoir
will be at EL. 857m & EL. 829.0m respectively, and the top of the dam will be at EL. 860m giving a free
board of 3m and lower reservoir will be at EL. 659m & EL. 637.0m respectively, and the top of the dam
will be at EL. 662m giving a free board of 3m.
Detailed geological mapping (1:1000 scale) of the reservoir and its surrounding areas was carried out
over 4.50 Sq. Km area to delineate rock outcrops, litho-contacts, attitude of discontinuities & to record
geotechnical parameters of the rock mass, and also delineate overburden and record its geotechnical
characteristics. From the geological map it is apparent that on the plateau top and its near vertical to
steeply sloping cliffs aligned in almost E – W direction towards south, south-west and south-east of

upper reservoir, quartzite outcrops are exposed (Fig. 5.16 & refer Figs. 5.9, 5.10 & 5.11). At many
locations along the cliffs and moderate to steep slopes flanking plateau top, gently dipping quartzite
beds exhibit several benches varying in width for a couple of meters and occurring adjacent to
successive vertical cliffs (Fig. 5.17).
Figure 5.16: Quartzite exposed along the E – W aligned cliffs located to the south of the
plateau over which location of upper reservoir is proposed
Figure 5.17: Gently dipping quartzite exposed along the slopes adjacent to plateau
exhibiting benches with successive vertical cliffs
The plateau surface at places is near flat (Fig. 5.18a), however, in majority of cases exhibits gentle
slopes (Fig. 5.18b). Quartzite outcrops sre exposed intermittently (Figs. 5.19), and covered in
majority of cases with thin venier of overburden (Fig. 5.20a), although at places particularly in low
lying areas or along the ephemeral streamlet alignment 0.50m to +3.0m thick overburden could be
observed. Rock blocks / boulders of variable shape and sizes are spread over at many places ( Fig.
5.21b). In the areas where bed rock is exposed, sparsely located small trees and bushes could be
noticed, however, in the areas having soil development or accumulation of overburden the density of
bushes and trees is more.
The top layer/venier of overburden comprises of rock fragments and interspaces occupied by

admixture of light brown clay-silt – sand. In the areas where the thickness of overburden varies from
0.50m to +3.0m, at places quartzite fragments and admixture of gravel, sand, silt & soil are in equal
proportion, whereas the finer fraction is more than 90 volume percent in some areas (Fig. 5.20a
&5.20b).
Figure 5.18: Near flat area (a) towards northern part of the reservoir and gently sloping
surface (b)
Figure 5.19: Quartzite outcrops exposed on plateau surface where upper reservoir is
peoposed

Figure 5.20: Thin scree material over the bed rock (a) & rock blocks/boulders of quartzite
occurring at the top
Figure 5.21: Different type of in situ overburded developed in parts of upper reservoir
In general, on surface quartzite is having light yellow to pink-brown staining but fresh outcrops having
light grey to white colours are observed at many locations. Bedding planes (S 0) could be identified by
colour laminations and variation in grain size (Fig. 5.22), however, at places differential weathering
has given rise to alternate groove & ridge structure (refer Fig. 5.20a) representing bedding structure
resulted possibly due to variation in mineral assemblage or grain size.

Figure 5.22: Bedding planes in quartzite represented by colour laminations and variation in
grain size
Thickness of quartzite in the upper reservoir area has been estimated to be varying from 95m to
110m, based on the geomorphic expressions, presence of sparsely exposed & highly weathered granite
outcrops along the pediment zone extending along the cliffs, and the contact of quartzite with
underlying granite in the surrounding areas.
It exhibits thin to moderately thick bedded nature (Fig. 5.23), and shows variation in mineral
constituents and texture from basal part to top. Above the older granitoids (=Peninsular Gneiss) hard,
compact & moderately thick bedded quartzite is exposed and is composed of fine to medium grained
quartz embedded in fine grained siliceous matrix suggesting arenite composition of the parent rock. At
places feldspar grains could be deciphered occurring as accessory minerals (Fig. 5.24).
Figure 5.23: Moderately thick bedded quartzite (a) and thin bedded quartzite underlain by
moderately thick bedded quartzite

Figure 5.24: Medium to fine grained quartzite of arenite composition (a) and quartzite with
feldspar as accessory mineral
Thin layers/ bands of ferruginous, dark grey to brown quartzite are observed at many locations within
moderately thick bedded quartzite light grey to light pink quartzite (Fig. 5.25). Thin layers/bands of
conglomerate/pebble beds having open framework & embedded in siliceous/ferrugineous cement
occur intermittently within the quartzite at different levels. Thickness of these clastic sediments varies
from a few cms to 30cm (Fig. 5.26). The shape and size of pebbles varies from one horizon to other,
however, in majority of cases are rounded to subrounded in shape and composed of quartz, jasper and
quartzite set in sandy matrix (Fig. 5.27). The matrix material at times also contains rounded to
angular sand sized quartz and pink feldspar grains (refer Fig. 5.27b). The presence of unsorted and
subhedral to angular shaped pebbles & gravels suggests sudden dumping and near provenance during
deposition.
Figure 5.25: Lbands of ferruginous quartzite within

moderately thick bedded quartzite
Fig.6.25. Lbands of ferruginous quartzite within moderately thick bedded quartzite

Figure 5.26: Thin layers of pebble bed occurring in massive quartzite (a); 30cm thick pebble
bed having ferrugineous & siliceous matrix
Figure 5.27: Quartz, jasper, quartzite pabbles/gravels of different shape & size embedded in
sandy matrix
Along the dip direction in the middle portion moderately thick quartzite is overlain with sharp contact
by medium to coarse grained, hard & compact, light to dark grey to brownish pink, gritty quartzite
(Fig. 5.28) of high strength. Grity clasts composed of quartz, feldspar & mafic minerals are embedded
in siliceous to arkossic groundmass. The thickness of grity quartzite varies from a couple of meters to
20m, however, it was difficult to trace out its strike continuity.

Figure 5.28: Grity quartzite occurring over thickly bedded quartzite
Grity quartzite is overlain conformably with sharp contact by thinnly bedded, fine to medium grained,
grey to pale white, hard & compact quartzite (Fig. 5.29) of moderate strength. It laterally grades in to
fine grained, white, quartzite.
Figure 5.29: Thinnly bedded quartzite occurring in the upper part of the hills
Primary sedimentary structures, viz., trough & plannar cross stratification, symmetrical &
asymmetrical ripple marks (Fig. 5.30) were observed at differet locations.
Figure 5.30: Ripple marks in thinly bedded quartzite outcrops

Figure 5.31: Trough (a) & planar (b) cross stratification in gritty quartzite
Quartzite exposed in the project area is dissected by four sets of discontinuities, however based on
their orientation and dip direction further categorization has been carried out. Geotechnical
parameters of the discontinuities are tabulated below.
5.10.2 Power House Complex:
The near vertical cliff forming the southern margin of the plateau over which upper reservoir has been
proposed is flanked by a pediment zone having gentle to moderate slopes and varying in width from
100m to 150m (refer Figs.5.7, 5.10, 5.11, 5.16). It has resulted by the merging of tatus/debris fans
resulted by the mechanical weathering of adjacent near vertical cliffs and extends from cliffs to near
flat, low lying areas. The thickness of overburden spread over the pediment zone is estimated to vary
from a couple of meters to +10m, and it comprises predominantly of an aggregate of angular
fragments of quartzite of different shape & size and inter-fragment spaces filled up with brown
admixture of silt, sand and clay (Fig. 5.32). The volume percent of different fractions varies from place
to place, however, it is expected that adjacent to the cliffs large rock blocks will constitute the
overburden.
Figure 5.32: Nature of overburden in pediment zone extending between cliff and low lying
flat area

At a few places within the pediment zone between EL. 620m and EL. 730m completely weathered soil
(after granite/gneiss) with calcrete nodules of different shapes & sizes (Fig. 5.33) surrounded by
debris/talus material have been noticed and delineated. It indicated that there are small basement
highs along the pediment zone.
Figure 5.33: Highy weathered granite outcrops surrounded by debris / talus noticed along
the pediment zone flanking the plateau margin
Beyond the pediment zone, all along the low lying near flat area extending up to the lower reservoir
(Renuka Sagar reservoir) thin venier of reddish brown admixture of sand-silt-clay in increasing order
of abundance with spaersely distributed rock fragments if variable shape & size will be underlain by
20m – 30m thick insitu weathered profile. The weathered profile developed after the chemical
weathering of parent granite/gneiss representing a part of the Peninsular Gneiss is expected to have
highly weathered zone varying in thickness from 15-20m followed by moderately weathered rock
mass (5–10m). The thickness of weathered zone will decrease gradually towards lower reservoir
where coarse grained, grey, fresh, hard and compact granite of very high strength is exposed ( Fig
5.34). The granites are characterized by stong preferred orientation of feldspar laths defining foliation
planes (S1) and composed of quartz, feldspar and ambhiboles in decreasing order of abundance. A
number of aplite and pegmatite veins have been noticed criss crossing the granite and emplaced along
widely spaced discontinuities (Fig 5.34).

Figure 5.34: Fresh outcrops of granite exposed along the periphery of Renuka Sagar
reservoir
Limited outcrops of fresh granite could be seen in the project area, and based on that the discontinuity
data have been recorded and their geotechnical parameters given in following table.
Joint set Average Aperture Spacing Persistence( Joint Condition

Orientation (mm) (cm) m)
S1a 271°/75° Tight to open 20-100 10-15 Rough, Planar
S1b 020°/56° Tight to open 20-100 10-15 Rough, Planar
S2 301°/85° Tight to open 40-100 8-10 Smooth, Planar
S3 075°/49° Tight to open 60-120 6-10 Rough, smooth,
Planar
S4 198°/66° Tight to open 60-120 1-3 Smooth, Planar
5.11 TECTONIC SETUP
Based on literature survey, there appears to be no active fault or thrust reported in the region. The
seismic zoning map of India was carried out by number of researcher’s team. The suggestions of
zonation were different for different authors. Tandon (1956) came with a broad concept and classified
the Indian region into three zones (light, moderate and high hazard), based on spatial-temporal
earthquake distribution and knowledge of geotectonic. Later on, Krishna (1959) also identified and
demarcated zones on the basis of light, moderate and high. The former maps are qualitative followed
by quantitative studies Guha (1962) and Gobin (1968, 1971) prepared the maps which are based on
the MMI scale (Modified Mercalli Intensity).
The seismic zoning was reviewed time to time based on geological and geophysical data. Indian
standard Institute (ISI) now updated as the Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) is the authoritative
official agency to publish hazard maps and seismic codes (IS-2002) in the Indian region. The seismic
hazard maps which were publish in 1962 have six zones, revised in 1966 with seven zones and later

on 1970 updated to five zones. Although these zones were more reliable for the Indian subcontinent,
but after the occurrence of Latur (1993) and Jabalpur (1997) earthquakes, these zones is needed a
critical review and in 1984 zone I was merged into zone II. The map was updated in 2002 by Bureau of
Indian Standard (BIS), at present the latest version of the hazard map consisting only four zones II, III,
IV, and V in terms of zone factors that are based on their past seismicity and tectonics history. The PGA
values are assigned for these zones are as 0.10g, 0.2g, 0.25g, and 0.40g. Below Figure 5.35 showing the
different seismic zones of India (BIS, 2002).
Figure 5.35: Seismic Zonation Map; Source BIS 2002
5.12 SURFACE & SUB-SURFACE INVESTIGATIONS
5.12.1 Geological Mapping
In order to understand the geological set up of the Project area on a regional scale, a thorough study of
all available literature was carried out in addition to requisite surface and subsurface investigations.
Initially reconnaissance traverses were undertaken and subsequently large scale geological mapping
(1: 10000 Scale), encompassing the Project Layout and its surroundings areas was carried out with the
help of GPS.
Detailed Geological Mapping (1:1000 Scale) by using Total Station has been initiated along the Project
Layout to further techno-economic optimization. At present detailed geological mapping is being
carried out in Upper Reservoir area. Based on the geological mapping and geotechnical parameters
recorded following drawings were prepared, and Project layout and DPR stage design drawings were

optimized.
Table 5 8: Geological Plan, L-section and Cross section of different Project Components
S.NO DESCRIPTION
1 Geological Map of Upper Reservoir Area
2 Geological L-Section along Dam Axis
3 Geological Cross section along dam structure Section AA
4 Geological Cross section along dam structure Section BB
5 Geological Plan of Project General Arrangement
6 Geological L Section along water conductor system
7 Geological Plan of Power House Area
8 Geological cross section of Power House
9 Geological L Section along centre line of units
5.12.2 Exploratory Drilling
Based on the surface geological mapping carried out till date, subsurface investigations were planned
for entire Project Layout (Drawing showing bore hole location details enclosed in Volume-5) to
ascertain the depth of overburden, geological & geotechnical parameters of foundation grade rock to
optimize DPR stage design drawings. At this stage a total of 26 numbers of exploratory boreholes have
been planned and tentative depth of each boreholes has been given, however, the number of boreholes
and depth of each borehole may increase or decrease as per the requirement of geological
investigation. Project component wise details of exploratory boreholes and exploratory pits are
tabulated below. Geophysical survey will be carried out if required.
S. No Bore Hole Bore Hole Location Coordinate Depth

Name Northing Easting (m)
1 UBH-1 Upper Reservoir 1752969 500595 30
7 UBH-6A Upper Reservoir 1753666 498592 20

14 BH-11 Upper Reservoir 1753427 500745 78
15 BH-12 Penstock 1752836 500660 88
16 BH-12A VPS 1752716 500677 180
17 BH-15 Power House 1752220 500687 90
18 BH-16A Power House 1752292 500762 92.5
19 BH-17 Power House 1752215 500637 95
20 BH-18 Power House 1752215 500764 95
21 BH-19 Outlet 1751916 500706 55
22 BH-20 HPS 1752499 500681 70
23 BH-21 Approach Road at Adit 1752331 501355 50
to Penstock
24 BH-22 Adit 1752463 501183 80
25 BH-23 Adit 1752383 500932 80
26 BH-24 TRC 1751395 500759 20
TOTAL 1413.5
5.12.3 Exploratory Pits
Subsurface investigation through exploratory pits along the upper reservoir were initially though
over/ planned to ascertain the thickness & nature of overburden. As the adequate number of drill
holes have been done, it is now proposed to do away with the exploratory pits as sufficient subsurface
information is obtained already. If required pit excavation shall be carried out during pre-construction
stage.
5.12.4 Permeability Test
Water pressure tests for permeability were conducted in all the exploratory drill holes, using
single/double packer method in descending & ascending order, Permeability values were calculated in
accordance with IS 5529 part 1 & 2 (2006) and results were incorporated in the respective drill logs.
The data pertaining to the permeability tests of each drill hole are appended as Annexure – II of
Volume IV: Geological and Geotechnical Studies.
5.12.5 Rock Mechanics Testing
Laboratory Rock mechanics tests will be carried out on drill cores obtained from the boreholes
covering the various components for assessing engineering parameters of the rock such as density,
water absorption, apparent porosity, indirect tensile strength, point load strength, uniaxial
compressive strength, Young’s modulus, Poission’s ratio etc. The above test is proposed to be carried
out at National Institute of Technology-Warangal.

5.12.6 Geophysical Surveys
Upper Reservoir area explored by detailed surface geological mapping (1:5000 scale) and through
extensive sub-surface (drill holes) investigations. It is observed in general that the reservoir area
including the proposed embankment structures is having sporadic rock exposures of quartzitic
sandstone and remaining area is covered with thin overburden deposits comprising sandy soil or with
angular rock fragments varying in thickness from 0.5m to 3.0m thickness. It is proposed to carry out
Seismic refraction survey during pre-construction/ detailed design stage along the axis of
Embankment Structures as per requirements.
5.12.7 Seismic Studies
Seismotectonic Atlas of India and its Environs (GSI, 2000) was referred to understand the
seismotectonic setup of the Project area. The Project area falls in Seismic Zone-III, however, as the
proposed Embankment structures are more than 15.0m height and as per the guidelines of CWC
Seismic Design Parameters are to be determined through deterministic & probabilistic approach by
utilizing the seismic events recorded in a radius of 300km from the Project area in last 100 years. A
competent Agency has been identified to ascertain the seismic design parameters for the project
components.
5.13 FOUNDATION INVESTIGATIONS
Consequent upon finalisation of Project Layout, surface & sub-surface geological investigations were
planned for detailed geological & geotechnical appraisal of different project components and further
techno-economical optimization. The quantum of surface and subsurface explorations planned &
carried out during the course of the geotechnical investigations of the project area and their detailed
test results are presented in Volume IV: Geological and Geotechnical Studies.
5.14 CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL INVESTIGATIONS
5.14.1 Assessment for Availability
Various construction materials like sand, aggregate, stone, borrow area soils are proposed to be
obtained from the designated quarries. The assessment of various construction materials and their
locations are summarized in the table below:
Table 5 9: Location of samples collected
SL No Material Location Sample No Lead (In Km)

Name of Quarry From Nearest Project Component
1 Fine Ag- Malaprabha River, Chik SMCFA-1 110km from Power House Complex
gregate Mullangi village, Site, Saundatti

Karnataka
Malaprabha River, Chik SMCFA-2 110km from Power House Complex
Mullangi village, Site, Saundatti
Karnataka
Sattegiri, Yerragatti, SYFA 75Km from Power House Complex
Karnataka Site, Saundatti
Malaprabha River, SMSFA 110km from Power House Complex
Sangala village, Karnataka Site, Saundatti
Malaprabha River, SMCFA 110km from Power House Complex
Chikkoppa Village, Site, Saundatti
Karnataka
Malaprabha River, Mullur SMMFA 110km from Power House Complex
Village, Karnataka Site, Saundatti
2 Coarse Ag- Tallur, Karnataka STCA 50 Km from Power House Complex
gregate Site, Saundatti
Itnal, Karnataka SICA 55 Km from Power House Complex
Site, Saundatti
Sattegiri, Karnataka SSCA 56 Km from Power House Complex
Site, Saundatti
3 Clay TopinKati (A), MK Hubli STAC1 65 Km from Power House Complex
Site, Saundatti
TopinKati (B), MK Hubli STBC2 65 Km from Power House Complex
Site, Saundatti
MK Hubli SMHC1 to 65 Km from Power House Complex
SMHC3 Site, Saundatti
4 Filter Media Excavated Material from SUD1 to Around Project area
Project Component* to be SUD5
used
5 Rip Rap Excavated Material from SUD1 to Around Project area
used
6 Rock Fill Excavated Material from SUD1 to Around Project area
used
7 Water Renuka Sagar, Karnataka SRSW1 to Around Project area
SRSW3
The samples of these materials will tested before doing detailed designs of the structures.

5.14.2 Coarse Aggregate
Excavated material from the identified project component sites/quarries and nearby crushing plants
are tested for suitability of coarse aggregate as listed below:
Table 5 10: Test on Coarse Agreegates
Sieve Analysis IS 2386 Pt-1 1963

Flakiness & Elongation Index IS 2386 Pt-1 1963
Specific Gravity & Water Absorption IS 2386 Pt-3 1963
Voids Ratio IS 2386 Pt-3 1963
Bulk Density IS 2386 Pt-3 1963
Aggregate Impact Value IS 2386 Pt-4 1963
10% Fine Value IS 2386 Pt-4 1963
Deleterious Materials IS 2386 Pt-2 1963
Crushing Value IS 2386 Pt-4 1963
Los Angles Abrasion value IS 2386 Pt-4 1963
Alkali Aggregate Reaction (By Chemical method) IS 2386 Pt-7 1963
Soundness [By MgSO4 or Na2SO4] IS 2386 Pt-5 1963
Petrographic Analysis with coloured micro photograph IS 2386 Pt-8 1963
5.14.3 Fine Aggregate
The sand from Banas River have been prospected for quality and quantity for use as fine aggregate in
concrete. These sands are medium to coarse grained. A sample of sand has been collected and tested in
a laboratory for assessing its suitability for use as fine aggregate in concrete for construction of
various structures of Saundatti PSP and found suitable. It is proposed that the excavated material will
be tested for suitability of fine aggregate as listed below:
Table 5 11: Test on Fine Agreegates
Grain Size Analysis IS 2386 Pt-1 1963

Fineness Modulus IS 2386 Pt-1 1963
Silt Content IS 2386 Pt-1 1963
Specific Gravity & Water Absorption IS 2386 Pt-3 1963
Bulk Density IS 2386 Pt-3 1963
Soundness [By MgSO4 or Na2SO4] IS 2386 Pt-5 1963
Alkali Aggregate Reaction (By Chemical method) IS 2386 Pt-7 1963
Organic Impurities IS 2386 Pt-2 1963
Bulking of Sand IS 2386 Pt-3 1963
Petrographic Analysis with coloured micro photograph IS 2386 Pt-8 1963

5.14.4 Water Samples
Samples of water has been collected from Lower reservoir and tested for their suitability for use in
construction purposes as well as for E&M design requirements. In-situ water quality tests like pH,
Electrical Conductivity, Alkalinity, Suspended solids, Sodium, Sulphate, Chlorides, Calcium etc, have
been conducted and found suitable for Construction purpose. Water is available in plenty for
construction activities.
5.15 SUMMARY
5.15.1 Rock as Coarse aggregate or Rockfill
Sufficient quantity of rock is investigated from open excavation from rock samples collected near to
the project component sites. The muck excavation from tunnels and open excavations etc., are suitable
for use as coarse aggregate in concrete as well as for Rockfill. However, there are number of existing
Crusher Plants located in near the Project Site and the capacity of plants are in the range between 210
TPH and 500 TPH.
5.15.2 Sand as fine aggregate
Sand from Malaprabha River is found suitable and shall be used as fine aggregate for use in concrete.
Alternatively, crushed sans at site can also be used as fine aggregates
5.15.3 Water Samples
Samples of water from Lower reservoir has been collected and tested for their suitability for use in
construction purposes and found that it is suitable.
5.16 HYDROLOGICAL AND METEOROLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS
Hydrological and Meteorological Investigations are covered in detail in CHAPTER 6.

CHAPTER 6 HYDROLOGY
6.1 INTRODUCTION
Saundatti Pumped Storage Project (PSP) is located in Belagavi Distt of Karnataka. Greenko Group has
1280 MW of Standalone Pumped Storage capacities depending on technical details, site suitability,
associated requirements and demand from various State DISCOMs/STUs and other consumers.
Saundatti PSP will comprise of two reservoirs i.e. Proposed Lower Reservoir and Proposed Upper
Reservoir. This project is a one of its kind and the proposed reservoirs are not located on any river
course and the existing Renuka Sagar reservoir from which one time water will be drawn is located
across river Malaprabha.
The present proposal envisages by installing a Pump Storage project between the Proposed upper
reservoir & lower reservoir, by installing reversible Francis turbines (total installed capacity 1280
MW) near Karlakatti Village in Saundatti Taluk of Belagavi district. Since the proposed scheme is a
pumped storage scheme and envisages to utilize the water allocated from Renukasagar Reservoir to
the lower reservoir, no modification in the operating levels of existing Renukasagar Reservoir (Key
parameters are given in Table 6.1 below along with Area Capacity Curve) are needed. Moreover, only
recycling of storage in the proposed upper reservoir and lower reservoir is utilised for PSP operation.
As such hydrological study is required to the extent to see the amount of water loss from the
reservoirs and the quantity of water required for refilling the reservoir.
Table 6 1: Key parameters of Renuka Sagar reservoir

1 Catchment Area of Reservoir Sq. Km 2176
2 (i) Average Annual Rainfall in the Catchment mm 635.00
2 (ii) 75% Dependable Rainfall in the Catchment mm 497.58
3 Discharge from self catchment area Cumecs 989.01
4 Design Flood Discharge Cumecs 5239
5 Full Reservoir Level (FRL) m EL +633.83
6 Minimum Draw Down Level (MDDL) m EL+ 623.93
7 Live Storage TMC 29.34
8 Dead Storage TMC 8.35

9 Gross Storage TMC 37.69
10 Length of Dam m 155.00
11 Height of Dam m 43.00
6.2 OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY
The objective of the study is to assess the various parameters for project planning and design of
proposed Saundatti PSP scheme.
• To assess the water availability for running the proposed PSP scheme through out the year
• Estimate the design flood for Saundatti PSP Upper Reservoir & lower reservoir.
• To assess the demand of water for refilling the reservoir due to evaporation, pumping
operation etc. No consumptive loss of water is envisaged.
• To estimate the sediment loads
6.3 PROJECT COMPONENTS
The Saundatti PSP envisages construction of Upper reservoir and lower reservoir which is proposed to
be located on the flat / gradually sloping land. The water from upper reservoir shall be utilized for
peaking power generation. After generation, the water from Lower dam shall be pumped back to
upper dam during off peak hours through reversible turbines.
The storage project is proposed with the following components:
• Upper Reservoir & lower reservoir, formed with Asphalt Face Rock Fill embankment
• A steel lined penstock tunnel/pressure shaft to feed water to generating units
• Power House, switch yard and other auxiliary units
The discharge from Power House would be collected in the Lower Reservoir after power generation.
The same shall be pumped back to upper reservoir by the reversible turbines.
6.4 CLIMATE
The climate of Karnataka varies considerably, depending on the geographical region. The state mainly
experiences arid to semi arid in the plateau region, sub-humid to humid tropical in the western ghats
and humid tropical monsoon in the costal plains. Mainly three Monsoons play a major role in
determining the climate of the state. The entire state is divided into three metrological regions namely
costal, North interior & South inerior.

The entire coastal region and the adjoining areas have tropical monsoon type of climatic
conditions.This region stretches over the districts of Udupi, Uttara Kannada and Dakshina Kannada.
Rainfall received in this region is much more than the rainfall received in the other parts of the state.
The North interior region mainly covers the districts of Bagalkot, Belgaum, Bijapur, Bidar, Bellary,
Dharwad, Haveri, Gadag, Gulbarga, Koppal and Raichur area which are arid zones. This region receives
the least amount of rainfall in the state.
The south region spreads over the districts of Bangalore Rural, Bangalore Urban, Chitradurga,
Chamrajnagar, Chikmagalur, Hassan, Kodagu, Kolar, Mysore, Shimoga and Tumkur. These regions
experiences semi-arid type of climate.
Summers last from March and extends till may with very dry and hot climate. Monsoons begins in june
and lasts untill september. The state receives heavy rainfall from the Southwest Monsoon during these
months. The state receives very mild to moderate rainfall with Northeast Monsoon during the months
of October and continues till December. November, December, January, and February are the winter
months and the temprature dips to low. The range of winter temperature is generally 12 °C to 30 °C
The climate in Bellagavi District is tropical savanna climate with temperatures ranging from 18.4 °C
(65.1 °F) to 39.5 °C (103.1 °F) in the summer and 6.2°C (43.2 °F) to 31.5 °C (88.7 °F) in the winter. The
average annual rainfall is about 1775 mm (69.7 in).
6.5 HYDRO METEOROLOGICAL DATA
The Monthly rainfall data of ordinary Rain Gauge (ORG) stations of Saundatti, Yaragatti, Murugodu and
Hulikatti were available for 6 years from 2010 to 2011 and 2013 to 2016. The monthly rainfall data is
shown in the table below:
Table 6 2: Monthly Rainfall Data
MONTH Yaragatti Saundatti Murugodu Hulikatti

2010 Jan 12.0 9.0 15.0 0.0
2010 Feb 0.0 26.0 0.0 0.0
2010 Mar 0.0 12.0 0.0 0.0
2010 Apr 23.0 29.0 12.0 8.0
2010 May 31.0 8.0 8.0 6.0
2010 Jun 111.0 158.0 100.0 64.0
2010 Jul 124.0 100.0 140.0 121.0
2010 Aug 103.0 83.0 64.0 86.0
2010 Sep 69.0 54.0 57.0 31.0
2010 Oct 65.0 42.0 24.0 29.0
2010 Nov 135.0 96.0 138.0 110.0
2010 Dec 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

2011 Jan 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2011 Feb 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2011 Mar 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2011 Apr 67.0 41.0 14.0 75.0
2011 May 32.0 41.0 57.0 12.0
2011 Jun 42.0 56.0 50.0 80.0
2011 Jul 44.0 47.0 44.0 44.0
2011 Aug 62.0 107.0 64.0 89.0
2011 Sep 26.0 31.0 75.0 12.0
2011 Oct 136.0 74.0 141.0 132.0
2011 Nov 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2011 Dec 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2013 Jan 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2013 Feb 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2013 Mar 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2013 Apr 66.0 32.0 14.0 40.0
2013 May 41.0 5.0 29.0 0.0
2013 Jun 56.0 32.0 55.0 54.0
2013 Jul 70.0 73.0 63.0 19.0
2013 Aug 32.0 12.0 20.0 15.0
2013 Sep 152.0 82.0 139.0 135.0
2013 Oct 96.0 56.0 77.0 63.0
2013 Nov 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2013 Dec 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2014 Jan 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2014 Feb 7.0 28.0 19.0 6.0
2014 Mar 47.0 42.0 10.0 20.0
2014 Apr 17.0 70.0 28.0 14.0
2014 May 153.0 432.0 98.0 97.0
2014 Jun 46.0 177.0 38.0 35.0
2014 Jul 92.0 209.0 101.0 42.0
2014 Aug 107.0 315.0 112.0 72.0
2014 Sep 59.0 288.0 36.0 128.0
2014 Oct 77.0 266.0 104.0 97.0
2014 Nov 60.0 179.0 57.0 80.0
2014 Dec 34.0 63.0 8.0 20.0
2015 Jan 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2015 Feb 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2015 Mar 38.0 24.0 36.0 41.0
2015 Apr 4.0 0.0 3.0 0.0
2015 May 66.0 87.0 48.0 54.0
2015 Jun 75.0 63.0 113.0 104.0

2015 Jul 6.0 5.0 22.0 0.0
2015 Aug 54.0 19.0 22.0 51.0
2015 Sep 207.0 49.0 118.0 92.0
2015 Oct 79.0 58.0 77.0 103.0
2015 Nov 54.0 11.0 0.0 0.0
2015 Dec 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2016 Jan 2.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2016 Feb 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2016 Mar 4.0 0.0 26.0 0.0
2016 Apr 19.0 7.0 9.0 0.0
2016 May 152.0 52.0 86.0 83.0
2016 Jun 149.0 56.0 78.0 208.0
2016 Jul 86.0 56.0 80.0 69.0
2016 Aug 50.0 24.0 42.0 38.0
2016 Sep 39.0 17.0 67.0 48.0
2016 Oct 44.0 0.0 22.0 0.0
2016 Nov 2.0 12.0 7.0 0.0
2016 Dec 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
6.6 PROCESSING OF PRECIPITATION DATA
6.6.1 Quality of Data
(a) The hydrometeorological data is collected from the rain gauge stations near the catchment area of
Renuka Sagar reservoir and such data has been analysed in which the rainfall data has been checked
for consistency & gaps using statistical procedures.
• Since there is no data available about sediment sampling both for bed load & suspended
sediment load, estimation of sediment rate has been done using “CWC Compendium on silting
of Reservoirs in India” based on geographic locations
• Similarly, for the flow observation, no Gauge & discharge stations are available at project site
or anywhere on the U/S & D/S of the reservoir. Therefore, the stage discharge curve has been
arrived based on analysis of rainfall data and conversion to flows using Strange's table
• Data of evaporation, temperature, humidity, radiation, wind velocity has been collected from
the nearest observation station near the project site
(b) Details of G&D station could not be identified since no G&D observation site is available of either
CWC/State Govt. Discharge data is estimated based on analysis of rainfall data which has been
converted to runoff/flow data using strange's table.

(c) At the project site of Saundatti upper reservoir and u/s of this site, there is no G&D observation
stations available. Therefore, stage-discharge curve has been converted to runoff values using
strange's table.
6.6.2 Consistency of data
A time series is said to be consistent if all its values belong to the same statistical distribution.
Inconsistent data should not be used to predict the design parameters, since such data may indicate
change in regime of the concerned parameters, which needs to be accounted for while estimating
them for design purposes. A dataset may not be consistent due to various reasons. Some of them are
(i) changes in the underlying process or system, and (ii) changes in measuring the Fixeds of the
system, including defects in measuring equipment. In case of spatially Fixed measurements, such as
rainfall, inconsistency resulting from the former reason will be reflected in measurements taken at
different locations. In such a case, the dataset needs to be handled as it is, and no corrections need to
be made to it. However, if it is the latter reason, then, the inconsistency will be seen only in those
measurements taken from that specific equipment where changes have occurred.
a) External Consistency
Changes in working of rain-gauges can be checked and corrected, if necessary, through consistency
checks on data collected from them. Checking for inconsistency of a given dataset, which is one among
many such datasets collected, is done by double-mass curve technique (external consistency). For
example, this method compares cumulative rainfall measurements at a given rain-gauge station to the
cumulative mean rainfall measurements at all the other rain-gauge stations chosen to calculate the
areal average rainfall over the catchment. It is important to note that the accumulation of values is
started from the latest record, backwards. A sudden change in the slope of curve resulting from such
comparison indicates a “changed” rain-gauge. This test is repeated on all the rain-gauges of concern. In
the event of finding changed equipment, the precipitation values beyond the period of change of
regime are corrected using the relation
where,
Pcx = corrected precipitation at any time period at station X
= original recorded precipitation at the same time period at station X
= corrected slope of the double-mass curve

= original slope of the double-mass curve
b) Internal Consistency
For datasets that are not prepared in conjunction with other datasets, consistency may be checked
using single-mass curve technique (internal consistency). For example, runoff of a river at a given
point along its length may be checked for consistency using this method. The cumulative values of
runoff time series are plotted with respect to time. Next, the plot is checked for changes in slope,
which indicates a change in regime of the Fixed under concern, runoff in our case, and hence, its
consistency.
Data from Saundatti, Yaragatti, Murugodu and Hulikatti rain-gauge stations have been checked using
double mass curve method, before being used in the rainfall-runoff analysis. It was observed that the
data at all the stations is consistent which is presented below.
Rainfall Data Consistency at Saundatti Rain Gauge Station

Accumulated Monthly Rainfall
4000.0
3000.0
at Saundatti
2000.0
1000.0
0.0
0.0 500.0 1000.0 1500.0 2000.0 2500.0 3000.0
Accumulated Mean Monthly Rainfall of 3 station
Figure 6.1: Rainfall Data Consistency at Saundatti Rain Gauge Station

Rainfall Data Consistency Yaragatti Rain Gauge Station

3500.0
3000.0
2500.0
at Yaragatti 2000.0
1500.0
1000.0
500.0
0.0
0.0 500.0 1000.0 1500.0 2000.0 2500.0 3000.0
Figure 6.2: Rainfall Data Consistency Yaragatti Rain Gauge Station
Rainfall Data Consistency At Murugodu Rain Gauge Station

3500.0
3000.0
2500.0
at Murugodu
2000.0
1500.0
1000.0
500.0
0.0
0.0 500.0 1000.0 1500.0 2000.0 2500.0 3000.0 3500.0
Accumulated Mean Monthly Rainfall of 3 stations
Figure 6.3: Rainfall Data Consistency At Murugodu Rain Gauge Station

Rainfall Data Consistency At Hulikatti Rain Gauge Station

3000.0
2500.0
at Hulikatti
2000.0
1500.0
1000.0
500.0
0.0
0.0 500.0 1000.0 1500.0 2000.0 2500.0 3000.0 3500.0
Figure 6.4: Rainfall Data Consistency At Hulikatti Rain Gauge Station

6.7 WATER AVAILABILITY AT PROJECT LOCATION
The proposed storage project is being planned on the allocated water for utilization by recirculation
from Renuka Sagar Reservoir. The upper reservoir & lower reservoir are far away from any river
course and do not have any natural streams draining into the reservoirs. The yield into the reservoir is
assumed to be exactly proportional to area, which of the reservoir is 1.672 Sqkm (0.735+0.937 Sqkm
at FRL of catchment). The 90% dependable yield into the reservoir through precipitation works out to
0.557MCum (1.672 Sqkm X 333.3 mm)
Since the reservoir is not located across any stream, therefore, no specific hydrological studies are
required to assess the specific yield in to the reservoir through rainfall-runoff correlations and the
design flood. Hence, the hydrological studies are carried out to assess the water availability for
running the proposed PSP scheme through out the year and the demand of water for refilling the
reservoir due to evaporation, pumping operation etc. No consumptive loss of water is envisaged.
6.8 EVAPORATION
The annual monthly evaporation loss from the reservoir is calculated based on the actual monthly
evaporation data of Renuka Sagar Reservoir.
The evaporation volume from reservoir is assumed to be exactly proportional to submerged area,
which of the upper reservoir varies is 1.447 Sqkm (avg. surface area). The submerged areas of the
upper reservoir at each medium storage capacity between FRL and MDDL are used for estimating
annual losses due to evaporation, since the relation between the water levels and the reservoir areas
above MDDL of the upper reservoir are almost same. The annual losses due to the evaporation from
the upper reservoir is 2.191 MCM. The annual yield in to the reservoir through precipitation is 0.557
MCM. The balance loss of 1.634 MCM (0.06 TMC) due to evaporation will be compensated by pumping
from Renuka Sagar Reservoir.
Table 6 3: Evaporation loss rate in project area
Evaporation Loss in mm
Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May Total
4.5 4.4 4.0 3.8 3.6 3.6 3.7 4.1 4.0 4.6 4.7 4.9 49.79
6.9 SEDIMENTATION
6.9.1 Sedimentation Rate
The estimated silt load for the proposed reservoirs has been arrived based on “Compendium on Silting
of Reservoirs in India (2015)” published by CWC.

As per the CWC publication, a sediment rate of 378 m 3/sq.km/year is based on the average sediment
rate in the region of Deccan Peninsular east flowing rivers including Godavari and south Indian rivers
derived from the capacity survey carried out for reservoirs in this region.
6.9.2 Trap Efficiency
Trap Efficiency of the reservoir is determined on the basis of Brune’s Curves (IS: 12182:1987). The
capacity – inflow ratio of the reservoir is determined and the corresponding trap efficiency factor is
read from the Brune’s Curves shown in Figure 6.5
Figure 6.5: Brune's Curves
6.9.3 Sediment Volume
As per I.S. guidelines 12182-1987 “Determination of effects of sedimentation in planning and

performance of reservoir”, feasible service time of the reservoir for hydropower shall not less than 70
years.
The upper reservoir do not have any nala or catchment draining into the reservoir. The area (C.A.) of
upper reservoir at FRL is 0.735Sqkm. The total sediment volumes for 70 years at upper Reservoir is
calculated as following (assuming the sediment from lower reservoir will be carried out into the upper
reservoir during pumping as a worst case scenario)
Sediment volume of upper reservoir = 378 × 0.735 × 70 = 0.01944 MCM
Sediment volume of lower reservoir = 378 × 0.937 × 70 = 0.02479 MCM

The estimated annual sediment volumes for upper & lower dam is 0.01944 MCM & 0.02479 MCM
respectively. The ratios of the annual sediment volumes to gross storage capacity of dams is negligible.
Thus, the reservoir sediment problem is insignificant.
The Minimum Drawdown Level (MDDL) of the upper reservoir is kept at EL. 829.0m (based on
optimum head requiement) with corresponding dead storage capacity of 0.714MCM as against the
estimated sediment volumes of 0.01944 MCM. The estimated sediment volumes is contained well
below the dead storage itself and has no effect of sediment in the reservoir.
The Minimum Drawdown Level (MDDL) of the lower reservoir is kept at EL. 637.0m (based on
optimum head requiement) with corresponding dead storage capacity of 0.915MCM as against the
estimated sediment volumes of 0.02479 MCM. The estimated sediment volumes is contained well
below the dead storage itself and has no effect of sediment in the reservoir.
6.9.4 Sediment Distribution
The sediment entering into the reservoir gets deposited in it with the passage of time, and thereby,
reduces its dead storage as well as its live storage capacity. This causes the bed level near the dam to
rise and the raised bed level is termed as new zero elevation (NZE). The revised storage-elevation
relationships, based on sediment-loading of the reservoir, are worked out for fixing the live storage of
the reservoir and in locating the outlets to withdraw water from it for downstream needs.
Empirical area reduction method or the area increment method are used for predicting sediment
distribution in reservoirs. Empirical area reduction method is used for the proposed reservoir as per
IS 5477 (Part 2):1994 (Reaffirmed 2004). The new zero elevation for the upper & lower dam after
feasible service time, i.e. 70 years was below the Minimum draw down level of EL. 829 m & 637 m
respectively.
6.10 DESIGN FLOOD
The design flood for a hydraulic structure is the maximum flood that can be safely discharged through
the structure without causing any damage to it. As per the latest Indian Standards and guidelines of
the Central Water Commission (CWC), the design flood for a hydraulic structure may be one the
following:
• Probable Maximum Flood

• Standard Project Flood
• Flood of Specified Frequency (T-Year Flood)
The design flood may be the maximum probable flood or the standard project flood or a flood
corresponding to some desired frequency of occurrence depending upon the standard of security that
should be provided against possible failure of the structure.

As per IS 11223:1985, inflow design flood for the safety of a dam is the flood for which, when used
with standard specifications of other factors as mentioned in subsequent clauses, the performance of
the dam should be safe against overtopping and structural failure, and the spillway and its energy
dissipation arrangements, if provided for a lower flood, should function reasonably well.
The selection criteria depend upon the functional importance, with judicious combination of safety
and economy in the event of failure.
As per the Manual of Estimation of Design Flood (CWC) and IS 11223:1985, the criteria for adopting
the design flood depends upon the classification of the dam, based on storage capacity and hydraulic
head is furnished in Table 6 4.
Table 6 4: Design flood adoption criteria
S.No. Classification Gross storage (MCM) Hydraulic head (m) Design flood
1 Small 0.5 to 10 7.5 to 12 100 – year flood
2 Medium 10 to 60 12 to 30 SPF
3 Large >60 >30 PMF
Floods of larger or smaller magnitude may be used if the hazard involved in the eventuality of a failure
is particularly high or low. The relevant parameters to be considered in judging the hazard in addition
to the size would be:
• distance to and location of the human habitations on the downstream after considering the
likely future developments.
• Maximum hydraulic capacity of the downstream channel at a level at which catastrophic

damage is not expected.
The Saundatti PSP upper & lower reservoirs can be classified as "Medium" by storage criterion being
less than 60 MCM. However, it is a large dam by hydraulic head consideration, as the head is more than
30 m. Therefore, the dam should be designed for the Probable Maximum Flood (PMF).
As the catchment area of the upper & lower dam (1.672 Sqkm) is small and the time of concentration
is short, Rational Formula and one-day storm will be applicable for design flood study.
6.10.1 Probable Maximum Precipitation (PMP)
The proposed Saundatti PSP lies in the PMP Atlas of Krishna Basin. Accordingly, one-day PMP has been
taken as 520 mm with reference to the PMP atlas of Krshna Basin published by IMD in March 2017. A
clock hour correction of 50 mm has been applied, after that the 24-hour PMP value has been
computed as 570 mm and the same has been adopted as design storm for the Upper & Lower Dams.

6.10.2 Probable Maximum Flood (PMF)
The design flood has been estimated based on Rational Formula. 1-hour PMP was calculated as 2 50.80
mm/hr. The PMF of upper dam is calculated as following.
Q = 0.278CIA
Where,
C : runoff coefficient taken as 0.56 (Ref. from Table-15.1.1, Text Book of Applied Hydrology by Ven Te
Chow)
I : rainfall intensity (mm/hour)
A : catchment area (km2)
Design Flood Calculations for Upper & Lower Dam:
tc = Time of Concentration = 1 hr.
Conversion ratio from 24-hr rainfall to 1-hr rainfall = 0.44 (Ref. from Fig.10 of FER, Krishna & Pennar
Subzone (3h))
24 hrs. to 1 hr. rainfall Value = 570*0.44 =250.8mm
Therefore,
I : Rainfall Intensity = 250.80 mm/hr.
A = Catchment Area of Upper Dam = 0.735km2
Design Flood = 0.278CIA
= 0.278*1.0*250.80*0.735 = 51.245 m3/s ≈ 52.0 m3/s
A = Catchment Area of Lower Dam = 0.937km2
Design Flood = 0.278CIA
= 0.278*1.0*250.80*0.937 = 65.239 m3/s ≈ 66.0 m3/s
The PMF of the upper & lower dam works out to 52 & 66 m3/s respectively. The design storm duration
is taken as 1.0 Hr. The corresponding volume for upper dam works out to 0.187 MCM. The maximum
rise in the water level above FRL (EL 857.30m) in the upper reservoir is negligible. As the volume of
flood is very small, the same can be contained in the reservoir itself and hence, no separate spillway
provision is provided for the probable maximum flood.
The corresponding volume for lower dam works out to 0.2376 MCM. The maximum rise in the water
level above FRL (EL 659.30m) in the lower reservoir is negligible. As the volume of flood is very small,
the same can be contained in the reservoir itself and hence, no separate spillway provision is provided
for the probable maximum flood.
6.11 Freeboard
The evaluation of the height of the waves originating in the reservoir as a result of exposure to wind is
calculated to arrive at the requirement of Freeboard for upper & lower reservoirs.

The available dam freeboard and the wave wall height placed on the dam crest were evaluated
considering the following aspects:
➢ selection of an appropriate wind speed, valid for the studied area and representative of the
worst conditions;
➢ geographic and effective fetch for the selected dam location and reservoir;
The wind speed was selected as per IS 875-III.
The historical series shows an absolute maximum wind speed of 140.4 Km/h was used to evaluate the
wave height.
The effective fetch and wave height are calculated as per IS:10635 “Freeboard requirement in
embankment dams – Guidelines”
The effective fetch length is given by the following equation:
Effective fetch length = Σfi*cos2q / Σcos q
where:
fi = distances from the dam centre to the shore
q = corresponding angles (the centre line is the direction with maximum fetch)
The following table shows the results of computed free board for the reservoirs.
Table 5.5: Free board of Upper & Lower Reservoirs
Embankment Dams; Free board Calculations

IS : 10635
Upper Reservoir Lower Reservoir
FRL/MWL +857.00m +659.00m
FB (Calculated) +1.830m +1.839m
FB (Required) +3.000m +3.000m
TBL +860.00m +662.00m
Top Bund Level For Upper Reservoir is 860.0m and TBL For Lower Reservoir is 662.0m is provided.

CHAPTER 7 RESERVOIR
7.1 UPPER & LOWER RESERVOIRS - CATCHMENT AREA, SUBMERGENCE & ANNUAL INFLOW
The upper reservoir is formed in the natural depressions and do not have any natural streams
draining into the reservoir and is formed by an embankment upto EL. 860 m while the Lower
reservoir is formed by an embankment upto EL. 662 m. The proposed storage project is being planned
on the allocated water for utilization by one time drawing from the Renuka Sagar Reservoir and then
recirculating it from Lower reservoir to Upper reservoir.
The upper and lower reservoir does not have any significant catchment draining into the reservoirs.
The yield into the reservoir is assumed to be exactly proportional to area, which of the reservoir is
1.672 Sqkm (1.672 Sqkm at FRL of catchment). The runoff coefficient is taken as 1.0 since, the storm
will occur directly over the surface of the upper reservoir. The 90% dependable yield (arrived from 6
years of annual rainfall) into the reservoir through precipitation works out to 0.557MCum (1.672
Sqkm X 333.30 mm).
7.2 ELEVATION AREA CAPACITY
Elevation-Area-Capacity details of proposed reservoirs have been worked out from the contour maps
prepared for the project area. The area enclosed between successive contours is calculated and the
volume between any two elevations is calculated using the following formula:
V = H/3*[A1 + A2 + (A1 x A2)^ 0.5]
Where V = Volume between two contours (Mm3);
H = Contour interval/ Difference in elevation (m);
A1 = Water spread area at first contour level (Mm2); and
A2 = Water spread area at second contour level (Mm2)
The incremental volume of the reservoir between two contours thus obtained is summed up to
estimate gross storage capacity of reservoir at different elevations.
7.2.1 Upper Reservoir
The water spread area and the gross storage capacity of upper reservoir at various elevations is shown
in Table 7 1. The gross storage capacity of the upper reservoir is 18.501 MCM (0.66 TMC).
7.2.2 Lower Reservoir
The water spread area and the gross storage capacity of upper reservoir at various elevations is shown
in Table 7 2. The gross storage capacity of the lower reservoir is 18.779 MCM (0.66 TMC).

Table 7 1: Elevation-Area-Capacity of Upper Reservoir
SAUNDATTI PSP UPPER RESERVOIR CAPACITY

Cumulative Cumulative
Elevation Water-spread Water-spread Capacity Capacity
Sl.No Capacity Capacity
(m) Area (Sqm) Area (MSqm) (Cum) (Mcum)
(Mcum) (TMC)
1 827 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.00
2 828 535333.8 0.535 178445 0.178 0.178 0.01
3 829 535333.8 0.535 535334 0.535 0.714 0.03
4 830 542470.8 0.542 538898 0.539 1.253 0.04
5 831 549607.9 0.550 546035 0.546 1.799 0.06
6 832 556744.9 0.557 553173 0.553 2.352 0.08
7 833 563881.9 0.564 560310 0.560 2.912 0.10
8 834 571019.0 0.571 567447 0.567 3.480 0.12
9 835 578156.0 0.578 574584 0.575 4.054 0.14
10 836 585293.1 0.585 581721 0.582 4.636 0.16
11 837 592430.1 0.592 588858 0.589 5.225 0.18
12 838 599567.2 0.600 595995 0.596 5.821 0.21
13 839 606704.2 0.607 603132 0.603 6.424 0.23
14 840 613841.3 0.614 610269 0.610 7.034 0.25
15 841 620978.3 0.621 617406 0.617 7.652 0.27
16 842 628115.4 0.628 624543 0.625 8.276 0.29
4 843 635252.4 0.635 631681 0.632 8.908 0.31
5 844 642389.5 0.642 638818 0.639 9.547 0.34
6 845 649526.5 0.650 645955 0.646 10.193 0.36
7 846 656663.6 0.657 653092 0.653 10.846 0.38
8 847 663800.6 0.664 660229 0.660 11.506 0.41
9 848 670937.7 0.671 667366 0.667 12.173 0.43
10 849 678074.7 0.678 674503 0.675 12.848 0.45
11 850 685211.7 0.685 681640 0.682 13.529 0.48
12 851 692348.8 0.692 688777 0.689 14.218 0.50
13 852 699485.8 0.699 695914 0.696 14.914 0.53
14 853 706622.9 0.707 703051 0.703 15.617 0.55
15 854 713759.9 0.714 710188 0.710 16.327 0.58
16 855 720897.0 0.721 717325 0.717 17.045 0.60
17 856 728034.0 0.728 724463 0.724 17.769 0.63
17 857 735171.1 0.735 731600 0.732 18.501 0.66

Table 7 2: Elevation-Area-Capacity of Lower Reservoir
SAUNDATTI PSP LOWER RESERVOIR CAPACITY

Water- Cumulative Cumulative
Elevation Water-spread Capacity Capacity
Sl.No spread Area Capacity Capacity
(m) Area (Sqm) (Cum) (Mcum)
(MSqm) (Mcum) (TMC)
1 635 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.00
2 636 686590.0 0.687 228863 0.229 0.229 0.01
3 637 686590.0 0.687 686590 0.687 0.915 0.03
4 638 697991.7 0.698 692283 0.692 1.608 0.06
5 639 709393.3 0.709 703685 0.704 2.311 0.08
6 640 720795.0 0.721 715087 0.715 3.027 0.11
7 641 732196.7 0.732 726488 0.726 3.753 0.13
8 642 743598.4 0.744 737890 0.738 4.491 0.16
9 643 755000.1 0.755 749292 0.749 5.240 0.19
10 644 766401.7 0.766 760694 0.761 6.001 0.21
11 645 777803.4 0.778 772096 0.772 6.773 0.24
12 646 789205.1 0.789 783497 0.783 7.556 0.27
13 647 800606.8 0.801 794899 0.795 8.351 0.29
4 648 812008.5 0.812 806301 0.806 9.158 0.32
5 649 823410.2 0.823 817703 0.818 9.975 0.35
6 650 834811.8 0.835 829104 0.829 10.804 0.38
7 651 846213.5 0.846 840506 0.841 11.645 0.41
8 652 857615.2 0.858 851908 0.852 12.497 0.44
9 653 869016.9 0.869 863310 0.863 13.360 0.47
10 654 880418.6 0.880 874712 0.875 14.235 0.50
11 655 891820.2 0.892 886113 0.886 15.121 0.53
12 656 903221.9 0.903 897515 0.898 16.019 0.57
13 657 914623.6 0.915 908917 0.909 16.927 0.60
14 658 926025.3 0.926 920319 0.920 17.848 0.63
14 659 937427.0 0.937 1852004 1.852 18.779 0.66

7.3 SEDIMENTATION DATA & STUDIES
7.3.1 Rates of sedimentation
The estimated silt load for the proposed reservoirs has been arrived based on “Compendium on Silting
of Reservoirs in India (2015)” published by CWC.
As per the CWC publication, a sediment rate of 378 m3/sq.km/year is considered based on the average
sediment rate in the Lower reservoir derived from the capacity survey carried out for Renuka Sagar
reservoir.
7.3.2 Quantity of sediment (Tonnes or M cum during the life of the Reservoir)
The upper dam doesn’t have any catchment to carry sediments into the reservoir. The area (C.A.) of
upper resservoir at FRL is 0.735 Sqkm & lower reservoir is 0.937 sqkm. The total sediment volumes
for 70 years at upper Reservoir is calculated as following
7.3.3 Sediment studies
The sedimentation studies for fixing the life of reservoir are carried out as per BIS : 5477.
7.3.4 Sedimentation in the reservoir after feasible service time
The new zero elevation for the upper & lower dam after feasible service time, i.e. 70 years, was EL.
827.5 m & 635.2 m respectively. which is below the Minimum draw down levels of EL. 829 m & 637 m
respectively.
7.4 FIXATION OF STORAGE AND RESERVOIR LEVELS-APPROACH- CRITERIA
As one time drawl of water was approved by the Govt. of Karnataka from the Renuka Sagar reservoir, it
was the primary task to identify the location of the possible upper & lower reservoirs having sufficient
level difference for getting optimum head for generating power. The main parameters considered
during identification & finalization of the reservoir is: proximity of the upper reservoir and the
existing lower reservoir; capacity; topography & geological setup; reservoir water tightness & head.
Reconnaissance of the entire area around the proposed Project and existing Lower reservoir was
carried out utilizing available Survey of India (SOI) Toposheets (1:50,000 scale), satellite imageries &
google maps to identify possible locations for upper reservoir. Detailed topographic maps with one
meter contour interval were used for developing area capacity curve for upper reservoir which
indicated that sufficient capacity will be available as per the design requirement, and accordingly the
height & length of embankments / dams is worked out. Storage and Reservoir levels are also verified

based on sedimentation studies, water requirement for one cycle of operation and achieve target
capacity of 1280 MW. Based upon the differential head available between two proposed reservoirs, it
is proposed to operate the scheme between EL +857m and EL+ 829.0m.
Table 7 3: Key parameters of Reservoirs & Dams
Sl. No. Parameter Unit Upper Reservoir Lower Reservoir

1 Live Storage TMC 0.63 0.619
2 Dead Storage TMC 0.03 0.008
3 Gross Storage TMC 0.69 0.627
4 Full Reservoir Level (FRL) m EL 857 EL 659.00
5 Minimum Draw Down Level (MDDL) m EL 829 EL 637.00
6 Max Height of Dam m 35.0 22
7.5 SADDLES PRESENT ALONG THE RIM OF THE RESERVOIR
No significant saddles are present in the foreshore of the reservoir
7.6 LIFE OF RESERVOIR IN YEARS WITH BASIS
As per I.S. guidelines 12182-1987, feasible service time of the reservoir for hydropower shall not be
less than 70 years.
7.7 WATER TIGHTNESS OF THE RESERVOIR
Geological maps on 1:250000 scale & 1:50,000 scale prepared by the Geological Survey of India were
procured and studied to understand regional geological setup in and around the Project area.
Geotechnical assessment around periphery of reservoir indicate that no seepage is expected, however
few area required to be treated with cement grouting to fill the open jointing system in rockmass.
7.8 ANNUAL LOSSES
(a) Evaporation:
The total annual evaporation loss from upper & lower reservoirs works out to 2.191 Mcum.
(b) Seepage in the reservoir
No seepage losses are anticipated.
7.9 FLOOD ABSORPTION
The PMF of the upper dam work out to 52.0m3/s. The design storm duration is taken as 1.0 Hr. The
corresponding volume for upper dam works out to 0.187 MCM. The maximum rise in the water level
above FRL in the upper reservoir is negligible.

The PMF of the lower dam work out to 66.0m3/s. The design storm duration is taken as 1.0 Hr. The
corresponding volume for lower dam works out to 0.2376 MCM. The maximum rise in the water level
above FRL in the lower reservoir is negligible.
7.10 EFFECT ON SUB SOIL WATER TABLE IN THE ADJOINING AREAS PARTICULARLY DOWN
STREAM OF THE DAM.
Effect on sub soil water table in the adjoining areas will be nominal as the reservoir area is small.
7.11 RESERVOIR RIM STABILITY
As the upper reservoir is formed with ring bund, Reservoir rim stability does not arise.
7.12 AREA OF SUBMERGENCE / LAND ACQUISITION (HA)
The total area of submergence for formation of upper reservoir is 118.51 Ha.
7.13 RECREATION FACILITIES
Not provided at DPR stage
7.14 PISCICULTURE
Not envisaged for the project
7.15 NEED AND RECOMMENDATION FOR SOIL CONSERVATION MEASURE IN THE

CATCHMENTS
There is no need for soil conservation measure in the catchment.

CHAPTER 8 POWER POTENTIAL AND INSTALLED CAPACITY
8.1 INSTALLED CAPACITY
The installed capacity of Saundatti PSP is proposed based on the operating levels of the upper and
existing lower reservoir with a rated capacity of 1280 MW.
8.2 LOCATION & RESERVOIR DETAILS
8.2.1 Upper Dam
The latitude and longitude at the upper dam site are 15°51'28.27"N, 75° 0'13.82"E. The area capacity
characteristics developed for the reservoir at this Upper Dam location are enclosed at Table 7 1.
The gross storage in the upper reservoir at FRL (EL. 857 m) and MDDL (EL. 829 m) are 18.501 MCM
and 0.714 MCM respectively. The maximum live storage will be 17.787 MCM.
8.2.2 Lower Dam
The latitude and longitude at the lower dam site are 15°50'36.29"N, 75° 0'37.32"E. The area capacity
characteristics developed for the reservoir at this Upper Dam location are enclosed at Table 7 2.
The gross storage in the lower reservoir at FRL (EL. 659.00 m) and MDDL (EL. 637.00 m) are 17.864
MCM and 0.915 MCM respectively. The maximum live storage is 18.779 MCM.
8.2.3 Fixation of Reservoir Parameters
The Full Reservoir Level (FRL) of upper & lower dam has been kept in order to achieve the maximum
potential at site duly meeting the required storage capacity. The selection of installed capacity and
operating levels of the upper and lower reservoirs have been arrived by carrying out detailed
operation simulation studies of the scheme.
8.2.4 Minimum Draw Down Level
The minimum draw down for the reservoirs has been arrived at from the consideration of silt storage,
requirement of water seal above intake and head variations. Considering a sediment rate of 378
cum/sq. km/year, the silt volume in 70 years would only be a small proportion of the dead storage and
therefore does not influence the selection of MDDL. The MDDL has been fixed for Upper & Lower
Reservoirs at 829 m and 637 m respectively from the consideration of utilisation of optimum head and
requirement of live pondage for proposed installation of 1280 MW for about 6.38 hours.
8.3 OPTIMISATION OF INSTALLED CAPACITY
The installed capacity of Saundatti PSP is dependent on
i) On the allocated water and

ii) Reservoir storage and head available at the site.
The daily load factor of operation of the scheme, which in turn determines the hours of operation in a
day, depends on the power system requirements. The proposed Saundatti PSP is proposed with 1280
MW of Pumped Storage capacity developed on technical feasibility, site suitability and associated
requirements and demand from various State DISCOMs/STUs and other consumers. This project is a
first of its kind in the country which will supply firm dispatchable renewable power to the
Discom/Grid for 24 Hrs i.e. Round The Clock (RTC). Hence, the installed capacity of the power plant is
dependent on the reservoir storage for about 6.38 hours of generation and head available at site. The
assessment of storage requirement in the reservoirs for power generation has been carried out on the
basis of daily operation.
8.4 DAILY REGULATION, ENERGY GENERATION AND REQUIRED STORAGE
The plant has been proposed to be operated on daily cycle basis. A detailed study has been carried out
to establish the requirement of net storage in the reservoirs. The operation of the scheme in
generation or pumping, results in continuous change in the levels of the two reservoirs as also
consequently change in the operating head on the machines. The impact of continuous variations in
head is assessed by simulation of operation of the scheme considering shorter time intervals of 10
minutes.
When the lower reservoir is at 0.915 TMC below FRL When the lower Reservoir is at MDDL andWhen
the lower reservoir is at average level of FRL & MDDL. The average annual generation considering the
three scenarios.
The annual energy generation from Saundatti PSP estimated based on the generation simulation
works out to 2759 MU. The annual input energy required for pumping water to the upper reservoir
based on the pumping simulation works out to 3511 MU. The cycle efficiency of the plant works out to
80.35%.
There will be losses in storage in Upper reservoir due to causes like evaporation, transmission etc., A
pumped storage scheme does not require continuous flow of water as in a conventional hydropower
plant and stored water in the reservoir is recycled. However, the annual losses in storage in the
reservoir due to evaporation etc., need to be recharged during monsoon. There will be progressive
reduction in the stored volume of reservoir due to losses. Therefore, provision for additional storage in
the reservoirs will have to be made to facilitate planned operation of the PSP at 6.38 Hrs even at the
critical periods, when the storage in the reservoirs is at a minimum. As the provision additional
storage in the reservoir will increase the cost of the project and impact the overall viability, it is
proposed that the reduction in the storage volume of reservoirs due to losses will be compensated by
refilling the loss storage during monsoon periods.

Three scenarios were also considered in working out the average annual energy generation
When the lower reservoir is 0.618 TMC below the FRL: The annual energy generation works out to
3398.15 MU by utilizing 0.618 TMC of water for 5.83 Hours. Similarly annual energy required to pump
0.618 TMC of water when lower the reservoir is at FRL is 4330.21 MU for a duration of 7.0 Hrs.
When the lower reservoir is at MDDL: The annual energy generation works out to 3980.69 MU by
utilizing 0.618 TMC of water for 6.83 Hours. Similarly annual energy required to pump 0.618 TMC of
water when lower the reservoir is at MDDL is 4917.89MU for a duration of 8.0 Hrs.
When the lower reservoir is at average level of FRL and MDDL: The annual energy generation
works out to 2759 MU by utilizing 0.618 TMC of water for 6.2 Hours. Similarly annual energy required
to pump 0.618 TMC of water when lower the reservoir is at average reservoir level is 4526.10 MU for a
duration of 7.0 Hrs.
Thus the average annual energy generation and input power required is arrived at average of the three
scenarios
Annual Energy Generated = (3398.15+3980.69+2759)/3 = 2759 MU
Annual Input Power Required = (4330.21+4917.89+4526.10)/3 = 3511 MU
Cycle efficiency of the scheme – 80.35%
8.5 RULE CURVE FOR OPERATION OF RESERVOIRS
Rule curve is the target level planned to be achieved in a reservoir under different conditions of
probabilities of inflows and / or demands, during various time periods in a year. The Rule Curves are
generally derived by operation studies using historic or generated flows where long term historic
flows are not available. It is a graphical representation specifying ideal storage or empty space
planned to be achieved in a reservoir, under different conditions of probabilities of inflows and / or
demands, during various time periods in a year.
The proposed upper reservoir is intended only for the operation of Saundatti PSP. There is no
downstream water demands from this reservoir and no streams of any significance is joining into the
reservoir. As such, the operating rule curves as envisaged for multipurpose reservoirs has no
significance to the proposed reservoir, as this is planned only for PSP operation. The operating of these
reservoirs are governed by the following criteria
The reservoir will complete one cycle of operation daily ie. Filling and Drawdown
Drawdown from FRL to MDDL – 6.38 Hours
Filling from MDDL to FRL – 7.57 Hours

CHAPTER 9 DESIGN FEATURES OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
9.1 General
Saundatti PSP is located Belagavi district of Karnataka. It envisages creation of upper reservoir, water
conducting systems, power house near Karlakatti village. The scheme will involve construction of
3782 m long Asphalt facing rockfill embankment dam for creation of upper reservoir of 0.66 TMC
gross capacity. The lower reservoir is the existing Lower reservoir with 0.66 TMC gross capacity. The
scheme envisages utilization of 189.90 m rated head and design discharge of 193.46 Cumecs for
generation of 1280MW (3 units of 320 MW each) and 189.90 m rated head and design discharge of
97.73 Cumecs for generation of 320MW (2 units of 160 MW each).
The major project components are:
m/s & 1 No, 7.1 m dia, 981 m steel lined which will be bifurcated to 5.0 m dia, 128.752 m each
with velocity of 5.00 m/s comprising of Burried Penstocks, 4 Nos., 7.1 m dia & 185.97 m length
(average), Vertical Pressure Shafts, 4 Nos., 7.1 m dia & 392.75 m length and Horizontal
Pressure Shaft, 4 Nos., 7.1 m dia in which 3 Nos. will feed 3 units each of 320 MW and 1 no.
Independent Pressure Shaft will be bifurcated into two branch pressure shafts of 5 m dia & of
about 113.55 m length to feed two smaller units of 160 MW.
General layout of the project and the L-section along the water conductor system are shown in the
drawing number AA/POWER/2209/ALT1/001 to 003.

9.2 Alternative Studies
The Saundatti PSP – Pumped Storage Project is proposed in between two reservoirs i.e. Upper &
Lower reservoir. The scheme is proposed to operate between upper reservoir FRL: +857 m and lower
reservoir FRL: +659.00 m.
The proposed layout of the project has been finalized after considering various alternatives from the
topographical, geological & geotechnical constraints. The proposed Saundatti PSP envisages
construction of
• Upper Dam (for formation of upper reservoir)
• Intake Structure
• Steel Lined Intake tunnel / Buried Penstock / Pressure Shaft (Vertical & Horizontal)
• Surface Power House
• Tailrace tunnel
• Tailrace Outlet Structure
9.3 Geological & Geotechnical Appraisal
Topographical maps (D43D1 (48M/1) and D43C13 (48I/13)) of Survey of India were referred for
investigation, reconnaissance and for finalizing the project layout.
9.4 Head Works
9.4.1 Site Selection for Reservoirs
A Reconnaissance Survey has been carried out around the project area. Based on the site survey and
study of SOI topo sheets, the site selected for the standalone storage component of Saundatti PSP is the
ideal location available in the vicinity, suitable for formation of Upper reservoir & Lower reservoir
with shortest water conductor system. The present site is selected to avoid the eco sensitive zones and
minimise the extent of forest area required. The site for head works has been selected based on the
following criteria.
• To meet the storage requirement for a minimum 6.2 hours peaking generation.
• To keep the submergence area minimal.
• Shortest possible water conductor system.
• Site Topography & Geology.

9.4.2 Alternatives for Type of Dam
Roller compacted concrete, Asphalt Facing Rockfill Dams and Rockfill Dam with central impervious
clay core are the three types of dams considered for formation of embankment of upper reservoir. The
following aspects were taken into consideration for selecting the type of embankment.
• Material costs for construction of embankments
• Time spent for construction of embankment viz., total construction time, man-hours,
requirement of infrastructure facilities etc.,
• Time and costs used for trial tests.
• Preparation for construction, e.g., excavation, foundation, diversion and construction of

batching and crusher plants.
9.4.3 Roller-Compacted Concrete Dam (RCC Dam)
Roller-compacted concrete dams have many similarities with conventional gravity concrete dams. The
dam is built to required height and depth where it can resist the expected forces from the water by its
weight. But instead of using rock-fill or earth-fill, RCC Dam consist of concrete which is spread in thin
layers and compacted by vibrator rollers. It is important to provide the RCC Dam with sufficient
resistance to water leakage (seepage). The method of using a concrete with higher binder close to the
upstream face will decrease the permeability by creating a water tight barrier of concrete with higher
quality. RCC Dam is much heavier and thus demand better bedrock allowing the stresses produced by
the dam weight and the water pressure. If the bedrock is very weak or heavily foliated, the foundation
likely to suffer from shearing failure. As in case of concrete dams, geological conditions of the
foundations of RCC dams must be strong enough compared for a Rockfill dam. The cost of construction
and the requirement of infrastructure facilities are higher for RCC Dam compared to Rockfill dam.
9.4.4 Asphalt Faced Rock fill Dam (AFRD)
The main characteristics with the Asphalt Face Rockfill Dam (AFRD) is that the dam type enables
usage of local materials excavated from the project components and the compulsory excavations in the
Rockfill dam body, as opposed to using expensive material from quarries which may have to be
transported a long way etc. However, there are some quality requirements on the rockfill
material/aggregates which have to be met in order to be able to use them in the dam body. The quality
is mainly determined by the local geology and highlights the importance of good geological
surroundings in order to exploit all advantages with the dam type.
Excavated materials from the project components being proposed for shell of the Dam, Asphalt Face
Rockfill Dam is proposed for the Saundatti Upper Reservoir which is economical and faster to

construct comparing to RCC Dam. Moreover, the AFRD have many advantages comparing to RCC Dam.
The main advantages are:
• AFRD can be constructed on any given foundation condition and the excavation for foundation
need not be up to rock level, where the bed rock is deep seated. Foundation excavation is
negligible in most of the dams.
• AFRD has the advantage of faster construction in comparison of earth dam with filters and clay
core.
• Asphalt concrete facing will reduce the seepage through the dam up to a large extent.
• Asphalt concrete being flexible will be capable of sustaining reasonable deflection of dam.
• May lead to lesser damage due to accidental overtopping of dam.
• With modern earth moving machineries, the dam can be completed in less time compared to a
rigid dam.
Considering the merits & demerits of Asphalt face Rockfill dam & RCC Dam options, Asphalt
face Rockfill dam is selected for formation of upper and lower reservoirs.
Table 9 1: Salient Features of Proposed Upper Reservoir
Sl. No Description Upper Reservoir Lower Reservoir

1 Latitude 15°51'28.27"N 15°51'28.27"N
2 Longitude 75° 0'13.82"E 75° 0'13.82"E
3 Live Storage 0.63 TMC 0.63 TMC
4 Dead Storage 0.03 TMC 0.03 TMC
5 Gross Storage 0.66 TMC 0.66 TMC
6 Top of Dam EL +860.00 m EL +662.00 m
7 Full Reservoir level (FRL) EL +857.00 m EL +659.00 m
8 Min. Draw Down Level (MDDL) EL +829.00 m EL +637.00 m
9 Length of Embankment 3782.00 m 5740.00 m
In the pumped storage scheme generally, drawdown is in order of 10m to 28m which may be inferred
in present case from the Table 9 1. In such case, upstream impervious facing embankment dam is
found more appropriate than Rockfill dam with central impervious clay core as keeping water barrier
on the upstream face the embankment is pore pressure free, subject neither to steady seepage nor to
rapid drawdown effects. Moreover, other additional advantage offered by such type of dam is that after
drawdown of the reservoir, the facing is readily accessible for inspection, maintenance and repair.

Asphalt concrete faced rockfill dam (AFRD) in which asphaltic concrete as upstream impervious facing
as water barrier for Asphalt facing Rockfill embankment dam is more viable technically and fast in
construction, with conventional Rockfill dam with central impervious clay core as of requirement of
material is less being designed with steep upstream and downstream slopes as of no severe
drawdown conditions encountered and additionally requirement of less quality rockfill shell material
because no direct water contact and moreover placement of material is fast, as no stringent
requirements as in case of clay core. Further, asphaltic concrete facing dam is also having advantage
from other type of reinforcing concrete facing alternative as being flexible is capable of
accommodating more reasonable deflection dam and faster in laying with modern construction
equipment and technique.
9.5 ALTERNATIVE PROJECT LAYOUTS
After finalizing the parameters of Upper & Lower Reservoirs, the pumped storage component of
Saundatti PSP is proposed to be developed between upper reservoir FRL of EL +857 m and lower
reservoir FRL of EL +659m. Based on these criteria, there was limited choice in selecting the corridor
for the water conductor system along with powerhouse locations. Under these limitations and keeping
in view the topography and geological conditions, the project layout has been studied and worked out
and also to have optimized length of water conductor system along with powerhouse locations.
Accordingly, a corridor for water conductor system was selected towards the eastern side of the upper
reservoir where in the strong quartzitic sandstone capping the plain ground level but underlying shale
rock belonging to Vindhyan super group rocks was chosen for the Upper reservoir area. Hence this
component of the project is occupied mainly by strong quartzitic sandstone. The water conductor
system comprising Upper Intake structure, inclined and buried penstock, vertical pressure shaft,
horizontal pressure shaft, powerhouse complex and tailrace system shall be hosted partly in quartzitic
sandstone and largely in a shale rock. Similar geological set up is expected all around the hill slope
facing the lower reservoir. Hence the topographic feature facilitating shortest/optimized alignment for
water conductor system connecting upper and lower reservoir was the main aspect in deciding/
selecting the proposed alignment. In this corridor, primarily, the alternatives involving underground
and surface type powerhouse complex were studied while finalizing the project lay out. Accordingly,
the alternatives have been studied and discussed below with 5 units (3 units of 320 MW+2 units of
160 MW) of fixed speed Francis turbines and for the same location of upper reservoir. The layout
comprising the Project area with all the alternative schemes are shown in the drawing numbers
enclosed in Vol. III of the DPR.
1 Alternative - 1 Surface Powerhouse with Dwg. No. AA/POWER/2209/ALT1/01

Pressure shaft no Surge Tank

2 Alternative - 2 Underground Powerhouse Dwg. No. AA/POWER/2209/ALT2/01
complex
Alternative-1 with surface powerhouse: The water conductor system comprises of four nos. of steel
lined penstock tunnel/pressure shaft with one number of Penstock is divided into two numbers which
are connected to a common surface powerhouse. The water after power generation will be lead in to
lower reservoir through a Tailrace tunnel.
Alternative-2 with underground powerhouse: The water conductor system comprises of four nos.
steel lined penstock tunnel/pressure shaft and an underground power house. The water after
generation will be lead into underground surge chamber followed by Tailrace tunnel and then to lower
reservoir.
9.5.1 Alternative-1
Four intakes have been provided in the upper reservoir with four independent steel lined penstock
tunnel/pressure shaft of about 1035.712 m long and 7.1m dia. to convey to the surface powerhouse.
Three penstocks will be feeding 3 units of 320 MW and one penstock bifurcated in to two will be
feeding 2 units of 160 MW each.
The Three pump turbines of 320 MW will be fed by 7.1m diameter independent penstocks, where as
one 7.1m diameter penstock bifurcating in to two 5.0m dia. penstocks will feed 2 units each of 160
MW. The diameter of the branch pipes is arrived at based on equal velocity criteria.
This option envisages construction of Powerhouse out falling directly into the lower reservoir. The
average ground level at this location is about EL + 657.55m. The layout plan and L-section are shown
in drawing nos. AA/POWER/2209/ALT1/01 & AA/POWER/2209/ALT1/03. The layout plan &
longitudinal section of Alternative – 1 are shown in Figure 4.1 & Figure 4.2.
The requirement of surge tank in the water conductor system has been assessed based on the
following thumb rule:
• Criteria for requirement surge tank based on L/H Ratio:
• Surge tank is not required when L/H ratio is less than 5
• Surge tank may be required when L/H ratio is in between 5 & 10 to control mass oscillation in
Water Conductor System
• Surge tank is required when L/H ratio exceeds 10

Where,
L = Length of pressurized tunnel
H = Net head for power generation
L/H =1035.712/189.90 =5.45

The L/H ratio of this alternative is worked out to 5.45 which is more than 5. Hence, surge shaft
investigation is required in this alternative based on the above criteria. However, the transient analysis
of this alternative has been assessed to check the maximum pressure rise which is estimated is
31.34% at turbine, which will be adopted in the design of pressure shaft.
Criteria for requirement of surge tank based on Water Acceleration time (TW):
The provision of a surge tank should be investigated if an acceleration time in water conductor system
is 3 to 5.
Σ (Li*Vi) = (1035.712* 4.89) = 2.72

g Ho 9.81* 189.90
Where,
L = length (m), V = velocity (m/s), g = acceleration due to gravity & Ho is the Rated head on Turbine.
In this alternative the water acceleration time worked is out to 2.720 which is less than 3.0. Hence
based on this criteria the surge shaft is not required in this alternative.
The water after power generation will be conveyed through 268 m long independent Tailrace tunnels
to discharge water in to Lower reservoir.
9.5.1.1 Geological & Geotechnical Appraisal:
Based on the large scale geological mapping and geotechnical parameters recorded, a geological
longitudinal section along the proposed project layout was prepared (refer Plate No.- 2.1 & 2.3) and
geotechnical parameters, viz., RMR, Q-Values, Cohesion & angle of friction were determined. Following
inferences have been drawn from the longitudinal geological section and slope stability analysis of the
proposed open excavation along the sides of the proposed surface Power House.
• Four numbers of horizontal steel lined buried Penstock, 296.72.0m long and 7.1m dia
extending from power intake upto vertical pressure shaft with invert level 810.28m.
• The buried steel lined Penstock extending from intake to the top vertical pressure shaft
will have rocky foundation. The foundation grade rock is expected to be medium strong to
strong, jointed quartzitic sandstone gently dipping bedding planes towards westerly
direction. The rock mass will be of class II with the RMR value ranging from 64-69.
• Top of the four numbers of vertical Pressure Shafts (VPS) are located at EL. 800.88m. The
rock cover at the junction of the buried Penstock and VPS will be around 25m which
increases to 152.50m as the shaft goes down. The location of these Pressure Shafts shall be

optimized in staggered pattern in such a way that adequate lateral rock cover is available.
Vertical Pressure shaft after the top capping rock of quartzitic sandstone will pass through
shale rock which is expected relatively weak having interbedded with thin sandstone
bands/layers with the RMR range of 35 to 50 belonging to class IV to III.
• Three exploratory boreholes (BH-10, BH-11 & BH-12), each of 155m vertical depth was
planned and drilled parallel for VPS. These holes intersected 0.5m to 2.0m thick
overburden followed by fine to medium grained, strong to very strong Quarzitic Sandstone
having RQD from 10% - 67% down to 18m vertical depth. Thereafter VPS will be
encountered with Shale. Between 18m & 65 m (down to El 435m) vertical depth with RQD
varying from 10 to 67 % and the rock mass is of Class- III - IV category. Thereafter RQD
ranges varying Max. range of 75-98% down to VPS bottom level. Broadly, some patches of
upper class IV to class III and small pockets of class II in thickly bedded rock with general
RMR ranging from 45 to 52 in majority of the lengths. Overall, the sub-horizontally dipping
bedding planes could be of advantageous factor for the shaft excavation with respect to the
stability of the side walls.
• The first 100m of Bottom horizontal pressure shaft will have more than 126m vertical
cover, after that vertical cover decreasing towards powerhouse and 52m cover prevails at
upstream side/the start of powerhouse cut slope. The bottom horizontal pressure shaft
will negotiate through the fresh shale with the Basic RMR value ranging from 40-52 falling
in the rock class IV-III category and poor to fair rock quality (generally less than Q=4). For
a tunnel, the sub horizontal bedding planes will provide relatively stable walls but in the
roof portion sometimes slab failures can be expected, if dissected with sub-vertical joints
at closer spacing
• The bedding planes (S0-270/05) in shale rock with north south strike in general having
westerly dips. Beside bedding, two to three prominent joint sets (S1-130/81, S2-076/81 &
S3-240/82) have dissected the rock mass in bottom horizontal pressure shaft,
• The average ground level at the proposed surface Power House location is EL +658.44m
towards upstream side and EL +656.67m towards downstream wall. The deepest
foundation level as per design requirement has been estimated at EL 584.45 m. Therefore,
the powerhouse pit will involve about 74m and about 72m deep vertical open excavation
to reach the foundation level towards upstream and downstream side walls respectively. In
case of downstream side slope, with the creation of wide platform for transformer hall at
El 641.15m level, the effective vulnerable cut height on this side may be around 15m or so.

• Overall, the sub-horizontally dipping bedding planes shall be advantageous factors for the
stability of the cut slope especially in case of upstream wall where those planes dip
towards the hill side. But the downstream wall will have bedding planes dipping to the
powerhouse pit.
• At the location of the surface power house, the depth of the overburden is about 2.0 to
5.0m followed by highly weathered shale upto depth about 7 to 9m. Underneath the highly
weathered shale moderately weathered to fresh, compact, thickly bedded shale is
encountered, with thin intermediate layers of sandstone in some depths. The foundation
level of the power house lies in fresh shale having relatively low strength under rock class
IV-III with RMR range 40-52
• Considering the topography, geological & geomorphological setup of the area, the location
of the Power House was optimized in such a way that the length of the WCS does not
exceed the limit where otherwise provision of Surge Shafts becomes a necessity. At the
same time transgression of cut slopes in to the moderately sloping ground located adjacent
to the near vertical cliffs exposing distressed/toppling quarzitic sandstone outcrops of the
proposed open excavation was minimized to avoid adverse geological conditions otherwise
leading to extensive slope stabilization measures.
• The excavation for the draft tube tunnel expected to negotiate through slight to moderately
weathered shale rock, under average top cover of about 30m to 37m. The RMR range of 35-
52 (Q less than 1 or 1) expected, falling in the class IV-III category. At the outlet portal of
the tunnel the rock cover is about 22m and the overburden depth is about 2.0m. Shale
being the weak rock, careful excavation methodology with adequate support system will be
adopted.
9.5.1.2 Advantages of Alternative – 1
The proposed layout envisages housing of surface powerhouse. The alignment of pressure
shaft/penstock is a combination of embedded penstock & buried penstock. The total length of the
pressure shaft/penstock is about 1035.712m. The initial stretch of the pressure shaft/penstock is
216.32m & 128.752m long buried (cut & cover) penstock. The buried penstock meet with 218.18m
VPS (including top & bottom bends) followed by 506.3 m long (average)HPS.
The shales met with are fresh, and near horizontally bedded in the foundation level and also in the
major portion of cut slope. As such, there may not be any slope stability issues during the excavation
and operation with careful excavation and concurrent adequate / suitable support measures. Further

the slopes will be supported by shotcrete to arrest further weathering and rock bolts/dowels or any
other deeper appropriate support elements arising out of analysis from design requirements.
This combination gives the biggest advantage in avoiding surge shaft/surge chamber which will result
in reduction in construction time and project cost. The difficulty of tunneling is reduced greatly by
having a buried penstock of 128.752m which gives additional flexibility in the construction. This also
creates multiple numbers of working faces and hence the construction schedule/ program is
optimized.
9.5.1.3 Disadvantages of Alternative – 1
The average ground level at the surface Powerhouse is EL +657m. As the proposed power house
involves little deeper excavation, intricate supporting arrangements for the cut slopes involving
anchors, providing berms at suitable depths etc. The sub surface investigation comprising drill holes is
completed. With the availability of complete surface and subsurface geological and geotechnical data,
a surface pit type powerhouse as contemplated for the present scheme, the suitability of proposing
Shaft Type Powerhouse can also be examined after the detailed design aspects in this regard keeping
view geological conditions of the powerhouse area.
9.5.2 Alternative-2
Four power intakes have been provided to takeoff from the Upper reservoir with three independent
steel lined penstock tunnel/pressure shaft of 445.45m long and 6.0m diameter and one independent
pressure shaft will bifurcate into two no of 4.25m diameter to convey water to the underground
powerhouse. A short Draft tube tunnel of 126.37m connects the Powerhouse & a common tail race
Surge Chamber of size 25.0 m (W)x 160.0 m (L). Five tunnels of 617.72 m long, 8.2 m diameter horse
shoe Tailrace tunnel takes off from the Surge Chamber to the Tailrace outlet and further lead water
into lower reservoir. Three penstocks/pressure shafts will be feeding 3 units of 320 MW and one
penstock/pressure shaft bifurcated in to two will be feeding 2 units of 160 MW each.
The location of the power house cavern was finalized keeping in to consideration two factors, viz.,
shortest possible access to the underground powerhouse, and minimum possible length of Pressure
Shaft. Further, with the proposed location of power house the location of transformer cavern and
surge chamber are firmed up in consideration of the requirements of rock columns in between. The
Main Access Tunnel to Power house, Ventilation/cable tunnel and other construction adits are also
planned for this proposed underground power house complex.
Since, in this alternative the length of Tailrace Tunnel is very long hence, the requirement of TRT surge
chamber has been estimated based on the thumb rule of L/H Ratio:

Where,
L = Length of Tailrace Tunnel

H = Net Head on turbine
L/H = 617.72/46.83 =13.19
For this alternative the L/H ratio in the Tailrace Tunnel is worked out to 13.19 which is greater than 5.
Hence, a Tailrace Surge chamber has been proposed in this alternative.
The layout plan are shown in drawing no. AA/POWER/CIVIL/2209/34
9.5.2.1 Geological & Geotechnical Appraisal
Based on the large scale geological mapping and geotechnical parameters recorded, a geological
longitudinal section along the proposed project layout was prepared (refer Plate No. 02) and
geotechnical parameters, viz., RMR, Q-Values, Cohesion & angle of friction were determined. From the
longitudinal section following inferences have been drawn.
• The location of the power intake, buried penstock and vertical pressure shaft are same as the
alternative-1.
• The location of the underground Power House is governed by the location of the Power Intake
position and length of the Penstock. The average ground level at the proposed underground
Power House location is EL + 657.8 m. The crown of the Power House is EL + 623.90 m. The
vertical rock cover above the Power House varies between 182.45m to 169.75m, which is more
than one and half times of the height of the cavern thus the ensuring the stability of the crown
on the prima-facie.
• The PH cavern will be excavated through the fresh granite with the RMR range of 64-74 falling
in the class II rock.
• The GIS cum transformer cavern is about 40 m from the power house with the dimension of 15
m (W) x 26.3 m (H) x 202.70 m (L). the foundation grade of the GIS cum transformer cavern is
fresh granite.
• The tail race tunnel will negotiate through class II with the RMR ranging from 64-74. At the
outlet portal of the tail race tunnel the rock cover is about 19m and the overburden depth is
about 6.0m.
9.5.2.2 Advantages of Alternative – 2
The length of pressure shaft/penstock is similar to alternative-1 in the proposed layout envisaged with
housing of underground powerhouse complex.

9.5.2.3 Disadvantages of Alternative – 2
This alternative requires 800.0 m long Main Access Tunnel and Adits of 1770m to reach the
projectcomponents, excavation of which will take longer duration to reach the Power House and start
works at Power House. In case of underground system, power house is not a single cavern alone, it
consists of a transformer cavern increasing the vulnerability of underground complex and surge
chambers which in turn impacts the construction time of the project.
9.5.3 Comparison of the Alternative I & II
A comparison of the salient features of alternative -1 and 2 are given in Table 9 2
Table 9 2: Comparison of the Salient Features of Alternatives- 1 and 2
Project Components Alternative - 1 Alternative - 2
Power Intake 4 Nos 4 Nos
Sttel lined pressure 4 pentocks, 7.1m dia 1035.712 4 pentocks, 7.1m dia 455.45m
shaft/penstock
m each each
Power House Surface Powerhouse Underground Powerhouse
Draft Tube Tunnel - 126.37m
Downstream Surge Chamber - Underground surge chamber

160.0 x 25 x 64m
Tailrace Tunnel 3 nos, 8m dia 268 m long & 3 Nos, 617.72 m long &
2no's of 5.65 m dia 268 m long 3no's of 8.2m dia Horse Shoe
Horse Shoe Shaped TRT Shaped TRT
TRT Outlet 5 Nos 3 Nos
Tailrace Channel (up to mouth of - 1780.0m

lower reservoir)
Construction Period 36 Months 54 Months
Project Cost 7048.62 crores 8458.34 crores
9.5.4 Conclusion
The following conclusions are drawn from the above alternatives.
➢ Water availability will remain same for all alternatives, as upper & lower reservoirs are same
for all alternatives

➢ The various levels viz., FRL & MDDL being kept same for all the alternatives, there is very small
variation in energy generation because of small variation in net head.
➢ Construction period is the least for alternative-1, while alternative-2 has maximum.
➢ Project cost is least for alternative-1 compared to other alternatives.
➢ Geological & geotechnical appraisal of the alternatives considered clearly indicate that during
the construction of the majority of underground project components envisaged in Alternative-
II, viz., Surge Shaft, Power House & Transformer Caverns, adverse geological conditions such as
poor rock mass conditions and low rock cover zones will be encountered.
➢ The proposed project economics are inter related with the duration of development, increased
time period increases the cost to completion. Considering the overall economics of the cost for
the project, the scheme under alternative–1 is found to be technically feasible and
economically viable and the same is adopted for further detailed investigation and accordingly
this report further deal with the geological details and appraisal of engineering components of
the project.
9.5.5 Seismicity
As per seismic Zoning map of India, the project area lies in Zone-III. The design seismic coefficients as
per IS: 1893 for Zone III recommended seismic coefficient of 0.04 has been adopted. Considering the
type of the structure (Dam-all types), an importance factor of 3.0 has been considered in the design.
Accordingly, the horizontal seismic co-efficient works out to be 0.12, which is considered adequate.
The vertical seismic co-efficient where applicable will be taken as half of the horizontal co-efficient. No
earthquake of significance intensity has been reported in the project area as well as in the surrounding
areas, which does not warrant the requirement of site specific seismic study. However, if required the
seismic parameters adopted in the design of Renukasagar Dam will be verified and adopted in the
design of Saundatti PSP Scheme.
Project Specific Seismic Studies:
For better understanding of the Seismicity of project area, a competent agency has been identified to
carry out the site-specific design parameters study for evaluating seismic design parameters for the
project components.
9.6 Saundatti AFRD Dam (Upper Reservoir)
9.6.1 General
The upper reservoir dam site is proposed at Latitude 15°51'28.27"N and Longitude75° 0'13.82"E. The
lower reservoir is at Latitude 15°50'36.29"N and Longitude 75° 0'37.32"E. The dam proposed at this

location envisages construction of 3782 m long Asphalt face rockfill embankment dam for the
formation of upper reservoir. The gross storage capacity of the upper reservoir is 0.66 TMC with a live
storage of 0.63 TMC keeping the FRL and MDDL at EL + 857 m and EL + 829 m respectively. The gross
storage capacity of the lower reservoir is 0.66 TMC with a live storage of 0.63 TMC with the FRL and
MDDL at EL + 659.00m and EL + 637.00m respectively.
9.6.2 AFRD Dam
Asphalt face Rockfill dam is adopted for formation of Upper reservoir of Saundatti PSP. The height of
the upper dam is about 35m and the max crest length is about 3782 m can provide adequate live
storage.
AFRD Dam is designed with Asphalt facing on Upstream face of the dam and a casing zone with slope
1.8H:1.0V U/S face and 1.7H:1.0V on D/S face. As the height at maximum section is 35m. The top width
of the rockfill dam is kept as 8.0 m. Parapet wall on upstream side and guard stones on D/S on top of
bund have been provided.
9.6.3 Stability Analysis of Rockfill dam
The stability analysis of Rockfill dam section has been done based on the principles cited in the book
“Concrete Faced Rockfill Dams” by Paulo T. Cruz, Bayardo Materon, Manoel Freitas. And also various
published literature is refereed to carryout the stability analysis of AFRD. The minimum targeted FOS
values are shown in Table 9 3
Table 9 3: Minimum Target FOS Values
Sl.No Loading Condition Min FOS Slope

1 Construction condition 1.0 Upstream & Downstream
2 Partial Pool 1.3 Upstream
3 Sudden drawdown 1.3 Upstream
4 Steady seepage 1.5 Downstream
5 Earthquake Condition:
(a) Steady seepage 1.0 Downstream
(b) Reservoir full 1.0 Upstream
Load Combination Embankment Slope SFMIN

End of Construction upstream + downstream 1.00
Steady State Seepage (Full Reservoir) downstream 1.50
Steady State Seepage (Full Reservoir) with
downstream 1.00
Earthquake

Sudden Draw Down upstream 1.30
Sudden Draw Down + earthquake upstream 1.00
The dam stability evaluation has been performed considering the total and effective stresses
(depending on the load combination) induced inside the dam embankment.
Stability analysis of AFRD is enclosed in Annexure –9.1.
Summary of the stability verification results are presented in Table 9 4.
Table 9 4: Upper Reservoir - Summary of the results of stability analysis
Minimum
Slope Shear strength Factor of
Condition acceptable Factor
considered parameters Safety
of Safety
Undrained (total)
End of construction Upstream 1.803 1.0
strengths
Undrained (total)
End of construction Downstream 1.713 1.0
strengths
Undrained (total)
Steady Seepage Downstream 1.713 1.5
strengths
Steady Seepage Undrained (total)
Downstream 1.510 1.0
(considering seismic load) strengths
Undrained (total)
Sudden drawdown Upstream 1.706 1.3
strengths
Sudden drawdown Undrained (total)
Upstream 1.480 1.0
(considering seismic load) strengths
9.6.4 Free Board
The free board has been computed with reference to the IS:10635:1993, “Freeboard requirement in
embankment dams – Guidelines”. The free Board has been worked out to 1.830 m & 1.840m above FRL
for upper and lower reservoirs respectively. However, the top of the dam for upper reservoir have
been adopted at EL. 860m (i.e. 3.0 m above the FRL) and Lower reservoir is 662.0m (i.e. 3.0 m above
the FRL). Detailed calculations for freeboard of upper dam and lower dam is enclosed in the
Annexure – 9.2(a) and 9.2(b) respectively.
9.6.5 Bottom Outlet
For Drawdown of Reservoir, option of spillway and bottom outlet were studied and in the prevailing
circumstances of very small flood discharge, spillway provision was not required. Therefore, provision

of bottom outlet has been provided.
The spillway requirement for Saundatti PSP is investigated for the following considerations
➢ To pass the PMF
➢ Pumping operations are continued for a longer duration
The PMF of the upper dam work out to 52.0 Cumec. The design storm duration is taken as 1.0 Hr. The
corresponding volume for upper dam works out to 0.187 MCM. The maximum rise in the water level
above FRL in the upper reservoir is negligible. As the volume of flood is very small, the same can be
contained in the reservoir itself and hence, no separate spillway provision is required to be provided
for the probable maximum flood. However, a low-level bottom outlet has been proposed for Upper
Reservoir for reservoir drawdown in case of any emergency. Detailed hydraulic calculations and the
reservoir routing curves are provided in Annexure 9.3(a).
The PMF of the lower dam work out to 66.0 Cumec. The design storm duration is taken as 1.0 Hr. The
corresponding volume for lower dam works out to 0.2376 MCM. The maximum rise in the water level
above FRL in the lower reservoir is negligible. As the volume of flood is very small, the same can be
contained in the reservoir itself and hence, no separate spillway provision is required to be provided
for the probable maximum flood. However, a low-level bottom outlet has been proposed for Lower
Reservoir for reservoir drawdown in case of any emergency. Detailed hydraulic calculations and the
reservoir routing curves are provided in Annexure 9.3(b).
The drawdown of reservoir is proposed to be done through an embedded steel pipe having
approximate length of 150.0 m. At up-stream side of the embedded Steel Pipe, it is proposed to have an
inclined Trash Rack and a Vertical slide gate. A Butterfly Valve and a Howell Bunger valve (HBV) are
proposed to install at exit of the Steel Pipe.
The HB valve breaks up the flow into a hollow aerated jet which allows dissipating large amounts of
kinetic energy over short distances when compared with pipe outlets. Enhanced jet development
before impact, reduces the hydrodynamic loads acting upon dissipating structures or the riverbed.
Howell-Bunger valves are cavitation and water hammer resistant, velocity limitless, and electronically
controllable water control systems.
The Butterfly Valve is an auxiliary arrangement which will be used during maintenance time of Howell
Bunger Valve. In same way the vertical slide gate shall be closed during repair, maintenance of Steel
pipe, Butterfly valve and Howell Bunger Valve. The bottom outlet arrangement details are provided.
9.6.6 Upper Reservoir Main Technical Parameters
The upper reservoir is formed by constructing a 35.0m high AFRD which can provide adequate live
storage. Asphalt facing Rockfill embankment is designed with slope 1.80H:1.0V U/S face and 1.7H:1.0V

on D/S face. As the height at maximum section is 35m. The top width of the dam is kept as 8.0 m.
Parapet wall on upstream side and guard stones on D/S on top of bund have been provided.
Stability analysis of AFRD dam is made for U/S slope and D/S slope for construction case with and
without earthquake condition.
The Plinth beam is taken 1.0m into the rock or continuous impervious strata. Grout -curtain in rock
will be done in consultation with GSI, after the foundations for cut-off trenches are exposed.
In reaches where Plinth beam directly rests on rock, the foundation treatment consists of a key 1.0 m
depth with bottom width of 4.0 m and the surface shall be treated for fractures and joints and
transition zone provided wherever necessary.
The minimum desired values of factors of safety for various loading conditions are presented in Table
95.
Table 9 5: Key parameters of the proposed Upper Reservoir & Upper Dam
4 Top of bund m EL +860
5 Full Reservoir Level (FRL) m EL +857
6 Minimum Draw Down Level (MDDL) m EL +829
7 Length of Asphalt facing Rockfill

m 3782
embankment
8 Height of Asphalt facing Rockfill

m 35.00
embankment
9 Upstream Slope m 1.8H : 1V
10 Downstream Slope m 1.7H : 1V
9.6.7 Lower Reservoir Main Technical Parameters
The lower reservoir is formed by constructing a 22.0m high AFRD which can provide adequate live
storage. Asphalt facing Rockfill embankment is designed with slope 1.80H:1.0V U/S face and 1.7H:1.0V
on D/S face. As the height at maximum section is 22m. The top width of the dam is kept as 8.0 m.
Parapet wall on upstream side and guard stones on D/S on top of bund have been provided.
Stability analysis of AFRD dam is made for U/S slope and D/S slope for construction case with and

without earthquake condition.
The Plinth beam is taken 1.0m into the rock or continuous impervious strata. Grout -curtain in rock
will be done in consultation with GSI, after the foundations for cut-off trenches are exposed.
In reaches where Plinth beam directly rests on rock, the foundation treatment consists of a key 1.0 m
depth with bottom width of 4.0 m and the surface shall be treated for fractures and joints and
transition zone provided wherever necessary.
The minimum desired values of factors of safety for various loading conditions are presented in Table
96.
Table 9 6: Key parameters of the proposed Lower Reservoir & Lower Dam
4 Top of bund m EL +862
5 Full Reservoir Level (FRL) m EL +859
6 Minimum Draw Down Level (MDDL) m EL +637
7 Length of Asphalt facing Rockfill

m 5740.00
embankment
8 Height of Asphalt facing Rockfill

m 22.00
embankment
9 Upstream Slope m 1.8H : 1V
10 Downstream Slope m 1.7H : 1V
9.7 Intake Structure
The intake structure of Saundatti PSP is proposed with Diffuser type and will be constructed in the
upper & lower reservoir. Generally, for normal hydroelectric projects, the bell mouth entrance is ideal
for generation (turbine) mode when water enters. In this case there is a minimal losses as water
accelerates through the bell-mouth and in to the penstock. But in pumped storage project, this design
may not be suitable for pumped storage operation as when in pumping mode water flows in the
opposite direction through the bell-mouth transition. Water discharging from the penstock will not
follow the bell-mouth and will continue as a column of water with minimum divergence.
Therefore, it is proposed to have long and gradual diffuser type of section at a shallow angle so that the

discharging pump mode flow can be maintained with an even velocity distribution and decelerate with
minimal losses prior to reaching the Intake tunnel.
Seven separate intakes are provided to feed the steel lined Penstock/ pressure shaft independently.
The intake has been provided with a trash-rack structure at the upstream end.
A Gated structure is proposed downstream of intake entry for housing the hydro mechanical Gates and
their operating mechanism. Each intake entry is equipped with an independent gate which is joined at
the hoisting platform level. Accordingly, there will be one number of service gates for each opening
and one number of emergency gates for all the openings.
Submergence of Intake is checked for a discharge corresponding to design discharge to prevent vortex
formation and entry of air in to the system as per IS: 9761 and accordingly the upper reservoir MDDL
and center line of intake is kept at EL +829m and EL +813.83 m respectively. The lower reservoir
MDDL and center line of intake is kept at EL +637m and EL +623.50 m respectively. Also, it is proposed
Antivortex devices in front of trash rack structures to reduces vortex formation during operation of
plant. The details of intake structure along with trash rack arrangement is shown in drawing enclosed.
9.7.1 Hydraulic Design
In Saundatti PSP, Four individual diffuser/horizontal type of intakes have been proposed to feed the
steel lined Intake tunnel/Penstock/ pressure shaft independently. The Four independent trashracks in
front of each intake structure has been proposed which will be positioned at 15 o inclined with vertical
with reference to the IS:11388-2012. Accordingly, the trashrack has been designed for velocity of
0.866 m/s with design discharge of 193.46 m3/s. The flare angle of 8 o has been adopted for the intake
wall between the start of intake and tunnel to minimize the head loss and to avoid cavitation in the
intake tunnel. Based on this criteria, four numbers of each 30.9 (W) X 10.2 m (H) intake with trash
rack arrangement of 3 panels of each 8.3 m (W) X 10.56 m (H) has been proposed. The hydraulic
calculations for sizing of intake & trashrack is attached as Annexure-9.4.
The minimum submergence of the intake has been checked with reference to the Clause No. 5.2 of
IS:9761-1995 for a discharge corresponding to design discharge to prevent vortex formation and entry
of air in to the system. Accordingly, the MDDL 829.0 m has been fixed in the upper reservoir based on
the requirement of minimum submergence to prevent vortex formation and entry of air in to the
tunnel. Center line elevation & invert level of intake has been provided at El. 813.83 m & El.810.28
respectively. The detailed hydraulic calculations for submergence are attached in the Annexure-9.4.
Also, an antivortex devises have been proposed in front of the intake structure with 1.5 m thick beams
at a spacing of 1.5 m to reduces vortex formation during operation of plant. The drawing details of an
Intake structure showing Plan & sections are given in the drawing. No. AA/POWER/2209/CIVIL/006

& 007.
An air vent pipe of 1200 mm diameter has been proposed at just downstream of the service gate of
Intake structure. This avoids the negative pressures in the Intake tunnel and expels the air during
filling of the Intake tunnel. The sizing of air vent pipe calculations are attached as Annexure 9.5.
A Gated structure is proposed downstream of intake entry for housing the hydro mechanical Gates and
their operating mechanism. Each intake entry is equipped with an independent gate which is joined at
the hoisting platform level. Accordingly, there will be one number of service gates for each opening
and one number of stoplog gates for all the openings.
9.7.2 Slope Support Design
The existing ground elevation at the proposed power intake is at EL 837.75 and to reach the invert
level of the Power Intake i.e. EL 810.28, open excavation will be carried out. The depth of the
overburden at the power intake site is in the range of 15 to 20m.
Slope stability analysis of the power intake portal is carried out and the stereonet plot of the existing
discontinuities is plotted. The strike of the joint set S0 is parallel to the cut slope but the slope cut
angle is more than the dip angle of the bedding plane hence the possibility of the planar failure is ruled
out.
Also, from the stereonet study there is no intersection of the joint sets with in the friction circle, hence
the wedge failure is also ruled out.
The soil (overburden) profile in the area exhibits cohesiveness and can withstand vertical cut slopes.
However, the slope cut in the overburden will be excavated with 1H:1V slope and 1V:4H slope shall be
adopted in the bedrock excavation. Rock slope will be supported with 4.0 m long rock bolts @ 2m c/c.
Drainage holes shall be provided in the rock cut slope to avoid the accumulation of the pore water
pressure during raining. The drawings for the slope cut are shown in drawing no:
AA/POWER/2209/CIVIL/006 & 007.
Adequate treatment as per site conditions achieved after excavation of foundations will be provided.
9.8 Hydraulic Design
9.8.1 Hydraulic Data
Salient features of the reservoir are as follows:
Description Upper Reservoir Lower Reservoir

Gross Storage Capacity 0.66 TMC 0.66 TMC
FRL EL +857 m EL +659.00 m
MDDL EL +829 m EL +637.00 m

9.8.2 Hydraulic Loss
Hydraulic loss in the water conductor system is arrived as follows:
9.8.2.1 Major Losses
Friction losses in pipes are calculated with Manning’s formula:
Where:
Hf = Head losses (m);
n = Roughness coefficient; - 0.011 is used as the WCS is steel lined
L = Length of the pipe (m);
R = Hydraulic Radius of the pipe (m);
V = Average water velocity in pipe (m/s);
9.8.2.2 Minor Losses
The minor losses are estimated with the following equation:
Where:
K = Head loss coefficient.
The Minor head loss coefficients are estimated as follows:
9.8.2.3 Trash Rack Losses
The Head Loss through Trash rack is calculated by the following equation:
Where:
kt = The trash rack loss coefficient
= 1.45 – 0.45 R – R^2
R = Ratio of Net area through the rack bars to the gross area of racks & support.

V = Velocity of flow through trash rack, computed on net area (m/s).
g = Acceleration due to gravity (9.81m/s2).
9.8.2.4 Entrance Losses
The Head Loss through entrance is calculated by the following equation:
Where:
He = head loss at the entrance (m)
Ke = loss coefficient for entrance
V = velocity at the entrance (m/s)
g = acceleration due to gravity (m/s2)
9.8.2.5 Loss in the Gate Groove
The Head Loss due to intake gate groove is calculated by the following equation:
Where:
Hg= gate head loss (m)
Kg = loss coefficient for gate
V = velocity through gate (m/sec)
The value of “Ke” is considered as 0.10
9.8.2.6 Bend Losses
The losses due to bend shall be calculated as per the following formula
Where:
Hb = head loss due to bend (m)
Kb = bend loss coefficient which depends upon the bend radius; conduit diameter and the
angle through which bend turns.

V = velocity through conduit (m/s)
9.8.2.7 Transition Losses
(A) Contraction Losses
The losses due to gradual contraction shall be computed from the following equation
Where:
Kc = loss coefficient for contraction
V1 = velocity before contraction (m/sec)
V2 = velocity after contraction (m/sec)
(B) Expansion Losses
The losses due to gradual expansion shall be computed from the following equation
Where:
Kc = loss coefficient for expansion
V1 = velocity before expansion (m/s)
V2 = velocity after expansion (m/s)
9.8.2.8 Loss through Valves
The losses due to valve have been calculated as per the following formula
Where:
Hb = Valve head loss (m)
K = loss coefficient for Valve
V = Velocity through Valve (m/s)
Detailed Head Loss calculations for the project in generation mode and Pumping mode are
appended in Annexure 9.6. The head losses of the project have been worked out using

design discharges for generation mode and pumping mode with various capacity machines
are 193.46 m3/s (large unit) & 97.73 m3/s (small unit) and 161.70 m3/s (large unit) & 84.60
m3/s (small unit) respectively. The summary of head losses along-with head loss coefficients
for generation as well as pumping modes and the corresponding net heads are provided in
the Table 9 7 & Table 9 8 respectively.
Table 9 7: Summary of Head loss & Coefficients worked out in the Proposed Water Conductor System
Head Loss Coeff. Used Generation Mode Pumping Mode

Si. Head Loss at Various Small Large
No. Components of WCS (Generation (Pumping Large Unit Small Unit
Unit Unit
Mode) Mode)
Head Loss in 'm' Head Loss in ‘m’
Losses due to Trashrack
1 0.345 - 0.0132 0.0132 - -
at Intake
Friction Loss between
2 Trashrack & Start of 0.014 0.014 0.0141 0.0141 0.0116 0.0116
penstock
Contraction Losses (at
3 Start of Upper Reservoir 0.100 0.222 0.0721 0.0721 0.2820 0.1418
Intake)
Friction Loss upto Gate
4 0.014 0.014 0.0125 0.0125 0.0167 0.0078
groove
Friction Loss at trans-
5 ition from rectangular 0.014 0.014 0.0443 0.0443 0.0099 0.0212
gate to circular
Transition loss from
6 0.100 0.094 0.0456 0.0456 0.0472 0.0472
square to Rectangle
Transition loss from
7 0.017 0.017 0.00001 0.00001 0.00001 0.00001
square to circular
8 Loss at the Gate 0.100 0.100 0.241 0.2413 0.1686 0.1686
Loss at Bend :1 Bend at
9 0.030 0.030 0.040 0.0370 0.0260 0.0520
start
10 Loss at Bend : 90o 0.120 0.120 0.294 0.2940 0.2060 0.2060
Loss in the Conduit due
11 0.011 0.011 1.354 1.2444 0.9727 0.8694
to friction

Head Loss Coeff. Used Generation Mode Pumping Mode
Si. Head Loss at Various (Generation (Pumping Small Large
No. Components of WCS Mode) Mode) Large Unit Unit Unit
Small Unit
Head Loss in 'm' Head Loss in ‘m’

Branch Unit Pressure
12 0.011 0.011 - 0.2451 - 0.1848
Shaft
13 Branch Losses 0.320 0.425 - 0.3898 - 0.3617
Horizontal Bend at
14 0.020 0.02 - 0.0253 - 0.0191
Branch
15 Contraction at MIV 0.100 0.349 0.7041 0.7290 0.6849 0.4978
Friction loss in Trans-
16 0.011 0.011 0.116 - - -
ition
17 Loss in Butter Fly Valve 0.130 0.130 1.070 1.1109 0.7493 0.7603
18 TRT - Friction Loss 0.014 0.014 0.2931 0.4780 0.2047 0.3603
TRT Transition Loss
19 0.001 0.100 0.0189 0.0194 0.0132 0.0146
(Outlet)
Friction Loss at TRT
20 0.014 0.014 0.0094 0.0351 0.0061 0.0106
Transition
21 TRT Outlet Gate Loss 0.100 0.100 0.0751 0.1506 0.01049 0.1135
Transition Losses (from
22 0.041 0.100 0.0180 0.0367 0.0199 0.0208
gate to TRT)
Friction Loss at TRT
23 Transition (from gate to 0.014 0.014 0.0069 0.0625 0.0120 0.0238
TRT)
Transition Losses (at
24 0.215 0.100 0.1002 0.0981 0.030 0.0343
Outlet Structure)
Friction Loss at Outlet
25 0.014 0.014 0.0012 0.0013 0.0046 0.0059
Structure Transition
Losses due to Trashrack
26 - 0.345 - - 0.0112 0.0071
at Outlet
Losses in Tail Race
27 - - - - 0.000 0.000
Channel
Total Loss 4.5436 5.4003 3.4418 3.9418
Added extra for
0.5000 0.5000 0.5200 0.3900
Minor Losses
TOTAL HEAD LOSS 5.0436 5.9003 3.9618 4.3318
≈ 5.1000 6.0000 4.0000 4.4000
Table 9 8: Net Heads Adopted in the Project

Generation Mode Pumping Mode
Description
Large Unit Small Unit Large Unit Small Unit
FRL of Upper Reservoir 857.00 857.00 857.00 857.00
MDDL at Upper Reservoir 829.00 829.00 829.00 829.00
FRL at Lower Reservoir 659.00 659.00 659.00 659.00
MDDL at Lower Reservoir 637.00 637.00 637.00 637.00
Total Gross Head 195.00 195.00 195.00 195.00
Total Head Loss 5.10 6.00 4.00 4.40
Rated Net Head 189.90 189.00 199.00 199.40
9.9 Transient Analysis
A transient is a temporary flow and pressure condition that occurs in a hydraulic system between an
initial steady-state condition and a final steady state condition. Two most common causes of transient
initiation are the moving system boundaries viz. turbines and valves. In hydropower projects with
pressurized pipe network, the flow through turbine is controlled through guide vanes/valves. Rapid
opening or closing of guide vanes/valves results in hydraulic transients in water conductor system.
The water hammer study of Saundatti PSP has been analysed using WHAMO Software for large unit
and small units separately without surge tank. The transient model has been analysed considering
complete water conductor system from the Intake of Upper reservoir considering upper reservoir as
reservoir for turbine/generation mode and Lower reservoir as reservoir for pumping mode. The
transient analysis of the project has been carried out with reference to the IS:7396:1985 &
IS:7357:1974.
The following water conductor system parameters have been adopted for the WHAMO analysis:
Table 9 9: Water Conductor System Parameters used in Transient Analysis
Rated Capacity of the project = 1280MW

(3x 320 MW +2x160 MW)
Rated design discharge of the project = 193.46 Cumec (for large unit) & 97.73
(Generation Mode) Cumec (for small unit)
Rated design discharge of the project (Pump = 161.70 Cumec (for large unit) & 84.60
Mode) Cumec (for small unit)
Full Reservoir Level (FRL) at Upper Reservoir = El. 857 m
Minimum Draw Down Level (MDDL) at Upper = El. 829 m
Reservoir
Full Reservoir Level (FRL) at Lower Reservoir = El.659.00 m

Minimum Draw Down Level (MDDL) at Lower = El. 637.00 m
Reservoir
Total Length of Water Conductor System = 7.10 m Ø 1035.712 m long Water
Conductor System & 8.00 mϕ, 268 m long
TRT (for large unit)
Type of Turbine & Nos. = Reversible Francis Turbines of 3 Nos.
(large), 2 Nos. (small)
9.9.1 Turbine/Generation Mode
The transient study has been carried out under emergency operating condition and the model has
been analysed for the following cases during turbine/generation mode:
Table 9 10: Time Sequence Applied for Case-1: Shutoff of Generation
for Large Unit

Transient Cases Along Unit No-3
Time (s) Guide Vane/valve Opening (%)
Shutoff of Generation at FRL of Upper Reser- 0 100
voir (i.e. El. 857 m)
10 0
Shutoff of Generation at MDDL of Lower 0 100
Reservoir (i.e. El. 637.00 m)
10 0
Table 9 11: Time Sequence Applied for Case-3: Start of Generation
For longest WCS with Large Unit

Load Acceptance (0-100) at MDDL of Upper 0 0
Reservoir (i.e. El. 829 m)
20 100
1000 100
Load Acceptance (0-100) at FRL of Lower 0 0
Reservoir (i.e. El. 659.00 m)
20 100
1000 100

9.9.2 Pumping Mode
The transient study has been carried out under emergency operating condition and the model has
been analysed for the following cases during pumping mode:
Table 9 12: Time Sequence Applied for Case-2: Shutoff of Pumping
for Longest WCS with Large Unit

Shutoff of Pumping at FRL of Lower 0 100
Reservoir (i.e. El. 659.00 m) 13.5 0
Shutoff of Pumping at MDDL of Upper 0 100
Reservoir (i.e. El.829 m) 13.5 0
Table 9 13: Time Sequence Applied for Case-4: Start of Pumping
for Longest WCS with Large Unit

0 0
Load Acceptance (0-100) at MDDL of 20 100
Lower Reservoir (i.e. El. 637.00 m)
1000 100
0 0
Load Acceptance (0-100) at FRL of
20 100
Upper Reservoir (i.e. El. 659.00 m)
1000 100
9.10 Water Conductor System
9.10.1 General
Water under pressure is conveyed to the turbines through steel lined top pressurized Tunnel upto exit
portal followed by buried penstock, steel lined vertical pressure shaft, & steel lined bottom
pressurized tunnel upto Main Inlet Valve (MIV). The steel liner is proposed in view of the high strength
and flexibility required under different operational modes of the machine also no surge shaft is
provided in the water conductor system.
A 7.1 m diameter circular Penstock / Pressure shaft takes off from Intake Structure to feed the units of
Power House. 4 nos. of Penstock/ Pressure tunnel each of 7.1 m diameter will lead water from intake
to the powerhouse out of which one of the penstock is bifurcated into two smaller units of 5. 0m dia to
feed the two smaller units. 4 numbers of buried penstocks (128.752 m long will be connected at top of

vertical bend of each individual Vertical pressure shaft. 4 nos. of vertical pressure shaft of an average
height of 218.18m including top and bottom vertical bends will be connected to the bottom horizontal
pressure shaft. From this, 4 numbers of bottom horizontal pressure shafts, in which 3 numbers of an
average length of 506.30 m & 7.1 m diameter each will feed water to 3 numbers of Francis turbines
(i.e. for Larger units) of 320 MW and 1 number of 7.1 m diameter bottom horizontal pressure shaft
will be bifurcated into two of 5.0 dia. after a length of 392.75 m from the vertical shaft and lead water
to two horizontal unit pressure shafts of each 113.55 m long to feed the unit capacity of 160 MW each
(i.e. smaller units).
The plan & L-section details for large unit & small unit of the water conductor system/ pressure shaft
is shown in the Drawing nos. AA/POWER/CIVIL/2209/002 & 003 respectively.
9.10.2 Economic Diameter of Pressure Shaft
Economical diameter of the pressure shaft is calculated to ensure that the annual cost, which includes
the cost of power lost/required due to friction during generation/pumping, the annual depreciation and
the annual cost of maintenance is minimum. The mathematical procedure is elaborated in IS:11625-
1986 (Criteria for Hydraulic Design of Penstocks). Based on this procedure, the following equations have
been used for computation of ‘D’.
Cost of Excavation: -
Cost of Concrete Lining: -
Cost of Steel line in Penstock: -
Annual Cost of Power Lost in generation due to head loss: -
Annual Cost of Power Required in Pumping due to head loss: -
Where,

D = Diameter of the penstock in ‘m’
Pe = Unit cost of excavation in ‘Rupees/m3’
Pc = Unit cost of concrete lining in ‘Rupees/m3’
Cs = Cost of steel in ‘Rupees/kg’
i = Percentage by which steel in penstock is overweight due to provision of stiffeners,

corrosion allowance etc.
σj = Allowable stress in steel in ‘N/mm2’
ej = Joint efficiency of penstock
QG = Discharge through penstock in ‘m3/s’
n = Rugosity coefficient in Manning’s formula
EG = Turbine-Generator Efficiency
Ep = Pump-Motor Efficiency
Lf = Load Factor during Generation/Pumping
PkWh,G = Cost of 1 kWh of energy in Rupees during generation
PkWh,P = Cost of 1 kWh of energy in Rupees during pumping
For sizing the economic diameter of pressure shaft, various sizes starting from 5.0 m to 7.10 m has
been selected and the calculations have been carried based on the above formulas. The detailed
calculations are provided in the Annexure-9.8. From the calculations a graph has been developed
between annual charges on capital cost & the corresponding diameter. From the graph it is observed
that, the annual charges are minimum at 7.1 m diameter. Hence, 7.1 m diameter has been selected for
the project based on economic diameter analysis. The table showing the various diameters and the
corresponding cost vs Diameter curve is shown below in the Table-9.15 & Figure-9.1 respectively.
Table 9 14: Various diameter of Tunnel considered for the Selection of Economic Diameter
Cost of
Cost of Cost of Cost of Annual Cost of Total
Pumping
Diameter Excavation concrete Penstock Cost (Rs. Generation Annual
S.no Loss (Rs.
in “m” (Rs. In Lining (Rs. (Rs. In In Loss (Rs. In Cost (Rs. In
In
Lakhs/-) In Lakhs/-) Lakhs/-) Lakhs/-) Lakhs/-) Lakhs/-)
Lakhs/-)
D CE CC EP CG CP
6=0.11[3
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9=[6+7+8]
+4+5]
1 5.00 1.00 1.28 5.56 0.863 2.597 0.78 4.236

2 5.50 1.21 1.55 6.73 1.045 1.562 0.47 3.073
3 6.00 1.44 1.85 8.01 1.243 0.982 0.29 2.519
4 6.50 1.69 2.17 9.40 1.459 0.641 0.19 2.291
5 7.10 2.02 2.59 11.22 1.741 0.400 0.12 2.261
6 7.50 2.26 2.89 12.52 1.943 0.299 0.09 2.331
7 8.00 2.57 3.29 14.24 2.210 0.212 0.06 2.485
8 8.50 2.90 3.71 16.08 2.495 0.153 0.05 2.694
9 9.00 3.25 4.16 18.02 2.797 0.113 0.03 2.944
10 9.50 3.62 4.64 20.08 3.117 0.085 0.03 3.227
11 10.00 4.01 5.14 22.25 3.454 0.064 0.02 3.537
12 10.50 4.42 5.66 24.53 3.808 0.050 0.01 3.872
13 11.00 4.85 6.21 26.92 4.179 0.039 0.01 4.229
4.500
4.000
3.500
3.000
Cost in Rs. Lakhs/-
2.500
2.000
1.500
1.000
0.500
0.000
4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00 12.00
Diameter of Tunnel in "m"
Figure 9.1:
Detailed Project Curve
Report Showing Diameter
of Saundatti vs Cost Project
Pumped Storage of Tunnel for Selection of Economic Diameter
Page 132
9.10.3 Rock Support & Grouting Details of water conductor system
9.10.3.1 Top Inclined Pressure Shaft
Based on the investigations carried out, the water conductor system will negotiate different rock types
of variable strength with different rock conditions along its length.
General rock mass classification for each rock conditions have been carried out considering the
orientation of tunnel, tunnel grade rock mass, tunneling drive direction and recorded geotechnical
parameters of different discontinuities and other geotechnical parameter of rock mass, viz., strength,
weathering condition, RQD & ground water condition.
Design of Support system
The support system is proposed according to the prevalent rock classes estimated during geological
mapping and based on estimated rock quality on RMR basis.
The details of the typical support system for various rock mass classes for 7.1m diameter underground
excavations on the basis RMR classifications is presented in Table 9 15.
Table 9 15: Support Recommended for 7.1m diameter Top Inclined Pressure shaft
RMR Value Excavation Rock Bolts Shotcrete Steel ribs
81-100 Full Face 25.0 mm diameter, 3.0 m Spot SFRS No Steel ribs
Class-I (Very long spot grouted anchors
Good Rock)
61-80 Full face and Systematic 25 mm 50 mm thick No Steel ribs

Class II complete support diameter grouted rock SFRS in the
(Good Rock) anchors of 3.0 m long @ crown only.
1.75 m c/c staggered at
1.75 c/c along the tunnel
in the crown (top
120°only)
41-60 Full face and Systematic 25 mm diameter 100 mm Thick No Steel ribs
Class III grouted rock anchors of 3.0

(Fair Rock) complete support m long @1.50 m c/c SFRS in crown

staggered at 1.50 c/c along and walls.
the tunnel
21-40 Full face and Systematic 25 mm 100 mm thick No Steel ribs

Class IV complete support diameter grouted rock SFRS in the
(Poor Rock) anchors of 5.0 m long crown and side
@1.50 m c/c staggered at walls.
1.00 c/c along the tunnel
< 20 Heading and Systematic 25 mm 100 mm thick ISMB 250 @

Class V benching diameter grouted rock shotcrete in 750 mm c/c
(Very Poor excavation Install anchors of 3.0 m long the crown and with 75 mm
Rock) support @1.50 m c/c staggered at side walls. thick pre-
concurrently with 1.00 c/c along the tunnel cast lagging
excavation.
Shotcrete as soon
as possible after
blasting.
9.10.3.2 Vertical Pressure Shaft
Each pressure shaft comprises of 218.18 m long vertical shaft with top and bottom bends. Surface
excavation shall be carried out till the junction of the top bend and the vertical pressure shaft.
Excavation in the overburden shall be carried out in 1V:1H and in the bed rock it will carried out in
1H:6V.
Rock support system for the open cut rock slope includes shotcrete with wire mesh and grouted rock
anchors. Systematic drainage holes shall be provided in the bed rock. Drawing showing the details of
the support system for the excavation for the vertical pressure shaft is shown in drawing no:
AA/POWER/CIVIL/DPR/012.
The Pressure Shaft will be excavated from the top with a pilot hole and from the bottom with a raise
climber. The vertical shaft will be provided with steel liner throughout the length and minimum
500.00 mm thick concrete backfilling. Concrete grade of M20 will be used to backfill the gap behind
the steel liner.
9.10.3.3 Bottom Horizontal Pressure shaft
The bottom horizontal pressure shaft 7.1 m diameter steel lined will lead water from seven vertical
pressure shafts and feed water Francis turbines. Three numbers horizontal pressure shafts straight
join to Three bigger units of 320 MW and one after bifurcation will connect to two smaller units of 160

MW.
The bottom pressure tunnel is provided with 500 mm thick cement concrete lining considering the
minimum thickness required for the installation of the steel liner. Backfill concrete of M20 grade is
used to backfill the gap behind the steel liner.
9.11 Design of Support system
The details of the typical support system for various rock mass classes for 7.1m diameter underground
excavations on the basis RMR classifications is presented in Table-9.16.
9.11.1 By Wedge Analysis
To ascertain the adequacy of the typical support system proposed earlier on the basis of empirical
method, wedge analyses have been carried out using Unwedge software with the mapped joint sets
data. Detailed analyses indicate that wedges are formed on the floor, left wall, right wall and
roof/crown of the tunnel.
Wedge analysis is carried out with the support system of Class III. The support system based on the
empirical approach for class III rock i.e. 100 mm thick Shotcrete (SFRS) and 25mm dia 3.0 m long
grouted anchor bars at spacing of 1.5 m x 1.5 m is applied in wedge analysis. The support system is
checked to satisfy the above critical wedge failures. The pictorial representation of the wedges is also
presented.
The details of the typical support system for various rock mass classes is like top inclined pressures
tunnel.

Figure 9.2: Different views of wedge with support
Wedge analysis carried out with the support system as envisaged from empirical method based on
RMR basis.
Thus, all these unstable wedges become stable when the support measures proposed in table are
provided. The details analysis of the wedges of the bottom horizontal pressure shaft is presented in
Annexure 9.9.
Numerical analysis:
Numerical analysis is carried out in Phase2 software to find the displacement of the tunnel. As per the
geological surface mappng carried out in the project area, the tunnel is expected to pass through RMR
class II rock. The RMR values ranges from 64 to 74. Also the tunnel support system is checked for the
RMR class IV with value ranges from 30 to 40. Generalized Hoek and Brown material model is used
for the analysis.
A blast damage zone of 2.0 m is considered from the tunnel boundary with the disturbance factor of
D=0.3. Intact rock properties are taken from the rock mechanics test carried out on the core samples.
The tunnel is modelled in phase2 with graded mesh and 6 noded triangle mesh element at the actual
ground elevation. The boundary conditions are shown in the drawing given bellow. Gravity stress
loading is applied on the tunnel. Phase2 model of the tunnel is as shown below.

Analysis and Results
The displacement of the tunnel before the installation of the support system is as shown below. The
maximum displacement observed was 1.4 mm at the spring level. The displacement is less than 1% of
the tunnel opening which is 8.2 mm.

The support system calculated by the wedge analysis, is incorporated in the model to find the post
support behavior of the tunnel.
After the installation of the support system, the displacement and length of the plastic zone is reduced.
Similar analysis is carried out for the RMR rock class IV.
The detailed design of the support system of the Intake Tunnel/ Horizontal Pressure shaft is presented
in Annexure-9.9 of Volume II: Designs.
Grouting:
Consolidation Grouting and Contact Grouting is proposed in the entire length of the tunnel.
Consolidation Grouting and Contact Grouting is proposed in the entire length of the tunnel. Contact
grouting should be done at the bottom part of the steel liner also to avoid the cavities between the
steel liner and the concert backfill. The grouting details are provided based on the general practice
and IS codes. The details of the grouting hoes, pressure and location are provided in the drawings.
holes, pressure and location are provided in the drawings.
List of drawings pertinent to the rock support system and grouting is tabulated below:
S. No. Drawing Title Drawing Number
Intake tunnel/Pressure shaft 7.1 m ø- Excavation AA/POWER/2209/CIVIL/008

1.
and Rock Support details

Intake tunnel/Pressure shaft 5.3 m ø- Excavation AA/POWER/2209/CIVIL/009
2.
and Rock Support details
Vertical Pressure shaft 7.1 m ø- Excavation and AA/POWER/2209/CIVIL/010

3.
Rock Support details
Intake tunnel/Pressure shaft 7.1 m ø- Grouting AA/POWER/2209/CIVIL/011

4.
details
5. Vertical Pressure shaft 7.1 m ø- Grouting details AA/POWER/2209/CIVIL/012
Intake tunnel/Pressure shaft 5.3 m ø- Grouting AA/POWER/2209/CIVIL/013

6.
details
9.11.2 Penstock Bifurcation
Out of four water ways, one number of horizontal pressure shaft will be bifurcated into two branches,
and each branch shall carry water to feed 1 unit each of 160 MW. Velocity of flow in the branches is
kept equal to the velocity in the main penstock in order to minimise the head loss and turbulence at
bifurcation point. Hence, 5.0 m diameter is found to be suitable in keeping view to maintain the same
velocity in main & branch pressure shaft. The detailed calculations for sizing of branch pressure shaft
is provided in the following table:
Description Main Pressure Shaft Unit Pressure Shaft (Unit-1 & 2)
Design Discharge, Q 193.46 m3/s 97.73m3/s
Diameter, D 7.1 m 5.0 m
Cross sectional area, A 39.57 m2 19.625 m2
Velocity of flow, V 4.89 m/s 4.98 m/s
9.11.3 Steel Liner of Water Conductor System
The entire length of upstream water conductor system from end of intake gate to MIV has been
proposed with steel liner. The structural design of steel liner of water conductor system has been
worked out based on criteria provided in the IS:11639 (Part-2)-1995. Accordingly, the thickness of
steel liner is assessed keeping in view the internal pressure including water hammer effect. No rock
participation has been accounted for the design steel liner from the start of vertical pressure shaft to
MIV. The remaining upper portion of intake tunnel/burred penstock has been designed without rock
participation. The rock participation has been worked out based on the IS: 4880 (Part-VII) -2011. The
detailed calculations for rock participation is presented in the Annexure-9.10(a). Two types steels

grades have been used for this water conductor system viz., ASTM-537 Cl-2 steel has been used upto
the top of vertical bend and ASTM-517 Gr-F grade steel has been used from start of top vertical bent to
MIV considering the water hammer pressures in the water conductor system.
The detailed calculations of steel liner thickness in the water conductor system for large unit is provided
in the Annexure-9.10(b), for external pressure Annexure-9.10(C). The thickness of plate varies from
20 mm to 22 mm with ASTM 537 Class-II from Intake gate to top of Vertical pressure shaft. From top of
vertical pressure shaft to MIV the thickness varies from 32 mm to 36 mm with ASTM 517 Grade-F steel.
The arrangement details of steel liner for Large Unit & Small unit along the water conductor system has
been shown in the Drawing. No. AA/POWER/2209/CIVIL/014.The maximum length of each ferrule will
be 2.5 m. However, before erection, two ferrules of 2.5 m will be joined together in the shop and each fer-
rule of 5m will be transported for erection. All the joints will be welded joints. All shop welding of the
longitudinal joints will be double V-butt welds. The field welds will be single V-butt welds with backing
strip. All the shop welds will be checked by radiographic examination while all field welds will be tested
by ultrasonic examination. Hydraulic testing of ferrules will be carried at 1.5 times the design head be-
fore erection. The summary of steel liner for each large unit & small unit along water conductor system
have been provided in the Table 9 16 & Table 9 17 respectively.
Table 9 16: Summary of Steel Liner Thickness along Water Conductor System of Large Unit
Chainage of Water Thickness of

Si.No. El. at Start El. at End Steel Grade
Conductor System Steel Liner
'm' 'm' 'm' 'mm'
1 0 - 16.360 495.000 494.920 20.000
2 16.360 - 61.360 494.920 492.190 20.000
3 61.360 - 106.360 492.190 489.460 20.000
4 106.360 - 151.360 489.460 486.730 20.000
5 151.360 - 196.360 486.730 484.000 ASTM537 20.000
6 196.360 - 246.080 484.000 481.000 20.000
7 246.080 - 263.070 481.000 473.950 20.000
8 263.070 - 280.060 473.950 458.530 22.000
9 280.060 - 321.075 458.530 417.515 32.000
10 321.075 - 362.090 417.515 376.500 30.000
11 362.090 - 379.760 376.500 360.590 32.000
12 379.760 - 397.430 360.590 354.000 34.000
ASTM517
13 397.430 - 466.805 354.000 354.000 34.000
14 466.805 - 536.180 354.000 354.000 36.000
15 536.180 - 605.555 354.000 354.000 36.000

16 605.555 - 674.930 354.000 354.000 36.000
Table 9 17: Summary of Steel Liner Thickness along Water Conductor System of Small Unit
Chainage of Water Thickness of

Si.No. El. at Start El. at End Steel Grade
Conductor System Steel Liner
'm' 'm' 'm' 'mm'
1 0 - 16.590 495.000 494.920 20.000
2 16.590 - 56.590 494.920 492.190 20.000
3 56.590 - 96.590 492.190 489.460 20.000
4 96.590 - 136.590 489.460 486.730 20.000
5 136.590 - 176.590 486.730 484.000 ASTM537 20.000
6 176.590 - 213.960 484.000 481.000 20.000
7 213.960 - 230.840 481.000 473.900 20.000
8 230.840 - 247.720 473.900 458.560 22.000
9 247.720 - 288.750 458.560 417.530 32.000
10 288.750 - 329.780 417.530 376.500 30.000
11 329.780 - 347.450 376.500 360.590 32.000
12 347.450 - 365.120 360.590 354.000 34.000
13 365.120 - 436.820 354.000 354.000 ASTM517 34.000
14 436.820 - 508.520 354.000 354.000 36.000
15 508.520 - 603.220 354.000 354.000 36.000
16 603.220 - 678.220 354.000 354.000 26.000
9.12 Power House
9.12.1 General
The surface powerhouse has been planned to accommodate 5 units (3X320 MW+2X160 MW) of
Francis reversible type Turbines corresponding to 1280MW installed capacity. The layout of
Powerhouse has been prepared as per the recommendations contained in IS 12800 (Part 2/sec1):
1989. Detailed calculations for arriving the powerhouse dimensions are for larger and smaller are
enclosed in Annexure 9.11(a) & 9.11(b) respectively.
The powerhouse complex size is 125.45m (L) x 25.5m (W) x 54m (H). The center line of the turbine is
proposed at EL + 603.0 m corresponding to minimum Tail water level (MDDL) of El + 637.0 m at
Tailrace outfall. The service bay level has been fixed at El. 617.2 m with size of 30 m (L) X 26.5 m (W).
the unloading bay is proposed at El. 641.15 m with size of 15 m (L) X 26.5m (W) and located on right
side to the power house. The crane beam level has been proposed at El. 649.70 m.
The powerhouse will be of indoor type so that all the erection and maintenance will be taken up in the

powerhouse itself. Due considerations to the surface drainage, ventilation, lighting etc., has been given
while fixing the size and location of various components. The location of Gantry columns is finalized
considering the economy and the machine layout.
9.12.2 Machine Hall
There are four main floors in the machine hall. The lowest floor is at El.595.56 m and houses the main
inlet valve (MIV) for the units. Cooling water pumps, dewatering & drainage pumps shall be located on
the MIV floor. The larger units are spaced at 26.0m c/c, while the smaller units are spaced at 23.0m
c/c. The Pump Turbine floor is provided at EL. 607.00 m and houses the various pump turbine
auxiliaries and oil pressure units for governors including MIV for each unit. The generator floor is
provided at EL 611.75 m and houses various Unit Auxiliary boards (UAB's) neutral grounding cubicles,
HP lubrication system, marshaling panels, etc. Necessary hatches for erection and removal of MIV shall
be provided at various floors in the machine hall. The machine hall floor is at EL. 617.200 m. This is
the main operating floor and houses the unit control boards, control panels and excitation panels e tc.
The provision and arrangement of various electro-mechanicals /electrical equipment, control
equipment and other auxiliaries are discussed in detail in Electro-mechanical chapter. The entrance
for the machine hall shall be through the lift & stair case provided from the unloading bay.
9.12.3 Transformer Building
The transformer building of size 139.35m (L) x 15.0m (W) x 24.30 m (H) is located downstream of the
powerhouse at EL 640.40 m. The building will be founded on rock. GIS floor has been kept at EL
651.10 m. An EOT crane of capacity 10T with crane beam at EL. 662.20m has been provided in the
transformer building for handling various equipment. The structural framework of the building shall
be of RCC with Beams, slabs & columns and the covering Roof shall be structural steel Truss.
9.12.4 General design of the power house
9.12.4.1 Selection of site and general layout
Location of surface power house has been selected to avoid possible influences from slope excavation
during power house construction, whilst keeping the length of the waterways as short as possible to
avoid surge shaft.
The longitudinal axis of the power house is almost parallel to the contour lines. The layout of tailrace
tunnel and tailrace channel alignment. Unloading bay at EL 641.15 placed higher to erection bay at
EL617.20 to optimise excavation and ease in approach.
The control room building is placed d/s parallel to the B-Line of the power house at elevation of
machine hall/ erection bay EL 617.20. The location of outdoor GIS building & switchyard have been

located further d/s on the terraces at elevation EL 641.15 m & EL 651.90 m respectively. Switchyard
area of about 41 m x 120 m. and connected by approach road to power house with a gradient of less
than 5%. Control cables from GIS building/ switchyard to the power house will be laid for the
electrical connections to the terminals of the transformers.
9.12.4.2 Layout and main dimensions
General concept of designs
The lower reservoir MDDL 637.00 m is utilised for the setting out of centre line of turbine at EL 603.00
to retain reasonable suction head in pumping up as per IS 12800 (Pt-II). The general arrangements of
floors and dimensioning of EM equipment’s are also firmed up in accordance of IS 12800 (Pt-II)
provisions.
Main dimensions of the power station
Unit spacing: 26.0/23.0 m (320/160 MW)
Superstructure height (foundation to roof top): 39.50 m
Machine hall (height/ length/ width): 53.7/125.45/25.5 m
Sub-structure (max. height / max. length / max. width): 18.5/125.45/25.5 m
Erection bay (length / width): 30.00/26.5 m
Hoist of main crane hook above erection bay floor: 8.55 m
Unloading Bay (length / width): 15.00/26.5 m
Arrangement of floors and rooms
Horizontal layout
The floors of the power house will contain the following items of electro-mechanical equipment or
rooms:
Saundatti PSP-Arrangement of floors and rooms with description
Elevation Technical description of component
583.75m Dewatering pump sump bottom elevation
585.30m Drainage pump sump bottom elevation
587.51m Bottom of draft tube:Draft tube dewatering piping
595.56m Turbine inlet valve (MIV) floor
Foundation for butterfly valve, drainage for penstock, access to drainage and
dewatering sumps, Cooling water panel, DT drain valve access, Oil sump tank for

governor and MIV.
603.00m Centre line axis of spiral casing and distribution manifold:
Spiral casing, turbine runner, C/L of butterfly valve, branch for service water.
607.00m Turbine floor:
Turbine pit, cooling water pumps and piping, HS lubrication unit, drainage and
dewatering pumps & valves, compressor depression system, HP air compressor
system, LP air Compressor system, brake and jack panel, brake dust collector,
gauge panel, HMC/governor and Electrical control panel for MIV.
611.75m Generator floor:
Generator-motor with auxiliary equipments, NG cubicle, Excitation transformers,

unit auxiliary boards, Inert gas bank(for generator-motor fire protection).
617.20m Machine hall floor & it's upstream annexure floor:
AC excitation panels (VSI), Generator circuit breakers with LVAT cubicle, phase
reversal disconnecting switch, drainage and dewatering starter panel, DCDB,
Battery charger, control and relay panels, PLCC/FOTE panel, flood pumps and
control panel.
622.60m Single phase generator transformers (for 320MW units) with spare limb, three
phase generator transformers (for 160 MW units), Nitrogen injection fire
protection system (NIFPS), Station transformers
641.15m GIS Equipment and Outdoor yard
617.20m Erection bay floor for main equipment assembly
628.20m Top of beam for EOT crane at erection bay
641.15m Unloading bay, approach road
649.70m Top of beam for EOT crane at unloading bay
Vertical connections in the powerhouse
The erection bay (floor level 617.2 Mt.) is connected to the un loading bay (floor level 641.15 Mt.) by a
staircase/service lift. Another four stair cases are located in machine hall floor of the power house
(facing downstream) where connects all floors between elevations 595.56 Mt. EL MIV floor and 617.20
Mt. EL Machine hall floor. Two openings of 3.0 m X 4.0 m and 4.8 m X 6.1 m, for equipment service and
access for handling of main inlet valve respectively have been provided for each unit in the machine
hall floor, generator floor and turbine floor, to facilitate erection and maintenance.

9.12.5 Structural design of the powerhouse
9.12.5.1 General considerations
All calculations have been done in accordance with the respective Indian standards for Limit State
design. Corresponding material properties will be as specified below.
9.12.5.2 Material properties
Concrete
In accordance with IS 456:2000, concrete will be grade M 25 (specified Characteristic compressive

strength of 150 mm cubes at 28 days: 25 N/mm2), unless otherwise specified.
Steel reinforcement
Reinforcement will be grade Fe 415/500 (0.2% proof stress or a yield stress of 415/500 N/mm 2), cold
worked, high-yield strength deformed bars, in accordance with IS:1786. Nominal clear cover shall be
as per IS456:2000 (Clause 26.4), except where concrete in contact with water or ground water, in
which case the cover to the longitudinal bars shall be increased to 50 mm.
Structural steel (for metal works)
Structural steel will be standard quality steel conforming to IS 226 or fusion welding quality steel
conforming to IS 2062.
9.12.5.3 Loadings
Unit weights
Unit weights will be in accordance with IS 1911, but to allow for unavoidable variations, the following
values will be assumed for design:
- Mass concrete: 2400 kg/m3
- Reinforced concrete: 2500 kg/m3
- Rock: 2600 kg/m3
- Steel: 7850 kg/m3
- Common burnt brick clay: 1920 kg/m3
Live Loads
The live loads include uniformly distributed floor loads, equipment standing loads, equipment wheel
loads, trucks, crane lifting loads and similar items. The uniform floor live load will be disregarded for
areas occupied by equipment whose weight is specifically included in the dead load. However, uniform
live load must be considered for accessible areas beneath equipment, such as beneath a raised water

tank on legs. The following minimum uniform live loads shall be used:
➢Stairs, corridors, offices, locker rooms, laboratories: 5 kN/m 2
➢Walkways and platforms: 5 kN/m2
➢Turbine floor and turbine distributor floor: 15 kN/m2
➢Generator floor: 15 kN/m2
➢Control room floor and battery room floor: 10 kN/m2
➢Unloading Bay: 5 kN/m2
➢Erection bay (EL 601.20 m): 50 kN/m2
➢Machine Hall (EL 601.20 m): 25 kN/m2
➢Storage area, Mechanical workshop: 15 kN/m2
➢Roof: 1.5 kN/m2
➢Elsewhere: 5 kN/m2
Wind loads
Wind loads are defined as per the provisions of IS 875 (Part 3): 1987: The basic wind speed Vb. for a
50-year return period, is 39 m/s (see Fig. 1 of the code). As per Clause 5.3.2, the Terrain is Category 3.
The power house is a Class C structure as it is longer than 50 m. As per IS 875 (part 3), the importance
factor, kl, is 1.06. The terrain, height, and structure size factors, k2, are as follows:
• Up to a height of 10 m, k2= 0.82
• At 15 m, k2= 0.87
• At 20 m, k2= 0.91
• At 30 m, k2= 0.96
• At 50 m, k2= 1.02
The topography factor, k3, equals 1 + Cs, where C =0.36 for slopes steeper than 17° (this is the case for
the power house). The factors is given by Fig. 14 and, for the topography prevalent at the power house,
was determined to be 0.3. Therefore, the topography factor, k3, is 1.11.
The design wind velocity is V z= Vb x kl x k2 x k3, and the design wind pressure in N/mm 2 is equal to by
pz= 0.6 Vz2. For wind parallel to the longer power house side, i.e. for Ɵ=0°:
• The windward pressure coefficient is +0.7, the leeward pressure coefficient is -0.4.
• The pressure coefficient for the roof is -0.8 on the windward half and -0.6 on the leeward half

of the roof.
For a wind direction perpendicular to the long power house side, i.e.: for Ɵ =90°,
• The windward pressure coefficient (Cpe) is +0.8, the leeward pressure coefficient is -0.l, and
each sidewall has a pressure coefficient of -0.5.
• The pressure coefficient for the roof is -0.8 on the windward half and -0.8 on the leeward half
of the roof.
The power house erection bay doors can be assumed closed during strong winds. Therefore, for the
calculation of the internal pressure coefficients, the power house will be considered to have medium-
sized openings of between 5 to 20% of the wall area. It will be examined for values of internal pressure
coefficient (Cpi) of +0.5 and -0.5, to determine which causes the greater effect on the individual
structural elements.
The wind load, F, acting in a direction normal to such as element is:
F= (Cpe - Cpi) x A x Pd
where A is the surface area of the structural element and P d is its corresponding design wind pressure.
Seismic loads:
The horizontal Seismic coefficient A h for a structure shall be determined by the following expression
as per IS1893(Part-1):2002
Ah=ZI/2R x (Sa/g)
Where
Z= Zone factor as per (Table-2) =0.10
I=Importance factor as per Table-6 (Clause:6.4.2) =1.5
R=Response reduction factor as per (Table-7) (Clause:6.4.2) =3
T=Fundamental Natural Period as per (Clause-7.6.2) Ta =0.075h 0.75
Sa/g=Average response acceleration coefficient as per Fig-2
Horizontal seismic coefficient Ah
Total Weight of the structure to be considered for seismic 1.0DL+0.5LL
Total Seismic Base shear=W x Ah
All the above-mentioned loads (Dead Load, Live Load, wind Load/Seismic Load & Crane Loads) are
been applied in STAAD Pro considering a single bay of the Power House and the structure is being
analysed for different load combinations as per the relevant codal provisions and based on the STAAD
analysis results the Column sizing has been finalised and Designed. The deflections are also checked

based on the analysis results and are kept within the allowable limits. All the detailed load calculations
and results are attached in separate Annexure 9.12.
9.12.5.4 Method of design
General
The limit state method will generally be used for structural design, adopting characteristic and design
values and partial safety factors for loads and material strengths, as specified in IS 456-2000, Clause-5,
to ensure an adequate Degree of safety and serviceability.
For the serviceability limit state, all elements of concrete will then be checked for deflection and crack
limitations, as per IS: 456-2000, Clause-42 and Clause-43, and in accordance with Clause-23.2.1, for
vertical deflection limits, and Section Clause-26.3 for Spacing of reinforcement.
Note, however. that instead of crack width calculations, as per Annex-F of IS 456:2000, one can limit
the reinforcing steel tensile stress to 195 N/mm 2 for the service level combination. This corresponds
approximately to an average crack width limitation of 0.3 mm, as given in IS 456-2000 Clause-35.3.2.
For-walls and slabs exposed to moisture, or in contact with soil or ground water, the crack limit will be
0.2 mm, and this can be allowed for by limiting the tensile stress of the reinforcing steel to130 N/mm 2.
Design stresses
Design bond stresses to be assumed for M 25 concrete are as follows:
➢Plain bars: 1.4 N/mm2
➢Deformed bars: 2.24 N/mm2
Compression (Flexural): as per Clause-38 of IS 456:2000
Compression (Direct): as per Clause-39 of IS 456: 2000
Shear: this value depends on the quantity of longitudinal tension reinforcement and concrete
grade provided. but shall not exceed 2.8 N/mm2 for M 20 concrete.
Torsion (pure and combined with shear): as per Clause-40 of IS 456:2000.
For structural steel conforming to IS 226 or IS 2062, the permissible axial, bending, shear,
bearing and combined stresses shall be as given in IS 800. section III.
Applicable codes and standards
The following codes and standards are applicable to this section of the design report:
➢ IS 456: Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete (fourth revision-(2000)
➢ IS 2062: Specification for structural steel (fusion welded quality) - (latest quality)

➢ IS 800: Code of practice for the use of structural steel in general building construction
(latest revision)
➢ IS 875: Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and
structures (latest revision)
➢ IS 1786: Specification for high strength deformed steel bars and wires for concrete
reinforcement (latest revision)
➢ IS 1893: Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures (latest revision)
➢ IS 4326: Code of practice for earthquake resistant design and construction of buildings
(latest revision)
➢ IS 1905: Code of practice for structural safety of buildings. masonry walls (latest
revision)
➢ IS 1911: Schedule of unit weights of building materials (latest revision)
➢ IS 4247: Code of practice for the structural design of surface hydel power stations: Part
1 - data for design; Part 2 - Superstructure
➢ IS 7207: Criteria for the design of generator foundations for hydel power stations
➢ IS 7418: Criteria of design for spiral casings (concrete and steel)
➢ IS 807: Code of practice for design, manufacture, erection and testing (structural
portion) of cranes and hoists
➢ All other relevant standards or codes
9.13 Stability of cut slopes
9.13.1 Cut slope details
The average ground elevation at the proposed power house is varies from EL655.98 to EL 659.6 and
the deepest excavation is proposed at EL 584.45 including the draft tube pit. The height of vertical
excavation is about 71.5 m.
The foundation grade of the proposed power house is at EL 584.45 and service bay is at EL 617.2. The
excavation below the service bay shall be filled by spiral case and turbine floor concreting. Thus, out
of the 71.5 m vertical excavation, about 41.87 m would be the permanent cut slope.
At the proposed location of the power house, It is estimated that the thickness of the slope wash
material is about 5 m to 7m and the depth of the weathered zone below the slope wash material is
about 25 to 40 m. The foundation grade rock for the proposed power house will be fresh granite.
Excavation of cut slopes in slopewash is proposed to be carried out in 1H: 1V slope. Below the

slopewash material, excavation in the weathered zone will be carried out in 1H:4V, with a bench of 4 m
and vertical depth of 10m. Below the weathered zone excavation will be carried out in 1H: 6V slope
down to the deepest foundation with 4m wide berm after each 12m vertical bench excavation.
Based on the geological mapping in and around the power house area, the following discontinuity data
are collected.
Joint Dip Dip Direction

S0 05 270
S1 81 130
S2 81 076
S3 82 240
Figure 9.3: Pole Density for Powerhouse area

Figure 9.4: Joint Sets details
9.13.2 Stereonet Plots
Discontinuities details
Based on the above analysis, all joints are drive and sets are defined through density of poles. The
average values of joints sets are given in Table 9 18
Table 9 18: Joint sets of powerhouses
Avg. discontinuity
Persistence Spacing Aperture Roughness Infillin
Set No Dip Dip
(m) (cm) (mm) Condition g
Direction Amount
S0 270 05 2-15 1-6 Tight- 0.5 RU-RP None
S1 130 81 0.5-10 5-10 2.5 - 5 SR-RP Soft
S2 076 81 0.50-5.0 7-20 Tight - 2 SR None
S3 240 82 0.5-5.0 15-30 Tight - 1 RP None
The detailed analysis of the power house rock cut slope stability is attached as Annexure-9.13 of
Volume II: Designs.
From the above study, the rock support system comprising of 6.0 m long grouted rock anchors at
1.5x1.5m spacing, 75mm thick shotcrete with wiremesh is provided. Also systematic 6.5 m long
drainage holes @3.0 m c/c will be provided to keep the sloped safe from developing pore pressure
during rainy season.

CS-1 (Right Slope)
Limit Equilibrium Analysis:
The stability analysis is carried out using the limit equilibrium method using slide software. The slide
model with the properties of the material is shown as below.
Support Design:
Various combinations of the support system are analysed by varying the spacing and length of the
grouted rock anchors. In the overburden, 6.0 m long SDA @ 1.5mx1.5m spacing is planned. In the
rock, the 4.0 m long GRA @ 1.5mx1.5m long is planned. The slide model with the proposed support
system is

The summary of the factor of safety various combinations are as below.
Slope Condition-1 Condition-2 Condition-3

S. No
Direction Without support With support Condition-2+EQ
Downstream
1
Slope (CS) 1.699 2.287 1.911
From the above study, the rock support system comprising of 4.0 m long grouted rock anchors
at 1.5mx1.5m spacing, 75mm thick shotcrete with wire mesh is provided. The output of the
designed support system is incorporated in the powerhouse drawings.
CS-1A (Left Slope):

Support Design:
system is


S. No
Upstream
1
Slope (LS) 1.630 1.995 1.589
The detailed analysis of the power house rock cut slope stability is attached as Annexure-9.13 of
Volume II: Designs.
CS-1A (Right Slope):
Support Design:

system is

S. No
Upstream
1
Slope (LS) 1.455 2.462 1.867
9.14 Tail Race Tunnel
Three nos. each of 8.0 m dia and two nos. each of 5.65m circular shaped tail race tunnels start off from
the machines in the power house. The draft tube liner at the outlet is connected to the Tail Race
Tunnel. These tunnels are sized in such a way that they will allow a smooth passage of water from the

machine. The length of each tunnel is about 268 m. A vertical slide gate type with a hydraulic hoist has
been proposed at the end of each of the Tail Race Tunnel. These gates shall be operated during the
maintenance of the generating units, from a platform at the top of TRT outlet at EL. 662.0m.
The invert of the tail race tunnel at the outlet part is EL 619.50. the ground elevation at this location is
about EL 645.0.
The Tail Race Tunnel is proposed to be Concrete Lined (min. 400mmthk) in the entire reach.
Necessary transitions shall be provided at the relevant locations. Detailed Design of concrete lining is
enclosed in Annexure 9.14.
Design of support system
The details of the support system for various rock mass classes for 8.00m diameter TRT on the basis
RMR classifications is presented below.
81-100 Full Face 25.0 mm diameter, 4.0 Spot SFRS No Steel ribs
Class-I (Very Good Rock) m long spot grouted
anchors
61-80 Full face Systematic 25 mm 50 mm thick SFRS No Steel ribs

Class II diameter grouted rock in the crown only.
(Good Rock) anchors of 4.0 m long
@ 1.75 m c/c staggered
at
1.75 c/c along the
tunnel in the crown
(top 120°only)
41-60 Full face Systematic 25 mm 100 mm Thick No Steel ribs
Class III diameter grouted rock SFRS in crown
(Fair Rock) anchors of 4.0 m long and walls.
@1.50 m c/c staggered
at 1.50 c/c along the
tunnel

21-40 Full face Systematic 25 mm 100 mm thick ISMB 250 @ 750
Class IV diameter grouted rock SFRS in the crown mm c/c with 75 mm
(Poor Rock) anchors of 4.0 m long and side thick pre-cast lagging
@1.50 m c/ c staggered walls. in the heading.
at
1.00 c/c along the
tunnel
< 20 Heading and Systematic 25 mm 100 mm thick ISMB 250 @ 500

Class V (Very Poor Rock) benching diameter grouted rock shotcrete in the mm c/c with 75 mm
excavation anchors of 4.0 m long crown and side thick pre-cast lagging
@1.50 m c/ c staggered walls. in the heading and
at benching
1.00 c/c along the
tunnel
Wedge analysis carried out with the support system as envisaged from empirical method on RMR
basis. The table below summarizes FoS without and with support for critical wedges.
Numerical Analysis:
Numerical analysis is carried out in Phase2 software to find the displacement of the tunnel. As per the
geological surface mapping carried out in the project area, the tunnel is expected to pass through RMR
class III rock. The RMR values ranges from 64 to 74. Generalised Hoek and Brown material model is
used for the analysis.
A blast damage zone of 2.0 m is considered from the tunnel boundary with the disturbance factor of
D=0.3. Intact rock properties are taken from the rock mechanics test carried out on the core samples.
The tunnel is modelled in phase2 with graded mesh and 6 noded triangle mesh element at the actual
ground elevation. The vertical rock cover is about 27.83m, hence on the top, the model is considered
upto to the actual top elevation. The boundary conditions are restrained in both the directions in the
invert, and restrained in the x directions on the sides Gravity stress loading is applied on the tunnel.
Phase2 model of the tunnel model is as shown below.

Analysis and Results- RMR class III:
The displacement of the tunnel before the installation of the support system is as shown below. The
maximum displacement observed was 0.18 mm at the bottom level. The displacement is less than 1%
of the tunnel opening which is 8.6 m.

The support system calculated by the wedge analysis, is incorporated in the model to find the post
support behavior of the tunnel.
After the installation of the support system, the displacement and length of the plastic zone is reduced.
The detailed support system analysis of the TRT is presented in Annexure-9.9(c) of Volume II: Designs.
List of drawings pertinent to the excavation, rock support system and grouting is tabulated below:
S. No. Drawing Title Drawing Number

Tail Race Tunnel 8.0 m ø- Excavation and Rock AA/POWER/2209/CIVIL/023
1
Support details
Tail Race Tunnel 5.65 m ø- Excavation and Rock AA/POWER/2209/CIVIL/024
2
Support details
3 Tail Race Tunnel 8.0 m ø- Grouting details AA/POWER/2209/CIVIL/025
4 Tail Race Tunnel 5.65 m ø- Grouting details AA/POWER/2209/CIVIL/026
9.15 Outlet Structure
The Outlet Structure is located at the end of the tailrace tunnel located near the proposed lower
reservoir. The outlet structure will be function as intake structure during pumping mode. One number
straight type Outlet structure for each unit having symmetrical approach has been envisaged on the
lower reservoir to pump back the design pump discharges of 654.28 cumecs back into the upper
reservoir. The size and shape of the outlet located at the end of the tail race tunnel opening in the

lower reservoir is almost similar to the power intake. The tail race tunnel inlet entry is provided with a
smooth transition for entry of the required discharges.
9.15.1 Hydraulic Design
Five numbers of individual diffuser/horizontal type of intakes have been proposed at the end of five
numbers of Tail Race Tunnels (TRT) to pump the water from lower reservoir. From the five numbers
outlet structures, 3 numbers are big size which will be connected to large units TRT’s and two
numbers are small size which will be connected to small unit TRT’s. The opening of outlet structure
and trash racks arrangements are designed considering the pumping discharge of each unit.
In all the outlet structures the trash rack has been aligned at 15 o inclined with vertical with reference
to the IS:11388-2012. Accordingly, the trashrack has been designed for velocity of 0.799 m/s (i.e. to
maintain the velocity at trashrack is less than or equal to 1.0 m/s) for large unit with pumping
discharge of 161.70 m3/s. Correspondingly, for small unit the trashrack has been designed for velocity
of 0.665 m/s. The flare angle of 9o has been adopted for the outlet structure wall between the start of
Outlet and TRT to minimize the head loss and to avoid cavitation in the Tail Race Tunnel. Based on this
criteria, Three numbers of each 26.0 (W) X 11.5 m (H) outlet opening with trash rack arrangement of 3
panels of each 6.67 m (W) X 11.9 m (H) has been proposed for large units. Similarly, two numbers of
each 23.0 (W) X 8.5 m (H) outlet opening with trash rack arrangement of 3 panels of each 5.67 m (W)
X 8.8 m (H) has been proposed for small units. The hydraulic calculations for sizing of outlet structure
& trashrack is attached as Annexure-9.15.
The minimum submergence of the outlet has been checked with reference to the Clause No. 5.2 of
IS:9761-1995 for a discharge corresponding to pumping design discharge to prevent vortex formation
and entry of air in to the system. Accordingly, the MDDL at the outlet structure has been fixed at El.
637.00 m based on the requirement of minimum submergence to prevent vortex formation and entry
of air in to the tunnel. Center line elevation & invert level of outlet structure has been provided at El.
622.325 m & El. 619.50 respectively. The detailed hydraulic calculations for submergence are attached
in the Annexure-9.15. Also, an antivortex devises have been proposed in front of the outlet structure
with 1.5 m thick beams at a spacing of 1.5 m to reduce vortex formation during pumping. The drawing
details of an Outlet structure showing Plan & sections are given in the drawing.
9.16 DESIGN OF HYDROMECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
9.16.1 GENERAL
The Hydro mechanical equipment at Saundatti PSP will comprise the following:
➢ Intake Trash Racks
➢ Intake Maintenance Gates

➢ Intake Service Gates
➢ Outlet Service Gates
➢ Outlet Stoplog Gates
➢ Outlet Trash Racks
Design features and other details of these equipments are presented in the following sections.
9.16.2 Intake Trash Racks
A trash rack is proposed in front of the intake conduits to prevent the entrance of any trash. The trash
rack is designed to have minimum head loss and minimum vibration. Trash racks are proposed with
an inclination of 750 with horizontal apron. The steel flats/bars of size 75 mm x 16 mm thick with
rounded edge @ 150 mm c/c has been provided as trash bars. The clear spacing between the trash
bars shall however be verified by the supplier of the turbine machines based on the minimum
spacing's of the runner blades. Each panel of the Trash rack has been supported with suitable number
of horizontal girders so that, the unsupported length of the trash bars should not be more than the
value permitted as per IS:11388-2012. Lifting lugs have been provided to facilitate the lowering &
lifting of each trash rack panel. All the units /panels of the trash rack are interchangeable. The trash
panels will be supported on main piers, intermediate piers & rib beams of reinforced concrete. The
technical parameters of intake trash rack elements are provided in the Table-9.20.
Table 9 19: Technical Parameters of Intake Trash Racks
i No. of Vent 4
ii Clear Width between Middle Piers (m) 8.3 (1 no. for each unit)
iii Clear Width between side piers (m) 8.3 (2 no. for each unit)
iv Vertical height of TRs (m) 10.56
v Sill level EL 810.28 m
vi Full Reservoir Level (FRL) EL 857 m
vii Inclination of trash rack 75º (with horizontal)
viii Spacing between trash bars 150mm
ix velocity through the racks restricted to 1.0 m/sec
9.16.3 Intake Stoplog Gates
One number of Maintenance gate for all intake openings of size each 5.6 m wide x 7.1 m high are
proposed on upstream of intake service gate to facilitate repair and maintenance of Intake service
gates. Sill level of gate is proposed at EL. 810.28m. The gates have been proposed in accordance with
IS: 4622-2003 for water head corresponding to FRL 857 m. The gates have an upstream skin plate and
upstream sealing. The gate will be operated by mean of one common gantry crane of adequate
capacity provided at operating EL. 860 m. The stoplog gate will be operated (lifting & lowering) under

balanced head condition. The technical parameters of intake Stoplog gate are provided in the Table-
9.21.
Table 9 20: Technical Parameters of Intake Maintenance Gate
i Type of gate Vertical lift Fixed Wheel

ii No. of gates 1 Nos.
iii No. of opening 4 Nos.
iv Size of opening 5600 mm(W) x 7100 mm(H)
v Full Reservoir Level (FRL) El. 857 m
vi Sill Elevation El. 810.28 m
vii Water head 46.72 m
Operating (Lifting & lowering) will be done
viii Opening & Closing Conditions
under balanced head
ix Type of Hoist Common Movable gantry crane
x Number of Hoist 1 Nos.
9.16.4 Intake Service Gates
Four number of Service gate for each intake opening of size of 5.6 m wide x 7.1 m high are proposed at
start of penstock to cut-off water flow from the upper reservoir into each penstock. Sill level of gate is
proposed at EL. 810.28 m. The gates have been proposed in accordance with IS: 4622-2003 for water
head corresponding to FRL 857 m. The gates have downstream skin plate and downstream sealing.
The gate will be operated by means of independent rope drum hoist of adequate capacity mounted on
steel trestle provided at operating EL. 860 m. The gate has been designed for closure by its self weight.
The gate will be stored on dogging beams on top of operating platform at EL 860.0 m. The service gate
will be operated (lifting & lowering) under unbalanced head condition. The technical parameters of
intake service gate are provided in the Table-9.22.
Table 9 21: Technical Parameters of Intake Service Gate
9.16.5 Outlet Service Gates
Five number of Service gate for each outlet opening are proposed at the end of Outfall structure to cut-
off water flow from the lower reservoir into TRT. Three number of service gate of size 6.30 m wide X
8.0 m high for each of the larger units and two number of service gate of size 4.5 m wide X 5.65 m high
for each of the smaller units. Sill level of all the gates is proposed at EL. 619.50 m. The gates have been
proposed in accordance with IS: 4622- 2003 for water head corresponding to FRL 659.00 m. The gates
have downstream skin plate and downstream sealing with respect to the pumping. The gate will be
operated by means of independent hydraulic hoist of adequate capacity provided at operating EL.
662.00 m. The service gate will be operated (lifting & lowering) under unbalanced head condition. The

technical parameters of outlet service gate are provided in the Table-9.23.
Table 9 22: Main Technical Parameters of Outlet Service Gate
i Type of gate Vertical lift fixed wheel type

ii No. of gates 5
iii No. of opening 5
6300 mm (w) x 8000 mm (h) for larger units (3
iv Size of opening Nos.)

4500 mm (w) x 5650 mm (h) for smaller units (2
Nos)
v Full Reservoir Level (FRL) 659.00 m
vi Sill Elevation 619.50m
vii Operating (lifting & lowering) will be done
Opening & Closing Conditions
under unbalanced head condition.
viii Operation of hoist Independent Hydraulic Hoist
ix Operating level El.662.00m
9.16.6 Emergency Gates
Two set of emergency gates has been proposed in downstream of service gate in respect of emergency.
One set of emergency gates of size 6.3 m wide X 8.0 m high for 3 numbers of larger units and one set of
emergency gates of size 4.5 m wide X 5.65 m high for 2 numbers of smaller units. Sill level of all the
gates is proposed at EL. 619.50 m. The gates have been proposed in accordance with IS: 4622-2003 for
water head corresponding to FRL 659.00 m. The gates have upstream skin plate and upstream sealing
with respect to the pumping. The gate will be operated by mean of one common gantry crane of
adequate capacity provided at operating EL. 662.00 m. The stoplog gate will be operated (lifting &
lowering) under balanced head condition. The technical parameters of outlet stoplog gate are
provided in the Table-9.24.
Table 9 23: Technical Parameters of Outlet Stoplog Gate
i Type of gate Vertical lift fixed wheel

ii No. of gates 1 set for larger units & 1 set for smaller units
iii No. of opening 5
6300 mm (w) x 8000 mm (h) for larger units (3
iv Size of opening Number)

4500 mm (w) x 5650 mm (h) for smaller units-(2
Number)
v Full Reservoir Level (FRL) 659.00 m
vi Sill Elevation 619.50m

Operating (Lifting & lowering) will be done under
vii Opening & Closing Conditions
balanced head condition
viii Operation of hoist Common Movable gantry crane
ix Operating level El. 662.00 m
9.16.7 Outlet Trash Racks
A trash rack is proposed in front of the outlet structure to prevent the entrance of trash during
pumping. The trash rack is designed to have minimum head loss and minimum vibration. Trash racks
are proposed with an inclination of 75 0 with horizontal apron. Each panel of the Trash rack has been
supported with suitable number of horizontal girders so that the unsupported length of the trash bars
should not be more than the value permitted as per IS:11388-2012. Lifting lugs have been provided to
facilitate the lowering & lifting of each trash rack panel. All the units /panels of the trash rack are
interchangeable. The trash panels will be supported on main piers, intermediate piers & rib beams of
reinforced concrete. The technical parameters of outlet trash rack elements are provided in theTable 9
24.
Table 9 24: Technical Parameters of Outlet Trash Racks
i No. of Vent 5
6.67 m (for larger units) & 5.67 m (for
ii Clear Width between Middle Piers (m)
smaller units)
iii Clear Width between side piers (m)
smaller units)
iv Vertical height of TRs (m)
smaller units)
v Sill level EL 619.50 m
vi Full Reservoir Level (FRL) EL 659.00 m
vii Inclination of trash rack 75º (with horizontal)
viii Spacing between trash bars 150 mm c/c
ix velocity through the racks restricted to 1.0 m/sec
9.16.8 Instrumentation And Control System
The various instruments including remote control system for the remote control operation of all gates
along-with programmable computerized automatic reservoir monitoring control system is provided in
the main control room, in addition to individual operation system provided at top of pier. The
programmable reservoir monitoring and control system shall include all necessary instrumentation
required for monitoring and control of reservoir including water level measuring systems, gate
position indication transducers, discharge measuring devices etc. The communication system shall be

through fibre optic cable. Provision of power back up of adequate capacity will also be made (under
the scope of electromechanical works) for the operation of hydro mechanical equipment in case of
power failure. The diesel generating set shall be located in the control rooms to provide back-up
supply to gate operating equipments in case of power failures.
The drawings pertinent to the hydromechanical works are tabulate below.
S.No Title of the Drawing Drawing No.
1 Intake Structure - General Arrangement of Trashrack AA/POWER/2209/H&M/001
Intake Structure - General Arrangement of Maintenance Gate AA/POWER/2209/H&M/002

2
(sheet 1 of 2)
Intake Structure - General Arrangement of Maintenance Gate AA/POWER/2209/H&M/002

3
(sheet 2 of 2)
Intake Structure - General Arrangement of Service Gate (sheet AA/POWER/2209/H&M/003

4
1 of 2)
Intake Structure - General Arrangement of Service Gate (sheet AA/POWER/2209/H&M/003

5
2 of 2)
Outlet Structure - General Arrangement of Stoplog Gate - AA/POWER/2209/H&M/004

6
Large Unit (sheet 1 of 2)

7

8
Small Unit (sheet 1 of 2)

9
Outlet Structure - General Arrangement of Service Gate - AA/POWER/2209/H&M/006

10

11

12

13

Outlet Structure - General Arrangement of Trashrack - Large AA/POWER/2209/H&M/008
14
Unit & Small Unit

CHAPTER 10 ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL DESIGNS
10.1 GENERAL
The utility of Pumped Storage Project has evolved a long way as one of the power system tools to
perform multiple functions. While the fixed speed synchronous generator can meet the peak power
demand in quickest possible way, the pumping operation has immense contribution in maintaining
frequency at lean hour and maintaining the plant load factor of Thermal generation plants duly
utilizing the inexpensive power available in grid during off peak to convert in to storage energy.
Considering the above scenario, seven no's of fixed type units has been considered for the basic design
of the electro – mechanical equipment.
The proposed Saundatti Pumped Storage Project of 1280MW is envisaged to have 5 vertical reversible
pump-turbines driven generating units (3 X 320MW & 2 X 160 MW). The prime mover for all five
generators shall be Reversible Vertical Francis Turbine suitable for bidirectional operation. During the
Generator mode of operation, the power shall be generated at 18 KV for both 320 MW units and 160
MW units. The generated power will be transmitted through Generator Step-Up Transformer (GSUT)
located in trasformer room. HT side of generator transformer shall be connected to 400kV Gas
insulated switchgear (GIS). Auxiliary power required during start-up of plant will be derived from
400kV GIS through Station Transformer (ST) to the medium voltage system (11kV).
The same turbine shall act as a pump and shall operate in Motor mode for pumping the water from
lower reservoir to upper reservoir.
The installed capacity of a pumped storage scheme is influenced by the requirements of daily peaking
power requirements, flexibility in efficient operation of units, storage available in the reservoirs and
the area capacity characteristics. The key to the flexibility of the pumped storage hydro is to speed the
facility that can go from storing energy (pumping water into the upper water body) to the generation
of energy (releasing water from the upper water body through the turbines to the lower body of
water). The pure reversible turbine equipment requires stopping and reversing the water flow, this
can take only 5 to 6 minutes per cycle, which is an added advantage.
10.1.1 Basis for selection of machines
Size of larger & smaller units are based on the limiting width of powerhouse and diameter of water
conductor system consists of surface penstocks & vertical and horizontal underground pressure shafts
for the following design considerations:
➢ Suitable for handling and fabrication of ferrules
➢ Maximum excavated diameter for underground vertical and horizontal pressure shaft in consider-
ation of rock column in between and top cover requirements to suit geological conditions
➢ Size of adit for transportation of ferrules for construction of pressure shaft

➢ Limiting the size of runner
➢ Economical diameter of the pressure shaft in consideration of techno-commercial aspects as per
IS:11625-1986
➢ Limiting to the width of 25.5 m of pit excavation of surface powerhouse
Based on the above studies the optimal diameter works out 7.1m suitable for generation of 320 MW
unit.
10.2 LAYOUT PLAN OF ELECTRO-MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
The proposed Pumped storage scheme consists of existing Lower reservoir as Lower reservoir and
Upper reservoir which is to be constructed newly. The water conductor system will be connecting the
reservoirs through surface powerhouse complex equipped with Generator – Motor driven pump
turbine units.
The surface powerhouse will have 3 Nos. of 320 MW & 2 Nos. of 160 MW . Fixed speed Pump Turbine
units each along with all auxiliary system such as cooling water system, compressed air system, Fire
protection system, ventilation and air conditioning system, Illumination system, HT & LT AC and DC
systems etc.
The entrance to the machine hall shall be through service bay. The machine hall is proposed at EL.
617.2 shall be 269.25-m in length (including service bay and unloading bay) and 25.50m in width. The
height of power house is 52.0m. The transformer hall of size 9mx180m is located at downstream of
main powerhouse. 400 KV Gas Insulated substation shall be placed on above transformers.
The auxiliary rooms i.e. Control room, Model/Conference room, Engineers room,220V DC system,
HVAC Equipment, Electrical and Mechanical works shop etc. shall be located at different floors.
10.3 FLOOR WISE EQUIPMENT LAYOUT PLAN IS AS UNDER:
10.3.1 Machine hall at EL 617.2m
Unit Control Boards (UCBs) and Excitation Panels shall be installed in the machine Hall floor. Phase
reversal switch along with Isolated phase bus duct (IPBD) which is provided between Generator Motor
and dynamic breaking cubicle shall be installed at this floor.
10.3.2 Generator – Motor floor at EL 611.75m
Unit Auxiliary Boards (UABs), LAVT/Neutral grounding cubicles, lubrication system etc. shall be
installed in this floor.
10.3.3 Pump Turbine floor at EL 607m
Oil pressure units for governors and MIV for each unit, HP compressor system for blow down and
other pump turbine auxiliaries shall be placed on Pump- Turbine floor.

10.3.4 Main Inlet Valve (MIV) floor at EL 595.56
Cooling water pumps, Dewatering & drainage pumps, flood water pumps shall be located on MIV floor.
10.3.5 Drainage & Dewatering galley floor at EL 587.51m
Draft tubes shall be connected to dewatering sump through a network of valves and pipes. Seepage
and drainage from various floors of powerhouse shall also be collected to one adjacent drainage sump
at this floor.
The access to turbine pit shall be from pump turbine floor.
Necessary hatches for erection and removal of MIV shall be provided at various floors.
10.4 ELECTRO-MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
The Electro-Mechanical equipment required for the proposed scheme comprises of the following:
➢ Main inlet valve.
➢ Reversible Turbine and its auxiliaries like HP/LP air compressor system, water
depression system, lubricating oil system, Governor and its oil pressure unit and
cooling water system etc.
➢ Synchronous Generator/Motor and its auxiliaries, Excitation system, Cooling system,
Brakes, PLC and Automation arrangement etc.,
➢ Control, Protection, metering, measurement and annunciation panels for complete
powerhouse and for 400KV feeder panels.
➢ Isolated Phase Bus duct shall be provided for connecting generator/Motor, PRDS to the
Generator Step-up transformer, UAT, LAVT, NGT etc., for trouble free reliable operation.
➢ Phase reversal disconnecting device etc. with all accessories.
➢ Generator Step-up Transformers with On Load tap changer along with control and
protective gear and breakers etc.
➢ 400KV Gas Insulated switchgear (GIS) units is proposed for connecting to two different
sources separated by bus Sectionalizer.
➢ Auxiliary Power supply system consisting of unit auxiliary transformers, station
auxiliary transformer, D.G Set for alternative emergency supply and station/unit
auxiliary boards for station auxiliaries, unit auxiliaries, HT & LT switchgear.
➢ Control supply system consisting of AC supply, station battery, charger and its
distribution system.
➢ The station auxiliaries like 3 Nos. of EOT cranes (2 nos. at service bay and 1 no at
unloading bay), Air Compressor system, Dewatering and Drainage system, firefighting
equipment, Air conditioning, Ventilation system and illumination system, Cooling water

system, High pressure oil injection system, jacking oil system, public addressing system
etc.
➢ Power evacuation system consists of transmission line, protection/ metering
equipment, CT's, PT's, LA's along with its supporting structures and Receiving end
equipment including bay extension at the other end, PLCC, 48V DC battery system.
➢ SCADA system with necessary panels and workstations for GIS and for power plant
operation from Local and Remote.
➢ Starting Bus system suitable for Back to back starting and also Starting the units with
SFC systems. It consists of Current limiting reactor, starting Bus circuit breaker and
Isolators system at Each unit tap off and the output connected to a common SP Bus
duct to connect to other units and also to SFC equipment.
10.5 SALIENT FEATURES OF E&M EQUIPMENT
1 Powerhouse
a Type Surface Powerhouse (Pit type)
b Center Line of Unit El. 603.00 m
c Service bay level El. 617.2 m
d Unloading Bay Level El. 641.15 m
2 Electromechanical Equipment
a Pump Turbine Francis type, vertical shaft reversible pump-turbine
b Total No of units 5 no’s (3 X 320 MW & 2 X 160 MW)
Cumulative Design Discharge
c 775.84 m3/s
(Turbine Mode)
2.1 320 MW Turbines
a Total No of units 3 Units (All units are Fixed speed)
e Motor Capacity 340 MW
2.2 Generator-Motor
a Type Three phase, alternating current asynchronous, generator

motor semi umbrella type with vertical shaft
Generator – 320 MW
c Rated Capacity
Motor Capacity – 340 MW
d Rated Voltage 18 KV
Outdoor Single-Phase Power transformers with ON-Load
a Type
tap changer (OLTC)
Primary – 18 KV ; Secondary - 400 kV
d Rated Voltage adjustable range of the secondary voltage:
-10% to +10% in 1.25% steps
2.4 160 MW Turbines
a Total No of units 2 Units (both are Fixed speed)
e Motor Capacity 180 MW
2.5 Generator-Motor
Three (3) phase, alternating current synchronous, generator
a Type
motor semi umbrella type with vertical shaft
Generator – 160 MW
c Rated Capacity
Motor Capacity – 180 MW
d Rated Voltage 18 KV
a Type Indoor, 3-Ph transformers with On-load tap changer (OLTC)

Primary – 18 KV ; Secondary - 400 kV
d Rated Voltage adjustable range of the secondary voltage:
-10% to +10% in 1.25% steps
3 400 kV Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS)
a Type of GIS Indoor Type
b No. of GIS units One
c Location Inside GIS Building above ground
d Scheme Double Busbar Arrangement with bus Sectionalizer
4 Power Evacuation
a Voltage Level (KV) 400 KV
b No. of Transmission lines One Double Circuit Transmission Line
c Conductor Quad Moose conductor
Two nos 400 KV Moose Double circuit Transmission Lines
shall be used by the plant. One line will be connected to
PGCIL Narendra 400 KV substation at Dharwad and other
d Terminating at
line will be connected to PSP CPSS for evacuation of
generated Power and for Supply of power during pumping
mode
SITE AMBIENT CONDITIONS:

a Altitude < 1000 MSL
b Design ambient air temperature Min: 10 Deg C and Max: 45 Deg C
c Average relative humidity Max: 95% and Min: 30%
d Seismic Zone Zone III
10.6 PUMP TURBINE
Water samples shall be collected, and petrographic analysis shall be performed to understand the
quality of water. However, as the water used for this project is irrigation water with huge storage, it is
expected that water will be clear and no requirement of silt & abrasion coating/painting is anticipated.
Pump turbine runner shall be of 13:4/Ni: Cr stainless steel material. The upper portion of the draft
cone liner shall be provided with stainless steel cladding.
The Turbine/Pump turbines shall be of 8 nosvvertical shaft Reversible Francis type coupled to
Generator-Motors.:
Type of Turbines = Vertical shaft Reversible Francis type

320 MW – 3 Nos
Unit Ratings & Numbers =
160 MW – 2 Nos
Maximum Head(Turbine) = 220.0
Rated Head = 189.90
Minimum Head = 170.00
Maximum Pumping Head = 224.0
Rated Pumping Head = 199.00

Minimum Pumping Head = 174.0
Specific Speed – Turbine Mode = 149.00
Specific Speed – Pump Mode = 40.00
Synchronous Speed (320MW) = 166.67
Synchronous Speed (160MW) = 230.77
Setting of Turbine/Pump Turbine = -27 m Below minimum Tail Race Level
Max Pressure rise = 35 %
Max Speed rise = 50 %
Runaway speed for 15 min of duration and 150% of rated speed and critical speed is
=
critical speed 120% of runaway speed
50% of the rated capacity in generation
The min. load for continuous operation =
mode.
Combined Weighted average efficiency based Pump Mode – 92.94% (approx.)
=
upon the efficiencies of various outputs Turbine Mode – 88.79% (approx.)
Design life of Runner and other hydraulic
passages component against pitting caused by 50 years
cavitation
Each pump turbine shall include:
➢ Main Inlet Valve (MIV) with all accessories and associated auxiliary equipment
including upstream connection piece.
➢ Spiral case inlet sleeve connected to the Main Inlet Valve downstream sleeve.
➢ Spiral case and the stay ring.
➢ Head cover and the bottom ring.
➢ Operating ring, the wicket gates and their control system.
➢ Runner and bolting for connection to the turbine shaft.
➢ Turbine shaft and bolting for connection to the generator shaft.
➢ Turbine guide bearing.
➢ Main shaft seal.

➢ Draft tube cones.
➢ Draft tube lining.
➢ Hydraulic power supply, the governing air/oil pressure tanks.
➢ Instrumentation and protection devices required for correct functioning of the
turbines.
➢ Equipment cabling, motors, filters, etc., including the cubicles and terminal boards.
➢ Parts embedded in the 2nd phase concrete.
➢ An aeration system for the runner.
10.6.1 Main Inlet Valve (MIV)
Each Turbine is provided with main inlet valve of Hydraulic operated Butter Fly Valve type with dead
weight closing and having pressure oil operated servomotor mechanism in order to achieve quick
closing to cut off the water supply for the Turbine in the event of any machine tripping on a lock out
fault. The mail inlet valve will be of lattice type with maintenance & service seals designed to open
under unbalanced conditions and close against full flow in emergency. The main inlet valve shall be
normally opened by hydraulic system and closing system with dead weight for closing. Hydraulic
operated Bypass valve is provided across the main inlet valve for smooth operation with pressure
balance condition.
i) Dismantling Joint: The Joint shall be of Telescopic type and located on downstream of valve
facilitating dismantling of valve during maintenance.
ii) Servo Motor: Servo Motor of single acting type comprising of fabricated steel cylinder with covers,
dead weight closing piston and pressure oil system will be provided in a complete shape.
10.6.2 Governor for Pump Turbine Machine
The Electro – hydraulic governor shall be of digital type with Combined Proportional Integral and
Derivative function (PID) for control and regulating function and a hydraulic part acting as power
amplifying servo unit. The Governor shall be suitable for local and remote control, Synchronizing,
Load/Frequency control, Joint control operation, speed sensing etc.
10.6.3 Oil Pressure Systems for Governor and Turbine Inlet Valves
Each Pump – Turbine shall be provided with a separate pressure oil system (From Nitrogen bottle) for
operation of Pump- Turbine wicket gate servomotors through governors and for the opening of Main
Inlet Valve.
10.7 TURBINE AUXILIARIES
➢ Unit wise cooling systems with all accessories,

➢ Unit wise Pressure oil tanks / systems for unit governing & MIV systems with all accessories

➢ High Pressure compressed air system with common air compressors & Air receivers and unit
wise air receivers with associated valves and piping with instruments for water depression of
runner chamber and other station requirements.
➢ One (1) set of spare parts, tools & tackles of all equipment.
10.7.1 List of Spare Parts
S. No Description of item Qty.

1 Wicket gate bearing bushes (Upper, Middle, Lower, links) 2 Sets
2 Servo motor, sealing and piston rings 2 Sets
3 shaft sleeve, Shaft seal Sealing ring segments & 2 Sets
maintenance seal
4 Bearing pads/Segments (Guide and thrust bearings) 1 complete set of each type
5 Control & Power supply modules of Governor 2 Sets
6 Proportional valves, control valves 2 Nos. of each type used.

7 Oil pumping unit with unloader valve 2 Nos.
8 H S Lube Oil Unit 1 No.

9 Brake/ Jack units 1 Set
10 Air, oil / water coolers 1 set of each type used for one
complete unit
11 Compressor spares 1 Set
12 Valves 1 No. of each type used
13 Instruments/ relays 2 no.s of each type used
10.8 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
10.8.1 Control:
Unit’s auxiliaries shall be controlled by the SCADA system, through the Unit Control Boards. Unit
operating point and regulation shall be controlled by the unit set point controller.
It shall also be possible to control locally the main elements (pumps) from local control boxes or from
LV boards (selectable local/remote switches).
Local control shall be performed in a safe and convenient manner, and all information (faults, alarms,
measurements, status) necessary for such control shall be displayed locally.
If the system consists of redundant subsystems, the priority of operation of such subsystems shall be
selectable, either from SCADA system or locally.

10.8.2 Monitoring
The system shall be monitored by the SCADA system. All information (such as faults, alarms,
measurements, status of equipment, external orders, running time, number and type of operations,
performance information (net head, speed, output, flow rate, etc...) that is necessary for effective and
convenient control and monitoring by the SCADA system shall be transmitted through SCADA Local
Control Boards.
10.8.3 List of Spares for SCADA system:
1. Controller of each type - CPU, Communication card - 1 No

2.Network equipments of each type - Ethernet switch - 1 No
3. GPS Master clock - 1 No
4. Servers/operators workstation - 1 No.
10.9 POWER
10.9.1 Turbine Mode
All Turbines (fixed speed) shall be designed to generate rated output at generator terminals at the
rated head and will follow the pattern of machine hill curve in the entire range of minimum and
maximum heads.
10.9.2 Pump Mode
All units shall be capable of operating over the entire head range. The power input to the machine will
be as per the machine characteristics.
10.10 UNIT START-UP – SHUTDOWN
As per pre engineering discussions had with E & M equipment manufacturers techno economical
mode change timings are arrived/recommended with number of starts stops of units are envisaged for
about Eight per day in different modes. Start- up and shutdown time duration shall be according to
requirements to bring the machine into service in quickest possible time to meet the grid conditions
as described below:
S. No. Description Time (Sec)

1 Standstill to Turbine mode (Full load) 85
2 Turbine mode (Full load) to Standstill 130
3 Standstill to Pump mode (Full load) 240
4 Pump mode (Full load) to Standstill 110
5 Turbine full load to Pump full load 390
6 Pump full load to Turbine full load 210
7 Pump condenser to pump full load 60

8 Pump full load to Pump condenser 60
9 Turbine no load to turbine condenser 60
10 Turbine condenser to turbine no load 60
10.11 WEIGHTED AVERAGE EFFICIENCY
Weighted Average Efficiencies specified by OEM in the pre contractual stage is tabulated below.
S. No. Description Efficiency (%)

1 WAE of 160 MW unit in Generation mode 88.22
2 WAE of 160 MW unit in Motor mode 92.52
3 WAE of 320 MW unit in Generation mode 89.01
4 WAE of 320 MW unit in Motor mode 92.71
10.12 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION FEATURES OF TURBINE
10.12.1 Runner
The turbine runner will be integrally cast / welded in stainless steel material having 13% chromium
and 4% nickel and properly stress relieved. The runner will have suitable no. of vanes polished and
ground smooth and will be mounted on the turbine shaft in homology with the corresponding proven
model. Runner removal shall be envisaged from turbine top cover side through Stator bore.
10.12.2 Guide Vanes
Each Unit shall be provided with suitable number of Guide vanes and operating mechanism. The tur-
bine shall be equipped with one set of fabricated stainless-steel guide vanes with integral stems and
trunnions. Suitable number of wicket gates shall be provided to control the flow of water for regula-
tion of the unit. The guide vanes shall be uniform in shape. The number of guide vanes and the number
of runner vanes shall be coordinated in a manner to ensure that the turbine will operate without ob-
jectionable vibrations.
Guide vanes will be of cast stainless steel material conforming to 13% chromium and 4% nickel and
finished smooth. Guide vane operating mechanism will be of forged or fabricated steel. Each guide
vane will be supported with self-lubricated bearings. Synthetic rubber seals will be provided to pre-
vent leakage of water. The guide vanes will be operated by guide vane servomotor for which the pres -
surized oil will be supplied from the pressure oil system. The control of guide vane opening will be
through the governor.
10.12.3 Guide Vane Operating Mechanism
The operating mechanism shall consist of all elements for connecting the wicket gates to the wicket
gates servomotors including levers, links, Wicket gate operating ring, servomotor connecting rods and

pins of enough strength to withstand the maximum load that can be imposed on it by the most severe
operating conditions. Parts having relative motion and contact shall have self-lubricating bearings.
10.12.4 Turbine/pump Shaft
A turbine/pump shaft will be provided for mounting the turbine runner. The material of
turbine/pump shaft will be of carbon steel forging conforming to BS 29 or ASTM A 668 Class D.
The shaft will have adequate diameter to operate safely in combination with generator. The turbine
shaft will be connected directly to the generator shaft by means of a suitable coupling.
Shaft Sleeves:
The shaft will be provided with renewable stainless-steel sleeve. The sleeve will be of split
construction and securely fastened to the turbine shaft.
Shaft Seal:
The shaft seal will be provided to prevent leakage of water through the gap between the shaft and
turbine cover.
Two (2) shaft seals shall be provided one as main working seal and another as maintenance seal.
Working seal will be applied with water tapped from cooling water system with redundant source
from firewater tank/penstock. Maintenance seal is inflatable seal and will be applied at the time of
unit standstill condition.
Turbine Bearing:
The turbine bearings shall be segmental, adjustable pad, immersed Babbitt type of adequate design to
operate safely under all conditions.
The design of bearing and oil reservoir shall permit their inspection adjustment or removal without
disturbing the head cover or major dismantling of other parts of the turbine. The bearing design shall
be such that no water shall enter the lubricating system via the shaft seal and there shall be no loss of
oil by leakage past the lower oil shedder or by overflow from any part of the oil system under any
condition.
Stay Ring Assembly:
The stay ring assembly will be made of fabricated steel plate conforming to ASTM A516 Gr 60/70 / A
216 Gr WCB. The stay ring assembly will have set of streamlined stay vanes to guide the water flow.
Spiral Casing:
Spiral casing will be of welded construction fabricated from steel plates conforming to IS -2062 Gr. ‘B’
designed to withstand the maximum operating pressure including water hammer. The spiral casing
segments will be welded to the stay ring. The spiral casing will be anchored in concrete. The upstream
flanged end of spiral casing will be bolted to the dismantling joint of turbine inlet valve.
Draft Tube:

The draft tube will be made of fabricated steel plates conforming to IS – 2062 Gr. - ‘B’. Draft tube will
be fabricated in suitable parts namely draft tube cone and draft tube liner etc. and will be heavily
reinforced by ribs and anchored in the concrete.
Pressure Oil system:
Each Pump-turbine shall be provided with a separate pressure oil system for operation of Pump-
turbine wicket gate servomotors through governors and for the operation of MIV.
The oil pumping unit will be provided for supply of pressurized oil for the following:
a) Guide vane Servomotors
b) Turbine inlet butterfly valve
For regulation of water flow through guide vanes, the pressurized oil will be supplied through servo
valve, which will receive an electronic signal from governor. The oil-pumping unit will be provided
with two pumps (one main and one standby) with auto-changeover facility along with other required
accessories. For ensuring availability of stored pressurized oil, adequate capacity of nitrogen piston
type accumulators / HP air pressure vessel system for the governor pressure oil system. The pressure
oil system will be provided with necessary instrumentation and control system for the safe and
reliable operation of the units.
OPU system for the inlet valve and for Governing system is of adequate capacity confirming to three
complete operations i.e. Close - Open - Close which could be carried out with absence of power supply
to the pumping unit.
Governing System:
The turbine will be controlled by servo valve based electronic governor. The Governor in general shall
be designed in accordance to IEC 61362. The system will be so designed that the main functions of
speed control, power control are handled as a separate program parts and shall be programmed to
suit Francis turbine having adjustable guide vanes. The speed signal sensing should be redundant with
three sensors selected on different working principles for control and protection functions
Governor will also support RGMO mode of operation as per clause 5.2(f) of the Indian Electricity Grid
Code with latest amendments.
The Governor shall meet following Functional requirements:
 The Governor shall function based on the commands and set points given by the Unit Controller
and the control of the pump turbine is to be carried out besides give set points and commands to
VSI controller.
 The Governor shall operate in conjunction with the unit (controller) control system. In Turbine
mode the unit is to operate in power control, synchronous condenser and frequency influence con-
trol mode.
 The performance of the governor shall meet all the conditions & grid requirements.

 CEA stipulations viz Restricted Governing mode operation (RGMO) & Free governing mode opera -
tion (FGMO).
 Independent Grid mode of Operation
 Line charging Mode of Operation
 Black starting mode of operation.
 Condenser mode of operation.
 Integration with synchronizing panel with auto synchronizer.
 Local & Remote-control operation feature.
 Minimum setting range of the permanent droop shall be 0-10%.
 The speed dead band shall not exceed 0.02% at the rated speed.
 When generator is operating connected to the system with sustained load demand, the peak to
peak magnitude of the sustained power oscillation caused by the governor with 2% or more speed
droop setting, shall not exceed ±1% of the rated capacity.
 Sensitivity of governor shall be 0.01 %.
 The governor dead band time shall not exceed 0.20 second for speed change of 0.1 Hz or Larger
and the dead band adjustment range shall be 0 to ±3Hz.
 The range of Adjustment to speed setting 90% (of rated speed at no load) 110% (of rated speed at
full load) and maximum speed droop.
 Governor key control parameters shall be as below:
 Speed control accuracy: ± 1 rpm
 Load control accuracy: <0.5%
 Control cycle time: < 50 milli sec
Cooling Water System:
Water required for cooling of the machine components will be taken from the Tail race and supplied to
various coolers such as turbine bearing coolers, generator bearing oil coolers, governor oil cooler,
stator air coolers and turbine shaft seal, Power transformer heat exchangers etc. through booster
pumps and suitable duplex strainers as required. The cooling water system will be provided with
necessary instrumentation such as flow switches, differential pressure switches across the filters and
pressure switches etc., for safe and reliable operation of the units.
The raw water will be cleaned through motorized automatic online self-cleaning simplex filter (1
working + 1 standby) before supplying to the equipment.
HP Air Compressor System for blow down (Runner Aeration/water blowdown system):
The High-Pressure air system will cater to the needs of Tail water depression whenever the Machine is
required for starting the unit in pump modes and to be operated in the Condenser mode from other
modes or standstill. The runner and upper cone of the draft tube need to be blown out from water by

depressing tail water level by feeding high pressure compressed air into the draft Tube, Runner and
Bottom Ring for startup of Pump Turbine in Pump mode and commence condenser operation
Centralized redundant compressor station with common and unit dedicated air receiver tanks is
envisaged. Each unit dedicated tank will be designed for 2 blow downs.
HP Compressed air system shall essentially consist the following equipment:
a) 4x 50% (2W +2S) HP Air compressors (Oil free screw compressor)
b) 2 x 100% Air driers.
c) 2 Nos common air receivers
d) 7 Nos Unit air receivers
e) Associated piping, valves, instrumentation
High pressure compressed air system shall permit the runner dewatering for synchronous condenser
mode. System shall permit 2 consecutive runner dewatering operations for each unit. Compressor
shall be sized to ensure Re-filling of high-pressure tanks in shorter period.
The system for each unit shall be provided with necessary piping and pneumatically operated Air
valves controlled by Unit governor oil pressure system.
10.13 GENERATOR - MOTOR
The plant consists of 5 nos Generator/ Motor units. The generators will be three-phase Synchronous
machines of vertical shaft type directly coupled to their respective turbines. The operating capabilities
of units considered as per CEA regulations.
The nameplate rating of the Fixed Speed machines proposed are as follows:
Type of Machine = Synchronous Machine (Fixed Speed)

Bearing Arrangement = Suspended Type
Each Unit Rating (Large) = 320 MW
Number of Units = 3No’s
Terminal Voltage = 18 KV
Each Unit Rating (small) = 160 MW
Number of Units = 2 No’s
Machine Terminal Voltage = 18 KV
Common Parameters:
No of Phases = 3 Phase
Frequency = 50 HZ
47.5 Hz - 51.5 Hz (-5% to +3% of normal
Operating Frequency range =
frequency)
Power Factor in Generation Mode = 0.90 Lag & 0.95 Lead
Power Factor in Pump Mode = 0.95 (Lead)

Class of Insulation of Generator stator and rotor
= Class – F
windings
Temperature rise = Limited to Class – B
Type of cooling = Air cooled
Stator winding connections = Star
Type of duty = Continuous
No. of line terminals to be brought out = Three (3)
No. of neutral terminals to be brought out = Three (3)
Degree of protection for generator
= IP-23
enclosure
Inertia constant (H) = 3s Approx.
Cycle Efficiency - For complete cycle of

= 79.5%
Generation and Motor Modes
10.13.1 Insulation and Temperature Rise
Insulation of the motor shall be envisaged as follows:

a. Stator winding: Thermo setting Epoxy resin of Class-F insulation.
b. Rotor winding: Thermo setting Epoxy resin of Class-F insulation.
With a maximum cooling water temperature of 30° C. the motor- generator shall be capable of
delivering rated output to pump continuously at any voltage and frequency in operating range and
rated power factor without exceeding the following temperature rise over a maximum ambient Temp
of 45° C .
a. Stator winding: 85° C above ambient
b. Field winding: 95° C above ambient
c. Bearings by embedded: 70° – 80° C above ambient
10.13.2 Cooling System
The Motor-generator will be provided with a closed re circulating cooling system complete with air
ducts, water cooled surface air coolers, water header, metal housing, alarm devices, flow indicators,
manually operated isolating valves and all other accessories. The coolers will be placed symmetrically
around the stator.
10.13.3 Noise level
The noise level of the generator will be limited to 90 db when measured at 1m from any component of
the generator.

10.13.4 stator frame
The stator casing consists of a welded steel structure and is provided with suitably arranged braces to
form a stiff and vibration free construction. The core will be built up CRNGO silicon steel laminations
of high quality and low loss designed and fabricated to prevent hot spots and / or loose spots. The
interior of the stator casing partly forms the cooling ducts and therefore the braces in the stator frame
are arranged in such a manner that optimum air flow will be obtained. The stator frame with core and
windings will be shipped from the factory /works in suitable segments considering transport
limitations. The sections of the stator frame are clamped together by means of liberally dimensioned
bolts. Care will be taken to avoid vibrations at the insulated joints.
10.13.5 Stator Core
The stack of laminations constituting the active part of the generator is made of silicon alloy steel
sheets. The segments are coated with an insulating varnish of good thermal and mechanical properties
on both sides and stacked interleaved. In the axial direction the stator core is subdivided into a num -
ber of partial stacks, separated by spacers. These spacers form radial cooling ducts allowing the cool-
ing air to pass.
10.13.6 Stator Winding
The stator winding is designed as a pitched two-layer winding which is arranged to obtain a near sine
wave curve by suppressing the harmonics. The stator winding is a transposed bar winding Each bar
consists of several transposed, insulated strands in order to reduce the additional copper losses. The
stator winding is insulated using the High-Voltage-Insulation-System matching insulation class "F".
The ground wall insulation is composed of layers of mica glass tape impregnated with a high quality
epoxy resin in a vacuum impregnation process
10.13.7 Rotor Spider
All materials of the rotor parts are designed for the highest stress which may occur due to centrifugal
force during runaway conditions. The stub shafts of forged alloy steel properly annealed are flange-
connected to both sides of the rotor hub. The complete shaft will be tested exhaustively in the works of
the shaft manufacturer to ensure conformity to the material and structural standards. The rotor has a
suitably designed hub for the connection with the shaft.
10.13.8 Rotor
The rotor core is constructed in the same way as the stator core. The rim sheets are made of silicon al -
loy steel sheets. This reduces the additional losses in the teeth of the rotor rim. The segments are
coated with an insulating varnish of good thermal and mechanical properties on both sides and
stacked interleaved. In order to ensure cooling of the package and the installed winding, the entire

package is subdivided into several partial stacks with intermediate ventilation ducts. The design and
assembly process is analogous to the stator lamination stack. After heating, the segmental rim is
shrunk on the webs with keys placed between the webs and the rim to achieve the desired prestress.
10.13.9 Laminated Rim
The yoke of the rotor is of laminated construction. The yoke ring is stacked from individual steel sheet
segments. The high-strength steel laminations with multiple overlap are clamped by a large number of
axial bolts, uniformly distributed on the periphery.
After stacking on the spider with keys placed between the spider arm extremities and the
rim to achieve the desired fixation and to transmit the torque to the rim.
10.13.10 Breaking and Jacking:
Each generator is provided with combined braking and lifting jacks. In the jacks, two fluids are alterna-
tively used: compressed air for braking and high-pressure oil for lifting. The oil and air circuits are
completely separated.
Generator shall be provided with pneumatically operated brakes of adequate capacity to bring the ro-
tary parts of the generator and turbine to stop from about 10% of rated speed during normal opera-
tion. The brakes may be applied at higher speed during emergency shutdown of the unit, in order to
bring the rotor to rest faster. The brakes shall operate automatically and/or manually from local brake
control panel or Generator/unit control panel by means of push buttons/ control switch with neces-
sary interlocks.
Dynamic braking system is also considered for reduction in the mode change timings and effective
braking. Once the unit has been running, in generator, motor or condenser mode and a stop order has
been issued, the shaft line will keep rotating and slow down due to friction torque. In order to reduce
the stop time, the excitation & control system shall include an electrical brake function The electrical
braking can be activated at any speed from maximum synchronized rotating speed to 0 rpm. The elec-
trical braking performance shall be such that the stopping time is approximately 1/10 of the purely
mechanical stopping time. The generator will be provided with air-operated brakes to bring the rotat-
ing parts of the generator to rest from about 15% of the rated speed during normal operation. The
brakes will be suitable for application at higher speed during emergency shutdown of the unit in order
to bring the unit to rest at a faster rate. The brakes will operate manually/automatically from local
panel/unit control board.
10.13.11 LAVT and Neutral grounding Cubicles
LAVT Cubicles shall include Surge Capacitors, Lightning Arresters, Voltage Transformers and
associated accessories. The Generator Neutral Grounding Cubicle shall include a single phase, Dry type

Distribution Transformer, a secondary loading Disconnecting Switch, a Resistor and associated
accessories mounted in a single-ventilated, metal enclosed Cubicle.
10.13.12 Static Excitation System, AVR & Sliprings
The excitation of the generator will be applied via a static excitation system. Static Excitation system
shall have micro processor based controls. The excitation equipment shall comprise of rectifier,
excitation transformers, thyristors, field breaker with discharge resistor, field flashing circuit,
automatic voltage regulator and protection and control devices along with accessories to make it a
complete system.
The excitation system for each unit will consist of the following:
1) Dry type Excitation transformer.
2) A Set of Thyristor converters of suitable numbers such that even incase of ONE bridge failure,
the remaining bridges shall cater to themaximum continuous and ceiling current requirements.
3) Field flashing (both AC & DC) for excitation start up.
4) Field breaker and field discharge and suppression equipments.
5) Digital Automatic voltage regulator with auto and manual channelswith all standard limiter
functions.
6) Aux Excitation system with Transformer, Connecting Breakers taking input from station Aux
supply source for initial excitation during SFC & in back to back mode starting during motor mode of
operation.
The field current is transmitted to the rotor via slip rings and brushes. The slip rings are arranged on
the upper stub shaft end of generator, opposite to the turbine side. These are insulated mounted on
the shaft and are self-ventilated. The housing is provided against accidental contact serving also as
cooling air guiding chamber.
The brush holder is also mounted within this housing. There is a good accessibility through suitable
access doors. The required ventilation air is taken from the power house. The cooling path of the self-
ventilated slip rings is completely separated from the generator air cooling circuit and therefore no
coal dust can soil the generator.
10.13.13 Thrust Bearings
The main parts of the thrust bearing are the thrust bearing collar, which is mounted on the shaft, the
thrust bearing shoes and the spider with the oil container. The bracket is amply dimensioned and
adapted for support and alignment of the bearing. The thrust bearing shoes are made of steel and are
annealed to relieve all stresses. The thrust bearing is self-lubricated. Radial bores in the thrust collar
have a pumping effect as soon as the shaft is rotating due to the difference of circumferential speed
between the inner and outer diameter of the collar. The oil will be forced into an annular chamber.

The pressurized oil flows to a cooler and then returns once more to the thrust bearing, where it flows
through a nozzle ring. The nozzles are placed near the chamfered edges of the thrust bearing shoes
and there the cooled oil produces the oil film by rotation.
10.13.14 Guide Bearings
The guide bearing consists of rigid bearing segments which are lined with white metal of high quality.
The rotating journal is a part of the shaft or the vertical side of the thrust bearing collar in the case of
the combined thrust and guide bearing.
The journal of the bearing will be super finished to a high polish of minimum roughness.
The guide bearing is of the self-lubricating type. Radial bores in the rotating journal have a pumping
effect due to the difference of circumferential speed. The oil will be forced into an annular chamber
and from there through longitudinal channels to the bearing surfaces.
10.13.15 Resistance / Thermo Couple Type Temperature Detectors
Duplex type platinum RTDs of required quantity suitably distributed in the stator for measuring the
temperatures of core, teeth & windings shall be embedded for indication/recording and alarm as well
as for tripping the unit in case of high temperature. All RTD terminals shall be brought out to a
separate terminal box mounted on stator frame and further will be extended for SCADA / recorders for
automation along with sufficient DTTs for local indication. Similarly, suitable detectors along with
suitable communication will be provided for rotor winding temperature measurements also.
10.13.16 Condition Monitoring System
The Condition Monitoring system is designed to monitor the operation behaviour of Pump Turbine &
Generator Motor and to assess its condition to allow a condition-based maintenance by prediction of
abnormality and take preventive action. Following are the condition monitoring systems envisaged for
this project.
a. Vibration of Pump- Turbine & Synchronous Generator
b. Air Gap of Generator Motor units
c. Partial Discharge Off-line Monitoring of Generator Motor Units.
d. Shaft Current on line Monitoring of Pump- Turbine & Generator Motor.
e. Cooling & winding Temperature on line Monitoring of Generator Motor.
LIST OF GENERATOR – MOTOR SPARES:
Sr. No. Description Qty.

1. For one stator windings comprising one third (1/ 3) of all bars used 2sets
For one generator stator all necessary material for fixing, clamping, jointing
2. 2 sets
including slot wedges.

3. For one Rotor windings comprising one third (1/ 3) of all bars used 2sets
For one generator Rotor all necessary material for fixing, clamping, jointing
4. 2sets
including slot wedges
5. Generator Thrust Block 2 sets
Generator Thrust bearing segments/pads complete set with support (one set
6. 2 sets
per each Generator of 320MW &160 MW)
Generator Upper guide bearing shell along with segments/pads complete sets
7. 2 sets
(one set per each Generator of 320MW &160 MW)
Generator Upper guide bearing segments/pads complete sets (one set per
8. 2 set
each Generator of 320MW &160 MW)
Generator Lower guide bearing segments/pads complete set (one set per each
9. 2 set
Generator of 320MW &160 MW)
Generator Lower guide bearing Shell along with segments/pads complete set
10. 2 sets
(one set per each Generator of 320MW &160 MW)
11. Brake lining pads for 320 MW and 160 MW units 2 sets
12. Air/Water Heat exchangers 100% quantity of each generator 1 set
13. Jacking Oil Pump each with Motor one for each generator 2 set
14. HP Oil Lubrication Pump each with Motor one for each Generator 2 nos.
15. slip rings, brush holders complete for one Generator 2 set
16. One Lot of carbon Brushes for DC Excitation system 2 sets
17. One lot of seals and gaskets for each generator. 2 sets
18. DTT (Dial Type Temp. Thermometer) for each generator 2 sets
19. RTDs (Resistance Temperature Detectors) of each type for 320 MW 2 sets
Instruments for bearing lubrication system, thrust bearing, upper and lower 1 No. of Each
20.
guide bearings etc. type
1 set of each
21. Valves for each generator
type
10.14 PHASE REVERSAL DISCONNECTING SWITCH (PRDS)
Motor operated Phase Reversal Disconnecting Switch of suitable capacity envisaged for Generator and
motor operation with suitable short time withstand fault current.
A Phase reversal disconnecting switch (PRDS)

1 Continuous current rating 11 KA for 320 MW unit and 5.5 KA for 160 MW unit
80 KA/1 secs for 320 MW Unit
2 Rated Short time withstand current 63 KA/1 Sec for 160 MW unit

10.15 STARTING OF UNITS AS PUMP
10.15.1 Starting of ohe Units in Motoring Mode
Static frequency convertor type of starting is proposed to be adopted for starting of the units in
motoring mode. Two sets of S.F.C. equipments are provided. Keeping in view the large number of units,
and to enable staring of all units in a short time Provision is also proposed to be incorporated for back
to back starting of the units. A common starting bus with Current limiting reactor, starting Bus
Vacuum circuit breaker and Isolators system at Each unit tap off and the output connected to a
common SP Bus duct to connect to other units and also to SFC equipment is envisaged. The schematic
layout enclosed illustrates the arrangement.
Starting of the Pump – turbine units as pump will be done in two methods:
1. Back to Back starting
2. SFC Starting
10.15.2 Back to Back starting
In back to Back starting it is proposed to start the units as pumps with Unit 1,Unit 5,unit 7 as genera-
tors to limit the complexity in automation.
The Runner of the Unit being started as pump will be Dewatered and this unit will be interconnected
through Starting Bus at 18 KV by selecting the respective isolators as per drawing. The selected unit as
Generator( any one of Unit-1/5/7) will be connected to starting Bus by closing its Circuit Breaker. Af-
ter switching the excitation to the Rotor of both the units connected to Starting Bus and the guide
vanes of the Starting Generator will be opened to get the rated speed and Voltage. On synchronization
of the unit selected as pump the Generator will be isolated by opening of Circuit breaker. After release
of air from runner the Pump will be loaded by opening of its guide vanes to the required. This enables
smooth starting of Pumps.
Due to the large sizing of the machines and the fault level is on high side on 18 KV level it is preferred
to have Current limiting reactor before connecting to the starting Bus.
10.15.3 SFC Starting
Mainly to the extend possible the units will be started in back to Back starting mode. The last unit has
to be started individually through SFC equipment. SFC equipment works as a Variable frequency and
variable voltage principle having converter and inverter equipment and starts the unit as motor from
the Station supply source transformers (20/25 MVA).
All the equipment will be provided to start any unit as pump from any of the SFC provided as redun-
dant. SFC supply will be extended to the unit proposed for stating through Breaker and Isolator at
11/18 KV level by providing a starting Bus at 18 KV side also.

10.15.4 Details of Equipment
Two (2) sets of Static Frequency Converter (SFC) systems are considered to have redundancy of start -
ing equipment as this starting equipment are common for all 8 Units in the Power station. Starting
equipment shall be suitable to start the units as pump-motors smoothly with impeller in dewatered
condition and without inrush current. The Pump-motor shall be soft started and reach its rated speed.
It shall include the necessary transformers, H.T switchgear and all the control equipment required.
The starting equipment shall be of proven design and shall be robust and shall withstand no. of starts
in a day. All the control equipment for selection of the pump to be started and interlocks, indication
and alarm & annunciation circuits shall be included.
The isolator cubicles shall be provided with 2 Nos. Circuit breakers for incoming feeders and 9 Nos.
outgoing feeders one for each unit. All the protection and control circuits of starting equipment shall
be incorporated in the system. The system shall be suitable to start one pump at a time.
10.15.5 SFC System Configuration
SFC shall be combination of Thyristor bridges with an intermediate D.C link reactor. It shall include
first bridge named Network Bridge (NB) connected with a source transformer, and the Second Bridge
named Machine Bridge (MB) that connects to the motor stator terminals through necessary
switchgear and step up transformers. The first bridge shall be operated as rectifier and power fre-
quency supply is converted to DC. This DC contains ripples which are filtered by the link reactor. MB
shall be operated as an inverter, producing three-phase alternating current, the frequency of which is
varied from a very low value, up to the nominal value (i.e. about 50Hz. Thyristors firing angle in the NB
& MB are set by a controller with various feedback loops.
The converter can be high-high type or 12/12- pulse type, two converters are connected by a DC reac -
tor which is necessary for the current source type SFC.
The thyristor converters shall be identical and are to be connected in three-phase bridge connection to
form the power converter.
10.15.6 Control Unit
The control, protection and monitoring functions are integrated in the controller panel and shall be
grouped into two main parts. One is power cubicle, consisting of thyristors and snubber circuits. The
second part is the CPU with other electronic control circuitry and feedback circuits and acts very fast
in a ‘µ’sec range during short circuit test sequence. A human machine interface system for manual in -
terface.

10.15.7 Breakers/Switches
The SFC system is equipped with input breakers and output breakers. A bypass switch/ breaker shall
be installed if an output transformer is configured.
10.15.8 Transformers
SFC system shall consist of Transformers at the input (11KV) and output (18 KV) of the frequency con-
verter to match the network voltage and motor voltage to the permitted converter voltages. They re -
duce the harmonics injected into the network, limit the fault current inside the frequency converter
and provide the required phase shifting in case of 12-pulse configurations. The design of these trans -
formers shall be suitable to be adapted to the parameters and requirements of the entire starting sys-
tem. The transformers can be preferably dry type if they are proposed to be located inside pump house
in view of environmental & installations conditions or ONAN if mounted outdoor. All the required pro-
tections to be provided.
10.15.9 Static Frequency Coverter Spares:
1. Electronic Cards – 1 No. each type

2. Relay units – 1 No. of each type
3. Power Supply Units/Converter – 2 Nos. of each type
4. IGBT/Converter/Inverter Module, – 2 Nos. of each type used.
5. Cooling fans, measuring units – 2 Nos. of each type used
6. Controllers – 1 No. of each type used
10.16 ISOLATED PHASE BUS DUCT
The bus duct shall be air cooled, Isolated phase type in which each conductor shall be supported on
epoxy cast resin insulator at an interval as per the successful type test design and enclosed by an elec-
trically continuous individual aluminum housing separated from adjacent phases by an air space.
The enclosure shall be made of Al. alloy grade sheet rolled to form standard sections. Transport sec -
tions shall be welded at site. The IPBD enclosures are supported using supporting structures at suit -
able locations. Horizontal runs of enclosures are supported with sliding arrangement up to 10mm to
align the bus duct with equipment whereas vertical supports are designed for rigid and sliding mount -
ings.
Disconnecting links shall be provided at each end of generator, generator transformer, tap off etc. as
per requirements.
Rubber bellows are provided for connection between the bus duct and generator, transformers and cu-
bicles. Three enclosures are shorted together by means of aluminum plates to provide a closed electri -
cal path for enclosure currents which will be provided with holes to receive station earth bus.

Bus duct for 320 MW unit shall be Aluminum, 3 phase, 36 kV class to mitigate the transfer surges from
400kV level, 11000 amp indoor main isolated phase bus ducts (IPBD) with tap off connections to cur-
rent limiting reactor in the run of the main IPBD that include bus conductors, Generator main & neu -
tral terminal chambers, bimetallic & flexible connection at generator and PRDS end and PRDS to
transformer ends (Three single phase power transformers), vibration pads, supporting insulators,
housing and supports, ground bus wall / floor frame assemblies, seal off bushings, necessary fixtures
for support of bus ducts with the wall / ceiling and all other sundries to complete the equipment.
Bus duct for 160 MW unit shall be Aluminum, 3 phase, 36 kV class to mitigate the transfer surges from
400kV level, 5500 amp with short circuit capacity of 63 KA/3 Sec indoor main isolated phase bus
ducts (IPBD) with tap off connections to current limiting reactor in the run of the main IPBD that in -
clude bus conductors, Generator main & neutral terminal chambers, bimetallic & flexible connection at
generator and PRDS end and PRDS to transformer ends, vibration pads, supporting insulators, housing
and supports, ground bus wall / floor frame assemblies, seal off bushings, necessary fixtures for sup-
port of bus ducts with the wall / ceiling and all other sundries to complete the equipment.
Interconnection between Generator neutral terminals and Generator Neutral Grounding Terminals
(NGT/NGR Cubicle) along with adapter box from stator terminals terminated at generator barrel to
the seal off bushing and after the placement of CTs, formation of neutral and connection of single con-
ductor to NGT/NGR cubicle.
Tap off ducts from main IPBD comprising of 36 KV, 1500 A with short circuit current capacity of 120
KA/3 Sec for connection to Current Limiting Reactors including bus conductors, bimetallic and flexible
connections, supporting insulators, vibration joints, grounding arrangement, necessary fixtures for
support of bus ducts and all other sundries to complete the equipment are envisaged.
For Delta formation with vector group of YNd11 from three single phase Generator Transformers of
rating 100 MVA each adaptor boxes with necessary accessories has been envisaged.
Steel structure (one for each unit) for supporting the main & tap off bus ducts in its run along with
foundation bolts / embedment plates and U clamps for supporting the IPBD envisaged.
Salient features of IPBD:
a Number of phases of the system Three

b Nominal operating voltage 18 KV
c Highest system voltage 36 KV
d Voltage variation ± 10%
e Frequency 47.5 – 51.5
One-minute power frequency withstand test
f voltage 70 KV (rms)
g Impulse withstand test voltage 170 KV (peak)

h Rated Continuous current: 320 MW unit 160 MW Unit
i) Main Bus 11000 Amps 5500 Amps
ii) Tap off bus 1500 Amps
i Short Circuit current rating: 320 MW 160 MW
i) Main Bus (Symmetrical) 80/3 Sec 63 KA/3Sec
ii) Tap off bus (Symmetrical) 120KA/3 Sec
Maximum hot spot temperature rises above 45⁰C
j
ambient temperature at continuous rating:
i) Bus conductor 65 Deg C
ii) Enclosure and support structures where
accessible 30 Deg C
k Bus conductor material Aluminium
Al. alloy grade 91E as per IS
L Bus bar material
5082
M Material of bus enclosure Aluminium alloy
List of Isolated Phase Bus Duct SPARES:
S. No Description Qty
1 Copper flexible jumpers 1 set (each type 1 No.)
2 Current transformers 3 Nos. of each type
3 NGT & NGR 1 No.
4 Rigid jumpers 1 Set
5 Epoxy resin insulators used in main bus 5% of total qty
6 Epoxy resin insulators used in tap-off bus 5% of total qty
Seal off bushing
Main Bus -3 Nos.
7 1 Set
Delta Bus - 3 Nos.
Tap off Bus - 3 Nos.
8 Rubber bellow 1 Set
9 Limit switches of each type 1 Set
10 MCB of each type 1 Set
11 1 Set
Fuse of each type

10.17 LIGHTING SYSTEM
Energy efficient illumination fixtures i.e. LED type with suitable fixtures to meet the required
illumination levels as per standards are envisaged for plant and pothead yard illumination system. The
power station lighting system will comprise the following:
Normal 230V AC Lighting System:
The lighting circuit in the normal 230V AC lighting system would be fed through 11.0/0.415KV,
3phase, 4 wire transformers connected to 415V distribution system.
Direct Current Emergency Lighting system:
Direct current emergency lights would be provided at strategic points in the power station, viz. Near
entrances, staircases, the main control room, Turbine area, switchyard area etc.
These would be fed from the station 220V DC system and would be off when the normal AC power
supply is available. These would be automatically switched on when the normal AC supply fails.
Control Room 300 lux
Switchgear/MCC room 250-300 lux
TG building 250 lux
Outlying areas 30-40 lux
Switch yard 25-35 lux
Stores 100-150 lux
Battery Room 100 lux
Administration building and Office rooms 300 lux
Roads 20 lux
10.18 CABLING
All cables will be selected to carry the full load current under site conditions, with permissible voltage
drop/dip. In addition, these cables will be rated for short circuit capacity wherever required.
10.19 HT & LT POWER CABLES
For 18KV power cables - 18KV (UE) grade, stranded aluminum conductor, XLPE insulated, extruded
PVC Inner sheathed, armored, extruded FRLS-PVC (Flame retardant and low smoke - poly vinyl chlo-
ride) outer sheathed cables conforming to IS-7098.
For low voltage power cables - 1100 V grade, stranded aluminum conductor, extruded PVC insulated,
extruded PVC inner sheathed, armored, extruded FRLSPVC outer sheathed cables conforming to IS-
1554.

10.19.1 Control Cables
1100 V grade, annealed high conductivity copper conductor, extruded PVC insulated, extruded PVC in-
ner sheathed, armored, and extruded FRLS-PVC outer sheathed. meeting the requirements as specified
in IS-5831.
10.19.2 Signal and Supervisory Cables
Annealed tinned copper conductor in stranded circular construction, extruded PVC insulated, ex-
truded PVC inner sheathed, armored, and extruded FRLS - PVC outer sheathed, in twisted pairs and
screened. Cables will be laid in ladder type galvanized steel cable trays or in trenches.
10.19.3 Cable Trays
All the cables will be laid in Perforated GI cable trays with supporting structures in horizontal laying
and with Ladder type GI trays in Vertical placement. Copper tinned lugs will be provided for all the ter -
minations along with identification ferrules and Tags. Necessary cable glands with fire protection seal-
ing barriers shall be provided. The construction of the cable trays shall be suitable to withstand the as -
sociated cable load without undergoing bending or sagging. The cable trays will be of suitable width
and length. Necessary provision will be made to connect adjacent trays and the necessary components
such as splicer plates, Hexagonal head screws, nuts and washers along with 90-degree Horizontal El-
bow, Horizontal Tee etc. to fix the trays will be included in the scope of supply. The perforations pro-
vided shall be such that adequate ventilation is allowed and facilitate binding the cables to the trays.
10.20 EARTHING
Earthing of powerhouse & outdoor yard will be done as per IEEE 80 latest issue after measuring the
soil resistivity. The risers from the earth mat will be connected to water conducting system to limit the
overall ground mat resistance to less than 0.5Ω.
Two independent earthing points (Pads) of bolted type shall be provided on opposite sides of
generator stator casing and exciter for connecting earthing conductors. These earthing points shall be
in addition to any earthing studs provided in the terminal boxes.
The earthing pads shall be of non-corrosive metal, welded or brazed to the machine body. The size of
the earthing pads shall be suitable to connect earth conductor.
Two earthing terminals shall be provided for all auxiliary equipment, cubicles etc. Earthing bus shall
be provided for control panels.
10.21 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)
The function of plant central computer control system will be to provide automatic control for all the
units as well as the data acquisition, alarm monitoring and data logging and archiving. Programmable

Logic Controller (PLC), (Part of the SCADA system) located in the UCB, which will be entirely dedicated
to the unit as well as plant control and data acquisition.
One redundant PLC shall be dedicated for each unit in the UCB. The substation will have a dedicated
PLC. Other PLCs and /or RTUs shall be provided for control and data acquisition of auxiliary services
and intake. All PLCs will be connected to a central unit in the control room through fiber optical cables.
The central unit, through a man machine interface (video displays, functional keyboards, pointers) will
be used to provide efficient communication between the operators and the control system. The SCADA
system will also be designed to interface and communicate with the grid displaying system through a
telecommunication system, transmitting all the required data that is essential to the grid dispatching
operator.
10.22 GENERATOR / UNIT CONTROL PANEL
All operations such as starting, initiation of Auto synchronizing, bringing up to rated voltage and
speed, operation and annunciation of various conditions and alarms, monitoring, data logging,
recording and sequential event recording for generator and its excitation system shall be through
SCADA. For this purpose, a selection shall be provided on the SCADA to select Auto or manual modes of
synchronizing. Auto synchronizer shall connect the generator to the grid automatically after
synchronizing the two systems. Sufficient interlocking and/or closure permissive shall be
incorporated in this scheme. The equipment shall be supplied to control both the voltage and
frequency of hydro turbine generator set to match with those of the grid. There shall be two
independent outputs from Auto synchronizer and circuit breaker shall close only upon operation of
both the outputs.
Manual synchronizing of the Generator shall be possible from Generator control panel (GCP).
Synchronizing equipment consisting of Auto synchronizer, check synchronizing relay, guard relay,
double voltmeter, double frequency meter, synchro scope, push buttons for voltage and speed control,
control switches for GCB shall be provided on the generator control panel.
The unit is intended to be started, controlled in any of the modes from Generator Control Panel in local
& from main control room of Powerhouse and from Remote.
10.23 MAIN STEP-UP TRANSFORMER
Power generated at 18 KV will be stepped up to 400KV by means of 3x100MVA, 1Ph transformers for
each unit making a total of 15No's for 5 large units and 1 No. spare of 1-Ph 18/400KV 100 MVA oil
filled transformers (for 320 MW units) & 2 Nos 18 /400KV 3-Ph 150MVA oil filled transformers (for
160 MW units). These Step-up transformers will be installed in Transformer hall. Capacity of the
transformers arrived based on the Power Factor 0.9, Derating factor.
The main electrical parameters of each transformer will be:

a. Voltage ratio - 18 KV /400KV, 1Phase & 3 phase
b. Rating - 3 x 100 MVA (1 Ph) for 320 MW units
and 150MVA (3 Ph) for 160 MW units.
c. Cooling Method - OFWF (Oil Forced and Water Forced)
d. 18KV connection - Delta
e. 400KV connection - Star with neutral solidly earthed.
f. On load tap changer - In the range of +/-10.0% in step of 1.25%
The 18 KV terminals (Primary) will be suitable for Bus Duct connection and 400KV terminals for
connection to GIS.
The transformer will be equipped with the following accessories and metering instruments:
➢ An oil conservator made of steel sheets with welded joints. A diaphragm airtight seal is
provided with a breather connected into the air side of the diaphragm.
➢ A pressure relief device to protect against high pressure inside the oil tank.
➢ A gas relay mounted in the pipe connecting the conservator to the transformer tank and having
contacts for alarm and shutdown.
➢ A winding temperature indicator with sets of contacts for alarm and trip.
➢ An oil temperature indicator with alarm and trip contacts.
➢ An oil level indicator with magnetic level gauge and alarm contact.
➢ An on-load tap changer for changing the high voltage winding taps.
Salient features of Power Transformer:
Technical Particulars
1 Type Indoor Step Up
2 Standard IEC 60076
3 a) No. of windings Two
b) No. of Phases single
4 System frequency 50 Hz+3%& - 5%
Type of mounting On wheels mounted on rails
5 a) KVA rating of HV winding
100MVA single phase and 150 MVA , 3 Ph
b) KVA rating of LV winding
6 a) Low Voltage Winding 18 kV
b) High Voltage Winding 400/√3kV (1Ph), 400kV (3Ph)
7 Neutral Effectively earthed.
8 Vector Group after 3-Ph formation YNd11
9 a) L.V. Terminals 36KV Porcelain type bushing.

b) H.V. Terminals: 420kV RIP condenser type bushing
suitable for oil to oil or oil to SF6
termination
10 a) High Voltage Winding Graded
b) Low Voltage Winding Uniform
11 Type of cooling OFWF
12 Impedance Voltage at normal tap 15 % (IEC tol)
13 Insulating Medium Inhibited Mineral Oil (as per IEC:60296
and bid specification)
14 Tap changing gear
Type ON load tap changer
15 Insulation Levels for windings HV HVN LV
HV:1425
1.2 /50 micro – second wave shape impulse 1425 170 170
withstand (kVp)
Applied voltage (kV rms) 70 70 70
Induced overvoltage withstand (kVrms) 630 70 70
16 Permissible temperature rise over ambient
temp of 50 Deg C for ONAN &ONAF cooling
Of top oil measured by thermometer 50˚C
Of winding measured by resistance 55˚C
17 Minimum clearance in air (mm)
HV
Phase to ground 3500 3500
18 Bushing and Termination details :
HV winding Line end 420KV RIP Condenser bushing suitable
for GIB duct oil to SF6 termination
LV Winding 36KV porcelain bushing suitable for
busduct arrangement.
19 Insulation level of bushings HV LV
Lightning impulse withstand (kVP) 1425 170
Switching impulse withstand (kVP) 1175 NA
1 Minute power frequency withstand voltage 630 70
(kV rms)
20 Noise Level As per NEMA TR1 Latest issue

21 No. of Coolers Two nos. of 100% capacity one to act as
main & other act as stand by
List of Power Transformer Spares:
S. No Description Qty
1 Gaskets (All types) 1 set
2 Pressure relief device 1 No.
3 Gas detecting relay 1 No.
4 Buchholz relay 1 No.
5 Temperature indicators
a) Oil temperature indicator (OTI) 1 No.
b) Winding temperature indicator {(WTI) without repeater} 1 No. of each
6 Oil and water flow indicator with electrical contactors 1 No’s each
7 Gas sampling device 1No.
8 LV bushings 1 set
9 HV bushings 1 set
10 HVN bushing 1No
11 Silica Gel breather with 10kgs of additional silica gel. One No.
12 MOG 1 No.
13 Lifting jacks and steel slings 1set.
14 Valves of each type 2 No’s
15 Drain and vent plugs 2 No’s
Each type of MCB, auxiliary relay, contactor, heater, lamp and
16 2 No’s
push button.
17 Pumps of each type 1No’s
10.24 400KV INDOOR GIS
400KV Gas Insulated switchgear (GIS) units with sectionalizes and with double bus bar arrangement
proposed for the project. 400 KV GIS comprising the following bays:
 Generator transformer bays - 8 Nos.
 Station auxiliary transformer bays - 2 Nos.
 Bus coupler bays - 2 Nos.
 Bus Sectionalizer bays - 2 Nos.
 Line bays - 2 Nos.

To facilitate evacuation of power to two different grid substations as well as to avoid complete
interruption of power evacuation in case of any fault on the bus, bus Sectionalizer is considered. As the
400KV GIS consists 8 no’s of unit bays, 2 no’s SAT bays, 4 no’s of line bays and PT and Bus coupler bays
it is preferred to provide sectionalises to avoid from complete breakdown of the system and make
availability of other section which is healthy in case of Bus fault.
Indoor metal-enclosed phase segregated type SF6 gas insulated switchgear system rated for 400 kV, 3
phases, 63KA, 50 Hz consisting of following major items: switchgear system rated for 400 kV, 3 phases,
63KA, 50 Hz consisting of following major items:
a. 3150A SF6 gas insulated metal enclosed bus bars complete in all respects, comprising of:
 Individual bus bars enclosures running the length of the switchgear,
 Single-phase surge arrestors,
 Single-phase, 2-core voltage transformers,
 Single-phase disconnector complete with manual and motor driven operating
mechanisms, for isolation of voltage transformer,
 Single-phase safety earthing switches complete with manual and motor driven
operating mechanisms, with each single-phase disconnector.
b. Bus-coupler & bus sectionalize bay modules, each comprising of:
 3-pole SF6 gas insulated circuit breaker, complete with dedicated operating
mechanism,
 4-core, multi ratio, 3-pole current transformers,
 3-phase, single-pole group-operated disconnector complete with manual and motor
driven operating mechanisms,
 3-phase, single-pole group-operated safety earthing switches complete with manual
and motor driven operating mechanisms,
 Local control cubicle for control of coupler bay, bus bar VT and disconnector.
c. Generator bay modules, station transformer bay modules each comprising of:
 3-pole SF6 gas insulated circuit breaker, complete with dedicated operating
mechanism for each pole,
 5-core, multi ratio, 3-pole current transformer,
 Single-phase surge arrestors,
 3-phase, single-pole group-operated disconnector, complete with manual and motor
 3-phase, single-pole group-operated safety earthing switches, complete with manual
 Oil to SF6 bushings,

 Local control cubicle for control.
d. Transmission line bay modules, each comprising of:
 3-pole SF6 gas insulated circuit breaker, complete with individual operating
mechanism,
 5-core, multi ratio, 3-pole current transformer,
 3-phase, single-pole group-operated disconnectors, complete with manual and motor
 3-phase, single-pole group-operated safety earthing switches, complete with manual
 3-phase, single-pole group-operated high-speed earthing switch, complete with
manual and motor driven operating mechanism,
 SF6 / air bushings for outdoor connections,
 Local control cubicle for control.
e. Gas insulated bus duct (GIB) for interconnection between GSU transformers and respective
unit bays of GIS,
f. All necessary terminal boxes, SF6 gas filling, interconnecting power and control wiring,
earthing connections, gas monitoring equipment and piping support structures etc.,
g. Monitoring and diagnostic systems to monitor gas density, gas pressure, leakage, moisture,
partial discharge etc., and also operating parameters such as current, voltage, temperature
etc. complete with sensors, control/processor units, wiring/cabling in all respect and
integration of the systems with plant SCADA system.
10.25 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF COMPONENTS IN GIS:
10.25.1 Bus bars
Bus bar of each bay shall have separate gas compartment partitioned from adjacent bay. Gas barrier
insulators shall be painted with yellow colour. CTs shall be located in a separate gas compartment.
Bus bars chambers shall be so arranged as to allow maintenance on one busbar, i.e. gas removal, and
retain the other bus bar and circuits in service. The busbar phase conductor shall be aluminium
adequately supported by cast resin insulators or other approved material equally supported, at least
at both ends of each section making provision for free axial movement of conductor.
10.25.2 Circuit Breaker
Circuit breakers shall be equipped with the operating mechanism. Circuit breakers shall be of single
pressure type. Complete circuit breaker with all necessary items for successful operation shall be
supplied. The circuit breakers shall be designed for high speed single and three phase reclosing (as
applicable) with an operating sequence and timing as specified.

Circuit breaker shall be E1 - C2 – M2 class as per IEC 62271-100. Circuit breaker shall meet the duty
requirements for any type of fault or fault location also for line charging and dropping when used on
effectively grounded system and perform make and break operations as per the stipulated duty cycles
satisfactorily. Circuit Breaker shall be of Single Break type and shall be suitable for an operating
sequence of O-0.03 sec-CO-3 min-CO.
10.25.3 Current Transformers
The current transformers and accessories shall conform to IEC 61869 and other relevant standards
except to the extent explicitly modified in the specification. The particulars of the various cores may
change within reasonable limits as per the requirements of protection relay supplier.
10.25.4 Voltage Transformers
The voltage transformers shall conform to IEC- 61869 and other relevant standards except to the
extent explicitly modified in the specification. Voltage transformers shall be of the electromagnetic
type with SF6 gas insulation. The earth end of the high voltage winding and the ends of the secondary
winding shall be brought out in the terminal box.
10.25.5 Isolators
Isolators shall be of the single-pole, group operated type, installed in the switchgear to provide
electrical isolation of the circuit breakers, the transformers, double bus and transmission lines. The
isolators shall conform to IEC- 62271-102.
Salient features of 400 KV GIS System:
S. No. Technical particulars Parameters for 400KV
1. Rated Voltage 400 kV (rms)

2. System Voltage 420 KV (rms)
3. Rated frequency 50 HZ
4. Grounding Effectively earthed
Rated power frequency with stand Voltage (1 min) line to
5. 1050 kV (rms)
earth
6. Impulse withstand BIL (1.2/50 mic Sec) Line to earth 1425 kVp
7. Rated short time withstand current (1 sec) 63 kA (rms)
8. Rated peak with stand current 157.5kA (peak)
Guaranteed maximum gas losses for complete installation

9. As per IEC 62271-203
as well as for all individual sections in

Rated current normal/ at site (at 40-degree C design
10. 3000 Amp.
ambient temperature)
Zone- III, as per IS-
11. Seismic level
1893, Year-2016
Spares for GIS:
1. SF6 gas Pressure Relief Device assembly of each type 1 set

SF6 Pressure gauge cum switch / Density monitors and pressure switch as
2. applicable, of each type. 2 sets
Coupling device for pressure gauge cum switch for connecting gas han-
3. dling plant of each type 1 set
Rubber Gaskets, “O” Rings and Seals for SF6 gas for GIS enclosure of each
4. type 2 sets
5. SF6 gas (20 % of total gas quantity) 1 lot
6. UHF PD Sensors of each type along with BNC Connector 2 sets
7. Trip coil assembly with resistor as applicable of each type 3 sets
8. Closing coil assembly with resistor as applicable of each type 3 sets
Relays, Power contactors, push buttons, timers & MCBs etc of each type
9. and rating 2 sets
10. Auxiliary switch assembly of each type 2 sets
11. Spring Charging Motor 2 sets
Complete Spring Operating Mechanism including charging mecha-
12. nism etc. of each type 2 sets
Limit switch and Aux. Switches for complete 3 phase equipment of isola-
13. tor, earth switch & fast acting earth switch. 2 sets
14. Complete CT assembly 1 set
15. Complete PT assembly 1 set
16. Complete Gas insulated Surge arrester 1 set
10.26 CONTROL & PROTECTION EQUIPMENT
Integrated Numerical protection relays will be provided in redundant for each Generator and
Generator transformer. Basic protections are indicated here under however, specific protections
related to variable speed machines shall be considered at the time of detailed engineering.

10.26.1 Generator protection
Redundant Generator numerical protection relays shall be of different make as per the latest
protection philosophy. Relays shall be IEC61850 complaint and shall have GPS time synchronization
provision in addition with Disturbance Reporting and Event logging provisions.
The following protections will be provided for the generators:
- Backup Impedance (21)
- Over Excitation (24)
- Under Voltage/ Over Voltage (27/59)
- Under Power (37)
- Loss of Field/ excitation (40)
- Negative phase sequence (46)
- Thermal Over Loading (49)
- Breaker Failure (50BF)
- Voltage Restrained Over current (51V)
- PT fuse failure (60FL)
- 95% Stator earth fault (64G2)
- 100% Stator earth fault (64G1)
- Under/ Over frequency (81O/U)
- Generator Differential (87G)
- Annunciator (30)
- Rotor Earth Fault (64F)
- Master Trip relay (86G)
- Trip Circuit Supervision (95)
- Split phase based inter turn protection
- Overall differential protection with 3 winding inputs (Generator, GT HV, and
Generator Tap off).
10.26.2 Turbine Protections
The following protections will be provided:

 Under/ Over Speed (12/14)
 Governor Failure Relay (33/63)
 Bearing Temperature (38T)
 Oil pressure Failure (96.2 OPU)
 Oil levels
 Shear pin

 vibrations etc
10.26.3 Auxiliary Transformer Protections
The following protections will be provided:

 Under Voltage (27)
 Instantaneous O/C & E/F (50/50N)
 IDMT O/C & E/F (51/51N)
 Master Trip (86)
10.26.4 Step-Up Generator Transformer Protections
The following protections will be provided for step-up transformer:

 Transformer over Fluxing (49)
 Instantaneous O/C & E/F (50/50N)
 IDMT O/C & E/F (51/51N)
 Transformer Differential (87GT)
 Restricted earth fault (64REF)
 Annunciator (30)
 Oil temperature, Alarm/Trip Aux (49OA/OT)
 Winding temperature, Alarm/Trip Aux (49 WA/WT)
 Buchholz/ Alarm/Trip Aux (63 A/T)
 High Speed Tripping (Master) (86T)
 Trip Circuit Supervision (95)
 Low Oil Level Alarm (LOLA)
 Oil Surge Trip (OSR-T)
 Pressure Relief Device Trip Aux. (PRD-T)
 Apparatus thermal device (26)
 Liquid Switch (71)
10.26.5 400KV Line protections
400KV feeder protection shall be redundant with numerical protection relays and shall be of different
make as per the latest protection philosophy. Relays shall be compatible to IEC 61850 Protocol.
Disturbance Recorder evaluation cum event logger units shall be included.
The following protections will be provided for the lines:
 Distance Protection (21)
 Over/ under voltage (27/59)
 AC Directional over current (67/67N)
 Frequency (81)

 Master Trip (86)
 Trip Circuit Supervision (95)
 AC Reclosing Relay / Auto Reclose (79)
 Instantaneous Overcurrent Relay (50)
 Phase Angle Measuring or Out-of-Step Protective Relay (78)
 Bus Differential (87B)
 Overvoltage Relay (59)
 400KV reactor protection
 400KV bus bar protection
 Bus coupler protection
10.26.6 List of Spares for Protection System
1. Numerical protection relay (complete relay unit) - 1 No. of each type used.
2. Circuit breaker TNC switch for CB open & Close - 5 Nos.
3. Unit Emergency stop switch - 5 Nos.
4. High/Low burden trip relays/Master protection trip relays - 5 Nos. of each type used
5. Trip circuit supervision relay - 7 Nos.
6. Test handle - 2 Nos.
7. DC Change over relays - 5 Nos.
8. Trivector Meters (TVM) - 2 Nos.
9. DC Supply supervision relays - 5 Nos.
10. Any auxiliary item i.e. flag relays, single phase trip relays, voltage selection relays,
interposing relays, selector switch items, MCBs, fuses and other miscellaneous - 5
Nos.
11. Spares for distance protection, bus bar protection peripheral units.
10.27 SAFETY EARTHING & LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEM
Separate earthing grids will be provided for powerhouse and switchyard area and they will be
interconnected. The buried portion of the earth conductor will be of mild steel and exposed earth
conductors will be of galvanized steel. Required number of earthing pits will be provided. The earthing
grid will be designed to have a system resistance below 0.5 ohm. Detailed Design and drawings
enclosed.
A lightning protection system will be provided as per IS - 2309 and Indian Electricity Rules. The
protections will consist of roof conductors, air terminals and down conductors and will be provided
for outdoor Switch Yard.

10.28 AUXILIARY MECHANICAL SERVICES
10.28.1 EOT crane for Powerhouse
Two nos. EOT cranes of 400/30 Tons capacity each will be installed in the powerhouse building for
handling equipment during erection and maintenance and one no EOT crane with 150/30T in
unloading bay.
The EOT Crane shall be electrically driven, single trolley, double girder and overhead travelling type.
The cranes shall be provided complete with crane rails, rail soleplates, rail and soleplate fixings, all
necessary cabling, longitudinal travel collector wires and associated equipment, and end buffers for
the longitudinal travel. Each crane shall have hoisting, traversing and travelling motions. The Group
Classification for EOT crane shall be Mechanisms M5. Service bay EOT cranes shall work in Tandom
operation for installation and erection of heaviest components such as Generator rotor and stator.
Operation of EOT crane envisaged with Cabin and Radio Remote Control.
10.28.2 EOT crane for GIS
One no EOT cranes of 7.5T capacity will be installed in the GIS building for handling equipment. The
EOT Crane shall be electrically driven, single trolley, single girder and overhead travelling type. The
crane shall be provided complete with crane rails, rail soleplates, rail and soleplate fixings, all
necessary cabling, longitudinal travel collector wires and associated equipment, and end buffers for
the longitudinal travel. Crane shall have hoisting, traversing and travelling motions. The Group
Classification for EOT crane shall be Mechanisms M5. Operation of EOT crane envisaged with pendent
push button Control.
For all the cranes VVVF drives are envisaged for all the motion controls with different creep speeds as
required. Shrouded DSL system all along the Powerhouse length is envisaged for extending the supply
to the crane for safe operation.
10.28.3 EOT crane for others
For handling of intake and draft tube gates suitable electrically operated hoisting mechanism will be
provided individually.
10.28.4 Ventilation & Air Conditioning System
Adequate ventilation system will be provided for the total powerhouse area consisting MIV, turbine,
generator, machine hall, service bay & erection bay floors.
Package / Chiller units of adequate capacity shall be provided for air-conditioning of the important
areas of the plant.

HVAC system envisaged to provide cooled air ventilation by circulating chilled water from chiller plant
to maintain temperature in the powerhouse complex and other areas at less than 30-degree C with 65
% RH and air conditioning the areas like the control room at less than 25-degree C with 55% RH.
To minimize the return air duct exhaust fans are considered at the top of the service bay and Machine
hall area as necessary. Two sets of equipment are considered for power house complex to ascertain in
minimizing the duct sizes and space constraints. The HVAC system equipment rooms shall be placed
outside the power house premises and preferably at both ends and the ducts shall be routed to center.
10.28.5 HVAC system consists of:
 Blowers, Fans, air filter units, diffusers, dampers, louvers, circulating water pumps,
water spray system with bronze nozzles and fittings.
 Air-handling units, refrigerating machines, Chiller units, circulating pumps and their
fittings including painting, thermal insulation and foundations.
 Air duct, air dampers, air outlets and inlets and associated fittings including painting
and thermal insulation.
 Power source panel, operating panel, control system conduit tubes and cables for the
ventilation and air conditioning system, and associated fittings including painting.
 Water piping including expansion tank, headers, water pipes and fitting such as
elbows, bees, couplings, valves, supports etc. for air-conditioning system including
painting and thermal insulation.
 Refrigerant pipes and fitting such as elbows, bees, coupling valves, supports etc for air
conditioning system including painting and thermal insulation.
 Closed circuit air ventilation system shall be provided for removal of heat and control
of temperature of stator and rotor winding and machine enclosure.
 The air draft shall be produced with self-ventilated hub and rim. Electric fans are not
allowed.
 The cooling system shall be designed in a way to allow the generator/motor to operate
continuously at full power, without exceeding the temperature rise specified values,
when the capacity of the air-water heat exchangers is reduced by 10% due to internal
or external deposits of foreign bodies.
10.28.6 Air-to-water heat exchangers
Water supply for air to water heat exchangers shall be ensured by two inlet and outlet pipes connected
to the plant cooling water system. This system shall be complete with air coolers, cooling fins, fans,
cooling water pipes, valves, ducts, filters/strainers, sealing plate, alarm and indicating devices, flow
relays, RTDs etc.

10.28.7 Fire Protection System
The proposed fire protection system shall be designed to provide adequate safety measures in the area
susceptible to fire in the power station. TAC classifies hydel power generating stations as “Light hazard
Occupancy” and hence the system shall be designed accordingly. This system is designed as per
applicable requirements of NFPA 850 (recommended practice for Fire Protection for Hydroelectric
Generating Plants).
 Sprinkler and detection system for Generators and transformers
 Nitrogen injection fire protection system for power transformers (NFPS)
 Fire alarm and detection system for control room.
 Fire alarm and detection system for Gas insulated substation.
 Fire hydrant system for complete power house area.
 Portable fire extinguishers wherever required.
10.28.8 Fire Detection and Alarm System
Control rooms, switchgear rooms, battery rooms etc shall be provided with Analogue Addressable
Microprocessor based fire detection and alarm system. Multi-sensor detectors, Heat detectors, Manual
call points, Sounders etc shall be provided wherever required.
10.28.9 Passenger and Goods Lifts
One number passenger elevator and 1 No. Goods lift considered. Capacity of passenger elevator
considered as 13 persons/884 kgs and goods elevator considered as 4T (final rating will be decided
during detailed engineering).
The elevator shall be field-erected and shall include but not limited to the following components:
Traction-machine hoist motor, sound-reducing systems, beams, buffer braces, sheaves, ropes,
counterweight, buffers, flexible guide shoes, safety devices and governor, elevator cabin, cabin-
mounted controls, motion indicators, lights and ventilating fan, hall-mounted controls and motion
indicators, ladder, guards, hoist way entrances, electric power, lighting and control wiring, lift
controllers and stopping devices, Automatic Rescue Device and shop painting.
Main features considered are tabulated below:
Description Passenger Elevator Goods Elevator

Quantity One Number One Number
4 Tons (Exact rating will be
Load Carrying Capacity 884 kgs (13 persons)
decided DDE)
Speed (m/s) 1 1
No. of landings for the elevator G +4 (5 Stops): All in one side G +4 (5 Stops): All in one side
in control block side entrance. entrance.

Fl. sequence: As per power house Fl. sequence: As per power
layout house layout
Type of control/drive AC variable voltage variable AC variable voltage variable
frequency microprocessor based frequency microprocessor
with built in stabilizer. based with built in stabilizer.
Position of machine room Directly above the lift shaft Directly above the lift shaft
Well Dimensions 2500mm (W) x 1900 mm (D) 3400mm (W) x 3300 mm (D)-
For 4Ton
Method of Control VVVF Control System VVVF Control System
Minimum Factor of Safety for 12 12
Wire Rope
Minimum Factor of Safety for As per relevant standard (Shall As per relevant standard (Shall
Other part of Lift not be less than 6) not be less than 6)
Braking arrangement Automatic Electro Mechanical Automatic Electro Mechanical
10.28.10 LP Air Compressor System
LP air compressor system should be sized for providing required pressure for unit mechanical
braking, maintenance shaft seal, runner and draft tube air admissions, service requirements, supply to
filters.
Suitable air compressor system to meet the station requirements such as for brakes, cleaning etc. is
provided. Refer attached schematic drawing of LP air compressor system
LP Compressed air system shall essentially consist the following equipment:
a. 2 x 100% (1W +1S) LP Air compressors (Oil free screw compressor)
b. 2 x 100% Air driers.
c. 2 Nos air receivers.
d. 1No’s common receiver for each 2 units - total 3no’s.
e. Associated piping, valves, instrumentation.
10.29 Dewatering and Drainage System
For Dewatering of turbine casing water up to the Tail race gate, seven numbers of submersible pumps
of suitable capacity will be provided (3 in each sump). The Dewatering & drainage sumps are located
on either end of the units well below the elevation of MIV floor/turbine floor. The delivery of the
dewatering pumps are connected above the max Tail water level. An isolation valve along with NRV for
each pump are envisaged. The discharge line will be provided with necessary isolation valves and

piping. Necessary level switches will be provided in the Dewatering sump to facilitate auto start / stop
of the pumps.
To remove drain water collected in the drainage sump, eight (8) numbers of submersible/VT pumps of
suitable capacity will be installed (4 nos in each side sump) with necessary piping and valves. The
discharge from the pumps will be taken above the maximum tail water level. The discharge line will be
provided with necessary isolation valves and piping. Necessary level switches will be provided in the
drainage sump to facilitate auto start/stop of the pumps.
As per CEA guidelines additional submersible type dewatering pumps and it's control panel shall be
provided above machine hall floor.
10.30 Flood water system
Provision of Flood water evacuation system has also been made in case of inadvertent flooding of the
powerhouse. The system shall comprise of suitable number of submersible pumps with main and
standby installed along with valves, piping, control annunciation to discharge water outside the
powerhouse building and shall have provision to extend DG set power supply. The Control Panel along
with DG set system for the Submersible pumps shall be located well above the maximum tail water
level to enable the pumps operation in case of flooding. The outlet from flood pump will be laid above
the ground to release water into tailrace channel.
10.31 Oil Handling System
Oil handling system for transformer oil and lubricating oil for Motor generator units will be provided
with suitable piping, valves, tanks, purifiers etc. and shall be located such as to conform to the
requirements.
10.32 AUXILIARY ELECTRICAL SERVICES
10.32.1 400/11KV Station Auxiliary Transformers
2 no’s 20/25 MVA, ONAN/ONAF 400/11KV Station Transformers provided for proving power supply
to 11KV Bus. These transformers will be connected to the 11KV bus separately through necessary
switchgear. The output at 11KV fed to the Unit Auxiliary Transformers and common auxiliary
transformers.
a. Voltage ratio - 400/11KV, 3 phase, 50 Hz
b. Rating - 2 X 20/25 MVA
c. Type - ONAN/ONAF
d. LV - Delta
e. HV - Star with neutral solidly earthed
f. On load tap changer - +/-10% in 1.25% steps

10.32.2 11KV Switchgear
11KV switchgear will have 4 incomers (2 from Station auxiliary transformers & 2 from Emergency DG
set) with bus Sectionalizer and enough outgoing feeders to connect to unit auxiliary transformers and
station requirements.
The main electrical parameters of the switchgear will be:
a. Rated Voltage – 11kV
b. Rated short circuit breaking current – 40kA for three Second
c. Rated bus bar current – 1600 A
10.32.3 11/0.415KV Unit Auxiliary Transformers
415 V Unit & station auxiliary power will be derived by providing 9 nos. 2MVA, 11/0.415KV Unit
auxiliary transformers. These transformers will be connected to the 11KV Bus bar. The auxiliary
transformers will feed the unit auxiliary loads through an Unit Auxiliary board by means of suitably
rated cables. The auxiliary loads of unit include governor oil pumps, cooling water pumps etc. The
transformer will be in service after the Generator kept on grid and feeds the loads uninterruptedly.
a. Voltage ratio - 11/0.415KV, 3 phase, 50 Hz
b. Rating - 2 MVA
c. Type - Dry Type
d. Primary connection - Delta
e. Secondary connection - Star with neutral solidly earthed
f. Off circuit Tap Changer (OCTC) - +/-5% in steps of 2.5%
UAT rating of 2MVA is envisaged duly considering to meet the two units loads in case of failure of any
other UAT. Major loads are Auxiliary excitation supply required during starting as Motor which will be
around 750 KVA and the Cooling water pump supply requirement which will be approx. 125 KW and
OPU system pumps of higher capacity. Accordingly the scheme is designed. However final rating will
be decided during detailed engineering with respect to auxiliary consumption defined by OEMs.
10.32.4 415V Switchgear
415V Station Auxiliary Board (SAB)

Station Auxiliary transformers will be connected to a separate bus section of 415V auxiliary
switchgear.
The 415V auxiliary switchgear will feed the entire unit and station loads. The switchgear will be
equipped with the following.
a. Two nos. ACB controlled incomer feeders from Station auxiliary transformers.
b. ACB controlled Outgoing feeders to Unit auxiliary boards

c. Outgoing feeders to battery chargers / lighting panels with MCCB.
d. Motor feeders fitted with MPCB, DOL / Star- Delta Starter, thermal overload relays etc.,
are of draw out type
e. The switchgear will be provided with the necessary current transformers, indicating
instruments, relays, lamps, push buttons etc,
a. Rated Voltage – 415V
b. Rated short circuit breaking current – 50kA for One Second
c. Rated bus bar current – 2500A
10.32.5 415V Unit Auxiliary Boards
The Unit Auxiliary transformer will be connected to a separate bus section of 415V auxiliary
switchgear of unit auxiliary Board. The Unit Auxiliary board will feed the entire unit loads of each
Turbine-Generator. The switchgear will be equipped with the following.
 ACB controlled incomer feeder from Station auxiliary Board.
 ACB controlled incomer feeder from Unit auxiliary Transformer
 Outgoing feeders with MCCB.
 Motor feeders fitted with MPCB, DOL / Star- Delta Starter, thermal overload relays
etc., are of draw out type
 The switchgear will be provided with the necessary current transformers, indicating
instruments, relays, lamps, push buttons etc,
a. Rated Voltage – 415V
b. Rated short circuit breaking current – 50kA for One Second
c. Rated bus bar current – 2000 A
10.32.6 Power Station Auxiliary Services
The various services in the power plant will be supplied at the following nominal voltages depending
upon their ratings and function:
a. Motors - 415V, 3 phase AC supply
b. Lighting and space heaters - 230V, 1 phase AC supply
c. Power receptacles - 415V, 3 phase AC supply
d. Control circuits - 220V ungrounded DC supply for control,
indication & Instrumentation.

10.32.7 Emergency Power System - 1010 KVA Diesel Generator
Two numbers (1W +1S) of 11KV, 3 phase Diesel Generator set will be provided to meet the
requirement of power supply during construction. As per standard DG rating available in the market in
11KV voltage is 1010 KVA and hence 1010 KVA rating DG set envisaged. This DG set will meet the
requirement of power supply for emergency lighting and maintenance purposes during AC power
failure like operation of crane, operation of drainage and Dewatering pumps, ventilation system etc.
The DG set will consist of a Diesel engine with engine mounted accessories, an Alternator rated for
1010 kVA, 11KV, 3 phase, 50 Hz with exhaust system, fuel oil system, filters, piping, valves and fittings,
etc.
10.32.8 Direct Current Supply System
The DC system is the most reliable source of supply in the power station and will be used for the
control and protection of power plant equipment. The DC system will be used for the following:
a. Electrical control, Protection relay equipment and indications / annunciations on the control panel.
b. Emergency D.C lighting in case of total AC power failure
Two sets of 220 V, 500AH (tentative and final rating will be decided during detailed engineering)
battery bank with two nos. float and float cum boost charger and DC distribution board will meet the
DC loads. The batteries will be Lead Acid type plante type, complete with racks, porcelain insulators,
inter cell and inter-tier connectors. The chargers will be of silicon rectifier type with automatic voltage
control and load limiting features. Under normal conditions, the battery will be on float charge. The
float charger is connected to a distribution board and meets the requirements of DC load. In case of
additional demand of load or AC supply failure, the battery will meet the requirements of DC loads.
10.32.9 Communication system
a. Internal Telephone System: An Electronic telephone exchange is to be provided in the

powerhouse control room for Communication system between different vulnerable locations of
the project. It is also proposed to install a 10-line exchange with subscribers at various
important locations of the project for quick communication of the information and instructions
etc.
b. External Communication: One Telephone connection shall be provided in the power station
from the local Department of Telecommunication network for external communication.
c. Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)/OPGW: 1set of PLCC panels with 48V DC system
is proposed. Power-line communications / tele protection systems operate by adding a
modulated carrier signal to the wiring system. Different types of power-line communications use
different frequency bands. PLCC panels shall be provided with protection couplers for carrier
inter tripping.

RTU panel shall be provided for Data and speech communication with the state Load Dispatch center.
In addition, with Data and Speech communications separate dedicated channels shall be provided for
protection along with protection couplers.
10.32.10 400 KV Switchyard equipment’s:
The 400KV pothead yard will consist of four Outgoing line bays with isolator, CT, CVT, WT & LA and
take off gantry tower / structures. The isolators will be of Horizontal double break type with motor
operated operating mechanism. The capacitive voltage transformers shall be of silicon composite oil
filled type. Location of tariff metering CT (whether inside GIS or in ODY) will be decided based on
approving authority recommendation. The switch yard will be of Outdoor type with galvanized steel
lattice structures.
10.33 POWER EVACUATION
Two nos 400 KV Moose Double circuit Transmission Lines shall be used by the plant. One line will be
connected to PGCIL Narendra 400 KV substation at Dharwad and other line will be connected to PSP
CPSS for evacuation of generated Power and for Supply of power during pumping mode..
Power evacuation system consists of transmission line, protection/ metering equipment, CT's, PT's,
LA's along with its supporting structures and Receiving end equipment including bay extension at the
other end, PLCC/OLTE MUX, 48V DC battery system.
Pumped storage plant will be operated based on quantum of power required as per the PPA
commitment.
10.34 TRANSPORT LIMITATIONS
The unit’s size is determined depending upon the transportation constraints, flexibility of operation
and system considerations and geological constraints. All the equipment’s are sized based on the
consideration of following transport limitations;
 Maximum transport weight that can be safely transport to project site is 170T
 Length – 7 Mt approx.
 Width – 5.5 Mt. (max)
 Height – 6 Mt. (Max)
10.35 ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL WORKSHOP
The following list of workshop equipment’s (Electrical and mechanical) are envisaged to carry
maintenance of equipment’s during shut down (or) during operation of project.
Electrical workshop material:
S. No: Description
1 AC HV Test Kit, 0-50 KV, 10 A
2 DC HV Test Kit, 0- 100KV, 100 mA

3 3 Phase & Single Phase Variac
4 0 - 250 V, 10 Amps DC variable Source
5 Variable Frequency Source
6 0- 30 mA Variable DC Source
7 3 Phase, voltage(0-150V), Current(0-5A) Injection Kit
8 Numerical Relay Test Kit
9 0-10KV, 5A, Automatic Tan Delta & Capacitance Kit
10 0-300 Deg Soldering Station
11 Temperature Bath for Calibration of Thermometers
12 Polarity Tester
13 0-1000A, Primary Injection Kit
14 0- 100 KV Oil BDV Test Kit
15 Transformer Ratio Test Kit
16 Kalman Portable Dissolved Gas Analyser
17 Circuit Breaker Timing & Analyser Kit
18 Mustimeters
19 Clamp Meters 0-1000A
20 Clamp Meters 0-5 A
21 Dual Channel Oscilloscope
22 Wheatstone Bridge
23 0- 1000 ohms, 2 A Rheostat
24 DC Ground Fault Detector
25 Earth Megger
26 5KV Insulation Tester
27 Recti former- 0-1000A, 0-50V
10.36 Mechanical Workshop material:
S. No: Description
High Speed Precision Lathe (Horizontal Lathe Machine) with Drill bits upto 55
1
mm, reamer sets upto 55 mm, cutting bits
2 Arc welding machines and equipment
3 Aluminium welding machine
4 Milling Machine
5 Radial Drilling Machine
6 Bench Drilling Machine
7 Grinding Machine - AG4, AG7, Angle, Flexible
8 Portable Grinding Machine
9 Bench vice
10 Power Hacksaw Machine

11 Hydraulic Press
12 Tube/Pipe Bending Machine
13 Pipe Rolling Machine
14 Plate Bending Machine (Optional as per requirement)
15 Oxygen Cutting & Welding Kits
16 Measuring & Inspection Equipment. (Vernier Calipurse, Big & small)
17 Forklifts and lifting equipment
18 Work Benches - Bench Grinder
19 Saw Cutting Machine for cutting pipes, rods
20 Dead weight Pressure test Bench for 0- 250 Kg/cm2
21 Welding Generator- 600 amps
22 Welding Transformer
23 Brazing Transformer
24 Surface plate 2mtr x 1 Mtr.
25 Pipe Flaring Machine Set
26 Magnetic Base Drilling Machine upto 32 mm
27 Straight edge 5 Mtrs.
28 Outside Micrometre 2 Mtr.
29 Inside Micrometre - 500 mm
30 Oil Testing Kit
31 Hydraulic Pressure Pump Set
10.37 TOOLS AND TACKLES FOR HANDLING OF TURBINE
The following list of tools & tackles are envisaged for handling of turbine and its equipment during
erection and Operation & Maintenance time.
S.no Description Quantity

Hydraulic torque tensioners for runner/turbine shaft flange 2 sets (one per each
1
coupling bolts type of Unit)
Pneumatic Nut runner for opening each type of bolt size viz.
2 sets (one per each
2 head cover, bottom ring, labyrinths, draft tube cone bolts etc.
type of Unit)
used in the plant.
Torque wrenches of adequate torque capacity for Labyrinth, 2 sets (one per each
3 top cover, bottom ring, draft tube cone bolts etc. type of Unit)
2 sets (one per each
4 Set of nylon slings – round, for handling turbine components.
type of Unit)
Eye bolts of each size (M12 or above) used in the turbine com- 2 sets (one per each
5
ponents. type of Unit)

Lifting shackles of each size (M12 or above) used in the tur- 2 sets (one per each
6
bine components. type of Unit)
Equipment for the Spiral Case Pressure Test consisting of a
Test Head and a Test Ring (1 set common to large machines 2 sets (1 set for each
7
and 1 set common to small machines) to close the Spiral Case – capacity of machine)
Stay ring assembly for the pressure test.
3 Sets (2 Sets for
Site erection devices for stay ring: measuring stents, platforms
8 large units, 1 set for
and other tools and devices for stay ring site machining
small unit)
2 sets (1 set for each
9 Runner Inspection platform
capacity of machine)
10 Special tools for runner and turbine shaft handling
11 Special tools for head cover and bottom ring handling
12 Special tools for turbine guide bearing and shaft seal handling
10.38 TOOLS AND TACKLES FOR HANDLING OF GENERATOR- MOTOR
The following list of tools & tackles are envisaged for handling of generator motor and its equipment
during erection and Operation & Maintenance time.
S.No Description Quantity

a. Stator core clamping, stator bar assembly device at site
Stator roundness measuring device and length ruler with tem- 2 sets (1 set for each
1.
perature compensated criteria capacity of machine)
2. Sample plate for double dovetail bars assembly
Stator core subsection compaction device (including bolts, 2 sets (1 set for each
3.
clamping plate , nuts) capacity of machine)
4. Staking mandrels
5. Shaping bars
6. Stator core clamping device (Including spanner, tension) 2 sets (1 set for each

7. Shovel end tools
8. Wedge pulling tool
10. Stator bar lifting device
11. Bar assembly device
Stator/Rotor bar welding device (incl medium frequency 2 sets (1 set for each
12.
equipments) capacity of machine)
13. Wedge pushing tool
14. Stator mounting supports
15. Measuring ruler for power unit
b. Rotor assembly tools
1. Rotor core clamping device
2. Temporary clamping bolts for rotor core assembly
3. Rotor roundness measuring device
4. Rotor mounting supports (without sole plates)
5. Device for connecting the unit shaft
6. Stator lifting device
7. Rotor lifting device
Assembly and disassembly and adjusting device for thrust 2 sets (1 set for each
8.
bearing and guide bearing capacity of machine)
9. Magnetic drilling machine 2 sets (1 set for each

10. Generator run out measuring device
11. Lifting balance beam connected to crane
Rotor winding assembly and dismantle tools, rotor bar lifting 2 sets (1 set for each
12.
device capacity of machine)
10.39 LIST OF APPLICABLE IS/IES/BS CODES FOR ELECTRO-MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
Sr.No. Standard Number Title
Guidelines For Formulation Of Detailed Project Reports

1. CEA Guidelines for DPR For Hydro Electric Schemes, Their Acceptance And Exami-
nation For Concurrence
Hydraulic Turbines For Medium And Large Power Houses-
2. IS 12837
Guidelines For Selection
Guidelines For Selection Of Hydraulic Turbine, Prelimi-
3. IS 12800-3 nary Dimensioning & Layout Of Surface Hydro Electric
Power House
Hydraulic Turbines, Storage Pumps And Pump-Turbines -
4. IEC 60193
Model Acceptance Tests
Field Acceptance Tests To Determine The Hydraulic
5. IEC 60041 Performance Of Hydraulic Turbines, Storage Pumps And
Pump-Turbines
Rotating Electrical Machines - Part 1: Rating And Perfor-
6. IEC 60034-1
mance
Standard Methods For Determining Losses And Efficiency
7. IEC 60034-2
From Tests
Mechanical Vibration Of Rotating Electrical Machines
8. IS 12075 With Shaft Heights 56 Mm And Higher - Measurement,
Evaluation And Limits Of Vibration Severity
9. IEC 60146 Semiconductor Converters - General Requirements
Penstock And Turbine Inlet Butterfly Valves For Hydro

10. IS 7326
Power Stations And Systems

Guide To Specification Of Hydraulic Turbine Governing
11. IEC 61362
Systems
12. IEC 60044-1 Instrument Transformer – Part 1: Current Transformer
13. IEC 60044-2 Instrument Transformer – Part 2: Voltage Transformer
14. IEC 62271 High-Voltage Switchgear And Control Gear
IEEE Recommended Practice For Master/Remote Supervi-

15. IEEE 999-1992
sory Control And Data Acquisition (Scada)
16. IEEE C37. 20.3-2001 IEEE Standard For Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear.
IEEE Standard for Relays and Relay Systems Associated

17. IEEE C37. 90-1989
with Electric Power Apparatus
IEEE Guide for Protective Relay Applications to Power
18. IEEE C37. 91-2000
Transformers
19. IEEE C37.101-1993 IEEE Guide for Generator Ground Protection
20. IEEE C37.122 -1983 IEEE Standard for Gas Insulated Substations
IEEE Guide for Protective Relay Applications to Power

21. IEEE C37.97-1979
Systems Buses (ANSI)
IEEE Application Guide for Surge Protection of Electric
22. IEEE C62. 23-1995
Generating Plants
IEEE Recommended Practice for Sizing Lead-Acid Batter-
23. IEEE Std 485-1997
ies for Stationary Applications
24. IS 13947:1993 Low voltage switchgear and control gear
25. IS 2026 Specification for Power Transformers
International codes for testing of speed governing systems

26. IEC 308
for hydraulic turbines.
IEEE Recommended practice for preparation of equip-
27. IEEE Std 125-2007 ment specifications for speed governing of hydraulic tur-
bines intended to drive electric generators.
28. IS 8084 Bus ducts, IEEE C37.23, IS 8084
29. IS 3043 / IEEE 80 Code of practice for earthing.
Code of practice for protection of building and allied

30. IS 2309
structures against lightning.

31. IS 6665-2004 Code of practice for industrial lighting
IEC/IEEE Standard Generator Circuit Breakers

32.
C37.013
IS:8130, IS:7098, Construction, Performance and testing of XLPE insulated
33.
HV power cables
Construction, Performance and testing of 1100 V grade
34. IS:1554, IS:8130
PVC insulated control cables
Construction, Performance and testing of power cables
35. IS:1554
1100 V grade PVC insulated
Construction, Performance and testing of 1100 V grade
36. IS:694
Lighting/Misc./ Light duty unarmored cables.
37. IEEE C37.23, IS 8084 Bus Ducts
38. NFPA-72:2019 Fire Protection system
39. IS: 659:1964 Safety code for Air conditioning.
40. IS: 660:1963 Safety code for mechanical Refrigeration.
IS-3177: 1999 (2003- Code of practice for Electric Overhead Travelling Crane
41.
2007) Reaffirmed 2006 and Gantry cranes other than Steel work cranes.
Specification for Steel Wire Suspension Ropes for Lifts,

42. IS 2365: 1977
Elevators and Hoists
43. IS-10426 Specification for public address amplifiers
Net Heads Adopted in the Project

Description
FRL of Upper Reservoir 857 857 857 857
MDDL at Upper Reservoir 829 829 829 829
FRL at Lower Reservoir 659.00 659.00 659.00 659.00
MDDL at Lower Reservoir 637.00 637.00 637.00 637.00
Avg. Gross Head 195.00 195.00 195.00 195.00
Total Head Loss 5.10 6.00 4.00 4.40
Rated Net Head 189.90 189.00 199.00 199.40

Description

CHAPTER 11 POWER EVACUATION AND INTEGRATION
11.1 POWER EVACUATION SYSTEM:
The generated voltage of both wind and solar generations will be stepped to 33kV which will be
pooled to a cluster level pooling substation which will be strategically located to pool the maximum
generation and stepped to 400kV voltage level to minimize the losses. The pooled power at different
cluster substations will be routed to a central pooling substation where in the complete generation of
wind and solar will be pooled along with the generation/pumping of pumped storage scheme of 1280
MW.
The pooled power will be evacuated to PGCIL 220/400kV Narendra Grid Sub-Station, Dharwad
District with ACSR moose double circuit towers. Complete indicative scheme is depicted in following
figure.
At the time of excess generation i.e. above committed 1280 MW RTC from solar and wind plants,
pumped storage scheme will run in pumping mode to pump water from lower reservoir to upper
reservoir and when the generation is less than the RTC i.e. 1280 MW, pumped storage scheme will run
in generating mode to cater the deficit generation. Power evacuation of 1280 MW RTC will be
regulated by the state of art control system with multi plant coordination by either clamping the
excess generation or by switching ON the pumped storage plant in generation mode. Metering will be
provided on the outgoing lines of central pooling substation.

CHAPTER 12 CONSTRUCTION PROGRAMME & PLANT PLANNING
12.1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
The project execution is proposed to be completed in a period of 36 months excluding pre

construction activities of 6 months. The work is proposed to be let out on tender as lumpsum contact
in five packages as described in 12.3. A bar chart showing proposed construction schedule is enclosed.
12.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES
The Pre-construction work shall include the following:
➢ Detailed Topographical Survey and marking the Layout at site, Pre- construction
geotechnical investigation
➢ Clearance from various Government agencies and Acquisition of Land
➢ Detailed design and preparation of tender documents for Civil, Electro-mechanical,

Hydro mechanical works including pre-construction investigation.
➢ Award of Contracts
➢ Setting up of Site office, project team and store
➢ Arranging of construction power
➢ Construction of approach roads
12.3 DETAILED DESIGN & WORKING DRAWINGS
The detailed design of the components are already prepared using the data of detailed topographical
surveys and Geo-technical investigation & Construction Material testing results. As such, any further
optimization of the designs are modifications after the opening of foundations etc., will be carried out
in parallel with the pre-construction works. During Tender engineering, detailed design work will be
started and construction drawings will be available by the time contracts are awarded. The work for
tender engineering is expected to be completed within 3 months.
12.4 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT PLANNING
Mechanical construction has been planned for almost all the construction activities so as to achieve
consistent quality and faster progress rate. As the work is let out on lumpsum contract, the contractor
will bring in all the construction equipment required. The planning of equipments is carried out based
on the “Guidelines for preparation of Detailed Project Reports of River Valley and multipurpose
Projects” issued by Central Water Commission. Sequencing of construction activities, wherever
possible, has been attempted in such a way that equipment from one activity, on its completion can be
moved to the other. Thus, the total requirement of equipment at a time would be reduced and also,

sufficient utilization of equipment on the project would be ensured. Basic assumptions made for the
planning of equipment for various construction activities are listed below:
The scheduled working hours considering 25 working days per month, accordingly works out
as under:
Type of Shift Works (hours)

Single shift work/day 12x25x8 = 2400
Two shift work/day 12x25x16=4800
Three shift work/day 12x25x24 = 7200
Two shifts working of equipment is normally considered most economical in view of the high cost of
three shift working on account of low availability of equipment and higher stand-by equipment
requirement.
Thus, planning for all over ground works has been carried out based on two shifts per day working.
Underground works in any case, are planned for three shifts working as these involve cyclic
operations, which do not follow normal shift operation. The work in the formation of dam for upper
reservoir are planned for the 3 shift working.
12.5 COMMON EQUIPMENT
For construction of the Saundatti PSP, main common equipments are Aggregate Processing Plant,
Batching Plant and diesel captive power. These are common for all civil works.
12.6 AGGREGATE PROCESSING PLANT
Setting up of an Aggregate Processing Plant inter-alia include the following:
➢ Capacity and production schedule of aggregates;
➢ Location of plant;
➢ Type of Plants;
➢ Location of quarry areas and method of extraction of quarrying rock
For construction of this project, Aggregate Processing Plants (APP) are proposed at two locations and
Concrete Batching Plants (CBP) at two locations. Location 1 of APP (APP-1) is proposed at upper dam
site, aggregate shall be supplied for concreting of Intake Structure, concrete power block, upper
embankment and part of penstock from top.
Second location (APP-2) at Powerhouse site near adit portal, aggregate shall be supplied for
concreting of the lining of part of Penstock, Powerhouse & Lower dam.
As worked out above the APP having capacities of 100 TPH located at dam site, 250 TPH APP will be
located at Powerhouse site near adit portal.

➢ FE Loader 3 cum: 2 (2 at APP)
➢ Dozer (180 HP): 5 (2 at APP)
➢ 20 tonne capacity dumper: 6 (3 at each APP)
Equipment required at the quarry is not considered as the excavated materials from the project
components are proposed to be used for making aggregates.
12.7 BATCHING PLANT
Setting up of an Batching Plant inter-alia include the following:
➢ Capacity and production schedule of aggregates;
➢ Location of plant;
➢ Type and layout
Two CBP’s (CBP1, CBP2) will be required to match with the APP’s each of 90 cum/hr.
12.8 CONSTRUCTION POWER
The maximum power required for constructions activities is arrived at considering various capacities
of electrically driven machines/equipment and requirement of lighting, varies during the construction
schedule and also depends on construction methodology. It is estimated that about 2.5 MW of power
would be required during peak construction period. Basic construction power for the project is to be
arranged from Karlakatti village by tapping 11 KV line.
In addition to grid power, the provision for DG sets has been made as standby arrangement in case of
non-supply from grid.
1.0 MVA, 415V, 3 phase Diesel Generator Set
220 V, 400 AH (tentative) battery bank
12.9 METHODOLOGY FOR CONSTRUCTION OF VARIOUS CIVIL WORKS
12.9.1 Rockfill Dam for Upper Reservoir
As the total length of formation of rockfill dam for Upper reservoir is about 5.6 Kms, the working area
available is vast, it is proposed to deploy a total of six teams with six working fronts to complete the
dams as per the schedule. The construction of the dam involves surface excavation, placement of fill
materials, spreading & wetting and compaction of the fill materials. Total quantity of dam excavation
for formation of upper reservoir is about 3.91 Lakh m 3. The excavation of 2.73 Lakh m 3 quantity which
does not involve blasting operation is considered as common excavation and remaining 0.78 Lakh m3
which requires blasting is considered as rock excavation.
While working out the quantity for common excavation and rock excavation of each portion of dam,

Stripping of top soil has been considered as common excavation and excavation of cutoff trench is
considered as rock excavation.
12.9.2 Surface Excavation
Following construction methods are proposed for surface excavations:
➢ Stripping and excavation for trenching & preparation of base of dam and loading of the soft
material by 0.85 cum hydraulic excavators
➢ Transportation to the disposal area by 4.5/5.0 Cum capacity rear dumper/tipper
➢ A 90 HP bulldozer is also considered to stay in the disposal area for spreading of the
unloaded materials
➢ The rock excavation to be undertaken by drilling & blasting. Jack hammers and
wagon/crawler drill with hole patterns of 1m c/c and 2.75 m c/c respectively to be
deployed for drilling of charge holes.
12.9.3 Fill Placement
The construction of rockfill portion of upper reservoir involves placement of 69.5 Lakh m3 of fill
materials. The fill placement will require excavation and loading of material at the borrow
areas/quarries, transportation of the material to the placement site and unloading.
Hydraulic excavator-rear dumper combination is the most commonly used method of material
transportation. The selection of hydraulic excavators depends on the quantities to be handled,
limitations of space at the site and the availability of standard equipment. Matching rear dumpers are
estimated taking into account the distance to be traveled, the load ratings of haul roads and traffic
intensity. This method is considered quite flexible as this allows introduction of additional equipment
to supplement the capacity, if required. These equipments are available as standard items and most of
the sizes which are required for the projects are manufactured indigenously. As the fill material is
available within a distance of 10 to 15 kilometer and borrow areas are scattered over different
locations, the conventional method of material transportation, i.e., hydraulic excavator-dumper
combination has been considered more suitable for material transportation.
12.9.4 Impervious Materials
Impervious materials for upstream face and cutoff for the embankment involves placement of 1.65
Lakh m3 of impervious materials of Ashphalt concrete & plastic concrete.
The following construction methods have been considered for Ashphalt concrete mix are as follows:

12.9.5 Fine Filter
Fine filters are proposed with placement of 6.60 Lakh m 3 of fine materials. The following construction
methods have been considered for the placement of fine filter:
• Loading at the quarry by 0.85 cum hydraulic excavator and transportation up to filter
processing plant by 5.0 cum capacity rear dumper
• Processing at the filter processing plant of capacity, 250 TPH installed near the upper
reservoir
• Loading by 0.85 cum loader and transport to the dam site by 5.0 cum capacity rear dumper
• Spreading on the embankment in layers up to 30 cm thick by bulldozer with flywheel

power of 90 HP
• Compaction with 6 to 8 passes of 8t smooth drum vibratory roller.
12.9.6 Coarse Filter & Rock Toe
Coarse Filter & Rock toe involves placement of 3.55 Lakh m3 of materials. The following construction
methods and equipment are considered suitable for rockfill placement:
• Drilling of charge holes at the quarry by means of jack hammers and crawler drills with
hole patterns of 1-2.75 m c/c
• Blasting by means of electric detonators connected to proper wire circuits
• Loading at the quarry by 0.85 cum excavator and transportation up to filter processing
plant by 5.0 cum rear dumper
• Processing at the filter processing plant of capacity, 250 tph installed near the quarry
• Loading at the filter processing plant by 0.85 cum loader and transport to the dam site by
5.0 cum capacity rear dumper
• Spreading of the unloaded material on the embankment to about 50 cm to 70cm layer

thickness, by means of 90 HP flywheel power bulldoze.
• Compaction by 6 pass of 10t smooth drum vibrating rollers.
12.9.7 Major Construction Plant & Equipment for AFRD
Based on above methodology and equipment planning the list of equipment required for construction
of Rock Fill Dam (Upper & Lower) is given in Table below:

Table 12 1: Major Construction Plant & Equipment for Rockfill Dam
Sl.No Description Size/Capacity Quantity

1 Hydraulic excavator 0.85 m3 8
3 Crawler/wagon drill (ROC) 600 cfm 8
4 Air Compressor (Diesel) 8.5 cmm 15
5 Air Compressor (Electric) 8.5 cmm 15
6 Jack hammer 120 cfm 60
7 Front end loader 2.5 m3 8

8 Rear end dumper 4.5 Cum 45
9 Tipper 5.0 Cum 35
10 Angle dozer 90 HP 35
12 Vibratory compactor (pad foot) 10t 4
13 Vibratory compactor (smooth drum) 10t 4
14 Water sprinklers 8000 L 15
15 Filter processing plant 250 tph 1
16 Truck 8/10 ton 8
17 De-Watering Pump 05 / 10 HP 20
2
18 Grout pump 20 kg/m 10
12.9.8 Construction Programme
The excavations for the AFRD for the upper dam will start in the 3 rd quarter of year 1 in a segment
manner and will be completed in the 4 th quarter of year 3 including grouting operations. The dam
foundation treatment, which includes consolidation grouting and curtain grouting, will start locally as
the excavation is completed in that area.
Embankment construction will start in the mid of 3rd quarter year 1 and end 4th quarter of year 3, once
the excavation and foundation preparation works are sufficiently advanced. The period before the
beginning of the embankment construction shall be devoted to the preparation of the haul roads and
development of the borrow area.
A total period of 30 months, has been allowed for the completion of the dam embankment with the
aim to reach crest elevation by the end of 2nd quarter of year 3.
12.10 INTAKE STRUCTURE
Intake structure is planned to be executed with four separate teams, two teams at Upstream Intake
Structure and two teams at downstream Intake structure. Main activities to be undertaken for

construction of Intake Structure are surface excavations and concreting including embeddment parts.
Surface excavations will comprise of common excavation in overburden and rock excavation. The
surface excavations including slope stabilization, PCC & grouting works will start in 4 th quarter of year
1 and planned to be completed at the end of the 1 st quarter of year 3. The surface excavation for main
structure involves both common and rock excavations. The excavated material will be transported to
the disposal area using conventional excavator and rear dumper combination.
12.10.1 Surface Excavation for Intake Structure
Following construction methods are proposed for surface excavations:
• Excavation and loading of the soft material (common excavation) by 0.85Cum Shovel
• For rock excavations requiring drilling & blasting, drilling the very steep areas by hand-held
rigs (jack hammer) of 38 mm diameter with hole patterns of about 2.75 sqm and drilling
the accessible areas by crawler drill
• Loading of blasted rock by 0.85 cum hydraulic excavator, shovel attachment and assisted by
90 HP dozers
• Transportation to the disposal areas/main dam by 5.0 cum rear dumpers
• Crawler dozer, 90 HP to be deployed at the disposal area to spread the material.
12.10.2 Concreting for Intake Structure
For concreting of Intake Structure a period of 571 days has been planned for the placement. The
concrete required for Intake Structure is proposed to be produced in a centralized Batching and
Mixing Plant. The plant shall be located in the vicinity of the dam. In addition, two numbers mobile
batching & mixing plant each of capacity 18 m3/hour will be provided. The concrete from the plant will
be transported with the help of transit mixers of 6.0 cum capacity.
Following construction methods have been considered for concreting of Intake Structure
• Placing of concrete with the help of 1 Nos. 40 m3/hr concrete pumps with 25 m boom
• Concrete transportation by transit mixers of 6.0 m3 capacity
• Batching and mixing plant of capacity 30 m3/hr to be located preferably within a radius of 2
km from the concrete dam
• The aggregate crushing and screening plant of 250 tph for preparation of coarse and fine
aggregates.

12.10.3 Major Construction Plant & Equipment for Intake Structure
of concrete Intake Structure is given in Table below:
Table 12 2: Major Construction Plant & Equipment for concrete Intake Structure

3
1 Hydraulic excavator 0.85 m 4
2 Angle Dozer 90 HP 1
3 Air Compressor (elec) 8.5 cmm 8
4 Dumper 4.5 Cum 16
5 Tipper 5.0 Cum 4
6 Dewatering Pump (Elec) 10 hp 4
8 Jack hammer with pusher legs 120 cfm 4
3
9 Mobile Batching & mixing plant 18 m /hour 2
10 Needle Vibrator (Elec) 40mm 6
11 Tower Crane, traveling type 2 2
3
12 Transit mixers 6m 4
2
13 Grout pump 20 kg/m 6
14 Trucks 8/10 ton 4
15 Mobile Crane 16t 2
The concreting works for the Intake Structure at the upstream will start at the end of 4 th quarter of
year 1 and will be completed in the 1st quarter of year 3. The Intake Structure foundation treatment at
the tail race end, which includes consolidation grouting and curtain grouting, will start after the
excavation of Draft Tube Tunnel is completed and is planned to be completed in 2 to 4 months.
Concrete placement at the tail race end will start by mid of 3 rd quarter of year 2, once the excavation of
the Draft tube tunnels are completed and foundation preparation works are sufficiently advanced. A
total period of 24 months, has been allowed for the completion of the Intake Structure at the tail race
end with the aim to reach crest elevation by the end of 1st quarter of year 3.
12.11 STEEL LINED PRESSURE SHAFTS/PENSTOCK
For the excavation of Pressure Shafts one adits, namely adit to bottom of Penstock is provided and one
approach road to reach the top of vertical pressure shaft. Bottom adit off takes from approach road
from Kalakatti village. The top horizontal reach of Pressure Shafts will be approached by the approach
road to vertical pressure shaft.

12.11.1 Excavation Methodology for Adit & Tunnel
Before taking up actual tunnel excavation, portal construction and slope stabilization would be
required for which following construction sequence is suggested:
• Excavation and loading of the soft material by 2.0 m 3 hydraulic excavators assisted by 180
HP dozer
• For rock excavations requiring drilling and blasting, drilling the very steep areas by hand-
held rigs with 38 mm diameter with hole patterns of about 1-2.5 m 2 and drilling the
accessible areas by crawler rigs with 76 mm bits and hole patterns ranging from 7.5 to 9.0
m2
• Loading of the blasted rock by 2.0 m3 hydraulic excavator bucket shovel attachment and
assisted by 180 HP dozers
• Transportation to the disposal areas by 18/20t rear end dumpers
• Slope Stablization using shotcrete machine and anchoring by jack hammer/hydraulic
drilling rig
• Portal concreting by using portable concrete mixer with weigh batches.
• The portal excavation and slope stabilization will be completed within three month from
start of work. Once the same is completed, the excavation of adit followed by tunneling for
horizontal portion of penstock will start. In view of its size, the adit is proposed to be
excavated by heading and benching method.
• Following construction method for the excavation of adit and tunnel may be adopted.
• Drilling of charge holes by means of double boom hydraulic drill jumbo
• Driving of each round variable according to the Class of rock (approximate 3.5 m for the
Class I & II, 3.0 m for the Class III and 2.5 m for the rock Class IV and V)
• Number of holes per round (including those necessary for carrying out the smooth blasting
along the peripheral surface) approximately 30-40
• Charging operations of explosive using detonators
• Loading of the muck resulting from blasting, by Hydraulic mucker/rock loader (40 m3/hr
output capacity)
• Transport of the muck to disposal areas by 18/20t rear end dumpers
• Shotcrete with the help of 4-6 m3/hr capacity wet shotcrete machine
• Rock bolting using mechanized rock bolting rig.
A typical cycle for Class III (pull of 2.4m) is shown in Table
As per the rock condition of tunnel and with the derived cycle time, an average sustainable progress of

100 m/month can be achieved.
Stabilization of slopes, Portal formation & Approach roads for adit will be completed in 4 th quarter of
Year 1. The excavations for the adit will start in the 1 st quarter of year 2 and will be completed in eight
months working period.
Description Unit Cl – III
Finished Diameter of Adit m 9.00
Shortcrete Thickness m 0.076
Excavated Diameter of HRT m 9.15
Maximum Working Hours assumed in 24hrs in 3 shift including shift
change hrs 20
Drilling and Blasting
Depth of holes to be drilled m 3.00
Cross sectional area of Tunnel m2 75
Spacing of the holes m 0.85
No. of holes required per face nos 88
Spacing of the holes for perimeter m 0.5
Heading Perimeter m 33
Additional hole for line drilling / burn hole nos 66
Total no. of holes nos 154
Total depth of drilling m 462
Output of Double Boom Drill Jumbo m/hr 100
2 boom drill jumbo nos 1
Profile Marking & Setting of Operation hr 0.5
Drilling Time hr 4.62
Charging and blasting hr 1
Defuming with 20hp fan hr 1
Scaling and cleaning hr 1
Total time for drilling and blasting hr 8.12
Mucking
Quantity of muck considering 80% output and 50% bulkage cum 251.97
Output of 0.75 cum Side dump loader (loose) cum/hr 70
Mucking hours required hr 3.60
Cycle Time
Drilling and Blasting hr 8.12
Mucking time hr 3.60
Total time required hr 11.72
No. of cycle 1.71
Total progress per month of 25 days considering 2.4m pull 102.39
Total output in m per month Say 100
Total Length of Adit m 800
No of months required to complete adit excavation months 8

12.11.3 Excavation Methodology for Pressure Shaft
After completion of excavation of adit to bottom of Pressure Shaft, bottom horizontal reach from adit
to bottom vertical bend of Pressure Shafts will be excavated. About 5 to 6 m of vertical portion of
Pressure Shaft will be excavated from bottom horizontal reach by conventional drill and blast method.
The Alimak raise climber will then be installed / erected at the bottom of Pressure Shaft. The
excavation of vertical shaft will be carried out for three nos simultaneously. The erection of Alimak
raise climber will take about one month. The Alimak will land on a raised platform about 3 m from
invert of bottom horizontal reach. The mono rail will be fixed in vertical reach manually. After this the
Pilot Shaft of vertical portion will be excavated through Alimak raise climber and monorail extended
after each blast. The size of Pilot Shaft will be 2.6 m i.e. the size of Alimak Platform. The progress of 3
m per day will be achieved for excavating the Pilot Shaft. Following this sequence the pilot shaft will be
excavated from bottom to top. The methodology adopted remain same in all the Pressure Shafts.
For widening of Pressure Shaft a 15 tonne winch shall be provided at the top of vertical pressure shaft.
Platform will be lowered in the vertical reach of Pressure Shaft from where men and material will be
taken inside the widened portion of Shaft. A progress of 3 m will be achieved for widening the
Pressure Shaft to its full dimensions. The penstocks from bottom adit towards Powerhouse end shall
be excavated 25 m short of upstream Powerhouse wall. The 25 m reach of Penstocks shall be
excavated after Powerhouse excavation reaches that level.
The drilling will be carried out by 2-boom Hydraulic Jumbo and haulage of excavated muck will be
done by loader, dumper combination. The excavation shall be done full face with conventional
drilling/blasting method. The excavation of Top horizontal reach upto the Intake Structure will be
carried out after the surface excavations of Intake Structure are completed.
12.11.4 Rock Support Measures
Shotcreting shall be carried out upto excavated face after each blast whereas rock bolting shall be
provided about 2 pulls behind the excavated face. Both the operations, however, are to be carried out
after each blast. The excavated tunnel will be supported by steel ribs in the reaches which are
geologically weak. The excavated muck will be loaded through one 0.75 cum side dump loader and
transported by dump trucks of 10 T capacity to muck dumping area. After excavation scaling will be
done followed by the rock bolting and shotcreting. Pre- splitting or smooth blasting technique shall
also be adopted to avoid over break.
12.11.5 Steel Liner for Penstock
The penstock work involves fabrication of steel liners of 7.10 m dia and about 1035m long each. Thus
before the fabrication work, exact number and size of each ferrule shall be planned talking into

account the vertical and horizontal bend reaches. For this purpose, a well equipped Ferrule
Fabrication Workshop will be established at site, with the state-of-the-art plant and equipment. The
erection of ferrules shall be started from Adit to bottom of penstock. The erection of bottom vertical
bend shall be carried out first of all. The stepped concrete pedestals (stairs) shall be provided to
facilitate alignment of various pieces of vertical bend.
After erection of the bottom vertical bend the 2.5 m vertical pieces of ferrules will be lowered in the
Pressure Shaft with help of 15 tonne winch provided at the top of vertical shaft. Backing strip will be
welded with upper face of ferrule. The strip will help in proper alignment of next ferrule. A clear gap of
3 mm will be provided between bevelled edges of two ferrules. The circumferential welding will then
be carried out. The welding flux will be contained with help of backing strip. After circumferential
welding is completed Ultrasonic Tests will be conducted before carrying out backfill concrete and
erection of another ferrule. After completion of vertical reach in this fashion the top horizontal bend
will be erected in similar manner as bottom horizontal bend. Erection of ferrules in top horizontal
reach upto the Intake Structure is an independent activity and can be carried out after fabrication of
ferrules is over. The final matching shall be carried out after the erection of top horizontal bend.
Erection of ferrules in bottom horizontal reach up to upstream face of bottom adit to Pressure Shaft
will be carried out after bottom vertical bend is erected. Alternatively, the general installation
sequence described for the vertical shaft considering the installation of one ferrule at the time may be
further optimized to speed up the process. The capacity of the upper winch shall be increased
accordingly. Two or three ferrules of 2.5 – 3 m can be pre-assembled on the top and lowered all
together in the shaft. This reduces the amount of welding and tests inside the vertical shaft and
therefore shorten the installation time of the vertical shaft. This option shall be investigated during
execution of the project.
12.11.6 Major Construction Plant & Equipment for Penstock
of concrete Intake Structure is given in Table below:
Table 12 3: Major Construction Plant & Equipment for Penstock

1 Loader / Excavator (JCB) 1.0 Cum/ 0.24 Cum 5
3 Heavy Duty Jack hammer 120 cfm 35
4 Rear dumper 18/20 t 25
5 Air Compressor CFM 3500
6 Wet Shot Crete Machine Nos 1

7 Alimak Raise Clamber /borrower Nos 4
8 Electrical Winch 15 -20 Mt 4
9 Ajax Fury 2 Cum / Hr 6
10 Grouting Pumps 20 Kg / M^2 6
12.11.7 Concreting
The backfill concrete behind Steel Liner (ferrules) will be carried out once a ferrule of 5 m length is
erected at site. The backfill concrete in vertical reach of Pressure Shaft will be carried out from top
with help of a concrete pump. Similarly in horizontal reaches also the backfill concreting will be
carried out after erection of each ferrule of 5 m length followed by backfill concrete with concrete
pump.
12.11.8 Concreting Equipment Planning
The concrete shall be transported in transit mixers of 6.0 cum capacity. In three shifts working, total
erection time including backfill concrete for a 2.5 m long single ferule is 3 days. Assuming one shift i.e.
8 hr is dedicated for backfill concrete.
Total backfill concrete behind single ferule = 97.25 cum
Working hours = 8 hr
Hourly concreting program = 97.25 / 8 = 12.16 cum
Handling losses (5 %) = 12.16 x 1.05
= 12.76 Say 13.0 cum
Concrete production rate per hour = 30.0 cum
Weighted Average Lead = 2.0 KM
Hauling time
(12.5 km/hr (average), transit mixer speed) = 2 x 2.0 x 60 /12.5 = 19.2 min
Spotting and waiting time at the CBP = 8.0 min
Loading time at the CBP = 6.5 min
Turning, Spotting and Unloading time = 5.0 min
Total cycle time = 38.70 min
Nos of trip of transit mixer per hr of 50 min = 50/38.70 = 1.29

Concrete quantity carried per hour = 1.29 x 6 x 0.66
(assuming 66% efficiency of Transit Mixer) = 5.11 cum
Transit mixer required = 30/5.11
= 5.87 no. Say 6 no.
Total = 6 No.
Hence, only 1 No. pump 40 cum/hr is sufficient for placing the backfill concrete in penstocks.
12.11.9 Grouting
Contact grouting shall be carried out once the backfill concreting operations are over. This will be
carried out from holes left in steel Penstocks for this purpose. Drilling will be carried out from these
holes up to 300 mm inside the rock and contact grouting at a pressure of 1 to 1.5 kg/cm2 shall be
carried out.
Total requirement of equipment for backfill concrete in penstock are as under:
Table 12 4: Major Construction Plant & Equipment for concrete in Penstock

1 Transit Mixer 6.0 Cum 6 Nos
2 Concrete Pump 40 Cum/hr 1 no
3 Needle vibrator 40mm 4 nos
4 Batching and mixing plant 30 Cum/hr Capacity 1 no
5 Grout Pump 1 no
6 Dewatering Pump (Elec) 10 hp 4 no
The excavations of adit for bottom of penstock will start in the 3 rd quarter of year 1 and will be
completed within 7 months working period. The horizontal penstock excavation from the adit will
start from 1st quarter of year 2 and will be completed in 3 months working period. The excavation of
vertical shaft from 3 faces will start from 1 st quarter of year 3 and will be completed in 3 months. The
excavation of vertical shaft from other 2 faces will start from the third month of 3 rd quarter of year 1
and will be completed in 7 months. Erection of ferrules and Concrete placement will start by mid of 2 nd
quarter of year 2, once the excavation and foundation preparation works are sufficiently advanced and
will be completed by end of 2nd quarter of year 3.

12.12 POWER HOUSE
Main activities to be undertaken for construction of power house are surface excavations and
concreting along with erection of electro-mechanical equipment.
The sequence of operations for power house complex is based on the following construction methods
and equipment:
• Excavation and loading of the soft material by 2.0 m 3 hydraulic excavators assisted by 180 HP
dozer
• For rock excavations requiring drilling and blasting, drilling the very steep areas by hand-held
rigs with 38 mm diameter with hole patterns of about 1-2.5 m 2 and drilling the accessible
areas by crawler rigs with 76 mm bits and hole patterns ranging from 7.5 to 9.0 m 2
• Loading of the blasted rock by 2.0 cum hydraulic excavator bucket shovel attachment and
assisted by 180 HP dozers
• Transportation to the disposal areas by 18/20t rear end dumpers
• Placing of concrete with 20 m3/hr concrete pumps with 25 m boom
• Concrete transportation by 4.5 m3 transit mixers
• Concrete production in a Batching and mixing plant of capacity 90 m 3/hr
• The aggregate crushing and screening plant of 500 tph for preparation of coarse and fine
aggregates
• Mobile crane of 12t is to be utilized for handling of construction material, shutter forms etc.
The installation of electro-mechanical equipment will be done in close coordination with the civil
contractor. Almost all of the civil structures including the installation of overhead crane will be
completed before the installation of electro-mechanical equipment.
12.12.1 Major Construction Plant & Equipment for Power House
of concrete power house is given in Table below:
Table 12 5: Major Construction Plant & Equipment for power house
1 Hydraulic excavator 2.0 / 2.5 m3 10

2 Angle Dozer 180 HP 5
3
3 Front End Loader 2.5 m 5

4 Loader / Excavator (JCB) 1.0 Cum/ 0.24 Cum 5
7 Rear dumper 18/20 t 25
8 Tippers 10 t 8
9 Tower Crane, traveling 2 4
type
10 Aggregate processing plant 250 tph 1
11 Batching & mixing plant 90 / 65 m3/hour 1
12 Mobile Batching & mixing 18 m3/hour 1
plant
13 Concrete pump with 25 m 40 cum/Hr 3
boom
13 Transit mixers 6 m3 30
14 Compressed air cfm 2500
15 Grout pump 20 kg/m2 8
16 Trucks 8/10 ton 4
17 Mobile Crane 16t 2
18 Shotcrete Machine No 3
A period of 24 months has been planned beginning in the 3 rd quarter of year 1. The construction of the
concrete structures will begin by the 4th quarter of year 2 starting from the structures of the erection
area. It is planned to be completed by the 2 nd quarter year 3 in all the aspects of the construction
including E & M works.
12.13 TAIL RACE TUNNEL
The construction of Tail Race tunnel will be done from outlet face of Tail Race tunnel and the adit to
Tail Race. The tunnel will be excavated by drill and blast method using mechanised equipment. Double
Boom Drill Jumbo will be used for drill holes and shotcrete machine will be used for temporary lining.
An advance of 80 m/month is proposed for the excavation of Tail Race Tunnel. Concrete Lining of Tail
Race will commence immediately after the completion of excavation work. Concrete lining operation
consists of Kerb laying, overt lining to be followed by invert lining. The overt lining shall be done using
a 12m long hydraulically operated collapsible Gantry Shutter moving on rails. The rails shall be fixed
on kerbs to facilitate movement of the shutter. The concreting of invert portion will be done after the

overt lining is completed.
One no. 12m long Gantry shutter will be erected at d/s end of TRT. The lining operations will be
carried out in upstream direction towards junction with power house. The concrete will be fed from
30 cum/hr capacity CBP-2 installed near adit portal. The concrete behind the Shutter shall be placed
by Concrete Pumps (40cum/hr capacity). A Surge Hopper shall be kept near the concrete pump to
ensure uninterrupted supply of concrete to the Pump. Vibration of concrete shall be accomplished by
surface vibrators mounted on the Shutter itself and needle vibrators inserted through inspection
window in shutters. While the lining in this reach is in progress the kerb along with rail fixing will be
extended in upstream reach and the shutter will be moved on rails. The overt concrete lining from up
to junction with collection gallery is completed thus with a progress of 96m/month. The invert lining
in Tail Race Tunnel will be done after the overt lining is completed. The surface profile of the invert
will be finished to shape by screeding with the help of a tailor made template.
12.14 SWITCHYARD
The quantum of work involved in Switch Yard is less therefore work on this front can be deferred with
the start of work on other components of the project. The equipments deployed at power house is
planned to be used in switch yard works. Concrete/Building works will immediately commence after
the completion of necessary excavation/muck filling and foundation treatment works. The completion
will be finished before the completion of installation of electro-mechanical equipment in the
powerhouse.
12.15 HYDRO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
The fabrication of Intake gates, Trash racks and Tail Race gates shall be done partly in manufacturer’s
workshop and partly at site. The civil contractors will co-ordinate with the agencies supplying such
equipment and provide them all necessary support at site. Block outs and first stage anchor plates
shall be provided in various structures during first stage concreting. The second stage embedded parts
comprising of sill beams, tracks, seal seats & guides etc. shall be erected in these block outs before
undertaking second stage concreting. The supply and installation of all Hydro mechanical equipment
required at different locations will be ensured to be completed in time.
12.16 E&M WORKS
The E&M works in Power House will be taken up in parallel to civil works after the erection of EOT
cranes. The civil contractors will co-ordinate with the EM contractors and provide them all necessary
support at site. Block outs and first- stage embedment shall be provided in various structures during
first-stage concreting. The supply and installation of all EM equipment required at different fronts
shall be such that all other related to be completed in time so that the Power House works can be

completed in scheduled time.

CHAPTER 13 PROJECT ORGANIZATION
13.1 GENERAL
The Saundatti PSP envisages construction of Asphalt faced Rockfill Embankments for formation of
Upper reservoir along with the Non overflow section, Power Intake structure, Steel Lined Pressure
Shafts/Penstock, Power House, Tail Race Channel, Tail Race outlet structure other infrastructure
works.
The project is planned to be completed in a period of 36 months excluding 3 months devoted mainly
for creation of infrastructure facilities including road and other facilities. The construction of the
various project components are proposed to be carried out through contracting agencies entrusted
with suitable contracts.
All civil, hydro-mechanical and electro-mechanical works are executed in different packages of
contract as listed below
Civil Works
Package I: Civil works of Transition Channel, Asphalt faced Rockfill Embankment for Upper reservoir
and Tail Race Channel
Package II: Civil works of Power Block & power intake structure, Pressure Shaft, Power House, Draft
Tube Tunnel, Tail Race Intake Structure and Switch Yard
Hydro-Mechanical Works
Package III: Hydro Mechanical works comprising of gates, hoists, erection & fabrication of Pressure
Shaft pipes.
Electro-Mechanical Works
Package IV: Generating Units (Turbine & Generator), Cooling Water System, Drainage/Dewatering
System, Unit Control & Automation, BFV, EOT Crane, Air Conditioning, Ventilation etc. Fire Fighting,
Transformers (Generator Transformer), Switchgear Switchyard & Protection metering, Transformer,
DC System (Battery & Battery Charger), UPS etc., complete.
Transmission Line Works
Package V: Transmission line works
A competent consultant will be appointed for the preparation of technical specifications, detailed
designs and construction drawings for various components of the project and for the construction
supervision.
Keeping in view the size of the project involving huge investments and massive engineering activities,

it is essential that the progress of various activities be kept under a constant vigil at various levels in
order to check any avoidable straying from the schedule of construction. Hence, the organization of the
project has been planned to ensure very close coordination to avoid time and cost over-runs.
Broad features of this organization structure are described in the following paragraphs.
13.2 PROJECT ORGANIZATION
The works of Saundatti PSP would be looked after by a project team set up for the purpose under the
overall control of M/s Greenko Energies Private Limited. The unit is proposed to be headed by Project
Director for the overall management of the project. All the project services would be accountable to
the Project Director. The Project Director would be assisted by the project head in turn assisted by two
divisional heads under the construction & services division. All major engineering services will in turn
be headed by a General Manager (Sector heads) of each department to look after the planning &
control, civil, Electrical, P & M, Hydro & Mechanical, Electro & Mechanical, geology, store, C & P, Infra,
Environmental Health & Safety, quality control, quality services division, administration, financial and
accounts aspects of the projects. Each sector head would be assisted by the senior Managers (Team
Leads) with a team of staff members corresponding to that particular sector.
Organizational structure for the project execution is given in Figure 13-1. The organization set up
above will be supported by the necessary complimentary staff.
13.3 PROPOSED ORGANIZATION STRUCTURE
The proposed organization Consists of: Project Director, Project Head, Divisional Heads, Sector Heads,
Team Leads & Team members.
Sector Heads along with team leads and team members are responsible for the delivery of the
respective services allocated to them.
The Project Director shall be responsible for the over all execution of the project assisted by the
project head
The Project head shall be of Senior General Manager acts as bridge between project director and the
divisional heads and is responsible for the internal & external co-ordination, communication related to
the Project.
The Divisional Heads shall be of General manager and are responsible for the maintaining proper
communications and synergies between the sectors that are handled under the project.
The Sector Heads shall be of Assistant General Manager/ Senior Managers and assisted by an
administration wing headed by a Team Lead (Manager) posted along with the staff members at Project
Headquarters to look after the various engineering sectors such as planning & control, civil, Electrical,

P & M, Hydro & Mechanical, Electro & Mechanical, geology, store, C & P, Infra, Environmental Health &
Safety, quality control, quality services division, administration, financial and accounts. The Manager
would be assisted by necessary administrative personnel and administration, medical, security and
liaison staff in-charge of various duties.
While the General Manager assumes responsibility for all aspects of the project, officials under the
General Manager have to ensure that their reports etc. reflect up to date status of the project at that
point of time. They would periodically review the progress of works, identify the problem areas,
suggest remedial measures, see through the implementation of such measures and have a realistic
forecast of the status of the project.
To achieve the above objective, the Managers shall ensure that they and their personnel are interacting
regularly on a day-to-day basis with all the concerned personnel of the project whose work has a
direct impact on the progress of their work and take corrective measures, wherever called for, in order
to adhere to work schedule.
Manager (Civil construction) would be responsible for taking up Package- Infrastructure Civil Works
for creating infrastructure facilities. The Senior Manager (Civil) would be assisted by two Engineers
(Civil) along with supporting staff (as per requirement for the initial 3 months) for construction of
offices, buildings, roads, water supply as well as procurement of materials, construction &
maintenance of stores, etc.
Manager (Electrical) would be assisted by two Engineers (Electrical) to look after the infrastructure
requirements for Power house electrical & mechanical works, switchyard, transmission system,
construction equipment and workshops, construction power, communication & transport etc.
Manager (Mechanical) would be assisted by one Engineers (Mechanical) to look after the
infrastructure requirements for workshop facilities, fabrication yards, construction equipment,
construction power, communication & transport etc.
Financial Wing would be headed by Sr. Manager (Finance) along with one Accounts Officers and
supporting staff, who would be reporting to the General Manager on the financial and account matters.
Detailed description of functions of members of project organization is given below
13.4 FUNCTIONS & RESPONSIBILITIES OF PROJECT TEAM MEMBERS
13.4.1 Project Director
The ultimate authority within the project organization will rest with the Project Director. The Project
Director will be a senior level management representative, leading all the technical departments. The
Project Director will carryout periodic visits to the project for direct technical supervision of the

performance of the staff, progress of the works. to advise on the most important technical and
managerial decisions and to maintain close liaison with all the departments.
The principal responsibilities of the are:
• Establish the coordination with design review and site supervision teams so as to ensure the
quality of the services provided, including effective quality management programmes.
• Carry out a periodic review of the technical performance of the staff.
• Provide the guidance of the technical back-up and manage the direct technical inputs from
various resources when required.
• Select short-term expert Consultant for specialized inputs which may be found to be necessary
during the implementation of the Project.
• Assist in important meetings with Owners and other parties to the Project.
13.4.2 Project Head
The Project Head will reside at project sites on a full-time basis throughout the period of the
construction activities. He will be overall in-charge of the project supervision of the construction
packages. He shall act as acts as bridge between project director and the divisional heads and is
responsible for the internal & external co-ordination, communication related to the Project. His duties
will involve overall superintendence over the Engineers and other experts of the construction
packages. He will guide, monitor, supervise and control all the activities related to the construction
packages.
• Overall responsibility of management of the operations of the Consultant, contractor and

suppliers
• Establish and supervise a quality management programme to be applied to all the activities.
• Maintain a permanent liaison with the Owner and with the Construction Contractor's
management team.
• Be responsible for the overall liaison between the head office and the site
• Together with the divisional heads establish appropriate procedures for the processing of
monthly payment certificates, the monitoring of contract costs, and a Budget and Cost Forecast
System.
• Schedule the commissioning of the works.
• Co-ordinate technical presentations given by project staff to the Owner, as required,

highlighting construction progress, technical difficulties and proposed solutions.

• Establish the emphasis on the successful and sensitive handling of all environmental matters
related to the Contracts and to good project relations.
13.4.3 Divisional Heads (General Manager)
The General Manager will be responsible for the management of all the construction supervision
activities on site, reporting to the Project Director. He will liaise as appropriate with the Consultant's
Chief Design Engineer with regard to the availability and quality of construction drawings and the
design requirements.
The General Manager will delegate the individual section of services, together with the respective
authorisation and responsibilities, to his staff. All correspondence to and from the site will be
channelled via the General Manager to ensure proper distribution, filing, allocation of actions etc. All
Contract correspondence within the site or leaving the site will be submitted to the General Manager
for consent and signature.
The General Manager's principal responsibilities include:
• Act as Engineer-in-Charge's Representative with all the appropriate duties and powers
according to the conditions of Construction Contract
• Co-ordinate, supervise, manage and monitor all activities for the supervision of construction
and installation
• Prepare and assist in all important meetings with the Construction Contractor, review the
respective agendas and minutes of meeting.
• Prepare and direct all technical and progress meetings with the Construction Contractor,
prepare related meeting reports, and follow up requirements for subsequent action.
• With the assistance of the relevant supervisory team in direct charge of the supervision,
receive and review monthly performance reports, statements and claims presented by the
Construction Contractor. Prepare the respective recommendations and seek the agreement of
the Owner.
• Supervise and monitor the control and construction inspection activities with the assistance of
the site supervision staff.
• Review the Construction Contractor's work programmes, monitor progress against the agreed
programme, and recommend amendments to working methods or resources if necessary in
order to achieve required progress.
• The General Manager will be in charge of the preparation of the monthly reports with
appropriate graphical presentations, summarising progress during the month on a

quantitative and cost basis, will compare progress with programme, and will give reasons for
any discrepancies etc. and propose any necessary remedial measures.
• Review the Construction Contractor's work methods to ensure that they are in compliance
with health and safety requirements, will assure a high standard of workmanship, and will
correspond to the work rates required in the agreed construction programme.
• Check the amounts of construction materials and E&M equipment after their arrival on site,
and check their compliance with the appropriate specifications.
• Issue instructions to his supervisory staff, and give guidance where necessary, so that all
inspections, tests, acceptances and remedies will be carried out in the best interests of the
project and in accordance with the latest revision of the relevant codes and standards.
• Ensure that all construction activities are carried out in compliance with the environmental
protection requirements, and promote good project relations both within the project
organisation and with the local population.
• Assist the Project Director in establishing project management and control procedures,
including administration, budgeting and payments, quality assurance and communications.
13.4.4 Sector Head (Senior Manager -Civil)
The Senior Manager will be responsible for proper performance and management of all the design
review, construction supervision activities and planning/ environment/contractual aspects and will
report directly to the General Manager. The principal responsibilities are:
• Ensure the fulfilment of obligations related to the Construction Contract
• Establish and supervise a quality management programme to be applied to all the activities of
the construction contract
• Co-ordinate and manage the Consultant's design review and construction supervision and
monitoring activities.
• Supervise from time to time co-ordination of the Construction Contractors' and Consultant's
programmes.
• Establish effective communication procedures with the site team, and with the Construction
Contractor, the Owner and any other parties as requested by the Owner.
• Together with the General Manager and the Chief Contracts, Planning & Control Engineer,
establish appropriate procedures for the processing of monthly payment certificates, the
monitoring of contract costs, and a Budget and Cost Forecast System.
• Schedule the commissioning of the works.

13.4.5 Sector Head (Senior Manager -Electrical)
The Senior Manager (Electrical Engineer) will be responsible for review of the designs and documents
for the electrical systems and permanent instrumentation. He will review the relevant designs and will
determine the requirements for the civil and mechanical designs to ensure compatibility. He will
review the design of the automatic control system for the hydropower station ensuring that all
operating requirements for single or joint control and individual loading and unloading of units can be
met by the Specification, both for the manual system and the Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
(SCADA) equipment. He will review the final design to ensure that the plant, computer hardware and
software meets the requirements. If necessary, he will observe workshop simulation tests.
The incumbent’s principal responsibilities include the following:
• Review the designs and documents, making recommendations for changes or adjustments to
the designs, drawings or specifications where necessary.
• Check the design of the electrical components and control equipment with regard to the
method of installation.
• Review the detailed requirements and standards to be used in the circuit diagrams to be
submitted with their design and installation drawings.
• Review the designs, locations of the installations and the specifications of the equipment with
regard to international and local standards.
• Co-ordinate with the Chief Design and Mechanical Engineers procedures and scheduling the
installation of all equipment, cables, switches etc., control and power supply to the
underground structures and on the surface.
• Witness selected workshop tests and review reports submitted by the Contractor during
manufacture of the electrical plant and instrumentation.
• Recommend detailed test procedures for both dry and wet commissioning.
• Review the relevant sections of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals and check that the
spare part lists and documentation including circuit diagrams is complete.
13.4.6 Sector Head (Senior Manager -Mechanical)
The Senior Manager (Mechanical Engineer) will review designs for all mechanical plant, particularly
the turbines and the gates & hoists. The incumbent will review the relevant designs and specifications,
check and evaluate the designs and drawings, and will be involved in the testing.
The incumbent’s principal responsibilities include the following:-
• Review the designs and documents, making recommendations for changes or adjustments to

the designs, drawings or Specifications where necessary.
• Check the design of mechanical equipment with regard to their dimensions, the methods of
transport to the site and the method of installation.
• Review the proposed testing procedures in the factory and on site.
• Witness selected workshop tests and review all detail and progress reports submitted to him.
• Review all workshop drawings as submitted before manufacture and installation, and provide
advice during production together with joint visits to the factories if required.
• Review relevant sections of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals, including the spare part
and tools lists and all supporting technical documentation.
• Recommend detailed test procedures both for dry and wet commissioning at the end of
construction.
13.4.7 Sector Head (Senior Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC)Engineer)
The Senior Concrete Cum Quality Control Engineer (Civil) will have the following principal
responsibilities:
• Review and comment on the materials testing facilities.
• Supervise the quarry or borrow site investigations
• Monitor all material field and laboratory testing work carried out.
• Review the on-site storage and handling methods.
• Monitor the following specific activities in close co-ordinate with the respective Site Engineer.
• Quality control on quarry work and other material sources
• Quality control on cement, cement admixtures, bentonite and reinforcement steel Contractor’s
mix design tests
• Quality control of concrete production and placing.
• Routine tests on fresh concrete
• Quality control precast elements.
• Quality control of shotcrete supplied and as placed.
• Testing of rock samples from the excavations
• Rock Mechanics tests in the excavations

13.4.8 Sector Head (Engineering Geologist)
The Engineering Geologist is part of the site support staff with the responsibility for following up and
supervising all geological aspects of the project.
His duties include documentation of rock support measures. The main activities of the Engineering
Geologist concerned directly with the progress of the works will be
• Monitoring the Contractor's system of initial support for all drill & blast and shaft excavation.
• Recommendation of the subsequently required upgrading works.
• Monitoring the Contractor's installation of measuring devices including descriptive

documentation.
• Monitoring the reading of measuring devices, establishment of required frequencies of

reading, documentation' of data for processing.
• Geological mapping.
• Confirming over break in drill & blast sections.
• Monitoring of foundation work where required.
13.4.9 Sector Head (Senior Manager – Administration)
Senior Manager (Administration) shall be responsible for the project administration including
maintenance of colonies, running and maintenance of schools and dispensaries, public relations,
welfare etc. He shall be reporting to the General Manager and shall be posted at the project
headquarters. The Senior Manager (Administration) shall be assisted by a Security Officer along with
supporting staff to look after the vigilance and security aspects of the project areas.
13.5 MANPOWER SUMMARY
In order to ensure timely construction of the project, the following personnel shall be deployed at the
project office during peak construction period
Designation Category Peak Construction Period

Project Director, Level A 01
Project Head, Level A 01
Project Construction Head, Level A 01
Project Service Head, Level A 01
Sector Heads, Level B 12
Senior Engineers, Level C 54

Engineers, Level D 130
Total 200
13.6 PROJECT REVIEW
The project will be subject to monthly reviews so that all concerned are aware of progress to date. The
Monthly Progress Reports will provide means of monitoring project progress, forecasting construction costs
and outlining problems with recommendations to solve them.
The reports will contain as a minimum the following items.
• Monitoring and monthly evaluation of project progress
• Events and main activities undertaken during the period and progress on Contractor and
supervision staff activities as compared to the work program
• Project accounts, payments of approved bills, certificates of payments, variation orders and
any claims for cost or time extensions
• Summary of quality assurance tests
• Updated estimates of final cost
• Contractor's staffing (administrative staff and production staff)
• Plant and equipment
• All materials delivered at site
• Issues for which proposals for solutions have been submitted.
The Report shall clearly bring out the delays, if any, reasons for such delay(s) and the
recommendations for corrective measures. Defects and deficiencies observed during the month and
the corrective actions carried out are also reported in the Progress.

CHAPTER 14 INFRASTRUCTURE FACILITIES
14.1 GENERAL
The Saundatti PSP Project is located near Saundatti Village in Belagavi District, about 45 Kms from
Dharwad in Karnataka. The site is easily approachable by road from Dharwad. The nearest rail head is
also located in Dharwad. The nearby airports is at Hubli (60 Km) and the nearest port is at Karwar
(210 Km).
The Saundatti PSP is proposed to be completed in 36 months excluding Pre- Construction activities of
3 months. The Infrastructure facilities available and required are described in this chapter.
14.2 APPROACH ROADS
There here exist an all weather road upto Karlikatti Village. The upper reservoir area and the Intake
structure is about 3.0 Kms from Karlikatti Village. A new road of 3.0 Kms shall be formed up to the
upper reservoir followed by a network of project roads to colonies, workshop, quarries etc., shall be
formed.
Transportation of heavy machines and equipment’s will be required for construction purpose.
Widening of existing roads and improvement in grade of existing roads shall be undertaken before
starting construction of main project components.
However, the following roads are to be developed to access the following construction areas.
➢ Approach Roads to the Upper reservoir & Intake Structure
➢ Approach road to the penstock Adit.
➢ Approach road to Power House
➢ Approach road to the Dumping area and to the construction facilities.
Provision for formation of these roads had been provided in the project cost estimate..
14.3 CONSTRUCTION POWER
The maximum power required for constructions activities is arrived at considering various capacities
of electrically driven machines/equipment and requirement of lighting, varies during the construction
schedule and also depends on construction methodology. It is estimated that about 2.5 MW of power
would be required during peak construction period. Basic construction power for the project is to be
arranged from Rampura town by tapping 11 KV line.
In addition to grid power, the provision for DG sets has been made as standby arrangement in case of
non-supply from grid.
1.0 MVA, 415V, 3 phase Diesel Generator Set

220 V, 400 AH (tentative) battery bank
14.4 WATER SUPPLY TO THE CONSTRUCTION AREA AND COLONY
The water required for the various components of the project shall be met from Lower reservoir.
Adequate number of storage tanks and over head tanks shall be provided for the storage of water. A
couple of bore wells will be provided for supply of water to the project colonies and the labour camps.
14.5 TELECOMMUNICATION FACILITIES
The Construction area is covered by Mobile Phone network. Telecommunication links between various
project sites and outside places will be done through cellular network. The telecommunication
facilities in the project area also comprise of fixed line and WLL services from BSNL. For effective
coordination among various work sites, workshop, colonies, stores, design office, head office, etc., a
reliable tele-communication network is necessary.
An Internal automatic, telephone exchange (EPABX) with 15 lines capacity for the project shall be
provided. All important sites of work, offices and residences of senior officers shall be connected by
telephone. The Power house and permanent colony shall also be provided link to keep contact with
other work stations.
14.6 PROJECT OFFICES/COLONIES
The temporary and permanent buildings comprising of project offices and residential buildings are
required during construction and for O&M staff after construction.
The following provisions are made in the DPR towards construction of buildings
1. Construction of temporary quarters colony for the construction staff – 6000 Sqm
2. Construction of permanent quarters for the Maintenance staff – 4000 Sqm
3. Construction of temporary office building – 1000 Sqm
4. Construction of permanent office building – 1000 Sqm
5. Construction of temporary site office – 1500 Sqm
6. Construction of departmental stores – 2000 Sqm
7. Construction of Magazine – 500 Sqm
The land required for these construction facilities proposed to be acquired are also included in this
DPR.
The entire building construction program is scheduled to match with the construction activities.
Priority would be given to the construction of temporary quarters for staff, stores and offices.
Types of equipment required for infrastructure works has been assessed and included in the project

estimate and special T&P.
All other facilities / services such as Police Station, Secondary School, Post Office, Public Sector
banking facility, Market and Primary Health Centre etc., are available at Saundatti which is about 49
km away from Project Site.

CHAPTER 15 ENVIRONMENTAL & ECOLOGIAL ASPECTS
15.1 INTRODUCTION
Saundatti Pumped Storage Porject (SPSP) is located in Belagavi district of Karnataka. Project
envisages construction of upper reservoir and lower reservoir near Karlakatti village in Saundatti
Mandal of Belagavi District. The existing Lower reservoir is under operation with a gross storage
capacity of 0.627 TMC. The filling of the proposed upper reservoir to be drawn from the existing
Lower reservoir.
The Saundatti Off-Stream PSP Project will comprise of two reservoirs i.e. Saundatti Upper Reservoir &
Lower Reseervoir. Proposed Scheme will involve construction of rock fill embankment of maximum
height 43m for creation of Saundatti Off-Stream PSP upper reservoir with 0.637 TMC gross storage
capacity. Seven nos. of independent Penstock / Pressure Shafts will be taking off from Intake structure
provided with Trash rack and Gates located in Saundatti Off-Stream PSP upper reservoir. Surface
Power House will be located on the downstream of the intake structure and shall be equipped with
Seven Vertical-axis Reversible Francis type units composed each of generator/motor and a
pump/turbine having generated/pumping capacity of Six units of 320 MW / 340 MW and Two
Verticalaxis Reversible Francis type units of 160 MW / 170 MW respectively. The total design
discharge for the proposed scheme is 195.24 Cumec with the rated head of 189.20 m for larger units
and 188.70m for smaller units. The location of the project is shown in Figure 15.1.
Regulatory Environmental Clearance (EC) process involves three major steps as stipulated in EIA
notification of September 2006, viz. Scoping, Public Consultation and Appraisal. Terms of Reference
(TOR) for EIA studies were approved by Expert Appraisal Committee (EAC) of Ministry of
Environment & Forests (MoEF) vide letter no. J-12011/22/2019-IA.I (R) dated February 28th 2020.
Figure 15.1: Location Map

15.2 PROJECT STUDY AREA
Study area for environmental study has been delineated as Project area or the direct impact area
within 10 km radius of the main project components like Power House, Balancing reservoirs and
approach road etc.
A map of the study area prepared based on the above criteria is given at Figure 15.2.
Figure 15.2: Study area map
15.3 ENVIRONMENTAL BASELINE STATUS
Data on the existing environment quality was collected to understand the present setting of the
environment at the project site. To complete the EIA study, it is important to collect baseline data for
various physico-chemical and biological environmental components in the project study area. Baseline
data was collected for following physico-chemical and biological components.
➢ Vegetation Community Structure
➢ Wildlife
➢ Soil Quality

➢ Noise levels
➢ Ambient Air Quality
➢ Traffic density
Secondary data was collected on meteorology, geology, seismology, socio-economic status, etc. For the
present study, Land use/ Land cover maps prepared by National Remote Sensing Centre (NRSC),
Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) of Dept. of Space with Directorate of Ecology, Environment
and Remote Sensing. In addition, False Color Composite of the study area was extracted from Sentinel-
2 Multi Spectral Instrument (MSI) data of European Space Agency (ESA) which was downloaded from
https://earthexplorer.usgs.gov/. The FCC was used to refine the data obtained from NRSC.
15.3.1 Physiography
The spatial database on physiographic features like drainage, roads, settlements and villages, etc. was
created from maps of topographic sheets and satellite data followed by ground truth verification and
data analysis with Geographic Information System (GIS) tools. Digital Elevation Model of Advanced
Spaceborne Thermal Emission and Reflection Radiometer (ASTER) Global Digital Elevation Model
(GDEM) version 2 data was downloaded from https://earthexplorer.usgs.gov/ downloaded in GeoTIFF
format and was used for the preparation of relief and slope maps. Percent area under various slope
categories as per SLUSI namely gently sloping, moderately sloping, strongly sloping, moderately steep
to steep, steep, very steep and escarpments were also calculated for the entire study area.
The study area of the proposed project is comprised of moderately sloping, exposed rocks, and scrub
vegetation. The study area ranges from El. 550 to 850 m above msl. The denudation landforms are
visible in the form of scree slope, scarps ridges valleys, etc. Nearly 30% of the study area is under
moderately sloping followed by the area under Strongly Sloping category with 2.39%, Moderately
steep with 2.49% and Gently Sloping with 65.35% of the total area (Figure 15.2 & 15.3).

Figure 15.3: Digital ELevation Model (DEM) of the study area
15.3.2 Geology
The complex geological formations can be observed in the Belagavi district. The Schist and Banded
Ferruginous Quartzite, the peninsular gneiss by Granite and Gneissic Granites, the Kaladagi
formations, Sandstone, Quartzite, Shale and Limestone and Dolomite, Basalt (Deccan Trap) and the
Laterite formations are observed in the district.
The rocks exposed in the project area belong to Bagalkot Group of rocks under Kaladagi Basin of Paleo
Proterozoic age of Peninsular India. The project area comes under Lower Yaragatti and Ramdurg
Formation comprising of Mahakut chert-breccia and Manoli Argillite, Saundatti Quartzite and Salgundi
Conglomerate Formation respectively which are resting over Dharwar Super Group / Archean Granites
[Succession ref (after Jayaprakash et al. 1987)]. The principal rock types exposed in the project area
comprise of quartzite, brecciated quartzite, Quartz veins and weathered granite. Many structural

features, like parallel bedding, current bedding, folds, brecciation, conglomeration etc. can also be
observed.
15.3.3 Soil
The soil taxonomic (family) classification map for study area of Standalone Pumped storage
component of Saundatti PSP project was prepared as per the Soil Atlas of Karnataka State procured
from National Bureau of Soil Survey & Land Use Planning (NBSS & LUP). Soil resource map of the
study area was prepared and the area under each soil taxonomic class was calculated using GIS.
To assess the nutrient and fertility status of the soil in the study area the samples were collected from
six different locations. The sampling for soil was done at locations where major components of the
projects are planned. Soil samples were collected with help of khurpi from a depth of 20-30 cm (deep
soil) and from surface (top soil) after removing they were brought to laboratory for physico-chemical
analysis. The soil analysis was carried out at the Apex Testing and Research Laboratory (NABL
accredited Lab.), New Delhi.
Clayey Loamy soils are predominant in the study area. The soil fertility in general varies from Low to
Medium category. Based upon Nutrient Index in terms of NPK in case of Nitrogen and Potassium is
Medium (2.00), in case of and Phosphorus is Low i.e. NI is 1.00. Sugarcane, cotton and vegetables are
the major crops in the area.
15.3.4 Meteorology
The study area of the proposed project lies in Belagavi district, located east of the Western Ghats and
is situated in the northwestern part of Karnataka state. The area lies in the tropical climate zone and
can be termed as semi-arid. The climatic in the area is governed mainly by southwest monsoon and
the year can be divided into three seasons; (i) Monsoon (mid-June to mid-October), (ii) Winter (mid-
October to February) and (iii) Summer season (March to mid-June).
15.3.4.1 Temperature
The temperature of the study area recorded monthly data for the five years from 2013 to 2017. The
average maximum temperature of 41.0˚C was recorded during the month of April and average
minimum temperature of 17˚C during the month of December & January (reference year 2013-17).
15.3.4.2 Rainfall
The annual average rainfall of Belagavi district was recorded as 768 mm (based on data for a period of
2013-2017). Maximum Rainfall in the area was recorded during 2013 with annual rainfall of 789.73
mm and 162 rainy days. Minimum annual rainfall was recorded during 2015 with annual average of
658.37mm. The area receives maximum rainfall during south west monsoon i.e. between June and

October, where about 87.0% of the annual average rainfall is received.
15.3.4.3 Relative Humidity
The Relative Humidity is generally high throughout the year, average relative humidity is close to 79%
during September. Relative humidity is lowest during summer period between February to March
ranges from 34 to 37% (reference year 2013-2017).
15.3.4.4 Wind Speed
The wind speed is higher during the March to September as compared to the post monsoon and winter
period. The average maximum wind speed of 29.2 Kmph is observed during the month of June.
15.3.5 Water Quality
The data on water quality has been collected to evaluate surface water (reservoir and pond) and ground
water quality (tubewells, handpumps, wells, etc.).
The water quality in the study area in general is good. Except for agricultural activities there are no
sources of pollution of water bodies in the area. The conclusions of water quality test results are as
follows:
• According to BIS standards for Drinking Water (2012) all the ground water samples collected
from the study area fall within permissible limits of the same.
• 2. According to WQI all the ground water samples fall in Excellent ground water quality class.
• 3. All the samples of surface water qualify for Class ‘B’ i.e. designated best use of outdoor bathing
(organized) according to Water Quality Criteria of Central Pollution Control Board.
• 4. According to WQI surface water quality in general is in Good category throughout the study
area.
• 5. Groundwater is under the ‘Very Hard’ category, water from hand pumps or bore wells can be
fit for drinking after conventional treatment.
• 6. Nitrate at some of the sampling locations exceeds the permissible limits.
15.3.6 Land Use/Land Cover
The FCC and land use/ land cover map of the study area are given at Figures 15.4. 61.37 % of the study
area is comprised of agricultural fields and settlements. Forests constitute 12.70% of the area and
16.41% of the area is under waterbodies.

Table 15 1: Area under different Land use/ Land cover in the study area
S. No. Land Use/ Land Cover Area Area (%)

(Sq km)
1 Forest 196.4492 0.45

2 Scrub Forest 5349.689 12.24
3 Scrub Land 3402.365 7.78
4 Agriculture/ Fallow Land 26831.93 61.37
5 Settlement 764.0315 1.75
6 Waterbody 7174.372 16.41
Total 43718.84 100.00
Figure 15.4: Land Use/ Land Cover Map of the Project Study Area
15.3.7 Forest Types
The project area falls in Gokak Forest Division of Belagavi Circle under Karnataka State Forest
Department. The forests occurring in the study area of Standalone pumped storage component of
Saundatti PSP Project are classified as per classification given by Champion and Seth (1968).

Forest types of study area are under Tropical Moist Deciduous Forest, Tropical Dry Deciduous Forest and
Tropical Throne Forest, with 3 sub-types 3B/C2, 5A/C1b and 6A/DS1.
15.3.8 Floristic Diversity
During the field surveys an inventory of 170 species of plants belonging to different plant groups was
compiled. This list includes 65 species of trees, 35 species of shrubs and 70 herbaceous species. Most of
the vegetation is found mainly in the forest area, along and nearby the crop fields, as weeds of the
agricultural fields and nearby the roads, etc. Trees are found mainly as plantations in the forest area or in
the bunds of agricultural fields. Dominant families in the area are Fabaceae, Malvaceae and Asteraceae
followed by Sterculiaceae, Rubiaceae and Verbenaceae. Distribution of plant species within families are
summarized in Table 15.2. Among the lower plants 8 species of pteridophytes was observed during field
survey belongs to 7 families. List of plant species recorded from the area is given in Table 15.2.
Table 15 2: Family wise details of plant species
S.No Vegetation Type No. of Families No. of Species

1 Trees 31 65
2 Shrubs 19 35
3 Herbs 27 70
Rare, Endangered and Threatened (RET) Species
None of the plant species found in the study area falls under any of the IUCN Red List of Threatened
Species Version 2020-2. The majority of the species have not been evaluated or assessed yet by IUCN
(2020-2). All the 26 species that have been assessed are under the ‘Least Concern’ category (LC)
category.

Table 15 3: Conservation Status of Plant Species
Economically Important Plant Species

The local economy of Belagavi is mainly based on the agricultural produce market (called Krishi Upaj
Mandi in the local Hindi language) which is Asia’s largest agricultural produce market yard and the
world’s second-largest as per a 2011 report by WTO. Belagavi is a prominent trading center of herbs like
ashwagandha, isabgol, kalmegh, shatawari, safed musli, stevia leaves, giloy, babul, water chesnut
(singhara) and many more. Belagavi district is one of the largest producers of opium in the country.
Orange and Guava are the main commercial crops in the study area. Ajwain, Ashwagandha, Isabgol,
Kalmegh, etc. are the medicinal plants cultivated in Belagavi. Teak and Eucalyptus are common
plantation crops in the area.
Medicinal Plant Species
Ethnobotanical uses of plants for medicinal purposes especially by tribals in this area have been studied

by some workers like Pancholi (2015), Pandey et al. (2019), and Tugnawati and Titov (2020). Pancholi
(2015) although modern medical facilities are approachable at places, still they prefer using herbal
drugs owing to their confidence and belief in such treatment. The rural and tribal men are well-versed
with the symptoms of various types of diseases and with their herbal remedies because they have
carried on practice traditionally by verbal instruction.
Based upon the studies quoted above and information gathered during interaction with local people
while conducting field surveys a list of important medicinal plant species used for treating various
ailments are given in Table 15 4.
Table 15 4: Medical Plant Species
Sl.N Family Botanical Name Local Name
1 Acanthaceae Justicia adhatoda Adusa
2 Amaranthaceae Achyranthus aspera Apamarg
3 Anacardiaceae Lannea coromandelina Moyan
4 Annonaceae Annona squamosa Sitafal
5 Apocynaceae Calotropis procera Aak
6 Apocynaceae Wrightia tinctoria Dudhi
7 Apocynaceae Gymnema sylvestre Gudmar
8 Asparagaceae Asparagus reacemous Satavar
9 Asteraceae Ageratum conyzoides Bisadodi
10 Asteraceae Xanthium strumarium Chhota Gokharu
11 Asteraceae Eclipta prostata Bhringraj
12 Burseraceae Bosewallia serrata Salai
13 Combretaceae Anogeissus latifolia Dhawada
14 Combretaceae Terminalia arjuna Arjun
15 Combretaceae Terminalia bellirica Baheda
16 Euphobiaceae Ricinus cummunis Arandi
17 Euphorbiaceae Euphorbia hirta Dudhi
18 Euphorbiaceae Euphorbia nerifolia Sehund
19 Fabaceae Abrus precatorius Gunj

20 Fabaceae Albizia procera Safed Siris
21 Fabaceae Bauhinia variegata Kachnar
22 Fabaceae Butea monosperma Palash
23 Fabaceae Cassia fistula Amaltaas
24 Fabaceae Ougeinia oojeinensis Tinsa
25 Fabaceae Pongamia pinneta Karanj
26 Fabaceae Prosopis juliflora Bawaliya
27 Fabaceae Senna tora Chakramard
28 Hypoxidaceae Curculigo orchioides Kali Musali
29 Lamiaceae Ocimum sanctum Tulsi
30 Lythraceae Woodfordia fructicosa Dhavae
31 Malvaceae Abutilon indicum Kanghi
32 Meliaceae Azadirachta indica Neem
33 Menispermace Tinospora cordifolia Gilloy
34 Moraceae Ficus hispida Katgular, Umar
35 Moraceae Ficus religiosa Pipal
36 Moringaceae Moringa oleifera Munga
37 Myrtaceae Syzygium cumini Jamun
38 Nyctaginaceae Boerhoavia diffusa Laal punarva
39 Oleaceae Nyctanthes arbor- Har shringar
40 Rubiaceae tristis Papda
41 Rubiaceae Haldina cordifolia Haldu
42 Sapindaceae Schleichera oleosa Kosum
43 Smilacaceae Smilax zeylanica Ramdatun
44 Solanaceae Datura metel Kaladhatura
45 Solanaceae Solanum nigrum Makoi
46 Sterculiaceae Helicteres isora Marodfali
47 Sterculiaceae Sterculia urens Kullu

48 Tiliaceae Grewia tiliifolia Dhaman
49 Verbenaceae Vitex negundo Nirgundi
50 Zygophyllaceae Tribulus terrestris Gokharu
Main Agricultural Crops Grown in the Area

According to Agro-Ecological Sub Region (ICAR) classification, the study area falls under the Hot moist
semi-arid ecological subregion and according to Agro Climatic Zone (NARP), it falls in the Malwa plateau
zone.
Among major field crops, Maize and Soyabean are grown in Kharif season and Wheat, Mustard, and
Gram are rabi season crops. Orange, Guava, Mango, Papaya, Lemon, and Custard Apple are the main
horticultural fruit crops while the main vegetable crops are Potato, Tomato, Lady’s Finger, Brinjal,
Cabbage, Chilly, Onion, etc. Medicinal and Aromatic plants cultivated in the area are Ashwagandha,
Ajwain, Isabgol, Kalmegh, etc. Among plantation crops Teak and Eucalyptus are common.
Vegetation Profile of the Study Area
Physiographically the project study area falling in Belagavi district along the bank of Lower reservoir on
Krishna river. The area is characterized by undulating terrain dominant with agricultural fields and
Scrubland. Forest in the study area comprises of mixed deciduous forest and thorny vegetation on the
banks of Lower reservoir and hillocks, observed along the bank of river and hillocks.
Open forests are mainly of mixed Tropical dry deciduous type mainly represented by Anogeissus
latifolia, Diospyros melanoxylon, Holoptelea integrifolia, Boswellia serrata, Terminalia tomentosa,
Lannea grandis, Ziziphus spp., etc. However, the majority of the area is under severe biotic pressure as
habitations around the forest area largely depend on forest resources for their daily needs. Tectona
grandis (Teak) was only observed as a plantation crop along the bunds of agriculture fields.
Among the trees, Azadirachta indica, Mangifera indica, Cassia fistula, Anogeissus latifolia, Madhuca
longifolia, Dalbergia sissoo, Aegle marmelos, Syzygium cumini, Morus alba, Desmodium oogeinense,
Acacia nilotica, Corymbia citriodora (Syn. Eucalyptus citriodora), Albizia lebbeck, Leucaena
leucocephala, Phyllanthus emblica and Ziziphus species are the most common tree species found
growing near the settlements.
The bushes are comprised of shrubs like Lantana camara, Acacia pennata, Justicia adhatoda,
Colebrookea oppositifolia, and Dendrocalamus strictus. Commonly found herbaceous species are Senna
tora, Senna obtusifolia, Carissa spinarum, Calotropis gigantea, Argemone mexicana, Rungia repens, and
Asparagus racemosus common in Scrubland and open/ scrub forest.
Among the crops commonly grown in the area are Wheat, Gram, Pigeon pea, Maize, Lentil, and Linseed.

Around agricultural fields and fallow land Alysicarpus rugosus, Bidens pilosa, Galium aparine, Cannabis
sativa, Smilax zeylanica, and Flemingia chappar are common weeds in the area.
Grasses in the study area were represented by species like Aristida ascensionist, Brachiaria eruciformis,
Cyperus rotundus, Dichanthium aristatum, Eragrostis amabilis, Heteropogon contortus, Saccharum
spontaneum, Sorghum halepense, Erianthus munja, and Cenchrus ciliaris.
Community Structure
From the land use /land cover map of the study area most of the area is under Lower reservoir. Open
forests in the area were mostly observed along the bank of the reservoir. Thorny vegetation along with
deciduous tree species was recorded from scrub forest and Scrubland. Scrubland dominant with scrubs
and grasses were mostly found in the area near to the settlements.
Trees
In the study area, forests are mostly comprised of Dry deciduous forest with Diospyros melanoxylon as
the main constituent with common associates like Anogeissus latifolia, and Lannea coromandelica.
Sampling sites located in the area under Scrubland and scrub forest species like Acacia catechu and
Ziziphus jujuba were the dominant tree species. Butea monosperma was commonly recorded from the
Scrubland. Aegle marmelos, Dalbergia sissoo, and Grewia tiliifolia were recorded from the scrub/ fallow
land near the settlements. Agriculture in the surrounding of the project area is restricted around the
settlements with tree species like Azadirachta indica, Aegle marmelos, Toona ciliata, Moringa oleifera,
Mangifera indica, and Madhuca longifolia.
Overall 20 species of trees were recorded from the different sampling sites. During sampling Ziziphus
jujuba was found almost at all the six sampling sites, with the frequency of distribution was 60% to 80%.
Ziziphus jujuba was the dominant in the area followed by Acacia catechu mostly found at sampling sites
located in scrub forest and Scrubland. Diospyros melanoxylon was frequently observed tree species in
the Dry deciduous forest found along the slopes on the bank of Lower reservoir. The list of the different
species of trees are as follows in Table 15 5.
Table 15 5: List of Different types of Trees species
S.No Name of Species
1 Acacia catechu
2 Aegle marmelos
3 Anogeissus latifolia
4 Azadirachta indica

5 Boswellia serrata
6 Butea monosperma
7 Dalbergia sissoo
8 Diospyros melanoxylon
9 Grewia tiliifolia
10 Haldina cordifolia
11 Holoptelea integrifolia
12 Lannea coromandelica
13 Madhuca longifolia
14 Mangifera indica
15 Moringa oleifera
16 Phyllanthus emblica
17 Terminalia ballerica
18 Terminalia tomentosa
19 Toona ciliata
20 Ziziphus jujuba
SHRUBS
A total of 19 species of shrubs as shown in Table 15 6 were recorded during the surveys Shrubs in the
area were mostly observed at the sampling sites with low tree cover. Commonly found shrub species in
the area were Lantana camara, Calotropis gigantea, Carissa spinarum, Murraya koenigii, Ipomoea carnea,
and Ziziphus nummularia.
Among the recorded species Lantana camara, Calotropis gigantea and Ziziphus nummularia were the
most frequently observed species in the study area and recorded from 5 sampling sites. Lantana camara,
Senna obtusifolia and Murraya koenigii were the dominant shrub species recorded from forest areas as
well as from Scrubland. Ziziphus nummularia and Carissa spinarum were the shrub species recorded
from sites in Scrubland in the area. Ipomoea carnea was frequently seen near the water bodies.
Table 15 6: List of Different types of shrubs species
1 Abrus precatorius

2 Acanthospermum hispidum
3 Asparagus racemosus
4 Calotropis gigantea
5 Carissa spinarum
6 Colebrookea oppositifolia
7 Datura stramonium
8 Dendrocalamus strictus
9 Ipomoea carnea
10 Justicia adhatoda
11 Lantana camara
12 Murraya koenigii
13 Ricinus communis
14 Senna obtusifolia
15 Solanum nigrum
16 Tephrosia purpurea
17 Woodfordia fruticosa
18 Ziziphus nummularia
HERBS
At the sampling sites located in the forest area, the herbaceous layer was comprised of 40 species.
Species richness was highest during monsoon as the maximum number of species (31) were recorded as
shown in Table 15 7 during monsoon season and 27 species during pre-monsoon season. Among the
herbaceous flora grass species like Heteropogon contortus, Sorghum halepense, Aristida adscensionis,
Brachiaria eruciformis, Sorghum halepense, Eragrostis amabilis are the dominant species frequently
found in the area.
During pre-monsoon, Brachiaria eruciformis, Erianthus munja, Heteropogon contortus, Aristida
adscensionis, Chlorophytum tuberosum, and Sorghum halepense, Rungia repens, Lindenbergia indica,
Crotalaria medicaginea, and Ipomoea pes-trigridis were the most dominant herbs.
During monsoon season dominant herb species in the area were Apluda mutica, Smilax zeylanica,
Aristida adscensionis, Cenchrus ciliaris, Heteropogon contortus, Brachiaria eruciformis, Galium aparine,

Chlorophytum tuberosum, Dichanthium aristatum, Senna tora, Dodonaea viscosa, Saccharum
spontaneum, Rungia repens and Eragrostis amabilis During winter sampling Aristida adscensionis,
Brachiaria eruciformis, Dodonaea viscosa, Heteropogon contortus, Parthenium hysterophorus, Rumex
hastatus, Rungia repens, Saccharum spontaneum, Senna tora, and Sorghum halepense were the most
dominant species.
Table 15 7: List of Different types of herbs species
1 Ajuga integrifolia
2 Alysicarpus rugosus
3 Apluda mutica
4 Argemone mexicana
5 Aristida adscensionis
6 Bidens pilosa
7 Brachiaria eruciformis
8 Cannabis sativa
9 Capparis zeylanica
10 Cenchrus ciliaris
11 Chlorophytum tuberosum
12 Crotalaria medicaginea
13 Cymbopogon martinii
14 Dichanthium aristatum
15 Dodonaea viscosa
16 Drimia indica
17 Eragrostis amabilis
18 Flemingia chappar
19 Galium aparine
20 Heteropogon contortus
21 Lindenbergia indica
22 Phoenix acaulis

23 Phyllanthus fraternus
24 Rungia repens
25 Saccharum spontaneum
26 Senna tora
27 Smilax zeylanica
28 Solanum virginianum
29 Sorghum halepense
30 Sorghum vulgare
31 Tribulus terrestris
15.3.9 Wild Life
A brief description of wildlife in the project area based upon secondary sources and field surveys is given
in the following paragraphs.
15.3.9.1 Mammals
During the surveys 5 mammalian species viz; Boselaphus tragocamelus (Blue bull), Semnopithecus
entellus (Common Langur), Herpestes edwardsii (Indian Grey Mongoose), Canis aureus (Jackal), and
Funambulus pennantii (Five-striped Palm Squirrel) were sighted in the study area. According to the list
prepared based upon secondary data 10 species of mammals are reported from the area and the same is
given at Table 15 8.
Table 15 8: List of mammals reported from the study area based from secondary sources
Conservation Status
IUC
WPA
S. No. Family Scientific Name Common Name
19
201
1 Bovidae Boselaphus Nilgai/Blue Bull III LC

tragocamelus
2. Canidae Canis aureus Jackal II LC
3 Canidae Vulpes bengalensis Fox II LC

Conservation Status
IUC
WPA
S. No. Family Scientific Name Common Name
19
201
4 Cercopithecidae Macaca mulatta Rhesus macaque II LC
5 Cercopithecidae Semnopithecus Common Langur II LC

entellus
6 Herpestidae Herpestes edwardsii Mongoose II LC
7 Hystricidae Hystrix indica Porcupine IV LC
8 Leporidae Lepus nigricollis Common hare IV LC
9 Sciuridae Funambulus Five-striped Palm IV LC

pennantii Squirrel
10 Suidae Sus scrofa Wild Boar III LC
IUCN- International Union for Conservation of Nature; WPA – Wildlife (Protection) Act; EN
– Endangered; LC - Least Concern; NE: Not Assessed.
15.3.9.2 Avifauna
During the field surveys, 14 species of birds were recorded. Red-vented bulbul, Rock Pigeon, Green Bee
Eater, Indian Roller, Black Drongo, House sparrow, White-Throated Kingfisher, Dove, Common Myna,
House crow, Red-wattled Lapwing, and Cattle Egret were most frequently sighted bird species in the
study area. A total of 46 species of bird species belonging to 14 Orders and 46 families was compiled
based upon sighting as well as secondary data. List of bird species composition and their conservation
status has been described in Table 15 9.
List of bird species composition and their conservation status has been described in Table 15 9.
Table 15 9: List of avifauna reported from the study area with their conservation status in the study
area
S. No. Family Scientific Name Common Name IUCN 2018- IWPA

1 1972
Order: Anseriformes
1 Anatidae Tadorna ferruginea Ruddy Shelduck LC IV
Order: Accipitriformes

1 1972
2 Accipitridae Elanus caeruleus Black-winged Kite LC -
Order: Bucerotiformes
3 Upupidae Upupa epops Common Hoopoe LC
Order: Caprimulgiformes
4 Apodidae Apus nipalensis House Swift LC -
Order: Charadriiformes
5 Charadriidae Vanellus indicus Red Wattled Lapwing LC IV
6 Recurvirostridae Himantopus Black winged stilt LC IV
himantopus
Order: Columbiformes
7 Columbidae Columba livia Rock pigeon LC -
8 Columbidae Columba palumbus Common Woodpigeon LC -
9 Columbidae Streptopelia Ring dove LC IV

decaocto
10 Columbidae Streptopelia Laughing Dove LC IV
senegalensis
Order: Coraciiformes
11 Alcedinidae Alcedo atthis Common Kingfisher LC IV
12 Alcedinidae Alcedo atthis White-Throated LC IV

Kingfisher
13 Coraciidae Coracias Indian Roller LC IV
benghalensis
14 Meropidae Merops orientalis Green bee-eater LC IV
Order: Cuculiformes
15 Cuculidae Centropus sinensis Greater Coucal LC IV
16 Cuculidae Eudynamys Asian Koel LC IV
scolopacea
Order: Gruiformes
17 Rallidae Gallinula chloropus Common Moorhen LC IV
18 Rallidae Amaurornis White-breasted LC IV

phoenicurus waterhen
Order: Passeriformes

1 1972
19 Corvidae Dendrocitta Rufous Treepie LC IV

Vagabunda
20 Corvidae Corvus Indian Jungle Crow LC IV
macrorhynchos
21 Corvidae Corvus splendens House Crow LC V
22 Cisticolidae Prinia socialis Ashy Prinia LC IV
23 Cisticolidae Prinia atrogularis Black-throated Prinia LC IV
24 Cisticolidae Prinia gracilis Graceful Prinia LC IV
25 Dicruridae Dicrurus Black Drongo LC IV
26 Laniidae Lanius schach Long-tailed Shrike LC IV
27 Leiotrichidae Turdoides striata Jungle Babbler LC IV
28 Motacillidae Motacilla flava Yellow Wagtail LC IV
29 Motacillidae Motacilla alba White Wagtail LC IV
30 Muscicapidae Cinclidium frontale Blue-fronted Robin LC IV
31 Muscicapidae Oenanthe oenanthe Northern wheatear LC IV
32 Muscicapidae Saxicoloides Indian Robin LC IV
33 Muscicapidae Oenanthe fusca Brown Rockchat LC IV
34 Muscicapidae Saxicola caprata Pied Bushchat LC IV
35 Muscicapidae Saxicola torquatus Common Stonechat LC IV
36 Pycnonotidae Pycnonotus cafer Red-Vented Bulbul LC IV
37 Passerinae Passer domesticus House Sparrow LC IV
38 Sturnidae Gracupica contra Asian Pied Starling LC IV
39 Sturnidae Sturnia pagodarum Brahminy Starling LC IV
40 Sturnidae Pastor roseus Rosy Starling LC IV
41 Sturnidae Acridotheres tristis Common Myna LC IV
Order: Pelecaniformes
42 Ardeidae Ardeola grayii Indian Pond Heron LC IV
43 Ardeidae Egretta garzetta Little Egret LC IV
Order: Psittaciformes
44 Psittacidae Psittacula krameri Rose-ringed Parakeet LC IV
Order: Strigiformes
45 Strigidae Athene brama Spotted Owlet LC IV
Order: Suliformes
46 Phalacrocoracidae Microcarbo niger Little Cormorant LC IV

IUCN Red List of Threatened Species. Version 2018.1. www.iucnredlist.org>. Downloaded on 09
August 2018. IUCN- International Union for Conservation of Nature; NT- Near Threatened; LC - Least
Concern; IWPA – Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972
Appendix I: List of the bird families that do not appear either in Schedule-I or Schedule-IV of the
Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972 but should be included in the future amendments.
15.3.9.3 Herpetofauna
The sampling for herpetofauna was carried along the bunds of the proposed reservoir area, around the
periphery of the reservoir, and ponds and area along the existing and proposed water conductor system.
Sampling was repeated during evening time also. Visual Encounter Survey (VES) search was followed for
recording herpetofauna (amphibians and reptiles). The classification and nomenclature of reptiles are
based upon http://www.reptile-database.org/ and amphibians are based upon
https://amphibiansoftheworld. amnh.org/.
Herpetofauna comprised of reptiles and amphibians is given in Table 15 10. One amphibian species and
3 reptiles are sighted in the study area. During the surveys, stream frog, Indian Monitor lizard, and
Garden lizard were commonly sighted species.
Table 15 10: List of Herpetofauna found in the Study Area
Class Order Family Scientific Name Common Name

AMPHIBIA Anura Ranidae Amolops formosus Stream frog
Agamidae Calotes versicolor Garden Lizard
REPTILIA Squamata Pythonidae Python molurus Python
Forest Hawk
Varanidae Varanus bengalensis Indian Monitor lizard
15.3.9.4 Conservation Status of Fauna
Different faunal species like mammals and birds were assessed for their conservation status according
to IUCN Red List categories (Ver. 2020.2) accessed in December 2020 and WPA (1972) Schedules.
Among mammals, no Schedule I species was sighted in the study area.
According to WPA (1972) five species of mammals are Schedule-II, and two species are Schedule III,
and two species are listed under Schedule-IV.
None of the avifaunal species is under any category of the IUCN Red List of Threatened Species version
2020.2. As per the Wildlife (Protection) Act 1972 all species are Schedule IV and Schedule V.
15.3.9.5 Fish and Fisheries
Fish and fisheries in the study area is mainly comprised of Lower reservoir on Krishna river due to

construction of a dam. A part of the reservoir lies within the study area comprising about 47% of the
study area. The fishes of Lower reservoir have been documented by Rao et al. (1998) and Ridhi et al.
(2013). A detailed list of 72 fish species found in the reservoir has documented by Ridhi et al. (2013).
According to their study there are a number of commercially important species of fishes from the
viewpoint of fish culture as well as dietary requirement. Most common are Gibelion catla (Syn. Catla
catla), Cirrhinus cirrhosus, Cyprinus carpio, Labeo rohita, Labeo bata, Labeo calbasu, Labeo gonius,
Labeo pangusia, Heteropneustes fossilis, Ompok bimaculatus, and Sperata seenghala.
This is commercial fishing through contractors only for which a 5-year contract is given by the Fisheries
Department at Belagavi. The monitoring and stocking of the fish in the reservoir is done by the
Fisheries Department. The fisheries operations are channelised through a fisherman’s co-operative
federation, named KarnatakaMatsya Mahasangh Ltd. The fishermen are directly or indirectly involved
with fisheries operations. According to Fish Sales Centre at Rampura mainly 8 species are commonly
sold in the market. List of those is given in Table 15 11 below.
Table 15 11: Types of fish species available in the study area
S. No. Local Name Family Name of Species
1 Baam Anguillidae Anguilla bengalensis
2 Tilapiya Cichlidae Oreochromis aureus
3 Catla Cyprinidae Gibelion catla (Syn. Catla

catla)
4 Kalbasu Cyprinidae Labeo calbasu
5 Rohu Cyprinidae Labeo rohita
6 Mrigal Cyprinidae Cirrhinus cirrhosus
7 Singhad Heteropneustidae Heteropneustes fossilis
8 Silan Schilbeidae Silonia silondia
15.4 SOCIO-ECONOMIC PROFILE
The Study Area for the collection of data on socio-economic status has been delineated as the area within
10 kms radius of the main project components like proposed reservoir area, powerhouse, tailrace
channel, muck dumping site etc.
All project components as well as entire study area falls under Saundatti taluka (Parasgad) in Belagavi
district. Socio-economic profile of the study area covering aspects like demography, occupational
pattern, literacy rate and other important socio-economic indicators of the villages. The baseline socio-

economic profile is based on field survey and Census of India 2011.
Total households in study area tehsil are 70063. The total population of study area is 352929, of which
178755 are male and 174174 are female. Sex ratio in study area is 974 female per 1000 males.
The scheduled caste and scheduled tribes percentage population of the district is 9.54% and 11.07%
respectively. The literacy rate of the Suandatti taluka is 59.0 % of which the male 58.45% while the
female 41.55%.
The male and female literate population is 10738 and 7525 respectively, which implies that the literacy
rate of the affected villages is 58.4 % of which the male 58.8% while the female 41.2 %. Murgod village
has the highest li
Total working population of the Saundatti taluka is 46.34%, while, the rest 53.66% of the population is
classified are non-workers. Out of the total working population, 81.19% are main workers, while,
18.09% are marginal workers.
15.4.1 District Profile:
The Belagavi district consists of 7 tehsils and 3 Community Development Blocks according to Census
2011. There are 798 villages, out of which 675 villages are inhabited and 51 villages are uninhabited.
The district is known as India’s Eye donation capital as it accounts for the highest per capita eye
donation rate in the country.
Demographic Profile of the District
The total population of Belagavi district is 826,067 with 51.16% males and 48.84% females. Population
density per sq km in Belagavi district is 194, lower than that of the state i.e. 236. The sex ratio in the
district is 954, higher than that of the state i.e. 931.
The population of Scheduled Tribes (ST) is 8.65% whereas 13.46% population belongs to Scheduled
Caste (SC) community in the district. The district has a literacy rate of 70.80%. The male literacy rate is
83.91% and that of the female is 57.13%, creating a significant gender gap in literacy rate of 26.78%. The
economy of the district is mainly dependent on agriculture. The district is known for Opium cultivation
which is the major agricultural product in the district.
15.4.2 Socio-economic Profile of Villages in the Study Area
The socio-economic profile of the study area is based upon the Census of India, 2011, and field Survey.
The entire study area of Saundatti Off-Stream Pumped Storage Project 1280MW falls in Rampura tehsil
of Belagavi district in the state of Karnataka.
There is a total of 16 settlements including 15 villages and one town namely Rampura in the study area.
Out of these, there is one project-affected village namely ‘Karlakatti’ .

List of the villages in the study are Karlakatti, Basi Block, Barwadiya, Salarmala, Boojh, Majiriya, Besala,
Magarda, Amarpura Block, Jamalpura, Narwali, Khetpalya, Bhimpura, Anandipura Block, Chandrapura,
Rampura (Town).
Demographic Profile of the Study Area
Socio-economic profile of the study area covering aspects like demography, occupational pattern, literacy
rate, and other important socio-economic indicators of the villages.
There is a total of 6,437 households in the study area with an average household size of 5 with a total
population of 30,341 out of which 15,606 are male and 14,735 are female in the study area. The sex ratio
is 944 females per 1000 males. About 13.98% of the total population belongs to the 0-6 year age group,
out of which 51.59% are boys and 48.41% are girls.
In the study area, 9.75% population belongs to the Scheduled Tribes (ST) community whereas 8.84%
population belongs to Scheduled Caste (SC) community. Among the ST community, 51.80% are males
and 48.20% are females with a sex ratio of 931. However, among the SC community, 51.72% are males
and 48.28% are females with a sex ratio of 934.
The literacy rate in the study area is 67.69%, among males it is 79.91%while among females is 54.76%
creating a gender gap of 25.15%.
About 42.83% of the population in the study area is engaged in different kinds of works. Out of the total
working population, 66.85% are male and 33.15% are female, creating a significant gender gap in the
work participation rate of 33.70%. Of the total working population, 83.38% are ‘Main Workers’ and
16.62% are ‘Marginal Workers’. Among ‘Main Workers’ the gender gap of work participation is 43.28%
while among Marginal Workers it 14.32% in favour of females.
About 57.05% working population is engaged in agricultural activities, out of which 17.21% are
Cultivators and 39.84% are Agricultural Labours. A small percentage of the population is engaged as
household industrial workers (0.98%) and about 41.57% are in miscellaneous services. The gender gap
in Cultivators is about 36.04% while in the case of Agricultural Labours it is 6.28% in favour of females.
Basic Amenities & Infrastructure Available in the Study Area
Educational Institutions:
Educational facilities play an important role in the overall development of an area. These facilities
enhance economic growth and employment. There is a total of 89 educational institutes from primary
and secondary schools and colleges for a population of around 26000.
➢ There are three privately operating Pre-primary schools in the study area villages.
➢ There are 51 Primary Schools in the study area as per the Census 2011 record.

➢ There are 21 Middle Schools available in the study area.
➢ There are 7 Secondary Schools available in the study area.
➢ In the study area, there are 4 Senior Secondary Schools available.
➢ There is one government Degree College for Science, Art & Commerce students situated in
Rampura town area.
➢ There is one government Degree College for science students situated in Rampura town area.
Health Institutions:
The available medical/health facilities/institutions in the study area are as follows.
➢ There are only two Primary Health Sub-centers in the study area.
➢ There is only one dispensary available for medical help in the area which is situated in the
Rampura town area.
➢ There is one Family Welfare Center, 10 Maternity & Child Welfare Centers, and one Maternity
Home is available in the Rampura town area of the study area.
➢ One Veterinary Hospital is available in the Rampura town area.
➢ ASHA workers are available in all the villages.
Drinking-Water:
Hand pumps and Wells (uncovered) are the major sources of drinking water. Apart from this, Tube
wells/boreholes River water, tank, and tap water is also using in some villages of the study area.
Electricity Supply:
Electricity for domestic, agriculture, as well as Commercial or Industrial uses, is available in all the
villages and town areas of the study area.
Road Network:
In the study area, 8 villages and one town area are connected by the Blacktopped roads, 13 villages and
one town area are facilitated with Gravel road, however, the footpath is available in all the villages and
town area of the study area.
Banking & Finance Institutions:
There is one commercial bank in Chandrapura village and one nationalized bank in the Rampura town
area. However, there are 3 Cooperative banks in working in the area, out of which 1 bank in Besala
village and 2 banks are in Rampura town area.
There are 2 Agricultural Credit Societies available in the area, out of which one is in Besala village and

another one is in Rampura town area.
Self-help groups are operational in 8 villages of the study area.
15.4.3 Survey of Project Affected Village
A socio-economic survey of the affected village namely Karlakatti was carried out by interacting with
villagers. Discussions were carried out to understand the present socio economic status of the village,
socio-economic issues that need attention, their opinion/ perception about the proposed project and
expectations from the project, etc.
According to ‘Mission Antyodaya Survey 2020’ for village Karlakatti, the total population of the village
reached 948, out of which 485 (51.16%) are males and 463 (48.84%) are females spread over 205
households. About 13.43% population belongs to the 0-6 age group, in which 41.41% are boys and
58.59% are girls.
The total Scheduled Tribes population in this village is 68 which represents 9.23% of the total
population. Out of this, 32 (47.06%) are males and 36 (52.94%) are females. The Scheduled Caste
population is only seven (07) which constitutes about 0.95% of the total population. Out of this, 3
(42.86%) are males, and the remaining 4 (57.14%) are females. In Khemka village, 369 (50.07%) people
are literates. Out of these, 69.11% are male literates and that of females are 30.89%. The overall literacy
rate in the village is 57.84%, among males, it is 74.13% and among females, it is 38.78% with a gender
gap of 35.35%.
15.4.4 Observation on Social Changes/Impact due to COVID-19
During the survey in the village, it was observed that there were no Positive Cases of Corona Virus found
in the village. But, for safety, the villagers were following the instructions/suggestions from the district
administration and using sanitizer and face masks.
Though the schools were not open these days, students are utilizing their time at home using Smart
Phone and Computer System equipped with the Internet for study purposes. Besides, children are
avoiding playing in an open area with other children for safety reasons.
Due to the lockdown, the skilled and unskilled workers who were working outside the village have
returned to their village and engaged in agriculture and animal husbandry based activities. Many of
them are facing employment issues as they are bounded to stay at home. Their livelihood is depending
on government supports or some of them started agricultural labour works in the village or nearby
villages. Villagers said that there is not much impact on doing agricultural activities in their lands but for
marketing or trading they are facing some issues.

15.5 PREDICTION OF IMPACTS
15.5.1 Impacts During Construction
Majority of the environmental impacts attributed to construction works are temporary in nature, lasting
mainly during the construction phase and often do not extend much beyond the construction period.
However, as the construction phase of Pumped Storage Project is large and extend into Three and half
years, if these issues are not properly addressed, the impacts can continue even after the construction
phase for longer duration. Even though the impacts due to construction are temporary in nature, they
need to be reviewed closely as they could be significant due to the nature and intensity of the impacts.
15.5.1.1 Impacts due to immigration of Construction Workers
At the time of peak construction work in the project, around 4800 persons may be engaged, Out of 4800
the majority of about 1800 nos will be from the local population/surrounding Villages and balance
persons about 3000 will be migrate from other area. All the local persons will up/down from their home
only. Only the migratory manpower ie.e about 3000 will stay at site camp only. Immigration of such a
large population for a long duration in remote area can cause serious impact on various environmental
resources including socio-economic profile of local population.
The congregation of large number of construction workers during the peak construction phase is likely
to create problems of sewage disposal, solid waste management, tree cutting to meet fuel requirement,
etc. Appropriate mitigating measures have been suggested in EMP, which needs to be implemented to
minimize such impacts. This population is expected to reside in the project area at any given time.
15.5.1.2 Construction of Main Project Components
Construction work is required for the construction of following main project components:
➢ The project will involve construction of rock fill embankment of maximum height of 43m for
creation of Saundatti Off-Stream PSP upper reservoir of 0.637 TMC gross storage and 1.22 TMC
live storage.
➢ The upper reservoir is located at EL 840m (average) and the FRL and MDDL of this reservoir is
at EL 857m & EL 829m respectively.
➢ 4 nos. each of 1035m long and 7.1m dia. surface circular steel lined Penstock / Pressure Shaft
in which 3 nos. will feed 3 units each of 320 MW and 1 no. will get bifurcated in to two of 5.0m
dia. to feed 2 units each of 160 MW.
➢ A surface Power house having an installation of Three nos. Reversible Francis turbine each of
320MW capacity (All units are fixed speed turbines) operating under a rated head of 189.20m
in generating mode and 199.70m in pumping mode and Two nos. Reversible Francis turbine

each of 160 MW capacity (All are variable speed turbines) operating under a rated head of
188.70m in generating mode and 199.80m in pumping mode.
➢ Five numbers of 268.00 m long tail race tunnel connecting the tail race outlet structure and the
➢ A lower reservoir with FRL & MDDL at EL 659.000m & EL 637.00 m respectively. The Gross
storage capacity of existing reservoir is 0.627 TMC. Water will be pumped to the proposed
upper reservoir through TRT.
For construction of main project components major activities are excavation and concreting. Excavation
will have impact in terms of muck generation. Excavation and concreting process will require use of
various construction equipment such as batching plants, aggregate processing plants, dumper trucks,
excavators, dozers, shotcrete machines, jack hammers, generators, pumps, etc. leading to generation of
pollution in terms of emissions, wastewater, noise and solid waste.
15.5.1.3 Operation of Construction Plant and Equipment
During the construction phase, various types of equipment will be brought to the site and construction
plants and repair workshops will be set up. These include crushers, batching plant, drillers, earth
movers, rock bolters, etc. The siting of these construction equipments would require significant amount
of space. In addition, land will also be temporarily acquired, i.e. for the duration of project construction;
for storage of the quarried material before crushing, crushed material, cement, steel, etc.
The siting of these construction plant/ equipment’s would require clear piece of land. About 15.00 ha
has been estimated for the contractor’s activities and colony. Proper siting of these facilities will reduce
the impact due to their location. Their locations have been identified, keeping in view the technical and
economic criteria; however, same can be further refined during set up, keeping in view:
➢ Proximity to the site of use
➢ Sensitivity of forests in the nearby areas
➢ Wildlife, if any, in the nearby area
➢ Proximity from habitations
➢ Predominant wind direction
➢ Natural slope and drainage
Such activities are planned on private and government land and completely avoiding the forest area; to
minimize the impacts of tree cutting. Land will be restored once the project construction is complete.

Operation of construction plants and machinery, will have impact on ambient air quality due to fugitive
emissions associated with material handling; emission due to operation of DG sets to meet the power
requirements and other equipments; impact on water quality due to waste water generation and impact
on soil due to solid and hazardous waste generation and impact on soil due to solid and hazardous waste
generation. Management of such impacts with operation control and appropriate pollution control
equipment is essential to minimize their effect on surrounding environment including local population
and wildlife and same is discussed in Environment Management Plan.
15.5.1.4 Muck Disposal
The total quantity of muck generated from soil and rock excavation is about 4.56 Mcum. About 2.28
Mcum of excavated muck are expected to be utilized for Rockfill and aggregate for construction. It is
proposed to dispose off the remaining quantity, considering 40% swelling factor i.e 3.19 Mcum at a pre-
identified muck disposal site. The site will be fully rehabilitated and restored on completion of muck
dumping. Muck, if not securely transported and dumped at pre-designated site, can have serious
environmental impacts, such as:
➢ Can be washed away into the natural water bodies which can cause negative impacts on surface
and ground water quality.
➢ In many of the sites, muck is stacked without adequate stabilisation measures. In such a
scenario, the muck moves along with runoff and creates soil erosion like situations.
➢ Normally muck disposal is done at low lying areas, which get filled up due to stacking of muck.
This can sometimes affect the natural drainage pattern of the area leading to accumulation of
water or partial flooding of some area which can provide ideal breeding habitat for mosquitoes.
Muck disposal needs to be carefully planned else it becomes a major impact from construction of project.
Such a plan is prepared and included in the Environment Management Plan.
15.5.1.5 Road Construction
A network of roads would be required to approach various project components for construction,
operation and maintenance. It has been assessed that about 12.5 km length of new road is required to be
constructed to access the power house from the lower reservoir and Upper reservoir. The total land
required for the construction of new road is 10.76 ha.
The major impacts likely to accrue as a result of construction of the roads are:
➢ Loss of forest and vegetation by cutting of trees
➢ Geological disturbance due to blasting, excavation, etc.

➢ Soil erosion as the slope cutting operation disturbs the natural slope and leads to land
slips and landslides.
➢ Interruption of drainage and change in drainage pattern
➢ Disturbance of water resources with blasting and discriminate disposal of fuel and
lubricants from road construction machinery
➢ Siltation of water channels/ reservoirs from excavated debris
➢ Effect on flora and fauna
➢ Air pollution due to dust from debris, road construction machinery, etc.
➢ Noise generation due to construction activities
The indirect impact of the construction of new roads is the increase in accessibility to otherwise
undisturbed areas, resulting in greater human interference and subsequent adverse impacts on the
ecosystem. Appropriate management measures required to mitigate adverse environmental impacts
during road construction have been recommended.
15.5.1.6 Impact due to Acquisition of Land
For the development of Saundatti PSP, land would be required for construction of project components,
reservoir area, muck dumping, construction camps and colony, etc. Total land required for the
construction of proposed activities is approximately 383.26 ha. break up of land required for different
components is given in the Table 15 12 below.
Table 15 12: Land requirement for Saundatti Pumped Storage Project
Sl. no. Components Total Area (Ha)

1 Upper Reservoir 118.51
2 Intake Structure 10.61
3 Penstock 16.57
4 Power House & TRC Outlet 14.5
5 Lower Reservoir 156.51
6 Pot Head Yard 0.25
Proposed roads:from Lower Reservoir to Power House (PH),
7 PH to Upper Reservoir 10.76
Contractor facilities, cement and E&M stores, Temporary
8 colony area. 10.5
9 Muck disposal areas 30
10 Pumping & Other facilities 15
11 Magazine 0.05
TOTAL 383.26

Major impact of land acquisition is permanent change of land use, which is unavoidable. Additionally,
land acquisition has impacts on local population by way of loss of their agriculture land and hence
livelihood and also impact on flora and fauna by way of loss of forest land and clearing of vegetation on
acquired land. These impacts will be mitigated by implementing Landscaping Restoration and Green Belt
Development Plan and Biodiversity Conservation and Wildlife Management Plan, as discussed in EMP.
15.5.1.7 Impact on Water Quality
Sewage from Construction worker Camps
The project construction will last for a period of 3.5 years. About 4800 semi-skilled/unskilled, skilled
and supervisory staff are likely to work during the peak project construction phase. Most of the
employees/ workers during construction phase are likely to be employed from outside the project area.
The construction phase, also leads to mushrooming of various allied activities to meet the demand of
immigrant construction workers in the project area. Additionally drivers and labour associated with
transportation of material will also stay in the area on temporary basis.
The domestic water requirement for the construction worker and the technical staff migrating into the
project area is of the order of 480 cum/day @ 100 lpcd. Adding other requirement from fluctuating
population, it can go up to 500 cum/day. With 80% of this quantum to be generated as wastewater, the
quantity of 400 cum/day is considered significant and require planned disposal otherwise it will lead to
water pollution, resulting in increase in coliforms and other pathogens, which can lead to incidence of
water borne diseases. Therefore, project authorities would be taking appropriate measures to check
such disposal into the natural water bodies. In order to avoid any deterioration in water quality due to
disposal of untreated wastewater from labour camps, appropriate sewage treatment facilities will be
commissioned in the labour camps and only treated wastewater will be discharged following “General
Discharge Standards”.
Effluent from Construction Plants and Workshops
Water used in the construction plants and wastewater generated with high suspended solids. Similarly
from workshops, major pollutant will be oil and grease. Discharge of untreated wastewater will
adversely affect the surface and ground water quality. To minimize the impact, such effluent needs to be
treated in-situ before discharge to any water body or for land application.
Disposal of Muck
The major impact on the water quality arises when the muck is disposed along the river bank. The
project authorities have identified suitable muck disposal sites which are located near the river channel.
The muck will essentially come from the tunneling, road-building activity, and other excavation works.

The unsorted waste going into the river channel will greatly contribute to the turbidity of water
continuously for long time periods. The high turbidity is known to reduce the photosynthetic efficiency
of primary producers in the river and as a result, the biological productivity will be greatly reduced.
Therefore, the prolonged turbid conditions would have negative impact on the aquatic life. Therefore,
muck disposal has to be done in line with the Muck Disposal Plan, as given in Environment Management
Plan to avoid any negative impact.
15.5.1.8 Impact on Terrestrial Flora
The direct impact of construction activity is generally limited in the vicinity of the construction sites only.
As mentioned earlier, a large population (4800) including technical staff, workers and other group of
people are likely to congregate in the area during peak project construction phase. It can be assumed
that the technical staff will be of higher economic status and will live in a more urbanized habitat, and
will not use wood as fuel, if adequate alternate sources of fuel are provided. However, workers and other
population groups residing in the area may use fuel wood, if no alternate fuel is provided. Hence, to
minimize such impacts, it is proposed to provide alternate fuel for cooking e.g. LPG/kerosene to the
construction workers. The other alternative is to provide community kitchens on a cooperative basis by
the contractor. The details of the same have been covered in Environmental Management Plan.
Other major impact on the flora in and around the project area would be due to increased level of human
interference. The workers may also cut trees to meet their requirements for construction of houses,
furniture and space heating. Normally in such situations, lot of indiscriminate use or wastage of wood is
also observed, especially in remote or inaccessible areas. Thus, it is necessary to provide training and
awareness; and implement adequate surveillance to mitigate the adverse impacts on terrestrial flora
during project construction phase.
15.5.1.9 Impact on Terrestrial Fauna
Disturbance to Wildlife
During the construction period, large number of machinery and construction workers shall be
mobilized, which may create disturbance to wildlife population in the vicinity of project area. The
operation of various equipment will generate significant noise; noise and vibration will also increase
during blasting which will have adverse impact on fauna of the area. The noise may scare the fauna and
force them to migrate to other areas. Likewise siting of construction plants, workshops, stores, labour
camps etc. could also lead to adverse impact on fauna of the area. During the construction phase,
accessibility to area will lead to influx of workers and the people associated with the allied activities
from outside will also increase. Increase in human interference will have an impact on terrestrial
ecosystem.

Impact of blasting needs to be mitigated by adopting controlled blasting and strict surveillance regime
and the same is proposed to be used in the project. This will reduce the noise level and vibrations due to
blasting to a great extent.
Forest cover in the vicinity of proposed project working sites and their immediate vicinity is comprised
of scrub forest with agriculture as next pre-dominant land use type; apart from water body (Lower
reservoir). 10 species of mammals and 46 species of avifauna have been compiled from the study area,
as discussed in previous chapter. Therefore, adequate measures will be required during the construction
phase not to cause any adverse impact on terrestrial and avifaunal population. Although no Schedule I or
protected fauna species are reported.
15.5.1.10 Impact on Noise Environment
Sources of noise will be increased vehicular traffic due to project construction on approach roads and at
construction sites. Due to construction activity in the area, noise levels will increase during the period of
construction, however, they will remain limited to the work area mainly where large-scale construction
activity will progress. Other sources of noise and vibration will be the use of explosives for blasting
purposes for construction activities.
Noise due to Construction Equipment
The noise levels due to operation of the different construction equipment are given in Table 15 13.
Table 15 13: Equivalent Noise Levels due to Operation of Construction Equipment
Equipment Noise level (DB) Equipment Noise level (DB)

Earth Moving Material Handling
Compactors 70-72 Concrete mixers 75-85
Front loaders 72-82 Movable cranes 82-84
Backhoes 70-92
Tractors 76-90
Scrappers, graders 82-90
Truck 84-90
Others
Vibrators 69-81 Saws 74-81
The decrease in sound level of 80 dB(A) (at 1m from the source) at a distance of 100m from the source is
40 dB(A) even in the absence of external attenuation factor. Decrease in sound levels (measured at 1 m
from the source) at various distances. In the absence of details of attenuation factors, they have assumed
zero, whereas in actual practice attenuation factors such as vegetation, barricades, etc. will reduce the
sound level significantly. Noise levels get reduced by 6 dB(A) with every doubling of distance. Walls of

houses attenuates at least 30 dB(A) of noise. In addition, there is attenuation due to air absorption,
atmospheric in homogeneities, vegetal cover, etc. Thus, no increase in noise levels is anticipated beyond
100m from source during the project construction phase. However, it can be a cause of concern from
workers working in proximity to machines generating noise.
Noise due to increased vehicular movement
During construction phase, there will be significant increase in vehicular movement for transportation of
construction material. At present, there is no significant vehicular movement in the area. During
construction phase, the increase in vehicular movement is expected to be at least 5-6 trucks/hour during
peak construction period. The impact on noise level due to increased vehicular movement cannot be
quantified as it will depend upon various factors such as vehicle condition, vehicle speed, road condition,
idling time, traffic condition, etc.
Noise Generated due to Blasting
Noise generated by blasting is instantaneous in nature. Noise generated due to blasting is site specific
and depends on type, quantity of explosives, dimension of drill hole, degree of compaction of explosives
in the hole and rock.. As the blasting is likely to last for 4 to 5 seconds depending on the charge, noise
levels over this time would be instantaneous and short in duration. Considering attenuation due to
various sources, even the instantaneous increase in noise level is not expected to be significant especially
during day time. Hence, noise level due to blasting is not expected to cause any significant adverse
impact.
Impacts due to Ground Vibrations
The explosive energy generated during blasting sets up a seismic wave within the surface, which may
affect the structures and cause discomfort to human population. When an explosive charge is fired in a
hole, stress waves traverse in various directions, causing the rock particles to oscillate. Blasting also
generates ground vibrations and instantaneous noise. Various measures have been recommended to
minimize the adverse impacts due to blasting:
➢ Proper design of blast hole to be developed.
➢ Use of noiseless trunk delays to minimize the noise due to air blast.
➢ Use of non-electric system of blasting for true bottom-hole initiation.
➢ Use of muffling mats to arrest the dust and fly rock.
Noise in and around the construction site may affect the wildlife and residents in the nearby areas.
Wildlife in the area will likely move away from the noise and eventually return to the area when the
blasting is over. However, there is no major wildlife observed in and around the construction site and
hence this may not be a significant issue.

Impacts on Labour
The effect of high noise levels on the operating personnel has to be considered as this may be
particularly harmful. It is known that continuous exposures to high noise levels above 90 dB(A) affects
the hearing ability of the workers/operators and hence, should be avoided. To prevent these effects, it
has been recommended by Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) that the exposure
period of affected persons be limited as in Table 15 14:
Table 15 14: Noise levels exposure period for affected persons
Maximum equivalent continuous Unprotected exposure period per day for

noise level dB(A) 8 hrs/day and 5 days/week
90 8
95 4
100 2
110 0.5
120 0.25
15.5.1.11 Impact on Air Quality
In general Pumped Storage projects do not affect the air quality in a significant manner. The sources and
activities that might affect air quality in the project area are vehicular traffic, dust arising from unpaved
village roads and domestic fuel burning. The air environment around project site is free from any
significant pollution source. Therefore, ambient air quality is quite good in and around the project area.
Construction Phase Impacts
The sources and activities that might affect air quality in the project area are vehicular traffic, dust
arising from unpaved village roads and domestic fuel burning. The air environment around project site is
free from any significant pollution source. Therefore, ambient air quality is quite good in and around the
project area.
Increased vehicular movement for transportation of man and material and use of construction
equipment will impact air quality at the construction site through emissions from the engines and
equipment, fugitive emissions due to material handling, etc. Additionally, construction activities
including operation of crushers, concrete batch plants, construction work and movement of vehicles
along unpaved road will generate dust & gaseous emission and impact air quality. The burning of waste
will also affect air quality and therefore, need to be controlled. In absence of proper fuel, construction
workers at the project site may use wood for fuel burning.
Pollution due to fuel combustion in various equipment

The operation of various construction equipment requires combustion of fuel. Normally, diesel is used in
such equipment. The major pollutant which gets emitted as a result of combustion of diesel is SO 2. The
particulate matter emissions are minimal due to low ash content in diesel. Depending upon the fuel
quality and quantity and rating of DG sets and other equipment, it is important to provide adequate
stack height for emission to be dispersed in the atmosphere to have minimum increase in Ground Level
Concentrations (GLCs).
Emissions from various crushers and other construction plants
The operation of the crusher and other construction plants during the construction phase generates dust
and fugitive emissions, which can impact plant area and surrounding area as well, depending on wind
direction. Such fugitive emissions comprising mainly of the particulate matter, will be generated.
Preventive and protective measures are required to be implemented by contractors at site to control
such emissions and further reduce their impacts on workers and locals.
Fugitive Emissions from material handling and transportation
During construction phase, there will be increased vehicular movement. Lot of construction material like
sand, fine aggregate is stored at various sites, during the project construction phase. Normally, due to
blowing of winds, especially when the environment is dry, some of the stored material can get entrained
in the atmosphere. Although it is very difficult to completely eliminate such impact, it is possible to
reduce its intensity by implementing mitigation measures.
15.5.1.12 Impact on Socio-economic Environment
Positive Impacts on Socio-Economic Environment
The following positive impacts are anticipated on the socio-economic environment of the local people of
villages of project area during the project construction and operation phases:
➢ A number of marginal activities and jobs would be available to the locals during construction
phase.
➢ Developer bringing large scale investment to the area will also invest in local area development
and benefit will be reaped by locals. Education, medical, transportation, road network and other
infrastructure will improve.
➢ The availability of alternative resources provided by developer in the rural areas will reduce the
dependence of the locals on natural resources such as forest.
➢ With increased availability of electricity, small-scale and cottage industries are likely to come up
in the area.

➢ The proposed project site is well connected by road. Efforts to be made to develop eco-tourism,
which could earn additional revenue.
Negative Impacts on Socio-Economic Environment
Such projects, in addition, to positive impact on socio-economic environment may also bring certain
negative impact due to influx of outside population. Workforce will reside in that area for around three
years and also there will be influx of drivers and other workers on temporary basis. This influx of people
in otherwise isolated area may lead to various social and cultural conflicts during the construction stage.
Developers need to take help of local leaders, Panchayat and NGOs to ensure minimum impact on this
count.
Increased incidence of Diseases
Large scale activity in the area due to the proposed project may become a cause of spread different types
of diseases in the project area due to following reasons:
➢ Project requires long-term input of labour from outside the area.
➢ Project requires that significant numbers of project employees be separated from their families
for long periods of time
➢ Project involves the creation of large, temporary construction camp(s).
➢ Increases mobility of people in and out of the area (job seekers, formal and informal service
provider(s).
➢ Requires participation / resettlement of the local population.
15.5.1.13 Impact During Operation Phase
On completion of the construction of the project, the land used for construction activities will be
restored. Construction workers who have resided in that area will move to another project site. By
ensuring all the mitigation and management measures, as planned for this project, are implemented to
minimize the impact of construction phase, large part of the area will go back to its original form.
However, there will be some permanent changes such as reservoir formation, powerhouse and project
colony. The project is planned as a clean source of renewable energy as there are no significant pollution
generation during project operation. There is no air and water pollution from the project operation.
Similarly generation of solid and hazardous waste is also insignificant.
Other impacts of the construction phase include formation of reservoir impacting the water quality,
pollution generation from colony and plant and positive as well negative impacts on socio-economic
environment mainly due to improved infrastructure in the area.

During the operation phase, due to absence of any large scale construction activity, the cause and source
of water pollution will be much different. Since, only a small number of O&M staff will reside in the area
in a well-designed colony with sewage treatment plant and other infrastructural facilities, the problems
of water pollution due to disposal of sewage are not anticipated. The treated sewage will be reused for
gardening and green belt around the colony.
15.6 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
15.6.1 Compensatory Afforestation Plan
The Saundatti Off-Stream Pumped Storage Project is being constructed in the jurisdiction of Belagavi
Forest Division in Ujjain Circle, Karnataka. The total forest land required for the construction of
proposed project activities 301.96 ha.
The compensatory afforestation is proposed to be undertaken on Non-forest land identified in

consultation with the State Forest Department and District administration. The estimated cost of
Compensatory Afforestation programme with cost of non-forest land acquired for afforestation
programme is Rs. 5486.62 lakh.
Forest in the project area fall in the Eco Class IV as being of type Consisting of Tropical Thorn Forests and
Tropical Dry Evergreen Forests therefore NPV @ Rs. 6.26 lakhs/ha would be required to be deposited in
the Compensatory Afforestation Fund. The total cost of NPV has been computed as Rs. 1890.27 lakh.
The total cost of the compensatory afforestation plan, NPV, compensation of trees and cost of damage to
fence and infrastructure is Rs. 7376.89 lakh.
15.6.2 Biodiversity Conservation & Wildlife Management Plan
Keeping in view of the anticipated impacts, the main objectives of biodiversity conservation and wildlife
management plan are as follows:
 Maintenance of ecological balance through preservation and restoration of wherever it has been
disturbed due to project developmental activities.
 Conservation and preservation of natural habitats in catchment and project area
 Rehabilitation of critical species (endangered, rare and threatened species), with provisions for
in situ or ex situ conservation,
 Mitigation and control of project induced biotic and/or abiotic pressures/ influences that may
affect the natural habitats,
 Habitat enhancement in project area and catchment area by taking up afforestation and soil
conservation measures,

 Creating all round awareness regarding conservation and ensuring people’s participation in the
conservation efforts and minimizing man-animal conflict like human-wild dog; human-elephant
etc.
 Following are the measures suggested for the said plan:
➢ Wildlife Habitat Preservation & Improvement
➢ Establishment of Eco Park
➢ Sowing of Grass
➢ Biodiversity monitoring
➢ Awareness promotion
➢ Strengthening of Infrastructural Facilities of Forest Department
➢ Biodiversity Management Committee (BMC)
The estimated cost of implementation of various activities envisaged in the Biodiversity Conservation
and Management Plan would be Rs. 105.90 lakh.
15.6.3 Muck Dumping Plan
The Proposed Off-Stream Pumped Storage Project is located at Belagavi District, Karnataka. Proposed
Scheme will involve construction of Rock fill embankments of average height of around 30m with
maximum of 43m height in upper reservoir for creation of Off-Stream pumped storage component.
Water is proposed to be diverted through Six numbers of independent penstocks and one number of
independent penstocks bifurcated into two. A surface Powerhouse will be located on the downstream of
the power block and shall be equipped with Six turbines and a pump/turbine having
generating/pumping capacity of 320MW/340MW and two units of 160MW/180MW, respectively.
The construction activities of the project would generate muck from excavation of various project
structures. The total quantity of muck likely to be generated from excavation including construction of
roads is about 4.56 Mcum. However, after the utilization of muck for different project components and
considering the swell factor of 40% for excavated material, the total quantity of muck to be disposed is
worked out as 3.19 Mcum. The entire excavated material is proposed to be dumped at one location
identified specifically for this purpose.
For the disposal of muck an area of 30 Ha having capacity of 3.76 M Cum has been identified. The
disposal site was identified taking into consideration availability of suitable area, minimum distance
from generation sites.
The estimated cost of the relocation and rehabilitation of excavated material will be Rs.630.99 lakh.

15.6.4 Landscaping and Restoration of construction sites
During construction phase of the project, number of temporary construction sites and working areas
will come up. For the restoration of proposed project affected areas to its original landscape as much as
possible and retain its aesthetic values. Various engineering and biological measures will be
implemented for the restoration of proposed project affected areas. The estimated cost of restoration of
construction is 80.00 lakh.
15.6.5 Sanitation & Solid waste management
Solid waste generated from temporary and permanent colonies in construction as well as operation
phase requires special management for disposal. The project authorities will ensure sewage generated
from labour colonies and site office is treated and disposed as per the SPCB guidelines. It is proposed to
provide adequate septic tanks with soak pits for treatment and disposal of sewage. Various aspects of
solid waste management include:
➢ Reuse/Recycling
➢ Storage/Segregation
➢ Collection and Transportation
➢ Disposal
The waste generated from the project area will be collected, segregated and disposed off in line with the
provisions laid down in Solid Waste Management Rules, 2016. The total budget in order to manage the
solid waste generated from this population, has been proposed as Rs. 301.56 lakh.
15.6.6 Public Health Delivery System
The objective of Public Health Delivery System is to provide good health care facilities at construction
sites and to improve efficiency in the allocation and use of health resources in the project area, so as to
improve the health status of the people in the area.
Project construction and operation will bring about several changes in the socio-economic environment
of the area including increased threats to health of the community.
➔ New Diseases due to Migratory Population
➔ Chances of increase in water borne diseases as malaria, and dengue are high
➔ Chances of increase in respiratory troubles due to increase in suspended particles during the
construction phase.
➔ Chances of occurrence of gastroenteritis, cholera and typhoid in the labour camps.
Medical services at secondary level play a vital and complimentary role to the tertiary and primary

health care systems and together form a comprehensive district-based health care system. Following
activities are proposed:
 Ambulance: 2 no. with all the basic Medicare facilities and small DG set, etc. to cater for villages
in the project area.
 Budget for running the ambulances including driver, fuel and maintenance for 4 years.
 First aid posts including sheds, furniture and basic equipment.
 Budget for running the first aid post including cost of medico, para-medico/Nurses and
attendant, consumables, etc. for 4 years.
 Budget for strengthening existing medical facilities.
 Budget for Health Awareness/ Vaccination Camps for 4 years.
Mitigation measures to avoid spread of COVID19 among workforce Budgetary estimates for public
health delivery system to be implemented have been worked out as Rs. 226.00 lakh.
15.6.7 Energy Conservation Measures
The existing facilities will become insufficient for supply of kitchen fuel for the migrant population
during the construction of the project. Therefore, the project authorities would make adequate
arrangements such as Community kitchen, Supply of Kitchen fuel, efficient cooking facilities and solar
lantern either directly by developer or through contractor to reduce the pressure on natural resources in
the project area and minimize impacts on this count. A total budget of Rs. 235.00 lakhs have been
proposed under Energy Conservation Plan.
15.6.8 Labour Management Plan for their Health & Safety
Construction work has many associated risks and health impacts for the workers who are directly
exposed to such health and safety risks. Therefore, there is a need to prepare complete health and safety
documents for workers either by project proponent/contractor and proponent shall ensure its
implementation. A detailed plan will be prepared covering the above activities before start of
construction work. A tentative budget of Rs. 117.00 lakh for labour management have been proposed
under EMP.
15.6.9 Green Belt Development Plan
The main objective of green belt development plan is to increase the green cover in the area and
improving the aesthetics. Development of green belt and other form of greenery shall also prevent the
soil erosion and washing away of top-soil besides helping in stabilizing the functional ecosystem. A
"Green Belt Development Plan" has been prepared by selecting the potential flora of the region that

could help in achieving the desired results as stated above. Green belt development will comprise of
plantations at various places like alongside roads and at different project offices and colonies.
Green belt development will comprise of plantations at various places like alongside roads, around the
periphery of reservoir rim, at power house site and at different project offices and colonies.
The estimated cost for the plantations and creation of green belt around reservoir and colonies and
working sites would be Rs. 200 lakh 41.40 lakh.
15.6.10 Air & Water Management Plan
Various mitigation and management measures have been planned to reduce the impacts of air, noise and
water pollution and implement safety measures to ensure that impacts on these counts are reduced to
minimum possible during the entire construction phase. To implement such measures, it is important to
prepare a budget of such measures and include in the project cost so that lack of fund should not
constrain their implementation.
A sum of Rs. 50.00 lakh has been allocated to implement various activities envisaged under EMP.
15.6.11 Environmental Monitoring Plan
Monitoring shall be performed during all stages of the project (namely: construction and operation) to
ensure that the impacts are no greater than predicted, and to verify the impact predictions. The
monitoring program will indicate where changes to procedures or operations are required, in order to
reduce impacts on the environment or local population. The monitoring will be carried out by an NABL
accredited laboratory for a period of 3.5 years during the project construction phase or extended if the
project construction period gets extended. The monitoring program for the proposed project will be
undertaken to meet the following objectives:
To monitor the environmental conditions of the project area and nearby villages.
To check on whether mitigation and benefit enhancement measures have actually been adopted and are
proving effective in practice.
15.6.12 Rehabilitation & Resettlement Plan
For the development of Saundatti Off-Stream PSP, land requirement has been worked out as 402.50 ha.
Out of which 301.96 ha is forest land, 71.96 ha is private land and 28.58 ha is government land. Of the
total land required for the project 71.96 ha private land identified for the project will be acquired as per
KarnatakaRight to Fair Compensation and Transparency in Land Acquisition, Rehabilitation and
Resettlement Rules, 2015.
The entire private land identified for the project falls in one revenue villages - Karlakatti, tehsil Rampura,

District Belagavi. The private land proposed for procurement belongs to a total of 138 land owners. All
the 138 families will be losing their total agricultural land only and none of the families will be losing any
house or any other assets.
The financial requirement for implementation of the Rehabilitation and Resettlement plan and
Economic Development Package is Rs. 809.00 lakhs.
15.6.13 Local Area Development Plan
The proposed Project is located near Karlakatti about 0.5 Km, which comes under, Rampura tehsil,
Belagavi District. All the private land proposed to be acquired for the project is under Karlakatti.
Therefore, Karlakatti in general and Project Affected Families in particular will be direct beneficiaries for
the Local Area Development schemes.
Based on the local consultations in project affected villages, the focus areas covering many important
components of the sustainable development such as social, economic, livelihoods and environment will
be identified and set of development activities shall be proposed under each focus area for the benefit of
the local people under the Project.
15.6.14 Disaster Management Plan
In order to visualize the worst case scenario Dam Break Modeling exercise was undertaken and an
inundation map was prepared. Based upon the outputs generated from this modeling, a Disaster
Management Plan has been formulated. This plan presents warning and notification procedures to be
followed in case of failure or potential failure of the embankments. The purpose is to provide timely
warning to the population likely to be affected and alert key people who have to take respective actions
in case of an emergency. The estimated total cost of execution of disaster management plan including the
equipment would be Rs. 275.00 lakh.
15.7 COST FOR IMPLEMENTING ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
An amount of Rs. 7059.75 lakh has been allocated for the implementation of Environmental
Management Plan and Corporate Environment Responsibility Plan for Saundatti PSP Project are
summarized in the table given below.
Table 15 15: Cost for Implementing EMP & CER Activities
S. No. Management Plans Amount

(Rs. in lakh)
A Environmental Management Plan

1 Compensatory Afforestation 7376.89
2 Biodiversity Conservation & Wildlife Conservation Plan 105.90
3 Muck Dumping and Management Plan 630.99
4 Landscaping, Restoration of Quarry and Construction Sites 80.00
5 Sanitation and Solid Waste Management Plan 301.56
6 Public Health Delivery System 226.00
7 Energy Conservation Measures 235.00
8 Labour Management Plan 117.00
9 Green Belt Development Plan 41.40
10 Pollution Mitigation Measures 50.00
11 Environmental Monitoring Program 125.00
12 Rehabilitation and Resettlement Plan 809.00
13 Local Area Development Plan 1000.00
14 Disaster Management Plan 275.00
Total 11373.74

CHAPTER 16 COST ESTIMATE
16.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT
The Saundatti PSP envisages construction of upper reservoir & lower reservoir for the utilization of
the differential head generated in between the two reservoirs. In this renewable project the lower
reservoir is located on the river course; therefore onetime filling of the reservoir will be done by one
time drawl of water from the existing catchment of the Lower reservoir located on the chambal river.
The upper is proposed to be constructed near Karlakatti village located in Saundatti Mandal of
Belagavi district. The water from the Renuka Sagar (existing reservoir) will be used for one time filling
of the lower reservoir near the Karlakatti village and will be utilized for feeding the turbines housed in
a surface Power House located near to Lower reservoir.
The Saundatti PSP envisages construction of
m/s & 1 No, 7.1 m dia, 981 m steel lined which will be bifurcated to 5.0 m dia, 128.752 m each
with velocity of 5.00 m/s comprising of Burried Penstocks, 4 Nos., 7.1 m dia & 185.97 m length
(average), Vertical Pressure Shafts, 4 Nos., 7.1 m dia & 392.75 m length and Horizontal
Pressure Shaft, 4 Nos., 7.1 m dia in which 3 Nos. will feed 3 units each of 320 MW and 1 no.
Independent Pressure Shaft will be bifurcated into two branch pressure shafts of 5 m dia & of
about 113.55 m length to feed two smaller units of 160 MW.

16.2 BASIS OF THE COST ESTIMATES
The Civil Cost Estimates of the project has been prepared as per "Guidelines for preparation of
estimates for the river valley projects" issued by CWC and Indian Standard IS: 4877 "Guide for
Preparation of Estimate for River Valley Projects".
The detailed estimate of cost of civil works is based on planning and designs of various components of
works after review of site conditions, carrying out detailed field investigations & analysis and studies
etc. General arrangement and layout details of various structures as well as their salient features are
shown in drawings Volume of this report. Analysis of rates for major items of civil works has been
carried out. Rate for minor items of works and lump sum provisions for some works have been made
on the basis of experience on similar projects which have been completed recently or are under
construction.
The analysis of rates for various items have been worked out in consideration of the cost of materials,
carriage, handling, storing, labor and equipment required for various items of work and including
overheads. The total costs of these schemes have been worked out on the basis and guidelines of
Karnataka UCSR 2017 and the same is given in the general abstracts of the cost. The Daily wage rates
have been taken as per Karnataka Unified Schedule of Rates for the year 2017. For items for which the
rates are not available, the accepted schedule of rates of similar ongoing/recently executed projects
adopted. The quantities have been worked out by calculating the quantities of different items of work
involved from the design drawings of different structures. The detailed breakup of rate analysis, hourly
use rate of equipments, lead statments, detailed and abstract cost estimate are presented in Volume V
– Cost Estimates of this report.
The capital cost of the project includes all costs associated with investigations, design, construction
and maintenance during construction period of the project.
Provision for contingencies are considered at 3% of the works cost and are provided in the detailed
works estimates prepared on the heads of item rates and quantities of works to be executed.
The estimates of the Hydro Electric Scheme has been divided under the following account heads:
A. Direct Cost
I. Works
A - Preliminary
B - Land
C - Works
J - Power Plant Civil Works

K - Buildings
M - Plantation
O - Miscellaneous
P - Maintenance during construction
Q - Special T&P R - Communications
S - Power Plant and Electro-Mechanical system
X - Environment and Ecology
Y - Losses on stock
Total I-Works
Establishment
Tools and Plants
Suspense
Receipt and Recoveries
Total (A) - Direct Cost
B. Indirect Cost
Capitalization of Abatement of Land Revenue
Audit and Account Charges
Consultancy Charges
Upfront fee for loan
Total (B) - Indirect Cost
Total Cost (A+B)
16.3 PREPARATION OF DETAILED ESTIMATES OF COST (I-WORKS)
16.3.1 A - Preliminary
The provision under this head covers the works relating to various Investigations, Surveys, Model
tests, Ecological studies, field and laboratory tests on rocks, construction material investigations and
testing, collection of hydrological and meteorological data etc. Provision for preliminary expenses is
provided of Rs. 63.46 Crores, not to exceed 3.5% of total cost of I-Works.

16.3.2 B – Land
The provision under this head covers acquisition (or) purchse of Land for project components, access
roads, camps and buildings, workshops, stores, offices, residential and nonresidential areas for
construction and maintenance staff, Solatium charges, demarcation & measurement charges, etc. have
been made as per actuals. A provision of 158.65 Crore have been made under this head.
16.3.3 C - Works
The provisions under this head covers the costs of this sub-head covers the cost of Upper Dam & lower
dam works and associated Hydro-mechanical equipments if any.
Important items to be considered under this head are
Upper Dam & Lower Dam
➢ Stripping & Excavation of cutoff trench
➢ Foundation treatment
➢ Formation of Asphalt facing Rockfill embankments
➢ Curtain & Consolidation Grouting
A provision of Rs 1023.35 Crores have been made under the head of C- Civil Works
16.3.4 J - Power plant civil works
The provisions under this head covers the costs of, Upstream & Downstream Intake structure, Steel
lined pressure shafts/Penstocks, Power House & Tail Race Tunnel.
Intake Structure
➢ Excavation
➢ Foundation treatment
➢ Cement concrete for foundation, piers and abutments
➢ Masonry/concrete for guide walls of approach channel
➢ Concrete for trash racks including raking arrangement
➢ Gates with auxiliary equipment’s
➢ Reinforcement Steel
➢ Instrumentation etc.,
Steel lined Intake Tunnel & Pressure shaft

• Excavation
• Steel liner
• Cement concrete for backfill
• Stiffener, Reducers, Bends, Penstock valves, Instrumentation
Power House
➢ Excavation
➢ Concrete for foundation, sub-structure, super-structure and supports for turbines and
generators.
➢ Masonry/concrete for super-structure and other necessary items for building work.
➢ Scroll casing / Generator barrel
➢ Draft tube
➢ Bulkhead gates, crane and hoisting equipment
➢ Power-house crane
➢ Miscellaneous items such as anchor bolts, grouting etc.
➢ Instrumentation
Tail Race Tunnel
➢ Excavation
➢ Lining with cement concrete in tunnel, bed and sides of channel with drainage pipes
and valves
➢ Gates with auxiliary equipment’s
➢ Pucca works
➢ Cross Drainage(s)
➢ Instrumentation
A provision of Rs 1624.35 Crores have been made under the head of J- Power Plant Civil Works
16.3.5 K – Buildings
The provisions under this head covers the Residential / Nonresidential buildings, office buildings,
Stores, Testing laboratories, Workshops, Other Service Buildings, Community Centre etc. A provision of
Rs 53.00 Crores is made under this head.

16.3.6 M – Plantation
The provisions under this head covers the plantation program including Gardens etc. required for
beautification which is considered necessary at downstream of Weir and around Power House and
other important structures. A provision of Rs. 120 Lakhs is made under this head.
16.3.7 O – Miscellaneous
The provision under this head covers the capital cost & maintenance of Electrification, Water supply,
Sewage disposal and drainage works, Recreation, Medical, Firefighting equipments, Inspection
vehicles, School bus, Pay van, visit of dignitaries, welfare works etc. A provision of Rs 40.0 Crores
(around 2% C-Works, J-Power plant civil works and K-Buildings) is made under this head.
16.3.8 P - Maintenance during Construction
The provision under this head covers the cost of maintenance of all works during the construction
period. A provision of Rs 27.10 Crores (around 1.5% C-Works, J-Power plant civil works and K-
Buildings) is made under this head.
16.3.9 Q - Special Tools & Plants
The provisions under this head covers the Drilling & Grouting equipment’s, Transport, Compaction,
Electrical equipment’s, Construction Plant & Earth Moving equipment’s and other Miscellaneous
equipment’s. A provision of Rs.200.00 lakhs has been made under this head. As the project works have
been planned for construction through contractors, and it is expected that the contractors will procure
their own equipment’s for work.
The project estimates therefore do not provide for purchase of heavy earth moving equipment and
concreting equipment by the owner.
16.3.10 R – Communication
The provisions under this head covers the construction of main approach roads, quarry roads,
temporary or permanent river crossing, railways, bridges and connecting roads. A provision of Rs
31.86 Crores is made under this head
16.3.11 S - Power plant and Electro - Mechanical System
The provision under this head cover the Electro-Mechanical equipment for the power plant and
associated substation. The total cost of Electro-Mechanical works works out to be Rs. 1926.00 Crores.
Prices of major auxiliary equipment and services are based on current budgetary prices while that of
some minor items are based on prices for similar equipment procured in the past for similar projects.
Suitable provision for transportation, erection and commissioning charges, freight and insurance etc.

have been adequately made as per general guidelines issued by CEA. Provision for establishment and
Audit and Account charges for the electro-mechanical works have also been made under this cost
separately. Cost of transmission line for evacuation of power at Rs 390.00 Crores is also included in the
project cost.
16.3.12 X - Environment and Ecology
Under this head provisions for items like, compensatory afforestation, catchment area treatment,
establishment of fuel depot, salvage / rehabilitation of any rare or endangered species of flora and
fauna, control of aquatic weeds, public health measures to control water or soil borne diseases,
Restoration of land, seismological measures etc., are considered as per their requirements. A provision
of Rs 80.00 Crores is made under this head.
16.3.13 Y - Losses On Stock
The provision of Rs. 6.75 Crores under this head has been made at 0.25% of the total cost of C Works, J
- Power Plant Civil Works and K – Buildings.
16.3.14 Establishment
The provision of Rs. 138.95 Crores under this head has been made in the corresponding items of the
work.
16.3.15 Tools & Plants
Provision of Rs. 29.73 Crores for ordinary tools and plants is made at 1.0% of I - Works less land.
16.3.16 Suspense
The net provision under this minor head is "NIL", as all the outstanding suspense accounts are
expected to be cleared by adjustment to appropriate heads.
16.3.17 Receipts & Recoveries On Capital Account
Provision is made under this head towards estimated recoveries by way of resale at 15% of the total
cost incurred towards Q-Special tools and plants.
16.3.18 Indirect Charges
A provision of 0.25% of I - Work cost is made for Audit and Account subject to minimum of Rs. 7.83
crores.
16.4 PROJECT COST
The total project cost has been estimated at 7048.62 Crore at June 2022 price level as given below:
Cost of Civil Works 3984.50 Crores

Cost of E&M work including Transmission line 2270.63 Crores
Interest During Construction 793.49 Crores
Total project cost 7048.62 Crores
The detailed breakup of the cost estimate is enclosed in Volume V.

GENERAL ABSTRACT (1280MW)
Cost of
Head Cost of Civil Total Cost in
Sl No. Particulars Electrical
of A/c works in Lakhs Lakhs
works in Lakhs
A. Direct Cost
I I WORKS
A Preliminaries: 6346.07 6346.07
B Land: 15865.17 15865.17
C Works: 102335.00 102335.00
Weir
Upper Dam – 51994
Lower Dam - 50341
J Power Plant Civil Works:
1. Upper Reservoir Formation 19102.55 19102.55
2. U/S Intake 17933.32 17933.32
3. D/S Intake 19139.99 19139.99
4. Penstock / Adit 65927.39 65927.39
5. Power House 29810.77 29810.77
6.Tail Race tunnel 10520.90 10520.90
K Buildings: 5300.00 5300.00
M Plantation: 120.00 120.00
Site Plantations
O Miscellaneous: 4000.00 4000.00

Telephone, O & M of inspection
vehicles etc.,
P Maintenance: 2710.00 2710.00
Maintenance charges during
construction
Q Special Tools and Plants 200.00 200.00
R Communications: 3186.15 3186.15
Service Roads
X Environment & Ecology 8000.00 8000.00

Y Loss on stock: 675.17 685.15
@ 0.25% on total
S Power Plant Electrical Works 153600.00

Infrastructure Development for 39000.00
Power Evacuation
Pumping Charges 2000.00

Total I-Works 313172.48 192600.00 505772.48
II Establishment Charges 13895.17 7708.50 21727.67
Civil – Rs. 90.00 Crores plus
3.00% of cost
exceeding Rs. 1500 Crores
E&M – Rs. 67.50 Crores plus
2.25% of cost
III Tools & Plants: 2973.07 1926.00 4899.07
Ordinary T & P @ 1% of I –
works less B-land
IV Suspense NIL NIL NIL
V Receipts & Recoveries: -30 0.00 -30.00
Q – Special Tools & Plants @
15% of
capital cost
Sub Total (A) 330010.73 202234.50 532245.23
B. Indirect Charges
Audit and Accounts @ 0.5% of I 782.93 500.00 1282.93
Works
Sub Total (B) 330793.66 202734.50 533528.16

GST @ 12 % 39695.24 24328.14 64023.38
Sub Total '(C) 370488.90 227062.64 597551.54
Price Escalation 24965.54 0.00 24965.54
GST @ 18 % on Price Escalation 2995.86 0.00 2995.86
Sub Total (D) 398450.30 227062.64 625512.94
Interest During Construction 79349.32
Total Project Cost 704862.26

CHAPTER 17 FINANCIAL AND ECONOMIC ANALYSIS
17.1 INTRODUCTION
The economic viability of a project is determined by comparison with the alternative sources at the
same place considering therein all elements such as cost of transmission/distribution etc., In isolated
areas, it is often compared with diesel or other sources available for affording the same energy
benefits. The economics of the project, where existing facility is required to meet the demand could be
computed considering system requirements and the ability of the scheme for meeting the demand.
When a Hydro Project is to be developed by an Independent producer, he would have to consider
returns to him considering all factors such as rate offered to him by third party sale or captive
consumption or sale to state electricity boards, any subsidies and concessions available for funding or
otherwise.
The economic and financial evaluation of the Saundatti Pumped Storage Project has been considered
as per the standard guidelines issued by Central Electricity Authority and the norms laid down by the
Central Electricity Regulatory Commission (CERC) for Hydro projects have been kept in view in this
regard.
17.2 GENERATION BENEFITS FROM THE PROJECT
In a year, the planned power generation will be 2833 MU considering the rate of 6.38 hours per day for
365 days operation @ 95% machine availability.
17.3 ANNUAL REQUIREMENT OF PUMPING ENERGY
The pumping will have to be carried out for 7.57 hours for 365 days operation @ 95% machine
availability. The energy required for pumping works out to 3622 MU per annum.
17.4 PROJECT COST
The total project cost has been estimated at 7048.62 Crore at June 2022 price level as given below:
Cost of Civil Works 3984.50 Crores
Cost of E&M work including Transmission line 2270.63 Crores
Interest During Construction 793.49 Crores
Total project cost 7048.62 Crores
17.5 MEANS OF FINANCE
The project is proposed to be financed through term loans from financial institutes and balance
through equity participation or as in practice of Corporation.
Equity: The developer will provide Equity to the extent of 30% of the project cost based on the

estimates by adopting a debt equity ratio of 70:30 is borrowed.
Debt: The term loan to the extent of 70% of the project cost (including IDC) based on the estimates
will be obtained from the financial institutions.
The analysis has been carried out, considering the rate of interest equal to 10.5% on term loan. As per
CERC Terms & Conditions of Tariff Regulations, 2019 (in short, “CERC Tariff Regulations 2019”),
repayment of loan has been considered equal to the depreciation allowed under these regulations,
until the loan is fully paid off. Interest charges have been computed based on average of opening and
closing amount of outstanding loan.
17.6 PHASING OF EXPENDITURE
The project is scheduled to be completed in 39 months (Including Pre construction 3 months) in all
respects. The phasing of the expenditure worked out on the basis of proposed construction
programme is summarized in Table 18.1. Item wise detailed breskup is provided in Table 17 1.
Table 17 1: Phasing of Expenditure
Year 6 Monthly Phasing Capital Expenditure (Crores)
Pre Construction 2022 Pre Construction 3 Months 95.75
2022 6 592.43
2023 12 756.76
2023 18 617.65
2024 24 577.89
2024 30 510.58
2025 36 186.06
17.7 INTEREST DURING CONSTRUCTION
Interest charges during construction would depend on phasing of expenditure. IDC has been
considered for scheduled completion period of 39 months including preconstruction period of 6
months. The Interest during Construction period is expected to be Rs. 793.49 Crores.
17.8 DEPRECIATION PROVISION
As per CERC Tariff Regulations 2019, Depreciation is considered @5.28% p.a. for the initial period of
12 years and the remaining depreciation to cover 90% depreciable value shall be spread over balance
useful life of 40 years of the project.
Land is not a depreciable asset; hence depreciation is to be provided on total cost of the project other

than Land.
17.9 VIABLE TARIFF
Following assumptions are made to arrive at the viable tariff, as per CERC Tariff Regulations 2019.
Operation and maintenance O & M Expenses @ 3.5% of the project cost, escalated @ 4.47% per
annum.
Interest on working capital has been arrived as follows: The total working capital is arrived at by
considering sum of 15.00% on maintenance of spares, 1-month O&M cost, and 45 days Receivables.
Discount Factor for the purpose of calculating levelized tariff has been considered at 10.0%
The above analysis is only for the purpose of arriving at the stand-alone viable tariff for the Saundatti
PSP, and the viability analysis for the project will be carried out separately. Accordingly, the input cost
of power, which is dynamic and will vary as per actual conditions from time to time, has not been
captured in this analysis. Levelized tariff calculations for Saundatti PSP is enclosed.


GENERAL ABSTRACT (1280MW)
Cost of
Head Cost of Civil Total Cost in
Sl No. Particulars Electrical
of A/c works in Lakhs Lakhs
works in Lakhs
A. Direct Cost
I I WORKS
A Preliminaries: 6346.07 6346.07
B Land: 15865.17
15865.17
C Works: 102335.00 102335.00

Upstream Embankment
1. Upper Reservoir Formation 19102.55

19102.55
2. U/S Intake 17933.32

17933.32
3. D/S Intake 19139.99 19139.99
4. Penstock 65927.39
65927.39
5.Power House 29810.77 29810.77
6. Tail Race tunnel 10520.90

10520.90
K Buildings: 5300.00 5300.00
M Plantation: 120.00 120.00

Site Plantations
O Miscellaneous: 4000.00 4000.00

Telephone, O & M of inspection
vehicles etc.,
P Maintenance: 2710.00 2710.00

Maintenance charges during
construction

R Communications: 3186.15 3186.15
Service Roads
X Environment & Ecology 8000.00 8000.00
Y Loss on stock: 675.17 685.15

@ 0.25% on total
S Power Plant Electrical Works

153600.00
Infrastructure Development for 39000.00

Power Evacuation
Construction Power 2000.00

arrangement
Total I-Works 313172.48 192600.00 505772.48
II Establishment Charges 13895.17 7708.50 21727.67

Civil – Rs. 90.00 Crores plus
3.00% of cost
E&M – Rs. 67.50 Crores plus
2.25% of cost
III Tools & Plants: 2973.07 1926.00 4899.07

Ordinary T & P @ 1% of I –
works less B-land
IV Suspense NIL NIL NIL
V Receipts & Recoveries: -30 0.00 -30.00

Q – Special Tools & Plants @
15% of
capital cost
Sub Total (A) 330010.73 202234.50 532245.23
B. Indirect Charges
Audit and Accounts @ 0.5% of I 782.93 500.00 1282.93

Works
Sub Total (B) 330793.66 202734.50 533528.16

GST @ 18 %
39695.24 24328.14 64023.38
Sub Total '(C)

370488.90 227062.64 597551.54
Price Escalation 24965.54 0.00 24965.54
GST @ 18 % on Price 2995.86 0.00 2995.86

Escalation
Sub Total (D)

398450.30 227062.64 625512.94
Interest During Construction

79349.32
Total Project Cost

704862.26

PHASING OF COST OF CIVIL WORKS
(Rs. Lakhs
Construction Stage
Basic Cost Pre
Basic Cost as
as on price Construction Completed
Sl.No ACTIVITY/ITEM Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 on price level Total Escalation
level Nov Stage Cost
Nov 2018
2018 3 Months 0-6 7 – 12 13 – 18 19 – 24 25 – 30 31 – 36
C Works Weir
Phasing of expenditure in %age 0.00% 18.98% 25.00% 20.00% 20.00% 16.02% 0.00%
Basic Cost as on price level Nov 2018 102335.0 0.0 19420.2 25583.8 20467.0 20467.0 16397.0 0.0 102335.0
Escalation 0.0 728.3 1535.0 1688.5 2149.0 2090.6 0.0 8191.5
Zero Date Apr 2019

Completed Cost 0.0 20148.5 27118.8 22155.5 22616.0 18487.7 0.0 110526.5
Approach Channel
Escalation 0.0 358.2 573.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 931.2
Completed Cost 0.0 9909.4 10124.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 20033.8
2. U/S Intake
Escalation 0.0 201.7 430.4 369.9 94.1 0.0 0.0 1096.2
Completed Cost 0.0 5581.7 7603.7 4853.2 990.8 0.0 0.0 19029.5
3. D/S Intake
Escalation 0.00 0.00 229.68 315.81 602.91 732.10 0.00 1880.5
Completed Cost 0.00 0.00 4057.68 4143.81 6344.91 6474.10 0.00 21020.5
4. Penstock & Adit

Escalation 49.45 247.23 494.46 951.83 1384.48 1681.15 1483.37 6291.9
Completed Cost 3345.82 6839.97 8735.38 12489.12 14569.95 14866.63 11372.47 72219.3
5. Power House
Escalation 0.00 251.53 447.16 614.85 313.01 285.07 447.16 2358.8
Completed Cost 0.00 6958.95 7899.85 8067.54 3294.09 2520.87 3428.24 32169.5
6. Tail Race Tunnel

Escalation 0.00 0.00 110.47 195.29 220.94 301.82 276.17 1104.7
Completed Cost 0.00 0.00 1951.63 2562.50 2325.12 2669.02 2117.33 11625.6
7.Tail Race Channel

Escalation 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.0
Completed Cost 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.0
K Buildings
Escalation 23.85 39.75 0.00 0.00 83.48 101.36 159.00 407.4
Completed Cost 1613.85 1099.75 0.00 0.00 878.48 896.36 1219.00 5707.4
M Plantation
Escalation 0.14 0.68 1.08 1.49 1.89 2.30 3.15 10.7
Completed Cost 9.14 18.68 19.08 19.49 19.89 20.30 24.15 130.7
O Miscallaneous
Phasing of expenditure in %age 2.45% 24.38% 31.88% 25.10% 23.13% 20.40% -27.33%
Basic Cost as on price level Nov 2018 4000.0 98.0 975.0 1275.0 1004.0 925.0 816.0 -1093.0 4000.0
Escalation 1.47 36.56 76.50 82.83 97.13 104.04 -163.95 234.6
Completed Cost 99.47 1011.56 1351.50 1086.83 1022.13 920.04 -1256.95 4234.6

P Maintanance
Escalation 0.75 18.75 38.40 42.08 49.35 47.18 25.50 222.0
Completed Cost 50.75 518.75 678.40 552.08 519.35 417.18 195.50 2932.0
Q Special Tools & Plants

Escalation 0.00 0.00 3.00 8.25 5.25 0.00 0.00 16.5
Completed Cost 0.00 0.00 53.00 108.25 55.25 0.00 0.00 216.5
R Communication
Escalation 11.95 29.87 23.90 32.86 41.82 50.78 0.00 191.2
Completed Cost 808.49 826.41 422.16 431.13 440.09 449.05 0.00 3377.3
Y Loss on stock: @ 0.25% on total

0 675.2 67.5 135.0 135.0 135.0 67.5 67.5 67.5 675.2
Escalation 1.01 5.06 8.10 11.14 7.09 8.61 10.13 51.1
Completed Cost 68.53 140.10 143.14 146.18 74.61 76.13 77.65 726.3
II Establishment
0 21603.7 2916.5 4860.8 4104.7 3780.6 3240.6 1620.3 1080.2 21603.7
Escalation 43.75 182.28 246.28 311.90 340.26 206.59 162.03 1493.1
Completed Cost 2960.24 5043.11 4350.98 4092.55 3580.81 1826.86 1242.21 23096.8
III T & P
0 4899.1 391.9 783.9 881.8 783.9 783.9 1175.8 98.0 4899.1
Escalation 5.88 29.39 52.91 64.67 82.30 149.91 14.70 399.8
Completed Cost 397.80 813.25 934.74 848.52 866.16 1325.69 112.68 5298.8
B Indirect Charges
0 1282.9 218.1 320.7 218.1 192.4 173.2 96.2 64.1 1282.9
Escalation 3.27 12.03 13.09 15.88 18.19 12.27 9.62 84.3
Completed Cost 221.37 332.76 231.18 208.32 191.38 108.49 73.77 1367.3
Total Direct & Indirect Charges

0 308746.9 9433.9 57101.6 71392.1 57057.8 52297.8 45284.6 16179.2 308746.9 24965.5 333712.5
Escalation 141.51 2141.31 4283.52 4707.26 5491.27 5773.78 2426.88 24965.5
Completed Cost 9575.45 59242.94 75675.58 61765.02 57789.05 51058.36 18606.05 333712.5
Escalation Per Year 4.50%

Total Months upto mid of half yearly distribution 4 10 16 22 28 34 40
Escalation in % 1.50% 3.75% 6.00% 8.25% 10.50% 12.75% 15.00%

Cost of
Cost of Civil
Head Electrical Total Cost in
Particulars works in
of A/c works in Lakhs INTEREST DURING CONSTRUCTION
Lakhs
Lakhs
A. Direct Cost
I I WORKS 90 Days 1st Qtr 2nd Qtr 3rd Qtr 4th Qtr 5th Qtr 6th Qtr 7th Qtr 8th Qtr 9th Qtr 10th Qtr 11th Qtr 12th Qtr
2019 2020 2021 2022
A Preliminaries: 6346.07 6346.07 6346.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
B Land: 15865.17 15865.17 6346.07 4759.55 4759.55 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
C Works: 110526.47 110526.47 0.00 7158.91 13815.81 13815.81 13815.81 11052.65 11052.65 11052.65 11052.65 11052.65 6656.90 0.00 0.00
Weir
1. Upper Reservoir Formation 20033.80 20033.80 0.00 4006.76 6010.14 6010.14 4006.76 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
2. U/S Intake 19029.49 19029.49 0.00 2854.42 2854.42 3805.90 3805.90 2854.42 1902.95 475.74 475.74 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
3. D/S Intake 21020.49 21020.49 0.00 0.00 0.00 2102.05 2102.05 2102.05 2102.05 3153.07 3153.07 3153.07 3153.07 0.00 0.00
4. Penstock & Adit 72219.34 72219.34 3610.97 3610.97 3610.97 3610.97 5416.45 5416.45 7221.93 7221.93 7221.93 7221.93 7221.93 10832.90 0.00
5. Power House 32169.55 32169.55 0.00 4021.19 3216.95 3216.95 4825.43 4825.43 3216.95 1608.48 1608.48 804.24 1608.48 1608.48 1608.48
6. Tail Race Tunnel 11625.59 11625.59 0.00 0.00 0.00 581.28 1453.20 1453.20 1162.56 1162.56 1162.56 1162.56 1453.20 2034.48 0.00
7.Tail Race Channel 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
K Buildings: 5707.44 5707.44 1712.23 1141.49 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 570.74 285.37 171.22 684.89 570.74 570.74
M Plantation: 130.71 130.71 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 13.07
Site Plantations
O Miscellaneous: 4234.58 4234.58 107.00 457.00 591.00 664.00 709.00 555.00 534.00 506.00 500.00 472.00 416.00 -1320.42 44.00
Telephone, O & M of inspection vehicles etc.,
P Maintenance: 2932.00 2932.00 60.00 230.00 300.00 340.00 360.00 280.00 270.00 260.00 250.00 182.00 210.00 160.00 30.00
Maintenance charges during construction

0 0 0 0 54.125 54.125 54.125 54.125 0 0 0 0 0
R Communications: 3377.32 3377.32 844.33 844.33 0.00 0.00 422.16 422.16 0.00 0.00 422.16 422.16 0.00 0.00 0.00
Service Roads
X Environment & Ecology 8000.00 8000.00 1000.00 1000.00 800.00 800.00 600.00 600.00 600.00 600.00 600.00 600.00 200.00 200.00 400.00
Y Loss on stock: 726.32 726.32 72.63 72.63 72.63 72.63 72.63 72.63 72.63 36.32 36.32 36.32 36.32 36.32 36.32
@ 0.25% on total
S Power Plant Electrical Works 153600.00 153600.00 0 8462.1312 7724.544 18600.96 15360 11520 11520 15360 7680 7680 4439.04 22995.1488 22258.176
Infrastructure Development for Power 39000.00 39000.00 0 0 0 0 0 0 5850 5850 3900 3900 3900 10140 5460
2000.00 2000.00
S Total I-Works 336160.83 192600.00 528760.83
II Establishment Charges 23096.76 3118.06 3118.06 2078.71 2078.71 2309.68 2309.68 1732.26 1732.26 1732.26 1154.84 577.42 577.42 577.42
Civil – Rs. 90.00 Crores plus 3.00% of cost
E&M – Rs. 67.50 Crores plus 2.25% of cost
III Tools & Plants: 5298.84 423.91 423.91 423.91 423.91 529.88 423.91 423.91 423.91 423.91 529.88 741.84 52.99 52.99
Ordinary T & P @ 1% of I – works less B-land
V Receipts & Recoveries: -30.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -30.00 0.00
Q – Special Tools & Plants @ 15% of
capital cost
Sub Total (A) 557126.43
B. Indirect Charges
Audit and Accounts @ 0.5% of I Works 1367.27 232.44 218.76 123.05 109.38 123.05 123.05 82.04 82.04 102.55 68.36 34.18 34.18 34.18
Sub Total (B) 558493.70
GST @ 12% 67019.24 2866.02 5086.79 5566.98 6749.10 6717.11 5288.95 5736.94 6019.15 4874.02 4634.53 3761.17 5748.24 3970.24
Sub Total '(C) 625512.94
Sub Total Requirement Per Quarter 26749.53 47476.71 51958.47 62991.59 62693.05 49363.51 53544.80 56178.77 45490.81 43255.57 35104.24 53650.28 37055.62
Equity Per Quarter 26749.53 13408.70 13408.70 13408.70 13408.70 13408.70 13408.70 13408.70 13408.70 13408.70 13408.70 13408.70 13408.70
Loan Per Quarter 0.00 34068.01 38549.78 49582.89 49284.35 35954.82 40136.10 42770.07 32082.11 29846.87 21695.54 40241.58 23646.92
Interest During Construction 79349.32 0.00 10731.42 11131.25 13015.51 11643.43 7550.51 7375.01 6736.29 4210.78 3133.92 1708.52 2112.68 620.73

DEBT REPAYMENT SCHEDULE
Quarter Opening Closing Interest @
Installment Av Loan Total Interest Principal
Number Balance Balance 10.50 %
1 5613.13 116.94 5496.18 5554.65 145.81
2 5496.18 116.94 5379.24 5437.71 142.74
3 5379.24 116.94 5262.30 5320.77 139.67
4 5262.30 116.94 5145.36 5203.83 136.60 564.82 467.76
5 5145.36 116.94 5028.42 5086.89 133.53
6 5028.42 116.94 4911.48 4969.95 130.46
7 4911.48 116.94 4794.54 4853.01 127.39
8 4794.54 116.94 4677.60 4736.07 124.32 515.71 467.76
9 4677.60 116.94 4560.66 4619.13 121.25
10 4560.66 116.94 4443.72 4502.19 118.18
11 4443.72 116.94 4326.78 4385.25 115.11
12 4326.78 116.94 4209.84 4268.31 112.04 466.59 467.76
13 4209.84 116.94 4092.90 4151.37 108.97
14 4092.90 116.94 3975.96 4034.43 105.90
15 3975.96 116.94 3859.02 3917.49 102.83
16 3859.02 116.94 3742.08 3800.55 99.76 417.48 467.76
17 3742.08 116.94 3625.14 3683.61 96.69
18 3625.14 116.94 3508.20 3566.67 93.63
19 3508.20 116.94 3391.26 3449.73 90.56
20 3391.26 116.94 3274.32 3332.79 87.49 368.36 467.76
21 3274.32 116.94 3157.38 3215.85 84.42
22 3157.38 116.94 3040.44 3098.91 81.35
23 3040.44 116.94 2923.50 2981.97 78.28
24 2923.50 116.94 2806.56 2865.03 75.21 319.25 467.76
25 2806.56 116.94 2689.62 2748.09 72.14
26 2689.62 116.94 2572.68 2631.15 69.07
27 2572.68 116.94 2455.74 2514.21 66.00
28 2455.74 116.94 2338.80 2397.27 62.93 270.13 467.76
29 2338.80 116.94 2221.86 2280.33 59.86
30 2221.86 116.94 2104.92 2163.39 56.79
31 2104.92 116.94 1987.98 2046.45 53.72
32 1987.98 116.94 1871.04 1929.51 50.65 221.02 467.76
33 1871.04 116.94 1754.10 1812.57 47.58
34 1754.10 116.94 1637.16 1695.63 44.51
35 1637.16 116.94 1520.22 1578.69 41.44
36 1520.22 116.94 1403.28 1461.75 38.37 171.90 467.76
37 1403.28 116.94 1286.34 1344.81 35.30
38 1286.34 116.94 1169.40 1227.87 32.23
39 1169.40 116.94 1052.46 1110.93 29.16
40 1052.46 116.94 935.52 993.99 26.09 122.79 467.76
41 935.52 116.94 818.58 877.05 23.02
42 818.58 116.94 701.64 760.11 19.95
43 701.64 116.94 584.70 643.17 16.88
44 584.70 116.94 467.76 526.23 13.81 73.67 467.76
45 467.76 116.94 350.82 409.29 10.74
46 350.82 116.94 233.88 292.35 7.67
47 233.88 116.94 116.94 175.41 4.60
48 116.94 116.94 0.00 58.47 1.53 24.56 467.76
5613.13 5613.13

CHAPTER 18 RECOMMENDATIONS
18.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
The proposed 1280 MW Saundatti Pumped Storage Project involves construction of simple structures.
The project construction shall be completed in a period of 36 months excluding 6 months for
development of infrastructure facilities.
➢ Asphalt faced Rockfill dam for formation of Upper Reservoir & Lower Reservoir
➢ Upstream & Downstream Intake
➢ Steel Lined Pressure Shaft
➢ Power house with installed capacity of 1280 MW (3 X 320 MW + 2 X 160 MW )
➢ Outdoor yard
➢ Tail Race Tunnel
18.2 ECONOMIC JUSTIFICATION OF THE PROJECT
The planned power generation will be 2833 MU considering the rate of 6.38 hours per day for 365
days operation @ 95% machine availability. The total cost of the Project is estimated to be Rs. 7048.62
crores at 2021-22 price level. The tariff of power on the completed cost for first year as well as
levellised tariff have been worked out as:
Description First Year Tariff Levellised Tariff
Tariff Rs 4.75/ Unit Rs 4.08 / Unit
18.3 ENVIRONMENTAL & ECOLOGICAL ASPECTS
The project will cause little or no adverse impacts. Certain environmental impacts mainly during
construction phase have been identified and these shall be taken care by appropriate mitigatory
measures.
18.4 SOCIO-ECONOMIC BENIFITS
The following are the socio-economic benefits envisaged from the project:
• As there is very sparse population in the project area, therefore number of PAF are
very minimal.
• The project will improve the quality of life by way of primary education, health care,
women and child welfare, periodic medical camps.
• Generation of employment for local people.
• The construction and operation of this Project would lead to overall sustainable

development in the project region by making a direct as well as indirect contribution to
the people.

Volume-1 Full Report - 1280MW 28072022

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volume-1 Full Report - 1280MW 28072022

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volume-1 Full Report - 1280MW 28072022

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DOCUMENT RECORD

Project Name Saundatti Pumped Storage Project

Name of Client Greenko

Doc Title Detailed Project Report

Rev No Date of Issue Description

R0 19-07-2022 Volume – I; Detailed Project Report

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page i

DETAILED PROJECT REPORT : TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME I : MAIN REPORT

VOLUME III: DRAWINGS

VOLUME IV: GEOLOGICAL AND GEOTECHNICAL STUDIES

VOLUME IV A: SITE INVESTIGATIONS & GEOLOGY

VOLUME IV B: PLATES (SITE INVESTIGATION & GEOLOGY)

VOLUME V: COST ESTIMATE

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page ii

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 3

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 4

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 5

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 6

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 7

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 8

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 9

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 10

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 11

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 12

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 13

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 14

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 15

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 16

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 17

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 18

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 19

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 20

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 21

SAUNDATTI PUMPED STORAGE PROJECT

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 1

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 2

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 3

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 4

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 5

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 6

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 7

NAME OF THE PROJECT SAUNDATTI PUMPED STORAGE PROJECT

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 8

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 9

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 10

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 11

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 12

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 13

1.1 THE PROJECT

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 14

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 15

• 24 Hours Round The Clock (RTC) Base Load Energy

• 18 Hours Base Load Energy as per Demand

• 6.38 hours Peak Load Energy of 1280MW

1.2 SCOPE OF THE REPORT

1.3 TYPE OF PROJECT

Detailed Project Report of Saundatti Pumped Storage Project Page 16

1.4 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT

Saundatti IREP is located in Saundatti Tehsil/Mandal of Belagavi district in Karnataka, India. It is